SC20 1043 6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75 6 CICS System Programmers Reference Manual Mar75

SC20-1043-6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75 manual pdf -FilePursuit

SC20-1043-6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75 SC20-1043-6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75

User Manual: SC20-1043-6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 246

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SH20-1043-6

Program Product

Customer Information
Control System (CICS)
System Programmer's
Reference Manual
Program Nos. 5736-XX6 (DOS-ENTRY)
5736-XX7 (DOS-STANDARD)
5734-XX7 (OS·STANDARD V2)
The IBM Customer Information Control System (CICS) is
a transaction-oriented, multiapplication data base/data
communication interface between a System/360 or
System/370 operating system and user-written application
programs. Applicable to most online systems,CICS provides many of the facilities necessary for standard terminal
applications: message switching, inquiry. data collection,
order entry, and conversational data entry.
CICS is available in three systems - two for DOS users and
one for OS users. Because the two CICS/DOS systems are
compatible with each other and with the CICS/OS system,
it is possible to start with a small data base/data communication configuration and move up through DOS into OS.
This manual provides information essential for persons who
have the responsibility to define, prepare, and administer
CICS in the environment it supports.

Seventh Edition (March 1975)
This edition applies to Version 1, Modification Level 1, of the CICS/DOS-ENTRY (5736-XX6) and
CICS/DOS-STANDARD (5736-XX7) program products and to Version 2, Modification Level 3, of the
CICS/OS-STANDARD (5734-XX7) program product; it also applies to all subsequent versions and
modifications unless otherwise indicated in new editions or Technical Newsletters.
If changes are made to the information herein, the edition that is applicable and current will be
indicated in the latest System/360 and System/370 SRL Newsletter (GN20-0360).

This is a reprint of SH20-1043-5, incorporating changes released in the following Technical Newsletter:
SN20-9045 (dated October, 1973)
Copies of this and other IBM publications can be obtained through IBM branch offices.
©

PREFACE

This publication contains detailed information necessary to implement
three IBM program products: CICS/DOS-ENTRY, CICS/DOS-STANDARD, and
CICS/OS-STANDARD V2.
It provides system programmers, system analysts,
and system administrators with information that is primarily independent
of the operating system involved; for example, the use of CICS macro
instructions to selectively generate CICS management programs and
service programs and selectively prepare system control tables and
service tables.
It is assumed that the reader of this publication has
some knowledge and/or experience concerning the Basic Telecommunications
Access Method (BTAM) or has access to persons with such knowledge
and/or experience.
This publication should be used in conjunction with the appropriate
CICS Operations Guide when generating CICS and when preparing the
system tables that describe the environment CICS is to support.
Throughout this publication, parentheses are used in the notation
of CICS macro instructions to indicate those operands where more than
one applicable parameter can be specified with a single use of the
operand. Where parentheses are not used, only one parameter at a time
can be specified as part of the operand. An asterisk in (card) column
72 indicates that the macro instruction is continued on the next line
(card). The first operand on a continuation card must begin in column
16.
The words "transaction" and "task" have the same connotation in
CICS and are used interchangeably throughout this publ.ication; the
processing of a transaction may involve the execution of one or more
"programs".
For further information concerning CICS, see the following IBM
publications:
General Information Manual (GH20-1028)
Application Programmer's Reference Manual (SH20-1047)
Terminal Operator's Guide (SH20-1044)
Operations Guide (CICS/DOS) (SH20-1034)
Operations Guide (CICS/OS) (SH20-1048)
Logic Manual (CICS/DOS-ENTRY) (LY20-0712)
Logic Manual (CICS/DOS-STANDARD) (LY20-0713)
Logic Manual (CICS/OS-STANDARD V2) (LY20-0714)
All references to CICS/OS and CICS/OS-STANDARD in this publication
are references to the CICS/OS-STANDARD V2 system.
Note:

Information in this publication concerning TCAM is applicable
only to the CICS/OS system. Information concerning 3735 support
is not applicable to CICS/DOS-ENTRY.

In troduction.

• • •

General Description
••••
The Real-Time System Environment.
Real-Time System Programming • •
Preparing the System. • • •
System Generation • • • •
System Table Preparation. • • • • •
System Maintenance. • • • •
System Data Set Considerations.
User Data Base Considerations • . • • •
User Extrapartition Data Sets
User Exits. • • • • •
• •.•
Executing the System. • • • • •
Job Control • • • • •
System Initialization •
Terminating the System • •
Process ing Du mp Dat a Sets

3
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
9
10
10
10
11
11
11

System Generation . • • •
General Description • • •
Initialization of System Generation •
Control System Operational Group (CSO) • •
Control System Service Group (CSS).
Control System Dummy Group (CSD). •
Control System utility Group (CSU).
Control System Management Programs.
Task Control Program (KCP). • • •
Storage Control Program (SCP) • .
Program Control Program (PCP)
Program Interrupt Control Program (PIP)
Interval Control Program (ICP). •
Dump Control Program (DCP). • • •
Terminal Control Program (TCP). •
Pile Control Program (PCP). • • •
Transient Data Control Program (TDP). •
Temporary Storage Control Program (TSP)
Common System Area (CSA) • • • • • •
Master Terminal Program (MTP) • • •
Dynamic Open/Close Program (OCP). •
• • • •
Graphic Attention Program (GAP) • •
• •••
High-Level Language Support Group (HLL)
• • • •
Terminal Dependent Control Program (TDCP)
• • • •
Asynchronous Transaction Processing Group (ATP)
Termination of CICS/DOS System Generation • • • •
Generation of CICS/OS Data Language/I Facilities • • • • •
Defining PSB's and PCB's • • • • • • • • • • • •
Defining PSB and DMB Directories During CICS Generation • •

13
13
19
23
24
25
25
26
26
27
28
29
29
31
32
38
39
41
42
42
43
43
43
44
44
44
45
45
46

System Table Preparation • • • • • • • • •
System Initialization Table (SIT) • • • •
Terminal Control Table (TCT). • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
Establish Control section for Terminal Control Table. •
specify Data set Control Information. • • •
Describe Communication Lines. • • • • • •
• • • •
Describe Terminal Types • • .• • • • • • •
• • • •
Define Digital Response Messages for 7770 Audio Response Unit
Specify End of Terminal Control Table • • •
• • • •
Terminal Control Table Example. • • • • •
File Control Table (PCT). • • • • • • • • •
• • • •
Establish Control Section for Pile Control Table. •
Describe Data Set for Pile Management • • • • • • •

48
48
53
55
56
61
70
76
77
77
80
82
82

Describe Cross-Index Data Set Record • • • •
Define Header of Segmented Record • • . • •
Describe Each Segment of a Segmented Record
Describe Segment Sets • • • • • • •
Specify Last Segment Set. • • • • • • • • . . • • • • •
Speci fy End of File Control Table • • • • •
Create Superset ISAM Logic Module (CICS/DOS Only) • • • • •
File Control Table Example. • • • • • • • • • • • •
Destination Control Table (DCT) • . • • • • • • . •
Establish Control Section for Destination Control Table •
Specify Data Set Control Information • •
Specify Extrapartition Destinations
..•.
Specify Intrapartition Destinations. •
• •••
Specify Indirect Data Destinations. • • . . • • • • • •
Terminate Entries for the Destination Control Table • .
Nonresident Extrapartition Data Set Definition.
Destination Control Table Examples. • • • • •
Program Control Table (PCT) • • • • • • • • • • . • • •
Establish Control section for Program Control Table
Specify Transaction Control Information
Specify End of Program Control Table • •
Program Control Table Example • • • • • •
Proce ss ing Program Table (PPT). • • • • • • • • •
Establish Control section for Processing Program Table.
Describe Processing Programs.
• • • .
Specify End of Processing Program Table •
Processing Program Table Example. •
• • • •
System Service Tables • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Sign-on Table (SNT) • • • • . • •
Terminal List Tables (TLT) • • •
System Programming Considerations • •
• • • •
Creating User Exits for CICS Management Programs.
Creating a Terminal Error Program (DFHTEP) • • • •
Terminal Abnormal Condition Line Entry (TACLE).
DFHTEP Programming Considerations • • • •
DFHTEP Alternate Interface (CICS/OS Only)
7770 32-Second Timeout Considerations. • • • •
writing a Transaction to IPL the System/7 •
2260 Compatibility for the 3270 • • • • • .
CICS Table Preparation for 2260 Compatibility
2260 Model-Dependent Data Stream • •
Screen Techniques • • • • • • • • •
Start of Message Indicator (SMI). •
New Line Symbol (NL)..
••••
Line Addressing • • • •
•• • •
2848 Lock Feature • • •
•• • • • •
2845/2848 Tab Feature •
• •••
Initiating Transactions
3735 Programming Considerations •
System Generation • • • • • • •
Terminal Control Table Preparation.
Inquiry Mode. . • • • • • • • • • •
CICS/TCAM Interface Considerations. •
TCAM Application Program Interface. • •
CICS/TCAM Interface • • • • •
TCAM Device Considerations. •
TCAM User Exits. • • •
• •••
CICS/TCAM start up • • •
• • • •
CICS/TCAM Abend/Restart • • • • • •
..
CICS/TCAM Termination •
•• • •

System Administration..
• •••
Real-Time System Administration
System Control Functions. • • •
Master Terminal • • • • • • • •
Date and Time of Day Control.
System statistics • • • • • •

87
89
89

90
90
91

91
91
93
94

92
97
98
99
100
100
100
104
105
105
106
107
108
108
108 \
109
109
110
110
113
116
116

120
120
121

129
129
129

130
131
132
132
135
135
135
135
135
136
137
137
137

137
137
138
139
146
148
150
151
151
152
152
152
152
156

157

Dynamic Open/Close Function • •
Open Data Sets (OPEN) • • • •
Close Data Sets (CLOSE) • • •
Switch Dump Data Sets (SWITCH)
Con trol System Messages • • • •
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:

Index • • •

• •
• •
• •
••
• •

Required Entries to CICS Control Tahles.
Examples of Terminal Control Table Preparation •
CICS/TCAM Program Interrelationship.
Terminal Control Table Configurator. • •
File Control Table Configura tor. • • • •
CICS Macro Instructions • • • • • • • • •
Examples of User-Written Transactions • •

158
159
161
162
162
176
179
190
194
199
200
211
217

The IBM Customer Information Control System (CICS) is a
multi-application data base/data communication interface between OS or
DOS and user-written application programs.
Applicable to most online
systems, CICS provides many of the facilities for standard terminal
applications:
message switching, inquiry, data collection, order entry,
and conversational data entry.
Functions performed by CICS include:
•
•
•
•
•

Control of a mixed telecommunications network
Concurrent management of a variety of programs
Controlled access to the data base
Management of resources for continuous operation
Prioritization of processing

By eliminating many of the development requirements for such
functions of a real-time control system, CICS allows programmers to
concentrate instead on implementing applications, dramatically reducing
implementation time and cost.
Functions needed to support a data base/data communication system
and standard terminal applications are provided by the following CICS
management programs:
• Task Management - Provides its own dynamic multitasking facilities
necessary for effective, concurrent transaction processing.
Functions associated with this facility include priority scheduling,
transaction synchronization, and control of serially reusable
resources.
This CICS facility is in addition to the multitasking
or multiprocessing facilities of the host operating system.
• Storage Management - Controls main storage allocated to CICS.
Storage acquisition, disposition, initialization, and request
queuing are among the services and functions performed by this
component of CICS.
• Program Management - Provides a multiprogramming capability through
dynamic program management while offering a real-time program fetch
capability.
• Program Interrupt Management - Provides for the interception of
program interrupts by CICS to prevent total system termination.
Individual transactions that program check are terminated by CICS
with a dump (if Dump Management is used), thus preventing the entire
CICS partition/region from terminating.
Under CICS/OS, supports
the runaway task control function of CICS Time Management.
• Time Management - Provides control of various optional task
functions (system stall detection, runaway task control, task
synchronization, etc.) based on specified intervals of time or the
time of day.
• Dump Management - Provides a facility to assist in analysis of
programs and transactions undergoing development or modification.
Specified areas of main storage are dumped onto a sequential data
set, either tape or disk, for subsequent offline formatting and
printing using a CICS utility program.

• Terminal Management - Provides polling according to user-specified
line traffic control as well as user requested reading and writing.
This facility supports automatic task initiation to process new
transactions. Optionally, the user can request that certain lines
be under control of TCAM (rather than BTAM) in which case polling
and other network control functions are performed by the Message
Control program (MCP) residing in another partition/region.
The
testing of application programs is accommodated by the simulation
of terminals through sequential devices such as card readers, line
printers, disk, tape, etc.
• File Management - Provides a data base facility using direct access
and indexed sequential data management.
This function supports
updates, additions, random retrieval, and selective retrieval
(browsing) of logical data on the data base. Optional access to
the Data Language/I (DL/I) facility of the IBM Information
Management System (IMS/360) is also provided under CICS/OS.
Use
of DL/I requires the installation of the IMS/360 Version 2,
Modification Level 2 (or later) Data Base System (5734-XX6).
• Transient Data Management - Provides the optional queuing facility
for the' management of data in transit to and from user-defined
destinations. This function facilitates message switching, data
collection, and logging.
• Temporary Storage Management - Provides the optional general purpose
"scratch pad" facility.
This facility is intended for video display
paging, broadcasting, data collection suspension, conservation of
main storage, retention of control information, etc.
In addition to these management functions, CICS provides system
service programming to identify terminal operators, to give dynamic
control of the entire system to a master terminal, to display real-time
system statistics, to intercept abnormal conditions not handled directly
by the operating system, and to end operation by gathering summary
statistics, closing data sets, and returning control to the operating
system.

The real-time data base/data communications (DB/DC) environment is
characterized by a number of factors which distinguish it from the
conventional batch processing environment.
For example, the system
programmer must be aware of considerations inherent to the real-time
system environment, such as:
• Transactions are not batched by type, but arrive randomly.
o

Online data storage is expensive, so that storing redundant subsets
of data is an undesirable approach to providing the data access
required by other applications and programs.

• Sorting and scanning data prohibits the rapid access needed by a
single transaction.
• A number of transactions can simultaneously try to change the same
data.
• A terminal user may attempt an unauthorized access of confidential
data.
• A (software)

'----

recovery capability is required to prevent data losses.

The real-time data base/data communications environment (DB/DC)
differs from the traditional batch processing environment primarily in
the amount and types of concurrent activities that are likely to occur
within the system at a given time.
Whereas a batch processing system
schedules each application independently and provides data support
unique to each application, a DB/DC system controls many transactions
arriving on a random nonscheduled basis and provides a data base (with
integrated data) supporting each application.
In the conventional batch processing environment, the application
programmer plans a series of runs to edit batches of input transactions,
update master files, and write output reports.
To optimize total run
time and streamline the cycle, he must concentrate on careful
manipulation of data.
In accomplishing this, the data becomes
intricately tied to his program logic and is of little value in other
applications.
CICS solves many of these complexities by managing data centrally
in a data base on behalf of all applications.
This relieves the
application programmer of system management considerations, allowing
him to concentrate instead on the application, and shifts the
responsibility for an integrated data base to the system programmer.
As an effective interface, the system programmer must organize all
the data and optimize its storage, making tradeoffs between cost of
storage, performance, and service level according to management
guidelines.
The DB/DC system has a common data set (data base) manager,
and usually provides the system programmer with specialized interfaces.

CICS is modularly designed to allow the user to configure a data
base/data communications system appropriate to his needs.
While some
of the system components are essential, many are optional and can be
configured into the system under user control.
CICS modularity allows the user to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Include or omit functions or components.
Replace or extend a function or component.
Evolve and expand the support of the user's environment.
Conduct maintenance on a component level.
Bring the most current individual components together at
execution time to support the desired environment.

To assist the user in tailoring the system to meet his needs, source
code is distributed to the user which must be assembled to provide the
specific functions and components the user desires.
The detailed
instructions in preparing the system from the distributed
machine-readable material is contained in the appropriate CICS
Operations Guide.
SYSTEM GENERATION
CICS provides a system generation facility whereby the user can
define what CICS-provided functions or components he desires as well
as certain variables he wants included.
The system is then generated
according to that description.
CICS provides ten executable management programs which can be
selected and generated by the user to perform the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Task Management
Storage Management
Program Management
Program Interrupt Management
Time Management (Interval Control)
Dump Management
Terminal Management
File Management
Transient Data Management
Temporary Storage Management

In addition to the managment programs, a number of system service
programs (which run as application programs) can be generated.
The
service functions which these programs provide are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Sign on/sign off
Master terminal
Supervisor terminal
Operator terminal
System statistics
Abnormal condition handling
Terminal abnormal condition handling
Asynchronous Transaction Processing
System termination
Terminal test
Time of day control

Two utility programs can also be generated.
These are the Dump
Utility program for formatting and printing the dumps (produced during
execution), and the High-Level Language Preprocessor which is used to
prepare the ANS COBOL and PLII application programs for execution under

CICS.
In the CICS/DOS systems, a special linkage-editor facility is
also generated for use in preparing the object modules for execution.
An optional user-defined Common Work Area (CWA) is provided as an
extension of the Common System Area (CSA) in static main storage. This
work area is available for the use of all user-written programs and
can be used to contain user-defined data (which is not to be altered
by CICS) such as tables, accumulators, and sequence numbers.
The length
of the CWA must be specified during system generation.
The details concerning how to use the DFHSG macro instruction to
generate the system are provided in the System Generation section of
this manual.
The necessary JCL is detailed in the appropriate CICS
Operations Guide.
SYSTEM TABLE PREPARATION
This feature gives the user flexibility in
CICS is table-oriented.
describing his terminal, data base, and queuing environments.
It allows
him to describe several versions of existing environments, simplifying
evolution and growth to new environments.
Because of the table
orientation, the user need change only that part of his environment
that needs to be changed.
All tables are specified and constructed by the user with assistance
provided by CICS.
These tables are declarative in nature and are used
by CICS to control the environment according to the design criteria
established by the user.
Major tables are used to describe System
Initialization and terminal, data set, and queuing environments.
Other
tables identify user programs, transactions, operators, etc.
Detailed information on the contents of these tables and the macro
instruction used to prepare them are provided in the section "System
Table Preparation".
The Process Control Information field (PCI) is an optional
user-defined terminal work area which is provided as an extension of
the Terminal Control Table (TCT) in static main storage.
The PCI is
associated with a particular TCT terminal entry (TCTTE) and is available
for the use of all user-written programs that are logically attached
to that TCTTE.
The-PCI can be used to contain user-defined data (which
is not to be altered by CICS) such as user statistics and sequence
numbers.
The PCI is a variable-length field (0-255 bytes) which is specified
during system generation. For CICS/OS, PCI's of fixed length (15 bytes)
may also be specified during system generation for the purpose of upward
compatiblity from CICS/OS-STANDARD V1 to CICS/OS-STANDARD V2.
The
length of the PCI is specified during preparation of the TCT.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Because CICS is both modular and table-oriented, maintenance is
simplified considerably.
If a change in the user's environment should
occur which, in turn, requires a change to a CICS management program
and/or table, only the affected program or table needs to be generated
again~
This, of course, is also true of any corrections that must be
applied to the system.
To make a correction to a particular program
only the source code for that program needs to be updated, using the
appropriate operating system update facility, and then reassembled and
link edited.

SYSTEM DATA SET CONSIDERATIONS
The access methods and record content of the system data sets are
predBfined within CICS.
Any required formatting is performed by CICS
during system initialization or by the maintenance functions.
For
space considerations and requirements, see the appropriate CICS
Operations Guide.
The system data sets (files)
•
•
•
•
•
•

include:

Real-Time Relocatable Program Library
Real-time Pre-Located Program Library
Transaction Rollout Data Set
Dump Data Set
Intrapartition Data Set
Temporary Storage Data Set

The Real-Time Relocatable Program Library contains all user programs
and CICS programs to be loaded and executed in real-time including the
control system itself and certain user-prepared System Control Tables.
The library contains program text and, where applicable, a relocation
dictionary for each program.
The contents of this library are
asynchronously fetched into main storage for real-time execution in
the CICS/DOS-STANDARD and CICS/OS-STANDARD systems by the Program
Control Program. This library is not used for real-time execution in
the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system.
For the CICS/DOS-STANDARD system, the Real-Time Relocatable Program
Library is a user allocated extent.
Programs are prepared for this
library by DFHLINK. For the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, the Real-Time
Relocatable Program Library is a standard partitioned data set.
Programs are prepared for this library by the as Linkage Editor.
CICS/OS users may concatenate other private libraries to this library.

The CICS Real-Time Pre-Located Program Library is used in the
CICS/DOS-ENTRY system to retain the nonresident application programs
during real-time execution.
All application programs, so designated
by the user, are loaded into main storage by the CICS System
Initialization program and are written into the library for subsequent
fetch and refresh.
The Processing Program Table in main storage serves
as the directory for this library.

The Transaction Rollout data set (file) is used in the CICS/DOS-ENTRY
system to retain certain transaction information in order to support
conversational interaction with a terminal.
The types of transaction
information that may be expected to be rolled into this data set
include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Task Control Area
Transaction Work Area
User-acquired work areas
File, Temporary storage, Transient Data input/output areas,
work areas, and control areas
Register storage areas
Loaded programs

The optional dump data set is used by the Dump Control program to
record dumps of transactions within the system.
It is a sequential
data set located on either magnetic tape or direct access and can be
subsequently formatted and printed by the CICS Dump utility program.
CICS provides the capability to open/close the active dump data set
during the real-time ~xecution of the system. Optionally, the user
can define two dump data sets (DFHDMPA and DFHDMPB), alternating between
them during real-time execution of CICS.

The Intrapartition data set is a system option and is used for the
queuing of user data and, optionally, CICS data by the Transient Data
Centrol program (CrCS's general purpose queuing facility).
Data, as
requested, is stored chronologically into this data set according to
previously identified symbolic destinations for subsequent retrieval
when all applicable system conditions and facilities are in the
appropriate status. This data set is reusable and is required for
applications such as message switching, broadcasting, order
distribution, etc. The record format for this data set is standard
System/360 variable length.

The Temporary storage data set is a system option, and should be
allocated, if required, by the user as general purpose scratch pad
storage for use by the Temporary storage Control program.
User data,
as requested, is stored into this data set under a dynamically-provided
symbolic identification for subsequent retrieval and release (when
appropriate).
This data set is intended for applications such as
broadcasting, video display paging, transaction suspension, main storage
conservation, etc. This data set consists of variable-length records
within a preformatted fixed-length DAM data set record and is required
if the "time ordered" automatic task initiation feature of CICS is
generated.
Any tasK which requests the use cf Temporary storage when
space is not available will be suspended until adequate space is freed
1:y another task.
USER DATA BASE CONSIDERATIONS
CICS File Management allows the user a high degree of flexibility
when defining the structure of his data base.
Individual data sets
(files) within the data base can be accassed under control of the Direct
Access Method (DAM) or the Indexed Sequential Access Method (ISAM).
The following optional CICS features allow certain variations in data
organizaticn to provide the user with the most efficient data base
structure suitable to his environment.

CICS stores data in and retrieves data from the user's data sets.
It is possible to retrieve an individual record or selected segments
of an individual record.
A segmented record is one in which the
components of the record have been identified and grouped according to
frequency of use, functicn, and logical relationship.
The identifiable
groups are called segments.
Some segments are in all records, such as
those that contain identification or major record control fields.
Other
segments apply only in certain records.
The primary reason for
7

segmenting records is to ccnserve main storage, or, in the case of
variable-length records, to conserve direct access storage.
If additienal infcrmation is to be included in a segmented record,
either a new segment is created or an existing segment is altered.
In
either case, only the affected segment descriptiens need be changed
and the new programming added to support the change.
Symbolic
references to unchanged segments are not affected.
Adding information
to a fixed format record cculd require considerably more programming
than using the segmented record approach.
The user must define the record segments to CICS.
In addition, each
record to be retrieved in segments must have control information in
the first segment which is used to indicate the presence or absence of
each segment.
A segment should contain logically related data so that
only selected segments are required to satisfy the processing
requirements of a transaction.
A transaction that uses only selected
record segments requires less main storage for its processing.
The user, in selecting those segments necessary for processing
transaction groups, identifies them to CICS as a part of the data set
(file) definitions in the File control Table.
Such a group of segments
is a segment set. A segment set can include a single segment, a number
of segments, or all segments of a record. When a request is made to
File Control identifying a segment set in the request, CICS always
returns the header control segment plus the segments in that set.
Segmented records can be used with either DAM or ISAM data set
organizatiens.
For further details concerning segmented records, see
"Data Base Considerations" in the fl£~ !EElifg1i£1! R1:Qg!~!!1!!1~~§
B~!§~enc§ Ma1!Y~l (SH20-1047).

CICS provides deblecking of logical records which are blocked and
written on a direct access (DAM) data set.
This service is provided
for both fixed- and variable-length records.
The data set must be
created according to standard System/360 record formatting conventions.

CICS (optionally) allows the use of cross-index data sets to access
another data set which may be the main data set or another level of
index data set. If a record retrieved from a cross-index data set
indicates multiple entries in the main data set, information is returned
to the user-written application ~rograms to be used in selecting the
a~propriate main data set entry.
When the cross index does not indicate
rrultiple entries in the main data set, the File Centrel ~rogram reads
the requested re90rd from the main data set.
Organization of the cross-index data set may be either indexed
sequential or basic direct access.
The index record contains, in
additien to the information used to find it, the search argument for
the record on the data set which the index data set references.
The
index record may contain any other information desired by the user.
!he location of the search argument, its length, and the data set
identification for the referenced data set are supplied to CICS as part
of the data set definitions in the file Central Table.
For further
details concerning indirect accessing, see "Data Base Considerations"
in the £1£~ AEBlifE1iQll Rf9gf~!!1!!1~~~§ E§!~I~n£§ ]~1!Y~! (SH20-1047).

QQ~ IS!~

Y££1ab1§-L§ng!h ggcord§

The CICS/DOS systems support the retrieval and static update (no
length variation) of variable-length logical records within fixEd-length
blocks under an ISAM organization. These pseudo-variable blocks must
conform to System 360/370 variable-length record format conventions.
That is, the first four bytes must contain the block length of the form
LLbb.
Since all blocks are fixed length, this value will be the same
for all blocks.
Each logical record within the block must reflect the
length of the record in the first four bytes (LLbb).
A logical record
may not be continued onto the next block. The first byte of any unused
portion of a block must contain a hexadecimal FF.
The addition and deletion of records on a DOS ISAM variable-length
record data set must be handled by the user in an offline batch
environment.
When creating the data set, it must be defined as fixed
unblocked, and the key for each block must be the same as the last
logical record in that block.
The block size must be an even number
of bytes.
All records must reside in the prime data area; no overflow
records are allowed.
For details concerning the CICS definition of a
DOS ISAM variable-length record data set, see the discussion of the
File Control Table in the section "System Table Preparation".

Optional access to the Data Language/I (DL/I) facility of the IBM
Information Management System (IMS/360) requires the installation of
the IMS/360 Version 2, Modification Level 2 (or later) Data Base System
(5734-XX6) •
As CICS is initialized, an IMS batch job is attached (via OS) as an
subtask of CICS in much the same fashion as a regular IMS system is
executed as an as job.
All data sets required for a batch IMS job are
required for access to DL/I under CICS.

USER EXTRAPARTITION DATA SETS
Extrapartition data is the name given in CICS to transient stream
data which is corning into or going out of the data base/data
communication system environment. This data is usually coming from or
going to high-speed magnetic devices and is characterized by, but not
required to be, blocked, variable-length stream data.
The
extrapartition disposition facility is intended for use with the
following types of data and applications:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Message logging
Transaction logging
Reconstruction records and information
Data collection
Data entry

and all other output stream data intended for subsequent processing
(usually offline). The user defines this data consistent with his
requirements and facilities.
The extrapartition acquisition facility
is intended for limited stream (batch-like) data processing in the data
base/data communication environment.

USER EXITS
Exit routines may be provided by the user to extend or add functions
to CICS management programs.
All CICS management program exits are
included at the source level and are assembled with the management
program during system generation. The user exits provided for are as
follows:

Task Control (DFHKCP)

Before request analysis
Before task dispatch

Storage Control

Before request analysis

(DFHSCP)

Program Control (DFHPCP)

After program load

Interval Control (DFHICP)

Before request analysis
At expiration of time interval

Terminal Control (DFHTCP)

Before transaction attach
Before output event initiation
After input event completion

File Control (DFHFCP)

Before service request analysis
Before output event initiation
Before input event initiation
After input event completion

Transient Data Control
(DFHTDP)

Before service request analysis
Before output event initiation
After input event completion

Temporary Storage Control
(DFHTSP)

Before service request analysis
Before output event initiation
After input event completion

For further information concerning user exits, see the discussion
of the individual CICS management programs in the section "System
Generation"; see also the section "Creating User Exits for crcs
Management programs".

crcs is designed to bring together at execution time the most current
individual components to support the environment requirements present
at that time.
Through the use of the appropriate System Initialization
Table and the necessary overrides, any combination of crcs management
programs and tables may be loaded and executed.
Thus, the user may
have a test module and a standard module of any of the various crcs
management programs and tables (only one of which may be in main storage
for a given execution).
He can then execute crcs using the test module;
if it doesn't work satisfactorily, he can execute crcs again using the
standard module that he knows is working.
JOB CONTROL
The job control language (JCL) statements needed to execute crcs
varies not only with the operating system environment desired but also
with the choice of crcs functions and types of data organization.

Specific examples of JCL can be found in the appropriate CICS operations
Guide.
In a CICS/OS environment, a procedure may be set up so that execution
of a "standard" system requires a minimal amount of JCL to be submitted
as a job. Only for execution of a test system or for other than the
defined standard system would a larger JCL deck be necessary.
In a CICS/DOS environment, the user can elect to use Single Program
Initiate (SPI) to activate CICS with a minimal amount of JCL.
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
The flexibility in specifying which CICS management programs and
tables are to be loaded for a particular execution is accomplished
through the System Initialization program (DFHSIP).
This program is
named on the EXEC card in the JCL and is used to accomplish the
following:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Load the specified System Initialization Table.
Request any overrides that are desired.
Load the requested CICS management programs and tables.
Initialize tables and areas.
Open all required data sets.
Load any resident application programs.
Pass control to the Terminal Control program (which then executes
as the initial task) •

System termination is provided for through use of the master terminal
transaction (CSMT) and several CICS-provided programs (DFHMTP, DFHSTP,
DFHSTKC, DFHSTTD, DFHSTTR).
The Termination program (DFHSTP) allows
normal completion of transactions currently in progress, prepares
statistics, closes data sets, and optionally, takes a dump before
exiting to the operating system.
A detailed description of the use of the transaction CSMT in
terminating the system is found in the appropriate CICS Operations
Guide.

The dump data set produced by the Dump Management facility of CICS
is a sequential data set, on either magnetic tape or disk, which exists
in a semi-processed form.
The CrCS-provided utility program (DFHDUP)
is used to produce the final formatted dump.
The user can define an
alternate as well as a primary dump data set.
unless the user chooses to provide an alternate dump data set, DFHDUP
must be used only when CICS is not in real-time execution.
That is,
if the user wishes to print the dump data set, he must first terminate
CICS, run DFHDUP, then reinitialize CICS. This may satisfy the user
who only requires crcs for a part of the day.
However, for the user who requires crcs operations for a long period
of time, an alternate dump data set may be allocated.
Thus, at periodic
intervals, the user may request, through the CICS Master Terminal switch
function, that CICS begin using the alternate dump data set so that
the primary data set can be processed by DFHDUP in another
partition/region.
When the primary data set has been processed, the
user may again "switch" back to the primary data set and then process
11

the alternate data set.
This procedure can be repeated any number of
times.
If tapes are being used, this switching procedure causes the
old dump tape to be closed and dismounted, and a new tape to be mounted
and opened.
If the user switches to the alternate dump data set, then fails to
process the primary data set before again switching, the dumps on the
primary data set are destroyed by the CICS Dump Management facility
when new dumps are recorded.
A detailed description of the use of the Dump utility program is
found in the appropriate CICS operations Guide.

Generation of CICS/DOS is accomplished in three stages: stage I
consists of the assembly of the CICS/DOS generation macro instructions
and the preparation of the input for stage II; stage II consists of
the assembly of the CICS/DOS system; and stage III consists of the link
editing of the non-real-time system and tables used by the System
Initialization program to the DOS Core Image Library using the DOS
Linkage Editor (LNKEDT) and the link editing of the CICS/DOS real-time
system to the CICS/DOS Real-Time Relocatable Program Library (DFHRPL)
using the CICS/DOS Linkage Editor (DFHLINK).
Generation of CICS/OS is accomplished in a two-stage operation: (1)
assembly of the generation macro statements and (2) the running of the
job stream produced by this assembly.
During the generation of CICS, the user must specify the CICS
management programs and system service programs he requires to meet
his environmental needs.
The specification and naming of the desired
programs are accomplished through the use of DFHSG system generation
macro instructions, which are processed by the Assembler.
The order in which DFHSG macro instructions are specified is not
important, except that the first macro instruction specified must be
the DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction.
In the CICS/DOS systems,
the DFHSG TYPE=FINAL macro instruction must be the last statement of
the system generation input stream preceding the Assembler END
statement.
DFHSG macro instructions are written in Assembler language and, as
all Assembler language instructions, are written in the following
format:

blank
or
symbol

DFHSG

One or more operands
separated by commas

In this publication, parentheses are used to indicate those operands
where more than one applicable parameter (keyword and otherwise) can
be specified with a single use of the operand.
Where parentheses are
not used, only one parameter at a time can be specified as part of the
operand; a choice must be made in the case of more than one applicable
parameter.
Since a blank character indicates the end of the operand
field, the operand field must not contain blanks except after a comma
on a continued card or after the last operand of the macro instruction.
The first operand of a continued card must begin in column 16.
The following operands can be included in the DFHSG macro
instruction:
DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL,
STATUS=FIRST,
ASMBLR=Assembler name,
OPSYS=(VS1,VS2,number),
TRACE=YES,NO,
TIMECTL=YES,NO,
DSIZE=number,

*
*
*
*
*

*
*
13

MPS=YES,NO,
JOBNAME=jobname,
ACCTID=accounting information,
PGMERID='programmer's name',
MSGLVL=O,l,
DEVICE=2311,2314,3330,
CONDCD= ( (code, opera tor) , ••• , (code, opera tor) ) ,
PRIORTY=nn,
MSGCLAS=x,
CLASS=jobclass,
REGION=(n1K,n2K) ,
PROCNMS=(procedure names),
DL1=YES,NO,
ATP=YES,NO,
PREFIX=prefix,
TCTUA=(V1COMPAT,VARIABLE)
DFHSG PROGRAM=CSO,
MPS=YES,NO,
NSD=number,
DEVICE=2311,2314,3330,
SVC=number,
CAA=appendage suffix,
V1CMPAT=YES,
TCAMSIP=YES

*
*
*
*
*

*
*
**
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSS
DFHSG PROGRAM=CSD

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSU,
DEVICE=(TAPE,2311,2314,3330)

DFHSG PROGRAM=KCP,
CONSEC=YES,
RUNAWAY=YES,
STALCTL=YES,
ENQUEUE=YES,
OPSECUR=YES,
ICPTIME=YES,
ICPAUTO=YES,
ICPSYNC=YES,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XDSPCHR=symbolic name,
DEVICE= (2311,2314,3330)

*
*
*
*
*

*
**
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=SCP,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
SUFFIX=program suffix

*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=PCP,
PCPLOAD=YES,NO,
LANG=(COBOL,PL/I) ,
HLLTR=YES,NO,
COBOL=(V2,V3,V4,SUBSET) ,
XFETCH=symbolic name,
SUFFIX=program suffix

*
*
*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=PIP,
SUFFIX=program suffix

DFHSG PROGRAM=ICP,
RUNAWAY=YES,
ICPTIME=YES,

*
*

ICPAUTO=YES,
ICPSYNC=YES,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYPEEQ=symbolic name,
XICEEXP=symbolic name,
.DUMMY=YES

*
*
*
*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=DCP,
D"EVICE=TAPE,2311,2314,3330,
DEVADDR=nnn,
CICSDMP=YES,
SUFFIX=pLogram suffix,
DUMMY=YES

*
*
*
*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=TCP,
ACCMETH=(BTAM,BSAM,SAM,BGAM,TCAM),
DEVICE=(1403,1404,1442,1443,1445,2311,2314,3330,
2501,2520,2540,CRLP,BASD,DISK,TAPE),
BTAMDEV=(1030,1050,1050D,1053,1130,1130D,2020,2020D,
2260,L2260,2265,2740,2140D,2740-2,2741C,
2741E,2741DC,2741DE,2760,2770,2770D,27S0,27S0D,
29S0/1,29S0j2,2980j4,3275,3277,L3277,3284,
L3284,3286,L3286,3735D,7770,SYSj3,SYS/3D,SYS/7,
SYSj7D,Sj360,Sj360D,Sj370,Sj370D,TWX,BISYNC),
FEA!URE=(AUTOANSW,AUTCPOLL,BUFFRECV,PSEUDOBIN),
ANSWRBK=(EXIDVER,TERMINAL,AUTOMATIC,7770TERM,7770NULL),
INI!RL=YES,
LOCKF=YES,
WRAFLST=YES,
BSCOBE= (EBCDIC, ASCII,TRANSCODE) ,
AUTOTRN=YES,
UCTRAN=NO, (EBCDIC,ASCII),
CCMEAT=NO, (FORMAT,FULLBUF) ,
FMT2260=(6X40,12X40,12XSO,15X64),
FMT3270= (12X40, 24X80) ,
CMPT60L=(n1,n2,n3),
SMI=user character,
TAB=YES,NO,
CCNVTAE=(AEE,ABC),
XATTACH=symbolic name,
XOUTPUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
XTCMIN=symbolic name,
XTCMOUT=symbolic name,
TCM3270=YES,
TCM7770=YES,
BMS=YES,NO,
SUFFIX=program suffix

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=FCP,
CONSEC=YES,
FILSERV=(INBA,INIS,tAUPD,ISUPD,BAADD,ISADD,INDIRACC,
EXCTL,INSEG,OUTSEG,BABLKNG,VLR,HEXAD,BECAD,
ACTAD,IVBR,LOCATE,IBROWSE,DBROWSE) ,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XOUlPUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbclic name,
XINPUTC=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHSG PROGRAH=TDP,
INTRA=YES,TRANSINIT,
EXTRA=(ACQUISITION,DISPOSITION) ,
SUFFIX=pLogram suffix,

*
*
*
*
15

DEVICE=2311,2314,3330,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XOUTPUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

*
*

DFHSG PBOGRAM=TSP,
DEVICE=2311,2314,333C,
SUFFIX=p~og~am suffix,
VIRTUAL=VIRTUAL,REAl,
XTYPBEQ=symbolic name,
XOU~PUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

**
*
*
**

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSA,
WRKAREA=number,
SUFFIX=program suffix

*
*

DFHSG PBOGRAM=MTP,
TLT=YBS,NO

DFHSG PROGRAM=OCP
DFHSG PROGRAM=GAP
DFHSG PROGRAM=HLL,
LANG=(COBOL,PL/I) ,
PL1=(O,F)

DFHSG PROGRAM=DDM
DFESG PROGRAM=ATP,
INBUFF=number,
OUTBUFF=number
DFHSG TYPE=FINAL
Table 1 shows the symbolic names and program codes used during CICS
generaticn in the specification and naming of CICS management programs
and system service programs.

Table 1 (Part 1 of 2) •

Symbolic names and program codes used in system
generation

RBOG]!.tl B!l1]

~X1:!~Q11£

Terminal Control
3270 Basic Mapping
Support
Terminal Dependent
Control
Task Control
File Control
Program Control
Storage Control
Dump Control
Transient Data
Control
Common System Area
CICS Dummy CSA
Temporary Storage
Control
Interval Control
Program Interrupt
Dump utility
CICS/DOS Linkage Editor
Master Terminal
programs

"- '----

Asynchronous Transaction Processor
Asynchronous Transaction Read'er
Asynchronous Transaction Writer
Asynchronous Transaction Queue Purge
Dynamic Open/Close
Graphic Attention
System Service
programs
Sign-On
Sign-Off
Field Engineering
Control System Dummy
programs
Transient Data dummy
Dump Control dummy
File Control dummy
Temporary Storage
dummy
Interval Control
dummy
Control System
Operational programs
Abnormal Condition
Terminal Abnormal
Condition
Time Adjustment
Transmission Error
System Initialization

NAl1]

~Ql!]

RBQQBAM TY,R]

(Note 1)

RBQQ]AM
(Note 2)

DFHTCP (Note 6)
DFHBMSMM

TCP
TCP

Control program
Service program

DFHTDCP
DFHKCP
DFHFCP
DFHPCP
DFHSCP
DFHDCP

Note 9
KCP
FCP
PCP
SCP
DCP

Service
Control
control
Control
control
Control

program
program
program
program
program
program

DFHTDP (Note 6)
DFHCSA (Note 6)
DFHDCSA
DFHTSP (Note 6)

TDP
CSA
Note 10
TSP

Control
Control
Control
Control

program
program
program
program

DFHICP (Note 6)
DFHPIP (Note 6)
DFHDUP
DFHLINK
DFHMTPA
DFHMTPB
DFHMTPC
DFHMTPD
DFHMTPE
DFHMTPF
DFHATP

ICP
PIP
CSU
INITIAL
MTP
MTP
MTP
MTP
MTP
MTP
ATP

Control
Control
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service

program
program
program
program
program
program
program
program
prog ram
program
program

DFHRD1
DFHRD2
DFHWT1
DFHWT2
DFHAQP

ATP
ATP
ATP
ATP
ATP

Service
Service
Service
Service
Service

program
progra m
progra m
program
program

DFHOCP
DFHGAP

OCP
GAP

Service program
Control program

DFHSNP
DFHSFP
DFHFEP

CSS
Note 3
Note 3
Note 3

Service
Service
Service
Service

program
program
program
program

DFHTDPDY
DFHDCPDY
DFHFCPDY
DFHTSPDY

CSD
Note
Note
Note
Note

Control
Control
Control
Control
Control

program
program
program
program
program

DFHICPDY

Note 4

Control program

DFHACP
DFHTACP

CSO
Note 5
Note 5

Control program
Service program
Service program

DFHTAJP
DFHTEP
DFHSIP

Note 5
Note 5
Note 5

Service program
Service program
Control program

(Note
(Note
(Note
(Note
(Note

6)
6)
6)
6)
6)

4
4
4
4

Table 1 (Part 2 of 2).

Symbolic names and program codes used in system
generation

,RROGBAl1 BAM.£;

SYMBOLIC
(Note-'f

System Termination
System Statistics
programs

DFHSTP
DFHSTTR
DFHSTTD
DFHSTKC
DFHTRP
DFHTRPDY
DFHRWP70
DFHCAA70

Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Service program
Service program
Service program
Service program
Service program
Service program
Feature program
Appendage

DFHDEB70
DFHDLI
DFHDLIDY
DFHDLA
DFHDLQ
DFHDLE

Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note

5
11

SVC
Feature
Feature
Feature
Feature
Feature

Trace programs
7770 Read/Write
7770 Channel/Abnormal
End Appendage
7770 SVC
DL/I Interface
DL/I Interface dummy
DL/I Initialization
DL/I Application
DL/I CALL Execution
High-Level Language
programs
PL/I-OPT Entry
Interface
PL/I-F Entry Interface
PL/I Interface
CICS Preprocessor

NAl1~

,RROGBAl1
(Note 2)

4
11
11
11

HLL
DFHPL10I
DFHPL11
DFHSAP
DFHPRPR

Note
Note
Note
Note

~QQ~

RROGBAl1 !X£~

program
program
program
program
program

Feature program
7
7
7
8

Feature
Feature
Feature
Feature

program
program
program
program

The symbolic name is the name supplied to the linkage edit
procedure.
The program code. is the keyword parameter used in the system
generation macro instruction (DFHSG).
These programs are included in CICS if the user specifies
the system service programs with a DFHSG PROGRAM=CSS macro
instruction.
These programs are included in CICS if the user specifies
the control system dummy programs with a DFHSG PROGRAM=CSD
macro instruction.
These programs are included in the generation of CICS if
the user specifies the control system operational programs
with a DFHSG PROGRAM=CSO macro instruction.
A two-character suffix (other than IDY' and 'NO' which are
reserved) may be appended to these symbolic names.
Suffix
'DY' is reserved for dummy programs.
These programs are included in CICS if the user specifies
the high-level language feature with a DFHSG PROGRAM=HLL,
LANG=PL/I macro instruction.
PLI=(O,F) causes appropriate
program selection.
This program is included in CICS if the user specifies the
high-level language feature with a DFHSG PROGRAM=HLL,
LANG=(COBOL,PL/I) macro instruction.
This program is included in CICS if the user specifies
BTAMDEV=1030.

For CICS/OS, this program is given control by the System
Initialization program (DFHSIP) via an OS XCTL macro
instruction to function as the Request Block (RB) for CICS.
These programs are included in CICS if the user specifies
DL1=YES in the DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL maCIO instruction.

The
system
use of
of the
can te

DFESG TYPE=INITIAL maCIO instruction must be the first of the
generation maCIO instructions. Procedures developed from the
this maCIO instruction can be reused for subsequent generations
entire system or fOI parts of the system.
The following operands
included in this maCIO instruction:
DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL,
STA'IUS=FIRST,
ASMELR=Assembler name,
OPSYS=(VS1,VS2,number) ,
TRACE=YES,NO,
TIMECTL=YES,NO,
DSIZE=number,
MPS=YES,NO,
JOENAME=jobname,
ACC'IID=accounting information,
PGMERID='programmer's name',
MSGLVL=O,1,
DEVICE=2311,2314,3330,
CCN~Ct>= «code,operator) , ••• , (code,operator»,
PRIORTY=nn,
MSGCLAS=x,
CLASS=jobclass,
REGION=(n1K,n2K) ,
FRCCNMS=(procedure names),
DL1=YES,NO,
ATP=YES,NO,
PREFIX=prefix,
TCTUA=(V1CMPAT,VARIABIE)

*
*
*
*
*
*
**

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

TYPE: The TYPE=INITIAL operand specifies that this is the initial macro
instruction in a CICS system generation run.
S'IATUS: In the CICS/DOS systems, the STA'IUS=FIRST operand must be used
during the very first CICS/DOS system generation. The presence of this
o~erand results in the generation of the CICS/DOS Linkage Editor and
Library Maintenance pIogram (DFHLINK). This program is used to place
all CICS management and application pIograms in the Real-Time
Relocatable Program Library (DFHRPL).
Once the generation of DFHLINK is complete, it is used to format
the Real-time Relocatable Program Library.
The user must provide a
label set for DFHNPL in the partition standard label definitions and
include the DSIZE operand.
In the CICS/OS system, the STATUS=FIRST operand is used to cause
the CICS cataloged procedures to be placed in SYS1.PROCLIB.
If
TCTUA=V1COMPAT is specified, jobs are created during stage II of system
generation that modify the DFHTCT macro instruction and DFHTCT symbolic
storage definiticn (DSECT) to provide upward compability from CICS/OS
Version 1 to CICS/OS Version 2.

ASMBLR: This operand is used to identify the name of the Assembler to
be used during stage II of system generation and to produce the proper
JCL.
The default is ASMELR=ASSEMBLY for CICS/DOS and ASMBLR=IEUASM
for CICS/OS.
For CICS/OS, if the first three characters of the Assembler name
are 'lEV', Assembler H is assumed and only one work data set is
allocated (SYSUT1). Otherwise, Assembler F is assumed and three work
da'ta sets are allocated (SYSUT1, SYSUT2, and SYSUT3).
TRACE: The TRACE=NO oFerand is used to indicate that the optional
trace function is not to be used during execution of CICS. The default
is TRACE=YES.
TIMECTL:
The TIEECTL=N_O operand is used to indicate that none of the
optional time management functions are to be included in any of the
CICS management programs. If TIMECTL=NO is specified, the macro
instructions of the Interval Contrcl program (ICP) are not expanded
and warning messages appear on the assembly listings of the affected
CICS management programs. The time management functions excluded
include runaway task centrol and support of ICP macro instructions.
The default is TIMECTL=YES.
DSIZE:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used
to specify the number of directory tracks to be used for the Real-Time
Relocatable Program Library (created if the STATUS=FIRST operand is
included). The default is DSIZE=2.
MPS:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used to
indicate whether the DOS system for which CICS is being generated has
multiprogramming system (MPS) sUFPort.
The default is MPS=YES.
JOENAME: This oFerand is used to specify a JCL (OS) or job control
(DOS) jetname for systems generation. The default name is CICS.
The
entire jotname is a concatenation of the jobname operand (truncated to
four positions), program name, and suffix.
(Example: JOBNAME=NEW,
~ROGRAM=KCP, SUFFIX=01.) The jobname would be NEWKCP01.
For the default
jotname operand, PROGRAM=KCP, SUFFIX=03.
The jotname would be CICSKCPO.
The combined jobname will be truncated to eight positions.
]Q!~:

The program name for DFHSG TYFE=INITIAL is provided by the system
as GEN.
Therefore the default jobname is CICSGEN.

ACCTID:
Applicatle only to the CICS/OS-ST~NDARD system, this operand
is used to specifJ the JCL accounting information for the system
generation procedure.
The default is ACCTID=CICSGEN.
PGMERID: Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANtARD system, this operand
is used to specify the programmer's name to be placed in the JCL.
The
name must be enclosed in quotation marks and should not exceed 20
Fositions. The default is PGMERID='SYSTEM PROGRAMMER'.
MSGLVL:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to specify the message level desired for the JCL during stage
II. The default is MSGLVL=O.

DEVICE:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand specifies
for DFHLINK the device type on which the Real-Time Relocatable Program
Library is resident. This operand is propagated to the DEVICE=
parameters of DFHSG TYPE=CSO and TYPE=KCP. The default is 2311.
]ot~:

The Relocatable Program Library (DFHRPL) must be on the same
dEvice type as SYSRES.
For the DOS-ENTRY system, the Transaction
Rollout File (DFHTRF) and the preallocated Program Library
(DFHPPL) must also be on the same device type.

OPSYS:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS STANDARD system (release 2.3 or
later) this operand is used to specify the VS environment in which CICS
is to be run. For example, OPSYS=(VS1,1) is the decimal release number
of the operating system.
In the case of release 2.3, the fix for APAR
No. P10780 must also be applied.
ceNDCD:
Applicable only to the ClCS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to specify up to eight condition codes which, if met on any
job step, cause further processing of that job to be bypassed.
"code"
can 1:e any decimal number from 0 through 4095.
"operator" can be any
of the fcllowing:
GT, GE, EQ, LT, LE, NE.
For further details, see
the publication Q~ g2~ ~~n!£21 1~ng~~~ (GC28-6704).
PRIOBTY:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to assign a priority to the jobs in Stage II of system
generation.
All jobs are given the same priority, where "nn" can be
any decimal number from 0 through 13. For further details, see the
publication Q~ ~Q~ ~fn~~21 1~ng~Eg§ (GC28-6704).
MSGCLAS:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to route all messages issued by the OS Job Scheduler to an
output class othEr than the normal message class (Al.
"x" can be any
alphabetic (A-Z) or numeric (0-9) character.
If this operand is
omitted, or if MSGCLAS=A is specified, job scheduler messages are routed
to the standard output class, A.
For further details, see the
publication Q~ ~ob ££n~fQl 1~ng~~g§ (GC28-6704).
CLASS:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to assign a jobclass to all Stage II jobs. "jobclass " can be
an alphatetic character A through o. If this operand is omitted, or
if CLASS=A is specified, A is the default jobclass assigned to the
jobs. For further details, see the publication Q~ ~Q~ ~~ntrgl 1Engy~§
(GC28-6704) •
Applicable only to.the ClCS/OS-STAN£ARD system, this operand
REGION:
allows the user to (1) specify the maximum amount of main storage to
be allocated to the job, or (2) specify the maximum amount of main
storage to be allocated to the jcb and specify in which storage
hierarchy or hierarchies (if OS/MVT is generated with hierarchy support)
the space is to be allocated.

"--

If REGION=n1K is specified (for example, REGION=52K), "n1" indicates
the number of contiguous 1024-byte areas of main storage to be allocated
for the job (n1 should be an even number and must not excEed 16383).
If REGION= (n1K,n2K) is specified (for example, REGION= (60K, 150K), "n1"
indicates the number of contiguous 1024-byte areas to be allocated in
main storage (hierarchy 0), and "n2" indicates the number of contiguous
1024-byte areas to bE allocated in ~CS (hierarchy 1).
For further
details, see the publication g~ ~Q~ £Qnt~l 1ang~~g§ (GC28-6704).
21

If this operand is omitted, the default value (as established in
the input reader procedure) is aEsumed.
FRCCNMS:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
allows the UEer to specify the names of CICS cataloged procedures to
be used as follows:
(1) First Name - assembly of CICS programs and
user written Assembler language pregrams, (2) Second Name - link edit
of CICS Frograms and applicaticn programs, (3) Third Name - update of
a temporary library during system generation, (4) Fourth Name - assembly
and link edit during the preparation of system tables.
The default is
PRCCNMS={DFHASMV2,DFHLNKV2,DFHUPDV2,DFHAUPLK).
DL1:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
allows the UEer to specify whether or not the Data Language/I (DL/I)
interface is to be included in this generation of CICS.
The default
is DI1=NO.
]Q!~:

The Program Specification Directory (PDlR) and Data Management
Block Directory (DDlR) lists mUEt be in CICS.LOADLlB for the
link edit of the CICS-DL/I interface modules.
Therefore, if
DI/l is being generated, the listE must be assembled and link
edited before stage II of system generatien is executed.
For
further informaticn, see the section "Generation of ClCS/OS Data
Language/I Facilities".

ATP:
Applicable only to the ClCS/OS-STANDARD and ClCS/DOS-STANDARD
Eystems, this operand allows the UEer to Epecify whether or not
Asynchronous Transaction Processing (ATP) support is to be included in
this generation cf ClCS.
The default is ATP=NO.
PREFIX:
Applicable cnly to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to specify the index name for CICS system data sets.
The Job
Centrol Language (JCL) generated specifies these data sets as
prefix.LOADLIB, prefix.MACLlB, and prefix.SOURCE, where "prefix" can
centain frem one to eight characters and must conform to the data set
naming conventions outlined in the publication Q2 ~QE ~Qn~~l 1~ngy~g~
(GC28-6704). The default is PREFlX=ClCS.
!CTUA: !his operand is used to specify user-defined Process Control
Informatien (PCl) fields of fixed length (15 bytes) and/or variable
length (0-255 bytes). These fields are located in the Terminal Control
Table and can be used as terrrinal work areas.
TCTUA=V1CMPAT should only be used by ClCS/OS Version 1 users who
are currently using the £ixed-Iength 15-byte PCl field (the address of
which is at TCTTECl) and who desire Version 2 PCl compatibility with
Version 1. This operand must be specified in conjunction with the
STA!US=FlRST operand.
!CTUA=VARlABLE is used to specify a variable-length (byte aligned)
PCI field (the address of which is at TCTTECIA and the length of which
is at TCTTEClL) and should be used by all but CICS/OS Version 1 users
(who have used PCl fields) if a terminal work area is desired.
The
default is TCTUA=VARIABLE.

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Control System Operational group is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=CSO,
MPS=YES,NO,
NSD=number,
DEVICE=1311,2314,3330,
SVC=number,
CAA=appendage suffix,
V1CMPAT=YES,
TCAMSIP=YES

*
*
**
*
*
*

The following Control system operational modules are generated in
response to this macro instruction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

15.
16.

17.
18.
19.

20.

System Initialization program (DFHSIP) and its overlays
Trace Contrel program (DFHTRP), unless TRACE=NO was specified
in the DFHSG TYPE=lNlTlAL macro instruction
A dummy trace program (DFHTRPDY), unless TRACE=NO was specified
in the DFESG TYPE=lNITIAL macro instructien
System Termination program (DFHSTP)
Abnormal Condition program (DFHACP)
Terminal Abnormal Condition program (DFHTACP)
Terminal Error program (DFHTEP)
Time Adjustment program (DFHTAJP), unless TlMECTL=NO was
spEcified in the DFHSG TYPE=lNITIAL macro instruction
File and Terminal Statistics program (DFHSTTR)
Supervisory·Statistics programs (DFHSTKC)
Data Management statistics program (DFHSTTD)
Real-Time Pre-Located Program Library DTF - CICS/DOS systems
only
7770 Read/Write program (DFHRWP70) - CICS/OS-STANDARD system
only, and only if SVC and CAA operands are specified
7770 Channel/Abnormal End Appendage program (DFHCAA70) CICS/OS-STANDARD system only, and only if SVC and CAA operands
are specified
7770 SVC program (DFHDEB70) - ClCS/OS-STANBARD system only, and
only if SVC and CAA operands are specifeid
DL/l Interface program (DFHDLl) - ClCS/OS-STANDARD system only,
and only if Dl1=YES was specified in the DFHSG TYPE=lNlTIAL
macro instruction
DL/l InterfacE dummy program (DFHDLlDY) - ClCS/OS-STANDARD system
only, and only if DL1=YES was specified in the DFHSG TYPE=INITlAL
macro instruction
DL/l Initialization program (DFHDLA) - ClCS/OS-STANDARD system
only, and only if DL1=YES was specified in the DFHSG TYPE=INlTlAL
macro instruction
DLIl Application program (DFHDLQ) - CICS/OS-STANDARD system
only, and only if DL1=YES was specified in the DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL
macro instruction.
DL/I CALL Execution program (DFHDLE) - ClCS/OS-STANDARD system
only, and only if DL1=YES was specified in the DFHSG TYPE=lNITIAL
macro instruction

EROGRAM: The ERCGBAM=CSO operand is used to indicate that the control
System Operational group is being generated.
MPS:
The MPS=NO operand is used to indicate that the DOS system for
which ClCS/DOS is being generated does not have multiprogramming system
(MPS) support.
!he default is MPS=YES.
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS
systems.
23

NSD:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used to
specify the maximum number of nonseguential disk extents that will
exist for any data set involved in the real-time execution of CICS.
CICS system generation uses this value to determine the amount of main
storage to be reserved at the beginning of the partition for label
processing when the data sets are opened.
Although most data sets are
opened during system initialization, the dynamic open/close feature of
the CICS Master Terminal program may require the use of this label
~rocessing area at any time during CICS execution.
The presence of
this operand makes it unnecessary for the user to supply a DOS LBLTYP
job control statement with his CICS execution deck.
If this operand
is omitted, the default is NSD=9. The minimum which may be specified
is one since CICS opens the Real-time Relocatable Program Library even
if the user has no data sets to be opened.
DEVICE:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used
to specify the type of device upon which the Relocatable Program Library
and the Real-Time Pre-Located Program Library (DOS-ENTRY only) are to
reside.
The default is the value propagated from the DEVICE= operand
of DFHSG TYPE=TNTTIAL.
Applicable only to the CTCS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand is
SVC:
used to specify the SVC number under which the 7770 SVC routine provided
by CICS is to be link edited to SYS1.SVCLIB.
The number specified must
be in the range 200-255.
The default is SVC=200 for system generation
~urposes; however, the SVC is not link edited.
This operand is required
if the ACCMETH=B!AM and ETAMDEV=7770 operands are included in the DFHSG
FROGRAM=TCP macro instruction.
For information concerning adding SVC
routines to thg operating system, SEe the publication Q~ ~Y§1~ID
E~£E£sID~~£~§ guig§ (GC28-6550).
CAA:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand is
used to specify the two-character alphameric suffix to be assigned to
the 7770 Channel End/Abncrmal End Appendage routine provided by CICS
when that routine is link edited to SYS1.SVCLIB.
The suffix specified
must be in the range WA-Z9.
This ope~and is required if the
ACCME!H=E!AM and ETAMDEV=7770 operands are included in the DFHSG
fEOGRAM=TCP macro instruction and if the APPENDG operand is included
in the DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction during preparation of the
Terminal Control Table.
For information concerning adding appendages
to the operating system, see the publication Q~ ~lst~~ E£Qg~sIDID§~~§
g~1g~ (GC28-6550).
V1CMPAT:
Applicable only to the crcs/os STANDARD system, V1CMPAT=YES
must be specified if the user wishes to have the Terminal Abnormal
Ccndition program (DFHTACP) provide a crcs/os Version 1 interface when
linking to the user-written Terminal Error program (DFHTEP) under
crcs/os Version 2. This operand is to be used only by those former
crcs/os Version 1 users who have an existing DFHTEP.
TCAMSIP:
Applicable only if TCAM is used in the CICS/OS-STANDARD
system, this operand is used to generate TCAM support in the System
Initialization program (DFHSIP).

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Centrol System Service group is:
DFHSG ·PBOGBAM=CSS
The programs generated by this macro instruction are as
1.
2.
3.

follo~s:

Sign-on program (DFHSNP)
Sign-off ~rogram (DFHSFP)
F~E. Terminal Test Fregram (DFHFEP)

If the user does not require a particular CICS management program
(for example, File Centrel), he can elect to not generate that program
and, as a result, save the amount of static main storage that would be
required to contain the program.
However, a dummy program must be
Frovided for every CICS management program not actually generated.
If the Control System Dummy group is generated in response to the
DFHSG PBOGRAM=CSD
macro instruction, dummy programs with the suffix 'DY' are produced
for the fellowing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

File Ccntrel program
Transient Data Control program
Dump Centrel program
Temporary Storage Centrol program
Interval Centrol pregram
DL/I Interface program

This facility permits all dummy programs to be generated without
generating each one separately.

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Centrol System utility group is:
DFESG PBCGBAM=CSU,
DEVICE=(TAPE,2311,2314,3330)

The Dump utility program (DFHDUP) is generated in response to this
macro instruction.
FROGRAM:
The PRCGBAM=CSU operand indicates that the Central System
utility group (currently ccnsistently only of DFHDUP) is to be
generated.
DEVICE:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used
to specify the type(s) of input devices(s).
The default is
DEVICE=(TAPE,2311,2314,3330) •

~~]1]g1 ~1~1!~ ~~~~g~~]B1 R]~g]!~~
~ASK

CCNTRCL PBCGBAM (KCP)

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Contrcl pregram is as fellows:

~ask

DFHSG PROGRAM=KCP,
CCNSEC=YES,
RUNAWAY=YES,
STALCTL=YES,
ENQUEUE=YES,
OPSECUR=YES,
ICPTIME=YES,
ICPAUTO=YES,
ICPSYNC=YES,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XDSPCHR=symbolic name,
DEVICE=(2311,2314,3330)

*
*
*
*
*

Unless otherwise indicated, the omission of an operand results in
the corresponding functicn not being included.
FROGRAM:
The PRCGBAM=KCP operand indicates that the Task Control
Program is to ce generated.
CONSEC:
Applicacle only to the CrCS/DeS-ENTRY system, the CONSEC=YES
operand causes lcgic to be generated in Task Control that limits the
number of consecutive I/O's initiated by File Control.
When the
specified limit (centained in the CSA at CSAKCCDL) is reached, the task
is rolled out.
This consecutive dispatch limit is specified in the
System Initialization Table.
RUNAWAY:
The BUNAWAY=YES operand indicates that the optienal runaway
task ccntrol feature of Interval Control is to be supported by Task
Ccntrol.
STALCTL:
The STALCTL=YES operand indicates that the optional stall
detection feature of Task Control is to be included in CICS.
If this
operand is specified, DFHACP must be made resident.
ENQUEUE:
The ENQUEUE=YES operand indicates that the optional
enqueue/dequeue feature of Task Control is to be included in CICS.
This operand must be included if the exclusive control feature is to
be generated as part of the File Centrcl program.
OPSECUR: The OPSECUR=YES operand indicates that the optional operator
security checking feature of Ta~k Central is to be included in CICS.
ICFTIME:
The ICPTIME=YES operand indicates that the optional
time-of-day feature cf Interval Control is to be supported by Task
Central.
IePAUTO:
The ICPAUTO=YES operand indicates that the optional automatic
task initiation feature of Interval Control is to be supported by Task
Control.
26

*
*

*
*
*

*
*

ICPSYNC: The ICPSYNC=YES operand indicates that the optional task
synchronization service of Interval Control is to be supported by Task
Centrol.
SUFFIX: This operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix for the Task Centrol program being assembled.
If this operand
is omitted, a suffix is not provided.
XTYPBEQ: This oferand is used to generate linkage to a user-written
exit routine at the peint in Task Centrol prior to determining what
type of request for task services was issued. For further information
concerning user exits, see the section "Creating User Exits for CICS
Management programs".
XDSPCHR: This operand is used to generate linkage to a user-written
exit routine at a point in the Task Dispatcher subsequent to determining
which task to dispatch but prior to passing control to the task.
For
further informatien concerning user exits, see the section "Creating
User Exits for CICS Management Programs".
DEVICE:
Effective only in the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system, a rollout data
set DTF is generated for the device(s) specified. The default is the
value propogated from the DEVICE= operand of DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL.
STORAGE CeNTRaL PROGRAM

(SCP)

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Storage Centrel pregram is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=SCP,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
SUFFIX=program suffix

*
*

PROGRAM: The PROGRAM=SCP operand indicates that the storage Control
program is to be generated.
XTYPREQ: This operand is used to generate linkage to a user-written
exit routine at the entry point of storage Centrel.
For further
informatien concerning user exits, see the section "Creating User Exits
for CICS Management Programs".
SUFFIX:
This operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix for the storage centrel program being assembled.
If this operand
is omitted, a suffix is not provided.

PROGRAM CONTROL FEOGRAM

(PCP)

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Pregram Centrol program is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=PCP,
PCPLOAD=YES,NO,
LANG=(COBOL,PL/I) ,
HLL~R=YES,NO,

COBOL=(V2,V3,V4,SUBSET) ,
XFETCH=symbolic name,
SUFFIX=program suffix

*
*
*
*
*
*

Unless otherwise indicated, the omission of an operand results in
the corresponding functien not being included.
PROGRAM:
~rogram

The PROGRAM=PCP operand indicates that the Program Control
is to be generated.

PC~LOAD:
su~port

The PCPLOAD=NO operand is used to specify that the optional
for the Pregram Centrel Load feature is net to be geherated.
PCPLOAD=YES must be specified in order to use a sign-on Table or a
Terminal List Table or if application programs use either the DFHPC
TYPE=LOAD or the DFHBMS macro instruction.
See System service Tables.
The default is PCPLOAD=YES.
LANG: This operand is used to specify that the optional support for
ANS COBOL and/or PL/I is to be generated.
HLLTR:
This operand is used to specify that support for DFHTR (trace)
macro instructions is to be generated for high-level language
application programs. If this operand is used, the LANG operand must
also be used.
The default is HLLTR=NO.
CCBCL:
This operand is used to indicate which ANS COBOL compilers are
to be used to compile user-written applicaticn programs.
COBOL=V2
indicates that the ANS COBOL Version 2 Compiler (360N-CB-482 for DOS,
360S-CE-545 for OS) is to be used; COBCL=V3 indicates that the ANS
COBOL Version 3 Compiler (5736-CB2 for DOS, 5734-CB1 for OS) is to be
used; COBOL=V4 indicates that the ANS COBOL Version 4 Compiler
(5734-CB2) for as is to be used.
~he SUBSET parameter indicates that
the DOS Subset Compiler (5736-CB1) is to ce used.
If this operand is
used, LANG=COBOL must also be specified.
The default is COBOL=V3.
This ope~and is used to generate linkage to a user-written
XFtTCH:
exit routine at the point in Program Control following the loading of
the requested pregram.
For further information ccncerning user exits,
see the section "Creating User Exits for CICS Management Programs".
SUFFIX:
This operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix for the Pregram Centrel program being assembled.
If this operand
is omitted, a suffix is not provided.

PROGRAM INTERRUPT CONTROL PROGRAM (PIP)
The Program Interrupt Control program is a generalized program
interrupt handler that is given control by the operating system via
the STXIT (DOS) or SPIE (OS) macro instruction.
This program is
required under CICS/OS if the runaway task control feature of Interval
Control is to be supported.
The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Program Interrupt program is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=PIP,
SUFFIX=program suffix

PROGRAM: The PROGRAM=PIP operand is used to indicate that the Program
Interrupt program is to be generated.
SUFFIX:
This operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix (other than 'NO' which is reserved) for the Program Interrupt
program being assembled. If this operand is omitted, a suffix is not
provided.
INTERVAL CONTROL PROGRAM (ICP)
The system generation .macro instruction necessary to generate the
Interval Control program is as follows:
DFHSG PROGRAM=ICP,
RUNAWAY=YES,
ICPTIME=YES,
ICPAUTO=YES,
ICPSYNC=YES,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XICEEXP=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

*
*
*
*
*

*
*

unless otherwise indicated, the omission of an operand results in
the corresponding function not being included.
PROGRAM:
The PROGRAM=ICP operand indicates that the Interval control
program is to be generated.
If the TIMECTL=NO operand was included in the DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL
macro instruction, only a dummy Interval Control program is generated.
If the TIMECTL=NO operand was not included, the remaining operands of
the DFHSG PROGRAM=ICP macro instruction are applicable and must be
compatible with the corresponding operands included in the DFHSG
PROGRAM=KCP macro instruction.
RUNAWAY: The RUNAWAY=YES operand indicates that the optional
task control feature of Interval Control is to be included in
Note that the Program Interrupt Control program (PIP) is used
this feature and must be generated if the RUNAWAY=YES operand
under CICS/OS.

runaway
CICS.
to support
is used

ICPTIME: The ICPTIME=YES operand indicates that the optional
time-of-day feature of Interval Control is to be included in CICS.

Note that this operand must be used unless TIMECTL=NO was specified in
the DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction.
ICPAUTO: The ICPAUTO=YES operand indicates that the optional
"time-ordered" automatic task initiation feature of Interval Control
is to be included in CICS. This feature allows tasks to be
automatically initiated by CICS at a specified time of day or after a
specified interval of time has elapsed.
Note that the Temporary Storage
Control program (TSP) is used to support this feature and must be
generated if the ICPAUTO=YES operand is used.
Either this operand or
ICPSYNC=YES operand must be used unless TIMECTL=NO was specified in
the DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction.
This feature is used by
application programmers using the DFHIC macro instruction.
ICPSYNC: The ICPSYNC=YES operand indicates that the optional task
synchronization feature of Interval Control is to be included in CICS.
This feature allows tasks to be synchronized with a specified time of
day or with a specified interval of time.
Either this operand or the
ICPAUTO=YES operand must be used unless TIMECTL=NO was specified in
the DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction.
SUFFIX:
This operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix (other than 'NO' or 'DY' which are reserved) for the Interval
Control program being generated.
If this operand is omitted, a suffix
is not provided.
XTYPREQ:
This operand is used to generate linkage to a user-written
exit routine at the entry point of Interval Control.
For further
information concerning user exits, see the section "Creating User Exits
for CICS Management Programs".
XICEEXP: This operand is used to allow the Interval Control program
to generate linkage to a user-written exit routine when an Interval
Control Element (ICE) has expired.
For further information concerning
user exits, see the section "creating User Exits for CICS Management
Programs" •
DUMMY:
The DUMMY=YES operand is used to specify that a dummy Interval
Control program is to be generated. If this operand is used, a 'DY'
suffix is automatically generated for the dummy program; any use of
the SUFFIX operand is ignored.
This operand is used in lieu of the DFHSG PROGRAM=CSD macro
instruction to selectively generate a dummy Interval Control program.
Any other operands which may have been included in the DFHSG PROGRAM=ICP
macro instruction are ignored.

DUMP CONTROL PROGRAM (DCP)
The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Dump Centrel pregram is as follows:
DFHSG PROGRAM=DCP,
DEVICE=TAPE,2311,231ij,3330,
DEVADDR=nnn,
CICSDMP=YES,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
DUMMY=YES

*
*
*
*
*

unless otherwise indicated, the omission ef an operand results in
the corresponding function not being included.
PROGRAM:
~rcgram

The Pregram=DCP operand indicates that the
is to te generated.

Dum~

Centrol

DEVICE: Applicatle only to the CICS/DOS systems, this o~erand is used
to Epecify the type of output device. If this operand is omitted,
DEVICE=TAPE is assumed.
A particular Dump Centrol program in the CICS/DOS systems will
only one type of output device. If it is desired that different
device types be used on different runs, more than one Dump Control
program must be generated using the SUFFIX operand.
su~port

tEVADDR: If the DEVICE=TAPE operand iE used, the DEVADDR=nnn operand
must be used to Epecify the DOS device address to be assigned for the
tape drive. It should be a three-digit decimal number with leading
zeros, if necessary. For example, if SYS008 is the device address to
be used, DEVADDR=008 must be specified. If the DEVICE=2311 operand or
the DEVICE=2314 operand is used, the DEVADDR value is picked up from
the label information su~~lied for the Dump Control data set. This
e~erand is applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems.
CICSDMP: The CICSDMP=YES operand is used to specify that the optional
feature of dumping CICS management programs and tables is to be
generated.
SUFFIX: This operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix (other than 'NO' or 'DY' which are reserved) for the Dump Control
program being assembled. If this operand is omitted, a suffix is not
provided.
DUMMY: The DUMMY=YES operand is used to specify that a dummy Dump
Centrel ~rogram is to be generated. If this operand is used, a 'DY'
suffix is automatically generated for the dummy program; any use of
the SUFFIX o~erand is ignored.
This operand is used in lieu of the DFHSG PROGRAM=CSD macro
instruction to selectively generate a dummy Dump Centrol program. Any
ether operands which may have been included in the DFHSG PROGRAM=DCP
macro instruction are ignored.

TERMINAL CCNTRCL PBCGBAM (TCP)
Tbe system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Terminal Centrel program is as fellows:
DFHSG PROGRAM=TCP,
ACCMETH=(BTAM,BSAM,SAM,EGAM,TCAM),
DEVICE=(1403,1404,1442,1443,1445,2311,2314,3330,
2501,2520,2540,CRLP,DASD,DISK,TAPE),
BTAMDEV=(1030,1050,1050D,1053,1130,1130D,2020,2020D,
2260,L2260,2265,2740,2740D,2740-2,2741C,
2741E,2741DC,27Q1DE,2760,2770,2770D,2180,2180D,
2980/1,2980/2,2980/4,3215,3271,L3271,3284,
L3284,3286,L3286,3735D,7110,SYS/3,SYS/3D,SYS/1,
SYS/1D,S/360,S/360D,S/310,S/310D,TWX,BISYNC),
FEATURE=(AUTOANSW,AUTOPOLL,BUFFRECV,PSEUDOBIN),
ANSWRBK=(EXIDVER,TERMINAL,AUTOMATIC,1110TERM,1110NULL),
INITRL=YES,
LOCKF=YES,
WRAPLST=YES,
BSCOtE=(EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE),
AUTCTRN=YES,
UCTRAN=NO, (EBCDIC,ASCIT) ,
COMPAT=NO, (FORMAT,FULLBUF) ,
FMT2260=(6X40,12X40,12X80,15X64),
FMT3210= (12X4Q,24X80),
CMPT60L=(n1,n2,n3),
SMI=user character,
TAB=YES,NO,
CONVTAE= (AEE,ABC) ,
XATTACH=symbolic name,
XOUTPUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
XTCMIN=symbolic name,
XTCMOUT=symbolic name,
TCM3270=YES,
TCM7710=YES,
BMS=YES,NO,
SUFFIX=program suffix

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*

Unless otherwise indicated, the omission of an operand results in
the corresponding functicn not being included.
PROGRAM: The PRCGRAM=TCP operand indicates that the Terrrinal Control
program is to be generated.
ACCMETH:
This operand identifies the access methods to te used in the
terminal environment. One or more of the following keyword parameters
must be specified:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

BTAM
BSAM
SAM
BGAM
TCAM

Basic Telecommunication Access Method
Basic Sequential Access ,Method
Sequential Access Method
Graphics Access Method
Telecommunication Access Method

BT'AMDEV
DEVICE
DEVICE

BGAM and TCAM are applicable only to the CICS/OS system.
BGAM causes
support for local 2260's to te generated. If TCAM is specified, CICS
support for TCAM (360S-CQ-548) is generated.
SAM and BSAM are
functionally synonymous in CICS and can be used interchangeably.
Only
unblocked data sets can be used with SAM or BSAM.
32

In the generation of a TCAM only Terminal Control Program, the
fcllowing operands do not apply:
DEVICE, BTAMDEV, FEATURE, ANSWRBK,
INITRI, lCCKF, WRAPLST, BSCODE, UCTRAN=ASCII, CONVTAB, XOUTPUT, XINPUT.
DEVICE: This operand identifies the direct access or sequential devices
that are to be used in the terminal envircnment.
This operand must be
used if ACCMETH=SAM or ACCMETH=BSAM is specified. For direct access
devices, specify Eith~r the device type or the generic parameter DASD
or DISK.
ETAMDEV:
This operand identifies the ETAM device types and must be
present if ACCME1H=BTAM is specified. The applicable keyword parameters
are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

1030
1050
1050D
1053
1130
1130D
2020
2020D
2260
L2260
2265
2740
2740D
2740-2

15.
16.
17.

2741C
2741E
2741DC

18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.

2741DE
2760
2770
2770D
2780
2780D
2980/1
2980/2
2980/4
3215
3211
L3211
3284
L3284
3286
L3286
3735D
7710
SYS/3
SYS/3D
SYS/7
SYS/1D
S/360
S/360D
S/310
S/370D
TWX

45.

BISYNC

1030 Data Collection System
1050 Data Communication System
1050 Data Communication system (dial-up)
1053 Printer on a local/remote 2848 Display Control
1130 computing System
1130 Computing System (dial-up)
System/360 Model 20
System/360 Model 20 (dial-up)
2260 Display station (remote)
2260 Display station (local)
2265 Display Station
2740 Communication Terminal Models 1 and 2
2740 Communication Terminal Models 1 and 2 (dial-up)
2740 Communication Terminal Model 2 (2140 must also be
specified)
2141 Communication Terminal with correspondence code
2741 communication Terminal with PTTC/EBCD code
2741 Communication Terminal with correspondence code
(dial-up)
2741 Communication Terminal with P1TC/EBCD code (dial-up)
2760 optical Image unit
2110 Data Communication System
2110 Data Communication System
(dial-up)
2780 Data Transmission Terminal
2780 Data Transmission Terminal (dial-up)
2980 General Banking Terminal System Model 1
2980 General Banking Terminal System Model 2
2980 General Banking Terminal System Model 4
3215 Display Station (remote)
3217 Display Station (remote)
3271 Display station (local)
3284 Printer on a remote 3271 Control unit
3284 printer on a local 3212 Control Unit
3286 Printer on a remote 3271 Control Unit
3286 Printer on a local 3272 Control Unit
3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal (dial-up)
1710 Audio Response Unit Model 3
system/3 Models 6 and 10
System/3 Models 6 and 10 (dial-up)
System/7
System/1 (dial-up)
System/360
System/360 (dial-up)
System/370
System/310 (dial-up)
Ccmmon Carrier Teletypewriter Exchange Terminal
(Model 33/35)
Binary synchronous devices (for CICS/OS-STANDARD V1
compatibility)
33

The L2260 paramete~ is applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems.
The
BISYNC parameter includes 1130, System/360 Model 20, and System/360
Model 25 or higher. One or more parameters can be included in the
ETAMDEV operand.
Individual device type parameters are provided for the BTAMDEV
operand so that system generation input is self documenting.
If the
parameter length for this operand exceeds assembler limit of 255
characters for the particular system being generated, synonymous
parameters can, be omitted.
Specifying anyone of the parameters from
a group prod~ces su~portive code for all devices in the group. These
groups are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
]ote~

2020,SYS/3,S/360,S/37C,1130,BISYNC
2020D,SYSj3D,S/360D,S/370D,1130D
3275,3277
3284,3286,13284,13286
1053,2260,2265 When bin~ry. synchronous communica tion lines are part of the
user's configuration, it is possible for these communication
lines to time out if cont~ol is not returned to the terminal
before a timeout can occur.
The user can alleviate this
condition in either of two ways:
(1) by baving the application
program issue a CICS Task Control WAIT macro instruction to
voluntarily relinquish control, or (2) by setting the runaway
task time interval to a value that causes the long-running task
to be terminated before the line timeout can occur.

FEATURE: This operand is used to specify the special features present
in the terminal envi~cnment.
The applicable keyword parameters are:
1.
2.

AUTOANSW
AUTOP01L

3.
4.

BU"FFRECV
PSEUDOBIN

Switched·lines
Automatic polling feature required for multipoint
binary synchronous communication terminals
Buffer feature support for 2740 Model 2
Pseudo-binary transmission code for System/7

One or more parameters can be included in the FEATURE operand.
ANSWBBK: This operand is used to specify the type of terminal
identification; it must be used if FEATURE=AUTOANSW is specified.
parameters of this operand are net mutually exclusive.

The

ANSWRBK=EXIDVER specifies that BTAM-expanded ID verification is to
be employed to identify those terminals which transmit unique
identification sequences. ANSWRBK=EXIDVER must be specified if
ETAMDEV=3735D.
ANSWREK=TERMIN~L specifies that the operator will supply the
identificaticn for switched lines.

ANSWREK=AUTOMATIC specifies that automatic terminal identification
is to be sent by the terminal.
For terminals that communicate with a 7770 Audio Response Unit, the
applicable keywo~d parameters are 7770TERM and 7770NULL.
ANSWEBK=7770TERM specifies that the operator will supply the terminal
identification.
ANSWRBK=7770NULL specifies that no terminal
identification is to be sent by either the terminal or operator;
instead, the Terminal Control program will connect the line to the next
available terminal in the terminal pcol.
The default is
ANSWRBK=7770TEBM, providing BTAMDEV=7770 has also been specified.
34

]Q~~:

The ANSWRBK operand must include all keyword parameters for
which the corresponding parameter is to be included in the DFHTCT
TYPE=LINE specification during Terminal control Table
preparation.

INITRL:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, the INITRL=YES
operand (initial read lock) is used to indicate that all reads from
other than an applicatien program are with the keyboard lock option.
The FEATURE=KBRDLOCK operand must be included in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
macro instruction to have the keyboard lock feature operative for that
line. This operand applies to the 2848 Model 21 and 22 with the
optional keytoard lock feature.
LOCKF:
The LOCKF=YES operand is used to indicate that the optional
keyboard lock feature, su~porting the 2848 models 21 and 22, is to be
included in CICS.
The FEATURE=KBRDLOCK operand must be included in
the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction to have the keyboard lock feature
operative for that line.
For the CICS/DOS systems, if LOCKF=YES is
specified and if FEATURE=KBRDLOCK is included in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
macro instruction, the keyboard is locked on all reads including the
initial read.
WRAPLST:
The WRAPLS!=YES operand is used to specify that the optional
wrap list feature is to be included in CICS.
The list to be constructed
is a wra~around polling list for a nonswitched line.
BSCODE: This operand is used to indicate what types of binary
synchronous communication code are to be supported. The default is
BSCODE=(EECDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE).
.
AUTOTRN: The AUTOTRN=YES operand is used to specify that the optional
automatic transaction initiation feature is to be included in CICS.
Automatic transaction initiation is specified by the TRANSID operand
of the DFHDCT macro instruction.
OCTRAN:
This operand is used to generate support for the translation
ef lowercase data to uppercase in 3270 input data streams. If UCTRAN=NO
is specified, uppercase translation support for the 3270 is not
generated. The default is UCTRAN=NO.
If BSCODE=EBCDIC and/or CONVTAB=EBCDIC have been specified for
particular lines, UCTRAN=EBCDIC specifies that support is to be
generated for local and remote 3270'5 on those lines.
If BSCODE=ASCII
and/or CCNVTAB=ASCII have been specified for particular lines,
OCTRAN=ASCII indicates that support is to be generated for remote 3270's
en those lines.
Uppercase translation for the 3270 is performed only on input data
streams received from those 3270's for which FEATURE=UCTRAN was
specified during preparation of the Terminal Control Table.
COMPAT: This operand is used to generate 2260-compatibility support
for the 3270 Infcrmation Display System.
Such support allows the user
to run his currently operational 2260-based transactions from a 3270.
If COMPAT=NO is specifi€d, 2260-compatibility support for the 3270 is
not generated.
The default is CCMPAT=NO.

Two modes of compatibility operation are provided:
FORMAT and
FUILBUF.
Either or both may be ~pecifiBd with a single use of the
COMPAT operand.
If COMPAT is specified, then FMT2260 and FMT3270 must
be used to specify the screen formats.
CCMPAT=FORMAT indicates that FORMAT compatibility mode is to be
generated. FORMAT mode takes full advantage of the 3270 formatting
and data compression facilities, and is the preferred method of
2260-compatibility operation, particularly for the operation of remote
3270's.
CCMPAT=FULLBUF indicates that PULLBUP compatibility mode is to be
generated.
FULLBUP mode does not us~ the 3270 data compression
facilities and must therefore be used when all lines of input data are
desired.
]~!~~

If a 4S0-character 2260 is mapped onto a 4S0-character 3270,
use of FORMAT mode causes the loss of the last character of each
2260 output line.
Use of FULLBUP mode limits the data loss to
the last eharacteI position of the last line but at the expense
of tIansferIing a full 4S0 characters for each interaction
involving a data entry key.

FMT2260:
This opeIand is used to specify the various 2260 screen
fCImats to be simulated for 2260-based transactions on the 3270
Informaticn Display System.
The applicable keyword parameters are:
1.
2.
3.

6X40
12X40
12XSO

15X64

240-character 2260 Display station
4SQ-character 2260 Display station
960-character 2260 Display station or 12-row, SO-column
fermat for the 2265 Di~play Station
15-row, 64-column format for the 2265 Display Station

FMT3270:
This operand is used to ~pecify the 3270 SCIeen formats on
which 2260 SCIeen fOImats are to be simulated for 2260-based
transactions.
The applicable keyword parameters are:
1.
2.

12X40
24XSO

4S0-character 3275/3277 Display Station
1920-character 3275/3277 Display station

CMFT60L:
This operand specifies the minimum size of the Terminal
Input/Output Area (TIOA) that will be passed when an input operation
completes for any transaction running under 2260 compatibility.
This
operand must be specified if any of the transactions that are to be
run under 2260 ccmpatibility require an input TIOA larger than the
standard compatibility default.
This operand corresponds in function
to the INAREAL= specification formerly made in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
maCIO instruction for the 2260/2265 configuration.
The n1 parameter specifies the minimum size TIOA for a 3270 simulating
a 240 character scr~en sized 2260/2265, the n2 parameter specifies the
minimum for a 4S0 screen size simulation, and the n3 parameter specifies
the minimum for a 960 screen size simula.tion. The default values are
CMFT60L=(240,4S0,960).
If a value is supplied for any of the parameters
which is smaller than its corresponding default, the default value will
be taken.
SMI: This operand is used to specify the character that is to represent
the start of message indicator (SMI) in all messages to and from the
3270 operating in 2260 compatibility mode.
This character is generated
as a X'4A' and must be a valid alphameric displayable character.
If
36

the SMI character is contained in an output data stream, its display
is dependent upon the language feature specified for the 3270. Whatever
character is chosen, it remains the same for all transactions.
The
default is SMI=¢.
TAB:
TAE=YES must be specified if any of the 2260-compatible 3270
transactiens make use of the 2260 tab feature.
In this case, all colon
(:) characters are hbnored as 2260 tab characters when included in the
output data stream. The default is TAB=NO.
CCNVTAB:
This operand is used to specify the type of conversion to be
perfermed on the data received from the 7770 Audio Response Unit.
CCNVTAE=AEB specifies conversion from ABB' transmission code;
CCNVTAE=ABC specifies conversion from ABC transmission code. Either
er both may be specified with a single use of the CONVTAB operand.
If
this operand is used, ACCMETH=BTAM and BTAMDEV=7770 must also be
specified. The default is CONVTAB=(AEB,ABC).
XATTACH: This operand is used to generate linkage in the Terminal
Centrel program to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is
generated at the point prior to issuing a Task control ATTACH for a
transaction identification which is received in response to polling.
For further informatien concerning user exits, see the section "Creating
User Exits for CICS Management Programs" or the section "CICS/TCAM
Interface Considerations".
XOUTPUT:
This oFerand is used to generate linkage in the Terminal
Centrel program to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is
generated for output events at the Foint prier to translating or framing
output data.
For further information concerning user exits, see the
section "Creating User Exits for CICS Management Programs".
XINPU~:
This operand is used to generate linkage in the Terminal
Centrel Fregram to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is
generated at the point following completion of any input event.
For
further informaticn concerning user exits, see the section "Creating
User Exits for CICS Management Pregrams".

XTCMIN:
Applicable only to the crcs/os system, this operand is used
to generate linkage in the Terminal Contrel program TCAM module to a
user written exit routine.
The linkage is generated following
completion of any input event.
For further information concerning TCAM
user exits, see the section "CICS/TCAM Interface Considerations".
X~CMOUT:

Applicable only to the CICS/OS system, this ~perand is used
to generate linkage in the Terminal Contrel program TCAM module to a
user written exit routine.
The linkage is generated for output events
at the point prier to placing data on the output queue.
For further
informatien concerning TCAM user exits, see the section "crCS/TCAM
Interface Considerations".
TCM3270:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS system, this operand is
required if TCAM sUFPort is to include the 3270 Information Display
System.

TCMl170:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS system, this operand is
required if TCAM support is to include the 7770 Audio Response unit.
BMS: This operand is used to generate the Basic Mapping Support module
(DFEBMSMM) and tte necessary sUFFort code in the Terminal Control
program for Basic MaFPing Support (BMS). If BMS=YES is specified, a
corresponding entry (DFEEMSMM) must be included during preparation of
the Processing Program Table (PPT).
The default is BMS=NO.
SUFFIX: !his operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix for the Terminal Ccntrol program being assembled.
If this
operand is omitted, a suffix is not provided.
FILE CCN!FCI FECGEAM (FCP)
The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
File Crintrcl program is as follows:

*
*

DFESG PROGRAM=FCP,
CONSEC=YES,
FILSERV=(INDA,INIS,tAUPD,ISUPD,tAADD,ISADD,INDIRACC,
*
EXCTL,INSEG,OUTSEG,tABLKNG,VLR,HEXAD,DECAD,ACTAD, *
IVBR,LOCATE,IBROWSE,DBROWSE) ,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYFREQ=symbolic name,
XOU!PUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
*
XINPUTC=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

*
*
*
*
*

Unless otherwise indicated, the omission of an operand results in
the corresponding functicn not being included.
PROGEAM:
The PROGEAM=FCP operand indicates that the File Control
Frogram is to be generated.
CCNSEC:
This operand is effective only in the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system;
it causes logic to be generated in File Ccntrol that limits the· number
cf consecutive I/O events initiated by File Control that can occur on
tehalf of a given task.
When the limit (contained in the CSA at
CSAKCCDL) is reached, the task is rolled out by Task Control. This
facility helps protect CICS from being "seized" by a single task.
This
consectuive dispatch limit is specified in the System Initializetion
Table.
FILSERV: This operand is used to specify which of the file services
are to te generated into the File Control program. The applicable
keyword parameters are as follows:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

I NtA
INIS
DAUPD
I SUPD
tAADD
ISADD
INDIRACC
EXCTL

Input DAM
Input ISAM
Update DAM
Update ISAM
Add DAM
Add ISAM
Indirect accessing
Exclusive contrcl (requires Task Control enqueue
feature)

9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.

INSEG
OUTSEG
DABLKNG
VLR
HEXAD
DECAD
ACTAD
IVBR
LOCATE
IBBOWSE
DBFOWSE

Input segmenting
Output segmenting
Direct access blocking
Variable length-records
Hexadecimal relative track addressing (DAM)
Zened decimal relative track addressing (DAM)
Actual track addressing (DAM)
ISAM variable-length records (CICS/DOS only)
Dynamic open/clese/locate
ISAM sequential record retrieval
DAM sequential record retrieval

Any number of these keyword parameters can be included in the FILSERV
operand or CSMT File Service functions.
]Q1~§:

Use of the file browse option under CICS/OS reguires that the
user create the CVT macro and place it in SYS1.MACLIB.
For
guidance in creating the CVT macro instruction, see the CICS/OS
O~erations Guide.
LOCATE must be specified when DFHOCP is generated.
LOCATE must be specified if the Master Terrrinal facility is used
tc access data base.

SUFFIX:
This operand is used to provide a two-character alphameric
suffix (other than 'DY' which is reserved) for the File Control program
being assembled.
If this operand is omitted, a suffix is not provided.
XTYPREQ: This operand is used to generate linkage in the File control
program to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is provided prior
to determining what type of request for file services was issued.
For
further informatien concerning user exits, see the section "Creating
User Exits for CICS Management Programs".
XOUTPUT:
This oFerand is used to generate linkage in the File Control
Frogram to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is provided prior
to writing data in response to an output request. For further
informatien concerning user exits, see the section "Creating User Exits
for CICS Management Programs".
XINPUT:
This operand is used to generate linkage in the File Centrol
program tc a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is provided after
the File Control Table (FCT) is searched in response to an input
request.
For further information concerning user exits, see the section
"Creating User Exits for crcs Management Programs".
XINPUTC: This operand is used to generate linkage in the File Control
prcgram to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is provided upon
completion of an input event but prior to deblocking requested input
records.
For further information concerning user exits, see the section
"Creating User Exits for CICS Management Programs".
DUMMY:
The DUMMY=YES operand is used to specify that a dummy File
Centrel Frogram is to be generated.
If this operand is used, a 'DY'
suffix is automatically generated for the dummy program; any use of
the SUFFIX oFerand is ignored.

This operand is used in lieu of the DFESG PROGRAM=CSD macro
instruction to selectively generate a dummy File Control program.
Any
ether operands which may have been included in the DFHSG PROGRAM=FCP
macro instruction are ignored.
~RANSIENT

tATA CONTRCL PBCGRAM

(~DP)

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Transient Data Centrel fregram is as follows:
DFHSG PROGRAM=TDP,
INTRA=YES,TRANSINTT,
EXTBA=(ACQUISITION,DISPOSI~ION)

SUFFIX=program suffix,
DEVICE=2311,2314,3330,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XOU!PUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbelic name,
DUMMY=YES
Unless otherwise in1icated, the omission of an operand results in
the corresponding functien not being included.
PROGRAM: ~he PROGRAM=TDP operand indicates that the Transient Data
Centrel fregram is to be generated.
INTRA:
!he INTRA=YES operand specifies that intrapartition data sets
are to be used.
The INTRA=TRANSINIT operand is used to specify that
intrapartition data sets are to be used and that the automatic task
initiation feature is also to be included.
For further information
concerning intrafartition data sets, refer to Transient Data Services
section of the ~1~2 !EElj£~1iQn RIQ9~~ID~~~§ B§!§I§n£§ ~~nY~l SH20-1041.
EX~RA:
This operand specifies that extrapartition data sets are to be
used.
EXTRA=ACQUISITION indicates input from an extrapartion data set.
EXTRA=DISPOSITION indicates output to an extrapartition data set.
One
or both of these parameters can be included in this operand.
For
further informatien concerning extrapartition data sets, refer to
Transient Data Services section of the fl~~ AEE!ic~1ion RIQg~~~~±§
~§l~£§n£§ ~~nYsl SH20-1041.

SU~FIX:
This operand is used to provide a two-character suffix (other
than 'DY' which is reserved) for the Transient Data Control program
being assembled.
If this operand omitted, a suffix is not provided.

DEVICE:
Applicable only to the CIC5/DOS systems, this operand is used
to specify the type of device on which the intrapartition data set
resides. The default is DEVICE=2311.
XTYPREQ: This operand is used to generate linkage in the Transient
Data Centrel pregram to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is
provided prior to determining what type of request for Transient Data
services was issued.
For further information cencerning user exits,
see the section "Creating User Exits for CICS Management Programs".
XOUTPU!:
This oferand is used to generate linkage in the Transient
Data Contrel pre gram to a user-written exit routine.
The lir.kage is
40

*
*
*

**
*
*
*

provided after locating the appropriate entry in the Destination Control
Table (DCT) but prior to writing data in response to an output request.
For further information concerning user exits, see the section "Creating
User Exits for CICS Management Programs".
XINPUT:
This operand is used to generate linkage in the Transient Data
Ccntrol program to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is provided
after acquiring data in response to an input request.
For further
informaticn concerning user exits, see the section "Creating User Exits
for CICS Management Programs".
DUMMY:
The DUMMY=YES operand is used to specify that a dummy Transient
Data Contrcl program is to be generated.
If this operand is used, a
'DY' suffix is automatically generated for the dummy program; any use
of the SUFFIX operand is ignored.
This operand is used in lieu of the DFESG PROGRAM=CSD macro
instruction to selectively generate a dummy Transient Data Control

"--

40.1

program.
Any other operands which may have been included in the DFHSG
PROGRAM=TDP macro instruction are ignored.
TEMPORARY STORAGE CONTROL PROGRAM (TSP)
The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Temporary Storage Centrol program is as follows:
DFHSG PROGRAM=TSP,
DEVICE=2311,2314,3330,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
VIRTUAL=VIRTUAL,REAL,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XOUTPUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

**
*

*
*

Unless otherwise indicated, the omission of an operand results in
the corresponding function not being included.
PROGRAM:
The PROGRAM=TSP operand indicates that the Temporary Storage
Control program is to be generated.
DEVICE:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used
to specify the type of device on which the temporary storage data set
resides.
This operand is required in the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system; it
can be omitted in the CICS/DOS-STANDARD system if the temporary storage
data set resides in main storage. The default is DEVICE=2311.
SUFFIX:
This operand is used to provide a two-character suffix (other
than 'NO' or 'DY' which are reserved) for the Temporary Storage program
being assembled.
If this operand is omitted, a suffix is not provided.
VIRTUAL:
This operand specifies whether Temporary Storage is to be
run in a real or virtual environment.
Specification of VIRTUAL for
this operand generates a Temporary Storage program capable of running
in a V=V or V=R environment, but consumes a greater amount of address
space.
specifying REAL generates a Temporary Storage program capable
of running only in a V=R environment.

B2i§:

This operand is valid only for CICS/OS STANDARD Version 2.3 with
the fix for APAR No. P10780 applied or for later releases.

XTYPREQ:
This operand is used to generate linkage in the Temporary
Storage Control program to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage
is provided prior to determining what type of request for Temporary
Storage services was issued.
For further information concerning user
exits, see the section "Creating User Exits for CICS Management
Programs".
XOUTPUT:
This operand is used to generate linkage in the Temporary
Storage Control program to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage
is provided prior to writing data in response to an output request.
For further information concerning user exits, see the section "Creating
User Exits for CICS Management Programs".

XINPUT:
This operand is used to generate linkage in the Temporary
storage Control program to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage
is provided prior to returning control to the application program after
servicing an input request.
For further information concerning user
exits, see the section "Creating User Exits for CICS Management
Programs" •
DUMMY:
The DUMMY=YES operand is used to specify that a dummy Temporary
storage program is to be generated.
If this operand is uSEd, a 'DY'
suffix is automatically generated for the dummy program; any use of
the SUFFIX operand is ignored.
This operand is used in lieu of the DFHSG PROGRAM=CSD macro
instruction to selectively generate a dummy Temporary Storage Control
program.
Any other operands which may have been included in the DFHSG
PROGRAM=TSP macro instruction are ignored.

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Common System Area is as follows:
DFHSG PROGRAM=CSA,
WRKAREA=number,
SUFFIX=program suffix

In addition to generating the CSA, the execution of this macro
instruction causes the assembly of Terminal Control's TCA, Task
Control's TCA, and, in the CICS/DOS systems, a write to Operator (WTO)
routine.
In the ClCS/OS system, a dummy CSA is also generated.
PROGRAM:
The PROGRAM=CSA operand indicates that the Common System Area
is to be generated.
WRKAREA:
This operand is used to specify the number of bytes to be
allocated to the common work area portion of the CSA.
This area is
initially set to binary zeros and is available to all programs. If
the WRKAREA operand is omitted, the size of the work area defaults to
512.
The maximum size for the work area is 3584 bytes.
SUFFIX: This operand is used to provide a two-character suffix for
the CSA being generated.
If this operand is omitted, a suffix is not
provided.

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Master Terminal program is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=MTP,
TLT=YES,NO
PROGRAM: The PROGRAM=MTP operand indicates that the Master Terminal
program is to be generated.
TLT:
The TLT=NO operand indicates that the user does not desire to
use the Master Terminal program to load Terminal List Tables during
42

real-time execution of ClCS.
TL1=YES indicates that the Master Terminal
~rogram will be used to lead a Terminal List Table to change the status
of a class of terminals and/or ensure that a supervisory terminal
operator can change the status of only those terminals under his
centrol. The default is TLT=YES.
]Q!~:

If the Master Terminal facility is used to access data base,
LOCATE must be specified on the FILSERV operand of the DFHSG
PBCGRAM=FCP macro instruction.

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Dynamic Open/Close program is:
DFHSG PBOGBAM=OCP
This macro instruction must be issued if the Dynamic Open/Close program
is to be used either through the Master Terminal facility or in response
to a DFHOC request in an application program.
Whenever this program
is used, FCP must be generated with FILSERV=( ••• ,LOCATE).

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Graphic Attention prcgram is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=GAP
This macrc instruction is effective only in the CICS/OS-STANDARD system
and is used to generate sUFPort for the local 2260.

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
High-Level Language Support group is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=HLL,
LA NG= (COBOL, PL/I) ,
PL1=(O,F)

The su~port programs generated in response to this macro instruction
are as fellows:
1.
2.
3.

ClCS preprocessor program (DFHPRPR) - for either or both
languages
Entry Interface program (DFHPL1l) for PL/I F and/or for PL/I
optimizer (DFHPL10I)
.
PL/I Interface program (DFHSAP) for PL/I F and/or for PL/I
o~timizer (DFHPL10I)

PROGRAM:
Su~port

The PRCGRAM=HLL operand indicates that the High-Level Language
group is to te generated.

LANG:
This operand is used to identify the languages for which support
is to ce generated.
PL1:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS system, this operand is used to
identify the PL/I compilers for which sup~ort is to be generated.
The
default is PL1=F.
If both compilers are to be used, PL1=(O,F) must be
specified.
43

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Terminal Dependent Centrel program is:
DFHSG

~ROGRAM=DDM

This macre instructien must be issued when using 1030 terminals.

The system generation macro instruction necessary to generate the
Asynchronous Transaction processing group is:
DFHSG PROGRAM=ATP,
INBUFF=number,
OUTBUFF=number

*
*

The fellowing programs are generated in response to this macro
instruction:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Asynchronous Transaction
Asynchronous Transaction
(BFHRD1 and DFHRD2)
Asynchronous Transaction
(DFHWT1and DFHWT2)
Asynchronous Queue Purge

Control program (DFHATP)
Input processing programs
Output Processing programs
program (DFHAQP)

Note that this maero instruction is effective only if ATP=YES was
included in the BFHSG TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction.
PROGRAM:
The PRCGRAM=ATP operand indicates that the Asynchronous
Transaction Processing group is to be generated.
INBUFF:
This operand is used to specify the size (in bytes) of the
input tuffer used by the Asynchronous Transaction Input processing
programs.
The value specified should not exceed full track capacity
for the device being used, or, in the case of CICS/OS, should not exceed
the block size specified on the intra partition data set data definition
(DD) card at start-up time.
OUTBUFF: This operand is used to specify the size (in bytes) of the
output tuffer used by the Asynchronous Transaction Contrel program.
The value specified should not exceed full track capacity for the device
being used, or, in the case of CICS/OS, should not exceed the block
size specified on the intrapartition data set data definition (DD) card
at startup time.

Terminating JCL for stage II is produced in response to the
DFHSG TYPE=FINAL
macro instruction. This macro instruction is effective only in the
CICS/DOS systems and must be the last statement of the CICS/DOS system
generation input stream preceding the Assembler END card.

To provide CICS/OS application programs optional access to the Data
Language/I (DL/I) facility of the IBM Information Management System
(IMS/360), the following steps are necessary:
1.

Generate an IMS/360 Version 2 Data Base System capable of
executing batch IMS/360 programs.
This system must be
Modification Level 2 or later.

Indicate during generation of CICS that application programs
can access DL/I.
This is done by coding
DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL,DL1=YES

Generate a System Initialization Table (SIT) which includes
parameters for the CICS-DL/I interface.
Applicable parameters
are DL1, PSB, BUFPL, PSBPL and DMBPL; these parameters may be
included or overridden at execution time.

Include the following CICS options during generation of CICS:
a.
b.
c.

Task Control ENQUEUE/DEQUEUE
File Control LOCATE
Interval Control program (ICP)

Generate IMS/360 Control Blocks as detailed below.

DEFINING PSB'S AND PCB'S
The CICS-DL/I interface has the following requirements for Program
specification Block (PSB) generation:
1.

A special initialization PSB is used by CICS-DL/I Initialization
to bring the proper DL/I modules into storage.
This PSB, called
the "initialization" PSB is not used by any transaction.
Program
Communication Blocks (PCB's) are defined within the PSB to
indicate what type of CALL's and data bases DL/I will be called
upon to service.
The following rules apply.
a.

Define one data base PCB (TYPE=DB) for each of the following
access methods to be used: HSAM, HDAM.

Define two data base PCB's for the same data base for each
of the following access methods to be used:
HISAM, HIDAM.
These PCB's will be referred to as a PCB pair. Their
specification causes BISAM rather than QISAM to be used.

Within each PCB, define PROCOPT (processing options) to
include all processing options to be performed against all
the data bases using that access method.
That is, if one
HDAM data base is to be accessed via PROCOPT=GE and another
via PROCOPT=GRP, the combined PROCOPT to be specified is
PROCOPT=G RPE.

For each PCB being defined, provide one SENSEG statement.
For the PCB pairs required for HISAM or HIDAM (see above),
the SENSEG statements must refer to the same segment type.
If the use of QISAM is desired in addition to BISAM, provide
an additional SENSEG statement in one PCB of the PCB pair.

In the PCB statement, specify KEYLEN to be the length of
the key field defined in the SENSEG statement in (d) above.

The last statement preceding the END statement in the
assembly should be written:
PSBGEN

LANG=ASSEM,PSBNAME=psbname

If DL1=YES is specified during CICS System Initialization,
the PSB used is named CICS PSB unless overriden in the System
Initialization Table or by the execution time PSB parameter.
2.

If an application programmer does not uame a PSB in the DL/I
CALL, the PSB used has the name of the program whose name is in
the Program Control Table (PCT) entry for this transaction.
Therefore, for all transactions with DL/I CALL's where the PSB
name is not specified, there must be a PSB generated with the
same name as the program name in the PCT entry for the
transaction.
For PL/I programs, specify that the PSB is for
PL/I.

If an application programmer names a PSB in the DL/I CALL, there
must be a PSB generated with the name used in that CALL.
For
PL/I programs, specify that the PSB is for PL/I.

The CICS-DL/I Interface uses the pre-built blocks feature of DL/I.
After all Program Specification Blocks (PSB's) and Data Base
Descriptions (DBD's) have been generated, the user must then generate
Application Control Blocks (ACB's) in the IMS/360 ACB Library for all
PSB's to be used. The instructions for this generation are included
in the l11~l'§Q utilitie§ !1an£~l.
DEFINING PSB AND DMB DIRECTORIES DURING CICS GENERATION
A PSB Directory (PDIR) list and DMB Directory (DDIR) list must be
built for the CICS-DL/I Interface.
Each of these lists is built by a
separate assembly and link edit.
Both lists are then included in the
link-edit of DFHDLQ as described in the CICS/OS Operations Guide.

Each PSB excluding the initialization PSB, to be used by transactions
is defined via the statement:
label

DFHDLPSB PSB=psbname

The last statement in the assembly preceding the END statement is:
label

DPHDLPSB TYPE=FINAL

The NAME card for the Linkage Editor is written:
NAME DFHDLPSB (R)

Each Data Base Description (DBD)
the statement:
label

used by the system is defined via

DPHDLDBD (INDEX,) DBD=dbdname

where the positional operand, INDEX, indicates that this is a DFHDLDBD
statement for the INDEX DBD of a HIDAM data base.

The last statement in the assembly precEding the END statement is:
(label)

DFHDLDBD TYPE=FINAL

The NAME card for the Linkage Editor is written:
NAME DFHDLDBD(R)

CICS is dependent upon user-created system tables which describe
the user's data base/data communications environment and the treatment
the user wishes given to the elements of that environment. contained
in the system tables is information regarding the user's terminals,
data sets (permanent and temporary), programs, and transactions.
These
tables are created independently of system generation.
However, they
are required for the system to be operational.
CICS is dynamically configured under user control during system
initialization.
The desired system tables are selected by the user,
based on a standard naming and suffixing convention.
Each of the tables
is created separately and may be recreated at any time prior to system
initialization.
More than one system table of each type can be
maintained at the same time.
This allows the user to maintain special
tables for testing in addition to the operational tables.
The system tables are prepared (generated) by assembling the
appropriate macro instruction and its associated operands using the
Assembler program.
The output of each assembly contains the required
Linkage Editor control cards.
The tables are named in the following
manner:

System Initialization Table
Terminal Control Table
File Control Table
Destination Control Table
Program Control Table
Processing Program Table

DFHSITxx
DFHTCTxx
DFHFCTxx
DFHDCTxx
DFHPCTxx
DFHPPTxx

The first six positions are standard for each of the tables.
The
last two positions (xx) may be specified by the user to allow several
versions of a table to be maintained; any two characters (other than
'NO') are valid.
The suffix which the user assigns to a table is used
to determine which version of that table is to be loaded into the system
during system initialization.
When generating system tables, the assembly of each table must be
terminated by an Assembler END statement which includes a mandatory
label (symbol) of the form DFHxxxBA, where xxx is the three-character
table designation (for example, END DFHFCTBA terminates the assembly
of the File Control Table).
See the appropriate CICS Operations Guide for details concerning
the link editing of the tables.
A detailed description follows of what is required to complete the
control cards or macro instructions for each of the system tables.

The initialization of CICS is both flexible and dynamic.
The
flexibility at the time of initialization is provided by the System
Initialization Table (base name: DFHSIT).
The contents of the DFHSIT
macro which is assembled as a table supplies the System Initialization
program with the information to initialize the system to meet the user's
unique environment.
During the initialization process, the user is

given an opportunity to dynamically change some of the parameters, as
required.
The information contained in DFHSIT may be grouped into three
catagories for purposes of discussion:
1.

2.
3.

Information used to initialize and control system functions (for
example, storage cushion size, system partition/region exit time
interval, etc.).
Module suffixes used to load the user-specified version of the
CICS control modules and tables (for example, DFHPCTxx, DFHFCPxx,
etc.) •
Special information used to control the initialization process.

The user also has the flexibility of generating several System
Initialization Tables and selecting the appropriate one at the time of
initialization.
The following operands can be included in the DFHSIT macro
instruction:
DFHSIT TYPE=CSECT,DSECT,
SUFFIX=xx,
TRT=decimal value,
SCS=decimal value,
SP1=decimal value,
DVT=2311,2314,3330,
MSGLVL=O,l,
TSBLK=decimal value,
ICV=decimal value,
ICVS=decimal value,
ICVR=decimal value,
CDL=decimal value,
MXT=decimal value,
TCT=xx,
PPT=xx,
PCT=xx,
FCT=xx,NO,
DCT=xx,NO,
CSA=xx,
KCP=xx,
SCP=xx,
PCP=xx,
DCP=xx,NO,
ICP=xx,NO,
TCP=xx,
FCP=xx,
TDP=xx,
TRP=xx,
PIP=xx,NO,
TSP=xx,NO,
OSCOR=decimal value,
PL1=YES,NO,
DL1=YES,NO,
PSB=name,
PSBPL=number,
DMBPL=number,
BUFPL=number,
ATP=YES,NO,
ATPMT=number,
ATPMB=number,
SIMODS=(A2,Bl,C1,C2,C3,Dl,El)
(A2,Bl,Cl,Dl,E1)

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*

*
**
**
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
*

."---...

TYPE:
Specifies whether a CSECT or DSECT of the System Initialization
Table is to be generated.
If alternate or additional System
Initialization modules are coded by the user, a DSECT may be required
to provide symbolic addressability to values in the table.
The default
is TYPE=CSECT.
SUFFIX:
Specifies a two-character alphameric suffix for the System
Initialization Table being assembled. This suffix, if specified, is
appended to the standard module name (DFHSIT) and is used to name the
module on the linkage editor output library.
If this operand is
omitted, a suffix is not provided.
TRT: Specifies the number of entries that are to be provided in the
CICS Trace Table. If the user has not generated the Trace facility,
this operand should be ignored or set to O.
(See the discussion of
DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL.) If Trace has been generated and this parameter is
0, a dummy Trace facility is loaded (DFHTRPDY).
The default is TRT=O.
SCS:
Specifies the number of bytes (minimum 20) which are to be
reserved for the storage cushion.
The default is SCS=500.
SP1:
Specifies the number of bytes to be reserved for subpool 1 storage
in the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system. The default is SP1=0.
To arrive at the
size required, refer to "Storage Estimates and Considerations" in the
CICS General Information Manual (GH20-1028).
DVT:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand specifies
the device type on which the CICS/DOS system data sets reside.
These
data sets include the following:
1.
2.

CICS Real-Time Relocatable Program Library
CICS Real-Time Pre-Located Program Library (CrCS/DOS-ENTRY system
only)
CICS Transaction Rollout Data Set (CICS/DOS-ENTRY system only)

Since no default is provided, 2311, 2314 or 3330 must be specified.
MSGLVL:
Specifies a message level of either 0 or 1 which controls the
generation of messages to the console during system initialization.
MSGLVL=O allows only critical I/O errors or interactive messages to
appear.
MSGLVL=1 allows all messages to be printed.
The default is
MSGLVL=1.
TSBLK:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand specifies
the maximum block size (as a decimal value) for records on the auxiliary
temporary storage data set. The default is TSBLK=3625.
rcv:
Specifies the system partition/region exit time interval in
milliseconds. The default is ICV=1000.
For further information
concerning exit time interval, see the section "System Administration".
rcvs:
Specifies the system stall time interval in milliseconds as a
decimal value.
The default is ICVS=20000. For further information
concerning stall time interval, see the section "System Administration".

ICVR:
Specifies the runaway task time interval in milliseconds as a
decimal value.
The default is ICVR=5000.
If ICVR=OOOO, runaway task
control is suspended for the duration of the current execution of CICS.
For further information concerning runaway task time, see the section
"System Administration".
CDL:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system, this operand
specifies the consecutive dispatch limit as a decimal value.
The
default is CDL=5.
MXT:
This operand is used to specify the maximum number of tasks (both
synchronous and asynchronous tasks in the case of the CICS/DOS-STANDARD
and CICS/OS-STANDARD systems) that can be initiated concurrently within
CICS.
When the number of active tasks reaches this level, no new tasks
are initiated by the Terminal Control program.
The default is MXT=5.
TCT ••• TSP: Each of the operands contained in Figure 1 allows the user
to specify a two-character suffix which is appended to the standard
name before loading the CICS nucleus. For example, KCP=B1 causes the
DFHKCPB1 Task Control module to be included in the CICS nucleus.
In
each case, the default suffix is blank •
.§1ANQARQ NAME!
TCT=xx
PPT=xx
PCT=xx
FCT=xx,NO
DCT=xx,NO
CSA=xx
KCP=xx
SCP=xx
PCP=xx
DCP=xx,NO
ICP=xx,NO
TCP=xx
FCP=xx
TDP=xx
TRP=xx
PIP=xx,NO
TSP=xx,NO

M2i§:

DFHTCT
DFHPPT
DFHPCT
DFHFCT
DFHDCT
DFHCSA
DFHKCP
DFHSCP
DFHP,CP
DFHDCP
DFHICP
DFHTCP
DFHFCP
DFHTDP
DFHTRP
DFHPIP
DFHTSP

Terminal Control Table
Processing Program Table
Program Control Table
File Control Table
Destination Control Table
Common System Area
Task Control Program
Storage Control Program
Program Control Program
Dump Control Program
Interval Control Program
Terminal Control Program
File Control Program
Transient Data Program
Trace Control Program
Program Interrupt Program
Temporary Storage Progra~

If NO is coded, a dummy module is loaded (except in the case
of PIP where the program interrupt facility is not provided
if NO is coded).
FCT=NO and DCT=NO cause a dummy FCP and
a dummy TDP to be loaded, respectively.
For CICS/OS, PIP
must be included in the CICS nucleus if the runaway task
control feature is to be supported.
Since CICS does not provide generatable options for DFHPIP
and DFHTRP, PIP=xx and TRP=xx are used, respectively, only
if the user wishes to provide his own version of these
programs, or if the user specified a suffix when generating
PIP, then that suffix should be used in the SIT.

Figure 1.

Resident program suffixes

OSCOR:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
specifies a one- to six-digit decimal value indicating the amount of
51

main storage to be provided from the CICS partition/region for the use
of the operating system during CICS execution.
The default is OSCOR=Oi
however, the minimum amount of main storage available to the operating
system is equal to the size of the system Initialization program
(DFHSIP) •
If the value specified is greater than the size of DFHSIP, the amount
of main storage provided for the use of the operating system is equal
to ~he si~e of DFHSIP plus the amount specified in excess of the size
of DFHSIP.
Note that this main storage is not available to the
operating system until DFHSIP transfers control to the Dummy CSA program
(DFHDCSA) •
The user should be aware that an incorrect OSCOR specification could
adversely affect system performance.
The value specified should
accurately reflect the amount of main storage required by the operating
system, depending upon the CICS configuration.
PL1:
The PL1=YES operand indicates that programs coded in PL/I are to
be processed.
The default is PL1=NO.
DL1:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand is
used to indicate whether or not Data Language/I (DL/I) data bases are
to be accessed during execution of CICS.
The default is DL1=NO.
PSB:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system and only if the
CICS-DL/I Interface is being generated, this operand is used to specify
the one- to eight-character name of the Program Specification Block
(PSB) used during IMS initialization. This PSB contains a Program
Communication Block (PCB) for each DL/I access method to be used (two
PCB's in the case of HISAM), and is uSEd to load all required DL/I
modules during initialization.
The default is PSB=CICSPSB.
PSBPL:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system and only if the
CICS-DL/I Interface is being generated, this operand is used to specify
the Program Specification Block (PSB) pool size in 1024-byte blocks
for CICS-DL/I Interface support.
The number of 1024-byte blocks
specified must be in the range 0-999.
This operand corresponds to the
PSB operand of the IMS/360 BUFPOOLS system generation macro instruction
and to the III parameter of the IMS/360 CTL or CTX parameter list for
online execution.
The default is PSBPL=4.
DMBPL:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system and only if the
CICS-DL/I Interface is being generated, this operand is used to specify
the Data Management Block (DMB) pool size in 1024-byte blocks for
CICS-DL/I Interface support.
The number of 1024-byte blocks specified
must be in the range 0-999.
This operand corresponds to the DMB operand
of the IMS/360 BUFPOOLS system generation macro instruction and to the
JJJ parameter of the IMS/360 CTL or CTX parameter list for online
execution.
The default is DMBPL=4.
BUFPL:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD-system and only if the
CICS-DL/I Interface is being generated, this operand is used to specify
the DL/I data base buffer pool size in 1024-byte blocks.
The number
of 1024-byte blocks specified must be in the range 0-999.
This operand
corresponds to the DBASE operand of the IMS/360 BUFPOOLS system
generation macro instruction and to the HHH parameter of the IMS/360
CTL or CTX parameter list for online execution.
The default is BUFPL=8.

ATP:
Applicable only to the CIC~/DOS-STANDARD and CICS/OS-STANDARD
systems, this operand is used to indicate whether or not the
Asynchronous Transaction processing facility (ATP) is to ce generated.
The default is A~F=NO.
ATFMT:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS-STANDARD and CICS/OS-STANDARD
systems, this operand is used to specify, as a decimal value, the
maximum number of asynchronous tasks that can be initiated concurrently
within CICS by the Asynchronous Transaction Processing centrol program
(DFHATP). When the number of active asynchronous tasks reaches this
level, nc new asynchronous tasks are initiated by DFHATP. The default
is A'IPMT=1.
ATPMB:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS-STANDARD and CICS/OS-STANDARD
systems, this operand is used to specify, as a decimal value, the
asynchronous task inhibitor value.
When the number of active tasks
(both synchronous and asynchronous) reaches this level, the Asynchronous
Transaction Processing control program (DFHATP) does not initiate any
new asynchronous tasks, even though the number of asynchronous tasks
currently active is less than the value specified in the ATPMT operand.
Thus, even though no asynchronous tasks are active, none are initiated
if the tctal of all other active tasks has reached the level specified
in this operand.
If this operand is omitted, the default value is
egual to one less than the value specified in the MXT operand.
SIMODS:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used
to change the last two characters of thQ phase names of the System
Initialization overlays and/or allow the addition of one user-written
overlay. The phase names of the System Initialization overlays are
located in the DOS Core Image Library and must be seven characters in
length; the first five characters are DFHSI and the last two characters
are specified through use of this operand.
The default is
SIMODS=(A2,B1,C1,C2,C3,D1,E1) for the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system and
SIMODS={A2,B1,C1,D1,E1) for the CICS/DOS-STANDARD system.
The order in which the overlays are executed is determined by the
sequence of the parameters of the SIMODS specification. For example,
in response to the SIMODS=(AS,BS,CS,DS,ES) specification, the overlays
are loaded in the order DFHSIAS, DFHSIBS, DFHSICS, DFHSIDS, DFHSIES.
In response to the SIMODS=(AS,BS,CS,DS,US,ES) specification, the
overlays are loaded in the order DFHSIAS, DFHSIBS, DFHSICS, DFHSIDS,
DFHSIUS, DFHSIES.
If an additional user-written overlay is to be provided, the SIMODS
specification for the CICS/DOS-ENTRY and CICS/DOS-STANDARD systems
would contain eight parameters and six parameters, respectively.
BQ!~:

The interface to user-written overlays is subject to change with
later releases of CICS programs.

The Terminal Control Table provides a means whereby the user of CICS
can specify the terminal environment in which the system will operate.
'Ihe Terminal Control Table contains the data needed by the control
system to perform its ter«inal management functions.
The user can
create more than one Terminal control Table to describe both his
operational and his terminal testing environment.
The Terminal Control Table macro instruction (DFHTCT) is used to
specify the user's terminal environment which can include
telecommunication devices, sequential processing devices, and graphic
devices. The following operands can be included in the DFHTCT macro
instruction:
53

DFHTCT TYFE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYSnnn,
DEVICE=1030,1050,1130,1403,1404,1442,1443,1445,
2020,2260,L2260,2265,2311,2314,2501,2520,
2540,2740,2740/2760,2741C,2741E,2770,2780,
·2980 , 327 5 , 3 277 , L3 277 , 32 84 , L 3 284 , 328 6 , L3286 ,
3330,3735,7770,BSCMDMPT,BSCMDPPT,BSCMDSi,DASD,
DISK,SYS/3,SYS/7,S360,TAPE,TW33,TW35,TCAM,
DSCNAME=name,
EREOPT=E,R,W,C,N,RW,T,
FEATURE=(STC,CHK,BSC,KBL,OIU,SIX,SXW,SIW,RIX,
RXW,RIW,MAS,SLV,APL),
LINELST= (nnn1, ••• ,nnn31) ,
SWITCH=YES,NO,
CU=2701,2702,2703,2848,3272,7770,
CCNFIG=FPT,MFT,
BSCODE=EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE,
MODELS'!= (n 1, ••• , n 31) ,
RETRY=number,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

~ERMTS'I=YES,NO,

LERBADR=symbclic address,
DDNAME=name,
MACRF=(R,W),
FLNNAME=name,
NCP=number,
MODE=(,CNTRL,A or E,A or B),
BLKSIZE=length,
RECFM=F,V,U,
SYNAD=symbolic name,
OP'ICD=~,WU,WC,WUC,

AFFENDG=appendage suffix

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

symbol DFHTCT TYFE=lINE,
ACCMETH=SAM,ESAM,BTAM,EGAM,'ICAM,SEQUENTIAL,GRAPHIC,
TELECOMMUNICATION,
*
TRMTYPE=1030,1050,1053,1130,2020,2260,L2260,2265,
2740,2740/2760,2741C,2741E,2770,2780,2980,
*
3275,3277,L3277,3284,L3284,3286,L3286,3735,7770,
SYS/3,SYS/7,S360,CRLP,DASD,TAPE,TWX,U/R,
CLASS=(CONV,EATCH,VIDEO,HARDCOPY,BISYNC,AUDIO),
DSCNAME=name,
ISADSCN=name,
*
OSADSCN=name,
INAREAl=length,
*
TRMMODL=number or character,
BTAMRLN=number,
LISTADR=(name,WRAP),
FEATURE=(AUTCANSR,AUTOCALL,AUTOPOLL,CHECKING,
*
SCCNTROL,BUFFRECV,KBRDLOCK),
NPDELAY=number,
FOCLADR=symbclic address,
ANSWRBK=AUTOMATIC,TERMINAL,NULL,EXIDVER,
LINS'IA'I='OUT OF SERVICE',
BSCODE=EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE,
CONVTAE=EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE,TEXTMODE,AEB,ABC,
*
RDYMSG=symtclic address,
ERRMSG=symbolic address,
GENPOLL=YES,
FCCLCNT=number,
*
TCTUAL=number,
OUTQ=symbolic name,
*
FCCL=YES,
54

QUEUEID=hexadecimal number

symbol DPHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
*
TRMIDNT=name,
*
TRMPRTY=number,
*
TRMMODL=number,character,
*
TRMTYPE=1030,1050,1053,1130,2020,2260,L2260,2265,
*
2740,2740/2760,2741C,2741E,2770,2780,2980,
*
3275,3277,L3277,3284,L3284,3286,L3286,3735,7770, *
SYS/3,SYS/7,S360,CRLP,DASD,TAPE,TWX,U/R,
*
CLASS= (CONV, BATCH, VIDEO, HARDCOPY, BISYNC, AUDIO) ,
*
LVUNIT=number,
*
LASTTRM=LINE,GACB,POOL,
*
TRMADDR=address,name,
*
TRMSTAT=(TRANSACTION,TRANSCEIVE,RECEIVE,'OUT OP SERVICE',*
INPUT) ,
*
COMPAT=NO, (number of characters, number of lines,
*
device type, model number),
*
FEATURE=(PTRADAPT,SELECTPEN,AUDALARM,COPY,BUFEXP,
*
DCKYBD,UCTRAN),
*
POLLPOS=number,
*
TRANSID=name,
*
STN2980=number,
*
TAB2980=number,
*
TIOAL=number,
*
TCTUAL=number
symbol DPHTCT TYPE=7770MSG,
MESSAGE='message'

DPHTCT TYPE=FINAL
ESTABLISH CONTROL SECTION FOR TERMINAL CONTROL TABLE
The area of main storage into which the Terminal Control Table is
assembled is established in response to the
DFHTCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

macro instruction, which must precede all other DFHTCT macro
instructions in a Terminal Control Table assembly.
SUFPIX:
This operand specifies a two-character alphameric suffix for
the Terminal Control Table being assembled.
This suffix, if specified,
is appended to the standard module name (DPHTCT) and is used to name
the module on the linkage editor output library. If this operand is
omitted, a suffix is not provided.

SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL INFORMATION
The user must specify data set control information through use of
the
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI
macro instruction, which causes the control system to generate the
appropriate data set control information.
DTF information is generated
in the CICS/DOS systems; DCB information is generated in the CICS/OS
system.
This macro instruction can include the following operands:
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYSnnn,
DEVICE=1030,1050,1130,1403,1404,1442,1443,1445,
2020,2260,L2260,2265,2311,2314,2501,2520,
2540,2740,2140/2760,2741C,2741E,2110,2780,
2980,3215,3277,L3217,3284,L3284,3286,L3286,
3330,3735,1170,BSCMDMPT,BSCMDPPT,BSCMDSW,DASD,
DISK,SYS/3,SYS/1,S360,TAPE~TW33,TW35,TCAM,

DSCNAME=name,
ERROPT=E,R,W,C,N,RW,T,
FEATURE=(STC,CHK,TRC,BSC,KBL,OIU,SIX,SXW,SIW,RIX,
RXW,RIW,MAS,SLV,APL),
LI NELST= (nnn 1, ••• , nnn31) ,
SWITCH=YES,NO,
CU=2701,2102,2103,2848,3272,1110,
CONFIG=PPT,MPT,
BSCODE=EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE,
MOD EL S T= (n 1 , ••• , n 3 1) ,
RETRY=number,
TERMTST=YES,NO,
LERBADR=symbolic address,
DDNAME=name,
MACRF= (R, W) ,
FLNNAME=name,
NCP=number,
MODE= (,CNTRL,A or BrA or B),
BLKSIZE=length,
RECFM=F,V,U,
SYNAD=symbolic name,
OPTCD=W,WU,WC,WUC,
APPENDG=appendage suffix
Two DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instructions must be coded for each
sequential terminal.
One macro instruction is for the sequential input
data set and the other macro instruction is for the sequential output
data set. This input/output data set combination simulates the input
and output functions of a terminal. One DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro
instruction must be coded for this I/O combination.
One DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction must be coded for each BTAM
line group, where a line group is a group of communication lines that
meet the following operational requirements:
1.

All lines in the group are attached to the channel through the
same type of telecommunications control unit; for example, a
2101.
(This is true only for the CICS/DOS systems.)
The line connection between the control unit and the remote
devices is of the same type; for example, a switched network.
All devices within the line group have the same line features
and operating characteristics; for example, autopoll.

*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*

DEVADDR:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand
specifies the symbolic unit address (sequential device) used for
sequential terminal data sets.
DEVICE:
Specifies the valid device types for this Terminal Control
Table.
12260 signifies "lccal video attachment".
2260 and 2265 signify
"remote video attachment".
L3277, L3284, and L3286 signify "local 3270
attachment".
3275, 3277, 3284, and 3286 signify Uremote 3270
attachment".
BSCMDPPT signifies "mixed binary synchronous
point-to-point devices".
BSCMDSW signifies "mixed binary synchronous
switched devices".
ESCMDMPT signifies "mixed binary synchronous
multipoint devices u •
For direct access devices, specify either the
device type or the generic parameter DASD or DISK.
The TAPE specification defines the tape as work files for both the
input and the output data set.
Note that if an input tape with an
expired label is entered, the header may be re-written causing the
first"data record(s) to be destroyed.
Support for a 1053 printer is included when 2260, L2260, or 2265 is
specified.
In the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand automatically
generates the MACRF operand.
A 2740 Communication Terminal with 2760 Optical Image unit can be
specified as either a 2740 or 2740/2760.
DEVICE=TCAM (applicable only to CICS/OS) causes CICS to generate
the appropriate data set control infcrmation to handle the TCAM input
or output process queue.
]Q1~~

In the generation of a TCAM only the system, the following
operands do not apply to TCP and TCT:
ANSWRBK, BTAMDEV, BSCODE,
CCNVTAB, FEATURE, INITRL, LOCKF, UCTRAN=ASCII, WRAPLST, XINPUT,
XOUTPUT.

DSCNAME:
Specifies the symbclic data set control name associated with
the data set contrcl infcrmation.
The DSCNAME for the sequential input data set must be the same name
as that specified in the ISArSCN=name operand of the DFH!CT TYPE=LINE
macro instruction.
The DSCNAME for the sequential output data set must
be the same name as that specified in the OSADSCN=name operand of the
DFH!C! TYPE=LINE macro instruction.
The DSCNAME for ETAM data sets must be the same name as that
specified in the DSCNAME=name operand of the DFH!CT TYPE=LINE macro
instruction.
ERROPT:

Specifies the error recovery, error recording, and online test
tc be provided for the line group.
The applicable keyword
parameters are:

op~ions

E, specifies that the basic error recovery procedures are to be
provided for the line group.
If EEROPT is omitted, ERROPT=E is
assumed.
R, specifies that text-read errors are to be retried in addition
to the casic error recovery.procedures.
This option is valid
only for the following terminals:
1050 terminals (valid for
the card reader and paper tape reader only if the line correction
57

6.
7.

]Q1~:

feature is installe~, 2740 terminals with the checking feature,
and 2260 terminals.
W, specifies that text-write errors are to be retried in addition
to the basic error recovery procedures. This option is valid
fer all start-stop terminals. It is invalid for binary
synchronous terminals. It results in an additional copy of the
message for each retry (except for the 2260 with the line address
feature, and the 1050 card punch and paper tape punch with the
line correcticn feature).
This parameter is ignored for binary
synchronous terminals.
C, specifies that threshold errer counts and cumulative error
counts are to be maintained in the line error recording block
(LERB) for the line for data check, intervention required, and
nentext timeout errors.
This parameter is applicable only to
the CICS/OS-STANDARD system; however, for the CICS/DOS systems,
the LERB support is generated if the LERBADR parameter is
specified.
N, specifies that no error recovery procedures are to be provided
for the line group.
This parameter and E,R,W, and C are mutually
exclusive. This parameter is invalid for binary synchronous
stations; if coded, it is ignored.
BW, specifies that error recovery is to be performed with "read
text retry" and "write text retry".
T, specifies that the online test facility is to be used for
the line group.
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system,
this parameter is valid for all IBM terminals with or without
error recovery capability.
For CICS/OS, EROPT is also a valid spelling of this operand.
Commas must not be coded in this parameter. For example,
EFBOP'I=RECiT.

Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand
FEATURE:
specifies device-dependent machine special features and programming
special features. The applicable keyword parameters are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

STC, specifies that the 2740 or System/7 is equipped with the
statien centrcl feature.
CHK, specifies that the 2740 is equipped with checking feature
(CHK must always be specified for the System/1.)
BSC, must be coded when the DEVICE operand specifies a binary
synchronous device.
KEL, specifies that the 2848 control unit is equipped with the
data entry feature.
The Lock optypes are rejected as undefined
if this parameter is not used.
OIU, specifies that a 2760 Optical Image unit is attached to a
2740 with the checking feature and, optionally, the dial feature.
SIX, sxw, or SIW, used if ID verification for a calling operation
is to occur in a binary synchronous point-to-point dial system.
A more detailed expl&nation of these codes is given in the
publicaticn, DO~ ~~§i£ 1§1~£Q~~Yni£~1ion§ !££~§§ ~ethQg
(GC30-5001).
(See Note)
RIX, RXW, or RIW, used if ID verification for an answering
operation is to occur in a binary synchronous point-to-point
dial system.
A· more detailed explanation of these codes is
given in the publication, ]Q~ ~~i£ 1~1~£QIDIDYni£~!io~§ !££~§§
~§1.hQQ (GC30-S001).
(See Note)
MAS or SLV, used to specify whether the CPU is to be Master
(MAS) or Slave (SLV) when contention occurs in a binary
synchronous cpu-to-cPU contention system (private line). If
this operand is not used, FEATURE=MAS is assumed for this system.
If FEATURE=MAS is specified, the remote device is to be the
slave when contention occurs. If FEATURE=SLV is specified, the
remote device is the master.
When the remote device is the

2780, FEA!URE=SLV must always be coded.
The CPU must always be
the slave when contenticn occurs between the CPU and the remote
2780.
AFL, specifies that the autopoll feature is to be employed for
the start-stop devices.
If FEATURE=APL is omitted, the generated
channel programs for these devices will perform the standard
programmed polling.
A more detail€d explanation of this code
is given in the publication, ]Q§ ]~si£ 1§1~£2IDIDYn1f~~iQ~~ !cc~~§
~&1nQQ (GC30-5001).
'.

B2~~~

These parameters should not be used with "Extended ID
Verification" i.e., they should not be coded if ANSWREK=EXIDVER
is coded for TYPE=LINE.

lINELST:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand
specifies the correspondence between symbolic unit (SYSnnn) and relative
line numcer.
The user codes one three-digit number (nnn of SYSnnn)
for each line in the line group.
The order in which the three-digit
numbers are coded determines which symbolic units are associated with
the individual lines in the line group.
As many as 31 three-digit
numbers from 000-244 may be coded in this operand.
For local 2260's and local 3270's, each number entry represents a
physical device; all local devices attached to the same control unit
must be specified in the same LINELST operand.
S~ITCH:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand specifies
the type cf line ccnnection between the system and the remote device.
SWITCH=YES indicates that the line connection is through a switched
network.
SWITCH=NO indicates that the line connection is dedicated.
The default is SWITCH=NO.

CU:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand defines the
central unit attached to the channel (such as a 2701, 2702, 2703, 2848,
3272 or 7770). !his operand is required for all non-sequential devices.
If using the System/360 Model 25 with the Integrated Communications
Attachment, CU=2703 must be specified; for System/370 with Integrated
Communications Attachment, CU=2701 must be specified.
CONFIG:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand specifies
the type of binary synchronous line configuration. CONFIG=PPT indicates
that the data link between the CPU and the remote binary synchronous
device is point-to-point.
CONFIG=MPT indicates that the data link
between the CPU and the remote binary synchronous devices is a
multi-point link. The nefault is CONFIG=PPT.
BSCODE:
Specifies the type of binary synchronous transmission code.
BSCODE=EECDIC indicates transmission in Extended Binary Coded Decimal
Interchange Code.
BSCODE=ASCII indicates transmission in American
Standard Code for Information tnterchange.
BSCODE=TRANSCODE indicates
transmission in six-bit TRANSCODE.
The default is BSCODE=EBCDIC.
MODELST:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used
to specify a code (0,1,2,3) for each line in a binary synchronous line
group to be used by BTAM at OPEN time.
If this operand is omitted,
code 0 is assumed for each line in the line group.
A more detailed
explanation of this operand is given in the publication DO§ ]~~i£
~§1~2~~~nic~tiQ~§ A£fg§§ ]~!nQQ (GC30-5001).
crcs does not support
59

the use of codes 4, 5, 6, and 7.
If converting from CICS/DOS to
CICS/OS, this operand must be recoded as MODE.
RETRY:
Specifies the number of retries (0-15) by BTAM for recoverable
errors that cccur on I/O operations for binary synchronous
communication.
If this operand is omitted, RETRY=7 is assumed.
!ERMTST:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand
specifies whether cr not the online terminal test facility is to be
used. The default is TEBMTST=NO.
A more detailed explanation of this
c~erand is given in the ]Q§ ]s~if l§l§£Q~~YD~fs!iQn§ A££~§~ ~§1hQQ
publication, (GC30-5001 for DOS Release 26 or lower, GC27-6978 for DOS
Release 27 or higher). For CICS/OS, the online terminal test facility
is specified through the ERROPT operand.
LERBADR:
Specifies the label of the BTAM line error recording block
(LIRB) in which tte user has specified his LERB parameters. For
CICS/OS, this operand is valid only if EREOPT=C is also specified.
For
CICS/OS, LIRB is alsc a valid spelling of this operand.
DDNAME:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to supply the name of the data definition (DD) statement
associated with a particular data set (line group).
If converting from
CICS/DOS to CICS/OS and this operand is omitted, the DSCNAME becomes
the DDNAME.
MACRF:
Applicable only to'the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, MACRF=(R,W)
indicates that access to the BTAM line group or to sequential devices
is to be gained via either READ or WRITE macro instructions, or both.
The default for ETAM line groups is MACRF=(R,W); the OPEN option for
ETAM line groups defaults to input.
For sequential devices (other than card reader and line printer)~
MACRF=R or MACRF=W must te specified. The default is MACRF=R for a
card reader and MACRF=W for a line printer.
FINNAME:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
specifies the name of the first line entry (DFHTCT TYPE=LINE) for local
2260's.
NCP:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANtARD system, this operand is
used to indicate the number of channel programs that are to be specified
when using the Graphics Access Method.
The default is NCP=1.
MODE:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
specifies the mode of communication for a binary synchronous line group.
A more detailed explanation of this operand is given in the publication,
os Basic Telecommunications Access Method (GC30-2004). Note that since
CICS-does-not-suFPort-the-IBc-parameter-aescribed in GC30-2004, a comma
must be substituted in place of the IBC parameter.
ELKSIZE: This operand is used for
3's to specifiy th maximum length
Model 3's this value should be the
in the line entries that reference
macro instruction.
60

sequential data sets and 7770 Model
(in bytes) of a block. For 7770
same as that specified for INAREAL
the DSCNAME of this DFHTCT TYPE=SDSC1

For the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, the default is BLKSIZE=O. If this
operand is omitted, the block size can be specified in the data
definition (DD) statement associated with the data set.
A more detailed
explanation of this operand is given in the publication Q2 2YE~Ivi§QI
En~ ~~!~ ~~D~E~~~D! ~~IQ Jn~!~~£1iQD§, GC28-6647.
For the CICS/DOS systems, the default is BLKSIZE=80.
explanation of this operand is given in the pUblication
ang JLQ ~~£IQ§, GC24-5037.

A.more detailed
DO~

SUE~~i~QI

60.1

RECFM:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used for sequential data sets to specify the record fromat for the
DCB.
Applicable keyword parameters are F (fixed-length records), V
(variable-length records), and U (undefined records).
The default is
RECFM=U.
If this operand is omitted, the record format can be specified
in the data definition (DD) statement associated with the sequential
data set.
SYNAD:
Applicable only to CICS/OS with TCAM, this symbolic name
specifies the address of a subroutine to be given control if message
processing is used; the work unit is larger than the work area, and
OPTCD=C is not specified.
For input queues, the user has the option of specifying his own
SYNAD routine for which an EXTRN is generated. If SYNAD is not
specified, a CICS generated SYNAD routine is provided.
If CICS SYNAD
is used and the exit occurs:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Message DFH4000 is issued.
The DCB is closed.
The DCB is reopened.
Data is truncated to the specified blocksize and is passed to
the CICS application program.

OPTCD:
Applicable only to CICS/OS, this operand specifies the optional
fields for the TCAM work unit.
The W specifies that for input, the
name of the source of each message is to be placed in an eight-byte
origin field in the work area.
For output, it specifies that TCAM
expects the name of the destination of the message to be placed in an
eight-byte destination field in the work area before a TCAM WRITE macro
instruction is executed.
OPTCD=W must be specified for both the input
and output macro instruction.
U specifies that the work unit to be handled is either a message or
a message segment that is not a record.
If U is omitted, the work unit
is assumed to be a record.
C specifies that a one-byte field in the work area, called the
position field, indicates whether the work unit being handled is the
first, an intermediate, or the last segment of the message, and, on
input, whether a record delimiter has been detected in the data.
For further information concerning the OPTCD operand, see the
Guide (GC30-2024).

Q~L~f1

~ng OS/~I! 1£!~ g£Qg~£IDill~~§

APPENDG:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS-STANDARD system when
DEVICE=7770 is specified, this operand is used to specify a
two-character alphameric suffix for the 7770 Channel End/Abnormal End
Appendage routine.
The suffix specified must be in the range WA-Z9
and must be the same suffix as was specified in the CAA operand of the
DFHSG PROGRAM=CSO macro instruction.
DESCRIBE COMMUNICATION LINES
communication paths to the terminals on the system are described by
the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction.
The expansion of this macro
instruction is the Terminal Control Table line entry (TCTLE) and
contains the Data Event Control Block (DECB) that is used to communicate
with the appropriate access method.
The terminals related to this line
must be described immediately following this macro instruction through
use of the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction.
However, when
61

describing a switched-line network, all the lines for a given pool
should be described before describing the terminals for that line pool.
If TCAM is used, the TCTTE's that follow a TCAM TCTLE represent:
1.
2.

Physical terminals, if POOL=YES is not coded.
The maximum number of tasks (transactions) that can be
initiated for this TCTLE, if POOL=YES is coded.

The following operands can be included in the DFHTCT
TYPE=LINE macro instruction:
symbol DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=SAM,BSAM,BTAM,BGAM,TCAM,SEQUENTIAL,GRAPHIC
TELECOMMUNICATION,
TRMTYPE=1030,1050,1053,1130,2020,2260,L2260,2265,
2740,2740/2760,2741C,2741E,2770,2780,2980,
3275,3277,L3277,3284,L3284,3286,L3286,3735,7770,
SYS/3,SYS/7,S360,CRLP,DASD,TAPE,TWX,U/R,
CLASS=(CONV,BATCH,VIDEO,HARDCOPY,BISYNC,AUDIO),
DSCNAME=name,
ISADSCN=name,
OSADSCN=name,
INAREAL=length,
TRMMODL=number,character,
BTAMRLN=number,
LISTADR= (name, WRAP) ,
FEATURE=(AUTOANSR,AUTOCALL,AUTOPOLL,CHECKING,
SCONTROL,BUFFRECV,KBRDLOCK),
NPDELAY=number,
POOLADR=symbolic address,
ANSWRBK=AUTOMATIC,TERMINAL,NULL,EXIDVER,
LINSTAT='OUT OF SERVICE',
BSCODE=EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE,
CONVTAB=EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE,TEXTMODE,ABB,ABC,
RDYMSG=symbolic address,
ERRMSG=symbolic address,
GENPOLL=YES,
POOLCNT=number,
TCTUAL=number,
OUTQ=symbolic name,
POOL=YES,
QUEUEID=hexadecimal number

*
*

*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*

One or more DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instructions must be coded for
each line group.
The DSCNAME=name operand of each of the DFHTCT
TYPE=LINE macro instructions must contain the same name as was specified
in the DSCNAME=name operand of the related DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro
instruction.
A DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction must be coded for each logical
pair of sequential SDSCI macro instructions.
A DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction must be coded for each symbolic
unit (relative line) coded in the LINELST=parameter operand of the BTAM
SDSCI macro instruction. The DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction entries
must be contiguous on switched-line pools.
For the local 2260 Display
Station under CICS/DOS and the local 3270 Information Display System
under CICS/DOS or CICS/OS, only one DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction
is coded for each line group.
Noig:

For sequential devices, the last entry in the input stream must
be 'CSSF GOODNIGHT' to provide a logical close.
If all input

is sequential, 'CSMT SHUTDOWN' must be entered at one of the
terminals to terminate CICS.
ACCME~H:
This oferand is used to specify the access method to be used.
GrouFed according to syncnymity cf function, the applicable keyword
parameters are:

1.
2.
3.
4.

SAM, ESAM, SECUENTIAL
BGAM, GRAPHICS (CICS/OS only)
E~AM, TELECOMMUNICATION
TeAM, TELECOMMUNICATION (CICS/OS only)

!RMTYPE: This operand is used to specify the terminal type associated
with this communication line.
Only one TEMTYPE operand can be included
in each DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction. This operand, when
specified, establishes the default specification that will be used when
the !EMTYPE operand is not specified in a DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro
instructicn associated with this line.
If no TRMTYPE operand is
specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction, a TRMTYPE operand
must be supplied in each DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction for
that line.
The use of the TRMTYPE operand in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro
instruction is optional unless one of the following conditions exists:
1.
2.
3.

A 7770 is associated with the line.
A local 3270 is associated with the line.
One cr more remote 3270's are associated with the line.

In each of these cases an appropriate device-type parameter must be
specified in the TRMTYPE operand; for example:

"'--

1.
2.
3.

TBMTYPE=7770 for the 7770.
~RMTYPE=L3277, TBMTYPE=L3284, or TEMTYPE=L3286 for a local 3270.
TRMTYPE=3275, TEMTYPE=3277, TRMTYPE=3284, or TRYTYPE=3286 for
a remote 3270.

TWX is the Common Carrier Teletypewriter Exchange Terminal Station
(Model 33/35), DASD is the direct access storage device, CELP is the
card reader and line printer (a pair of sequential devices simulating
a terminal), TAPE is the magnetic tape device, and U/E is a general
term that refers to any reader, printer or punch.
1053 indicates a
1053 Printer Model 4.
CLASS:
This operand is used to indicate the device classification
associated with this communication line.
The applicable keyword
parameters are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CONV
BATCH
VIDEO
HARDCOPY
BISYNC
AUDIO

Device with ccnversational type application
Data collection type device
Device with cathode ray tube
Start/stop hard-copy device
Binary synchronous device
Audio response device

Multifle parameters may be specified, except that parameters within
the following groups are mutually exclusive: CONV and BATCH; VIDEO,
HARDCOPY and AUDIO.
BISYNC must be specified for any binary synchronous
line. For example, remote 3270s could be specified
CLASS=(CONV,VIDEO,BISYNC) and local 3270s CLASS=(CONV,VIDEO).

DSCNAME: Specifies the data set control information for this
communicatien line. It is not a~plicable for BSAM. The DSCNAME for
BTAM data sets must be the same name as that specified in the
tSCNAME=name operand of the related DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro inst~uction.
In case of TCAM, this operand specifies the data set contrel name for
an input TPROCESS queue; the OUTQ operand is also required.
ISAtSCN: Specifies the input BSAM data set contrel name for a
particular communication line. This data set control name must be the
same name as that specified in the DSCNAME=name o~erand of the related
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI maCIO instruction. This operand is not applicable
to ETAM, GAM, or TCAM.
OSADSCN: Specifies the output ESAM data set control name for a
particular communication line. This data set control name must be the
same name as that specified in the DSCNAME=name operand of the related
tFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction. This operand is not applicable
to BTAM or GAM. In the case of TCAM, this operand specifies the data
set contrel name for an output TPROCESS queue; the OUTQ operand may
not be used.
INAREAL: Specifies the message input area length.
rrinimum, must be specified as fellcws:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

7.
!Qi~:

This value, as a

For start/stop devices, the length should be equal to the length
of the longest initial sentence of a transaction.
For start/stop devices with the buffer receive feature (for
example, the 2740 Communication Terminal Model 2), the length
sheuld be equal to the length of the buffer less two bytes.
For binary synchronous devices, the length may be calculated as
(a+1) (b+2) + 1, where "a" is the number of blocks sent by a
device in re~~onse to an RVI (reverse interrupt) from CICS, and
"b" is the size, in bytes, of each block.
For the local 2260 Display station under CICS/DOS, the length
of the input message can at no time be greater than the length
s~ecified through this operand.
For the remote 3270 Information Display System, the length
specified should not be less than 254.
For the local 3270 Information Display System, the value
specified may be any number greater than zero. This value
indicates the minumum size of the Terminal Input/Output Area
(TIOA) that will ce passed to the transaction by the Terminal
Centrel program. However, for performance considerations, the
value specified should be equal to or greater than the length
of the expected input message; at no time can a message be read
whose length excEeds the INA REAL value by more than 2000 bytes
(unless the transactien provides a TIOA for the read large enough
te contain the message).
For sequential devices, the length should be equal to the
blocksize (and record length) of the data set.
The mimimum size TIOA passed to a transaction which is running
under control of 2260 compatibili~y is governed by the CMPT60L
operand in the system generation of the Terminal Control program
(DFHSG PRCGBAM=TCP).

TRMMODL: This operand specifies the model number of the terminal
associated with this communication line. This operand must be used if
the device is one of the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

CemIonent of the 1050 Data Communication System
2740 Communication Terminal Model 2
CemFonent of the 2980 General Banking Terminal System
ComFonent of the 3270 Informatien Display System
2740 Communication Terminal with 2760 Optical Image unit
2260 Display station
2265 Display station

The TBMMODL Farameter sets the default value that will be taken,
when it is not specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction
associated with that line.
If models vary on a line, the macro
instruction can have a TRMMODL parameter associated with it, which is
different from that specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE.
This will
override the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro for that DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro.
TRMMODL=1 is used to specify the 2980 ~eller station Model 1, 3275
Display station Model 1, 3277 Display station Model 1, 3284 Printer
Model 1, or 3286 printer Model 1. TRMMODL=1 is the default for the
3270 Information Display System.
TBMMODL=2 is used to specify the 2740 Communication Terminal Model
2, 2980 Administrative Staticn Model 2, 3215 Display Station Model 2,
3277 Display station Model 2, 3284 Printer Model 2, or 3286 Printer
Medel 2.
TRMMODL=4 is used to specify the 2980 Teller Station Model 4.
TRMMODL=5 is used to specify compcnent polling of the keyboard for
the 1050 Data Communication System using non-switched communication
lines. Component selection character 5 (OB) must be coded in the
polling list (DF~RMLST).
See note.
TRMMODL=6 is used to specify component polling of reader 1 for the
1050 Data Communication System using non-switched communication lines.
Component selection character 6 (OD) must be coded in the polling list
(DF~RMLS'I).
See note.
TRMMODL=7 is used to specify (1) the 2740 Communication Terminal
with 2760 optical Image Unit, or (2) compcnent pelling of reader 2 for
the 1050 Data Communication System using non-switched communication
lines.
Ccm~onent selection character 7 (OE) must be coded in the
FoIling list (DFTRMLST).
See note.
TRMMODl=O is used to specify an input component for the 1050 Data
Communication System. Cemmon pelling character 0 (15) must be coded
in the polling list (DFTRMLST).
TRMMODL=O is the default specification
for a 1050 Data Communication System.
The TRMMODL=character operand is used to specify the applicable
screen fermat for a 2260/2265 Display station as follows:

TRMMODL=A
TRMMODL=B
TRMMODL=C
TBMMODL=D
TRMMODL=E

6x40
12x40
12x80
15x64
12x80

2260
2260
2260
2265
2265

For example, TRMMODL=A specifies a 2260 Display station with a 6x40
screen format.
BQ~~:

"'----

When TRMMODL is specified, the user must also specify the
component selection character with control unit address via the
TRMADDR operand of the DFH~CT TYPE=TERMINAL macro.
65

ETAMRLN: Specifies the relative line number within a line group.
The
relative line number can be specified in the range 1-31 for CICS/DOS
and 1-256 for CICS/OS.
This operand is not applicable to BSAM, TCAM,
local 2260's, or local 3270's.
LISTADR:
Specifies the label of the BTAM Define Terminal List macro
statement (DFTRMLST) in which the user has specified his polling list
for the communication line.
(A terminal may not be specified more than
once in a polling list.) DFTRMLST entries should be coded immediately
preceding DFHTCT TYPE=LINE entries or immediately following DFHTCT
TYPE=TERMINAL entries.
If a .wraplist is specified in the DFTRMLST,
the WRAP eperand must be included. The default is to an open list.
LISTADR is not applicable when ACCMETH=BSAM, ACCMETH=GAM, or for some
devices when ACCMETH=BTAM (for example, dial-up 2741's).
The DFTRMLST macro instruction establishes a terminal list from
which ETAM attains the infermatien it needs to establish contact with
a terminal. This information consists of telephone numbers, polling
and addressing sequences, and identification sequences to be sent to
terminals, or against which an incomming sequence can be checked to
ensure that contact has been established with a valid station.
For more information, see the publication

]Q~ ]~§i£

~~1~£2~~YDi£~!iQD§ ~££~§§ ]~~hoQ (GC30-5001) or the
]~§i£ 1~1~£g~~~~jf~!jgn§ !££~§§ ~~!EQ£ (GC30-2004).

Note:

publication Q~

Polling list entries for remote 2260/2265 and remote 3275/3277
systems must specify a general poll.
The use of a general poll
allows a single entry in the polling list to invite input from
all devices attached to each remote control unit or display
station.
In this ferm of operation, the polling list should contain only
one entry for each 2845, 2848, or 3271 Control Unit or for each
3275 Display Station on the line.
For 2260/2265 display systems,
this form of operation is achieved by coding X'FF' as the second
byte of each entry in the pelling list.
For 3270 systems, this
ferm of operation is achieved by using a device address code of
X'7F' (EBCDIC) or X'22' (ASCII) in each polling list entry
applicable to a 3271 Control Unit or 3275 Display Station. For
remote 3270's, see the discussion of GENPOLL in this section
and the discussion of POLLPOS in the section "Describe Terminal
Types".

If ANSWRBK=EXIDVEB is specified, the LISTADR operand must specify
the label of a DFTRMLST macro instruction of the SWLST,AN format.
The
user data portion of the entries in this list must be either of the
following:
1.

The label of the corresponding DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro
instructien for each 3735; or

Hexadecimal zeros for terminals that share the line with the
3735 but do net transmit unique ID sequences.

For a dial-up line containing 3735'5 and other bisynchronous devices,
the answering list must be coded as follows:
symbol DFTRMLST SWLST,AN,xx,4,yy,zz,
(authsequence,O,userdata) " ,
(2D,O,'lERO)

*
*

where: symbol is the user· label specified by the LISTADR= operand of
the DPHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction, xx,yy,zz as defined in
66

the BTAM manual, (authsequence,O,userdata) is a sublist in the
answering list for each 3735 (authsequence is defined in the
BTAM manual),
must be specified for the control value, userdata
is the label of the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL entry and (2D,O,ZERO)
is a sub1ist in the answering list for all non-3735 devices on
the line where 2D is the ID ENQ sequence for non-3735 devices,
must be specified for the control value, ZERO is the label
used to represent userdata (the following statement must be
coded:
ZERO EQU 0).

FEATURE:

This oferand is used to indicate that one or more optional

66.1

features are present on a given terminal.
These features can be
specified in any order using the following keyword parameters:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

AUTOANSR, the automatic answering capability for switched lines.
AUTOCALL, the automatic calling capability for switched lines.
AUTOPOLL, the automatic polling capability required for
multi-point binary synchronous communication terminals and
optional for the 1050 Communication system and 2740 Communication
Terminal.
If AUTOPOLL is specified for the 2740, SCONTROL must
also be specified.
CHECKING, the VRC/LRC feature on the 2740 Communication Terminal.
SCONTROL, the station control feature on the 2740 Communication
Terminal and on the System/7.
BUFFRECV, the buffer receive capability for the 2740
Communication Terminal Model 2.
If BUFFRECV is specified,
SCONTROL must also be specified.
KBRDLOCK, the lock option capability for the 2848 Display Control
Models 21 and 22.

For terminals on switched-line networks, FEATURE=AUTOANSR must always
be specified.
NPDELAY:
Applicable only to start/stop
operand is used to specify the interval
between line polls (invitations) when a
detected.
This number can be specified
default values varying by device type.
poll delay".

and BISYNCH devices, this
of time, in milliseconds,
negative response to a poll is
in the range 0 to 20000, with
NPDELAY signifies "negative

When used with a TCAM line, this operand specifies the time interval
that is to expire before control is passed to TEP when a CICS task is
not ready to accept a subsequent record from the input process queues.
If the CICS task issues a read before the time interval expires,
processing continues normally and TEP is not notified.
This number
can be specified in the range of 0 to 20,000 milliseconds.
The default
value is o.
POOLADR:
This operand must be used for switched-line processing and
for the local 3270 Information Display System.
Used for switched-line
processing, this operand specifies the label assigned to the first
terminal description (DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL) associated with a particular
pool of communication lines.
POOLADR should be coded only for the
first line in a given line pool; FEATURE=AUTOANSR must also be
specified.
Used for the local 3270 Information Display System, this operand
specifies the label assigned to the first terminal description
associated with a particular pool of local 3270's. FEATURE=AUTOANSR
need not be specified.
ANSWRBK: This operand must be coded for switched lines to specify the
terminal identification to be used. If this operand is used,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR must also be specified.
Only one of the following
keyword parameters may be specified:
1.

AUTOMATIC, indicates automatic terminal identification.
This
parameter may be coded only for the Common Carrier Teletypewriter
Exchange Terminal station (Model 33/35).

TERMINAL, indicates that the terminal will be identified by the
operator. This parameter may be coded for the TWX, 1050, 2740,
2741, and dial-up binary synchronous devices.
(After the dial-up
67

connection has been made, the operator must enter the Terminal
Identification as it appears in the Terminal Control Table.) If
3735's share the line, specify EXIDVER.
3.

NULL, indicates that the terminal will not be identified by
either the terminal or operator.
This parameter may be coded
only for the 7770.
(After the dial-up connection has been made,
the Terminal Control program connects this line to the next
available terminal in the terminal pool.)

EXIDVER, not applicable to CICS/DOS-Entry, this keyword parameter
indicates that the terminal's unique ID sequence will be
identified by BTAM-expanded ID verification.
This parameter
must be coded for any line on which there is a 3735.
If devices
which do not transmit unique ID sequences share the line with
3735's, the non-3735 operator must enter the terminal
identification after the dial-up connection has been made.

BQi~:

These keyword parameters are valid only if the corresponding
keyword parameters have been included in the DFHSG
PROGRAM=TCP,ANSWRBK=(parameters) specification during system
generation.

LINSTAT: The LINSTAT='OUT OF SERVICE' operand indicates that the line
is to be initiated with an "out of service" status.
BSCODE:
This operand is used to specify the type of communication code
to be used for a given binary synchronous communication device.
The
applicable keyword parameters are EBCDIC, ASCII, and TRANSCODE.
The
default is BSCODE=EBCDIC.
CONVTAB:
This operand is used to specify the type of transmission
code, and may be used in lieu of the BSCODE operand for binary
synchronous devices. The applicable keyword parameters are:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

EBCDIC
ASCII
TRAN SCODE
ABB
ABC

Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Six-bit transmission code
ABB' code for the 7770 Audio Response unit Model 3
ABC code for the 7770 Audio Response unit Model 3

RDYMSG:
Required when TRMTYPE=7770 is specified, this operand is used
to specify the symbolic address of the ready message used by CICS to
communicate with terminals attached to the 7770 Audio Response Unit.
The ready message is defined through the DFHTCT TYPE=7770MSG macro
instruction.
(See the section "Define Digital Response Messages for
the 7770 Audio Response unit".)
ERRMSG:
Required when TRMTYPE=7770 is specified, this operand is used
to specify the symbolic address of the error message used by CICS to
communicate with terminals attached to the 7770 Audio Response Unit.
The error message is defined through the DFHTCT TYPE=7770MSG macro
instruction.
(See the section "Define Digital Response Messages for
the 7770 Audio Response Unit".)
GENPOLL:
GENPOLL=YES must be specified for a multipoint binary
synchronous communication line if one or more of the polling sequences
in the DFTRMLST (pointed to by the label specified in the LISTADR
operand) is a general poll sequence.
If this operand is used, the

POLLPOS operand must be included in each DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL
specification associated with the line.
For TRMTYPE=2980 and
TRMTYPE=3270, GENPOLL=YES is a default specification.
POOLCNT:
Applicable only to the CICS/OS system, this operand is used
to specify the number of Terminal Control Table line entries (TCTLE's)
to be included in the pool of TCTLE's for a line group comprised of
local 3270 Information Display Systems.
The pool of TCTLE's is used
by CICS to support concurrent operations on the BTAM local line group.
The number of TCTLE's specified should reflect the expected activity
on the local line group and the anticipated maximum number of concurrent
requests. For a local line group containing printers, the number
specified should be the actual number of printers plus one to avoid
locking out any screen keyboards when all printers are busy.
When a READ or WRITE for a particular 3270 is issued, CICS allocates
the first available TCTLE from the pool.
This TCTLE is freed when the
operation at the device is complete. For WRITE operations at a printer,
the operation at the device is considered complete when the printing
operation is complete.
CICS supports as many concurrent operations on the line group as
there are TCTLE's in the pool.
If no TCTLE is available to support a
requested operation, the request remains pending until a TCTLE becomes
available.
For CICS/OS, local 3270's can be arranged in line groups in any
desired manner.
TCTUAL:
This operand is used to specify the length, in bytes (0-255),
of the Process Control Information field (PCI) for all terminal entries
(TCTTE's) associated with this line. The default is TCTUAL=O.
If fields of different (variable) lengths are desired, the TCTUAL
value can be specified in one or more DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro
instructions for terminals associated with this line.
In any case,
the PCI field is generated for each terminal after the last terminal
entry of the last line.
The address of the PCI field is located at
TCTTECIA; the length is located at TCTTECIL.
For CICS/OS, PCI fields of fixed length (15 bytes) and/or variable
length (0-255 bytes) can be specified via the TCTUA operand of the
DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction. In the case of a fixed-length
PCI field (the address of which is located at TCTTECI), the TCTUAL
operand need not be specified.
In the case of a variable-length PCI
field (the address of which is located at TCTTECIA), the TCTUAL operand
should be specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction and/or
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction.
OUTQ:
Required in all TCAM input process queue Terminal Control Table
line entries (TCTLE's), the symbolic name identifies the corresponding
TCAM output process queue TCTLE.
Multiple input process queues may
reference the same output process queue.
POOL: By specifying POOL=YES on the TCAM output process queue, the
POOL feature is supported for that TCAM line.
The user should analyze
the restrictions prior to specifying the POOL feature.
For further
information concerning line pool restrictions, see the section
"CICS/TCAM Interface Considerations".

QUEUEID: This optional operand is used to specify a unique user
identification for the TCAM process queue. The identification is an
unframed, one-byte hexadecimal number (OO-FF) which is placed in both
the input and output line entry at TCTLEQID to provide unique queue
identification while executing a user exit.
DESCRIBE TERMINAL TYPES
The types of terminals on the system are described to CICS by the
symbol DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL
macro instruction. The expansion of this macro instruction is the
Terminal Control Table terminal entry (TCTTE).
These terminal
definitions must immediately follow the corresponding line entry (DFHTCT
TYPE=LINE).
The sequential terminals (TRMTYPE=CRLP,DISK,TAPE) support
only one entry each.
A DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction must be coded for each
terminal on a line. On single dropped and multidropped terminals on
non-switched lines, the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction must
immediately follow the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction. The DFHTCT
TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction entries must be contiguous for
multidropped terminals on non-switched lines and for terminals in a
terminal pool on switched lines.
For TCAM, the user must specify a single TCTTE for the input process
queue line.
This may be considered to be a "dummy" TCTTE in that it
does not relate to any physical terminal. On the output process queue
line (TCTLE), the user identifies each terminal to be associated with
that line set.
Therefore, if the user has ten terminals associated
with a particular TCAM process queue, he must code eleven DFHTCT
TYPE=TERMINAL macro instructions; one follows the input DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
macro instruction while the remaining ten follow the output DFHTCT
TYPE=LINE macro instruction.
The following operands can be used in the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro
instruction:
symbol DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
*
TRMIDNT=name,
*
TRMPRTY=number,
*
TRMMODL=number,character,
*
TRMTYPE=1030,1050,1053,1130,2020,2260,L2260,2265,
*
2740,2740/2760,2741C,2741E,2770,2780,2980,
*
3275,3277,L3277,3284,L3284,3286,L3286,3735,7770, *
SYS/3,SYS/7,S360,CRLP,DASD,TAPE,TWX,U/R,
*
CLASS=(CONV,BATCH,VIDEO,HARDCOPY,BISYNC,AUDIO),
*
LVUNIT=number,
*
LASTTRM=LINE,GACB,POOL,
*
TRMADDR=address,name,
*
TRMSTAT=(TRANSACTION,TRANSCEIVE,RECEIVE,'OUT OF SERVICE',*
INPUT) ,
*
COMPAT=NO, (number of characters,number of lines,
*
device type,model number),
*
FEATURE=(PTRADAPT,SELCTPEN,AUDALARM,COPY,BUFEXP,
*
DCKYBD,UCTRAN),
*
POLLPOS=number,
*
TRANSID=name,
*
STN2980=number,
*
TAB2980=number,
*
TIOAL=number,
*
TCTUAL=number

TRMIDNT: Used to supply a unique four-character symbolic identification
to each terminal.
The TRMIDNT parameter and the destination
identification in the Destination control Table, when applicable, must
be the same.
The identification supplied will be left justified and
padded with blanks to four characters if less than four characters are
supplied. This is necessary as the system always searches for a four
character match when searching tables.
This operand may be omitted if
POOL=YES is included in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE specification.
TRMPRTY: Used to establish terminal priority.
This decimal value
(000-255) is used in establishing the overall transaction processing
priority.
(Transaction processing priori ty is equal to the sum of the
terminal priority, transaction priority, and operator priority, not to
exceed 255.) The default is TRMPRTY=O.
TRMMODL:
Specifies the model number of the terminal associated with
this communication line.
If the device is one of the following, this
operand must be included in either the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE or DFHTCT
TYPE=TERMINAL specification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Component of the 1050 Data Communication System
2740 Communication Terminal Model 2
Component of the 2980 General Banking Terminal System
Component of the 3270 Information Display System
2740 Communication Terminal with 2760 Optical Image unit
2260 Display Station
2265 Display station

TRMMODL=1 is used to specify the 2980 Teller Station Model 1, 3275
Display Station Model 1, 3277 Display station Model 1, 3284 Printer
Model 1, or 3286 Printer Model 1. TRMMODL=1 is the default for the
3270 Information Display System.
TRMMODL=2 is used to specify the 2740 Communication Terminal Model
2, 2980 Administrative Station Model 2, 3275 Display Station Model 2,
3277 Display station Model 2, 3284 Printer Model 2, or 3286 Printer
Model 2.
TRMMODL=4 is used to specify the 2980 Teller station Model 4.
TRMMODL=5 is used to specify component polling of the keyboard for
the 1050 Data Communication System using non-switched communication
lines.
Component selection character 5 (OB) must be coded in the
polling tist (DFTRMLST).
TRMMODL=6 is used to specify component polling of reader 1 for the
1050 Data Communication System using non-switched communication lines.
Component selection character 6 (OD) must be coded in the polling list
(DFTRMLST) •
TRMMODL=7 is used to specify (1) the 2740 Communication Terminal
with 2760 Optical Image Unit, or (2) component polling of reader 2 for
the 1050 Data Communication System using non-switched communication
lines.
Component selection character 7 (OE) must be coded in the
polling list (DFTRMLST).
TRMMODL=O is used to specify an input component for the 1050 Data
Communication System.
Common polling character 0 (15) must be coded
in the polling list (DFTRMLST).
TRMMODL=O is the default specification
for a 1050 Data Communication System.

The TRMMODL=character operand is used to specify the applicable
screen format for a 2260/2265 Display station as follows:
~g£!fIFI~!11Qli

~~E£!lH!

TRMMODL=A
TRMMODL=B
TRMMODL=C
TRMMODL=D
TRMMODL=E

6x40
12x40
12x80
15x64
12x80

FOEMA!
2260
2260
2260
2265
2265

For example, TRMMODL=A specifies a 2260 Display Station with a 6x40
screen format.
TRMTYPE:
This operand is used to specify the terminal type if (1) the
terminal type has not already been specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
macro instruction, or (2) the user wishes to override the TRMTYPE
specification in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction.
CRLP is the card reader and line printer (a pair of sequential
devices simulating a terminal).
DASD is the direct access device.
TAPE is the magnetic tape device.
A 1053 is a 1053 printer on a local
or remote 2848 control unit.
TWX is the Common Carrier Teletypewriter
Exchange Terminal Station (Model 33/35).
U/R is a general term that
refers to any reader, printer, or punch.
CLASS: This operand is used to indicate the device classification
associated with a particular line.
The applicable keyword parameters
are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

CONV
BATCH
VIDEO
HARDCOPY
BISYNC
AUDIO

Device with conversational type application
Data collection type device
Device with cathode ray tube
Start/stop hard-copy device
Binary synchronous device
Audio response device

LVUNIT:
This operand is applicable only when TRMTYPE=L2260,
TRMTYPE=L3277, TRMTYPE=L3284, or TRMTYPE=L3286 is specified, or when
TRMTYPE=1053 is specified for a local 2260 line.
LVUNIT specifies a
decimal number from 1 to N which is used to identify the local video
unit. The maximum value of N for local 2260 is 25.
For local 3270,
N maximum is 32 (use of Assembler D restricts N to a maximum of 31).
For the CICS/DOS systems r the LVUNIT specification indicates the
local video unit's relative position in the corresponding DFHTCT
TYPE=SDSCI, LINELST=parameter specification.
For the CICS/OS system,
the LVUNIT specification indicates the local video unit's relative
position in the concatenation of data definition (DD) statements for
the corresponding DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI specification.
LASTTRM: This operand is used to indicate a "last terminal" condition.
The applicable keyword parameters are:
1.
2.

GACB, used for GAM onlYr identifies both the last terminal entry
on a given line entry and the last terminal entry on a graphics
attention control block.
LINE, used for BTAM non-switched line processing (except local
3270), BGAM (if GACB conditions do not apply), and TCAM (if
POOL=YES has not been specified).

PCOL, used for ETAM switched-line processing, for the local 3270
Informatien Display System, and for TeAM, identifies the last
terminal in the pool.
For TCAM, ECOL is use~ if ECOL=YES has
been specified.

TRMADDR: The TRMADDR=address operand specifies the device address
associated with a given terminal and is required only for BTAM devices.
(This operand is not required for some BTAM output devices; for example,
a dial-up 2741.) Fer most non-switched lines, the hexadecimal addressing
characters associated with the terminal must be specified.
(This
operand should not be used if the devices are local 2260's or local
3270's). For either binary synchronous devices or switched lines, the
label of the BTAM DFTRMLST must be specified using the TRMADDR=name
operand.
]Q1~:

For a 3735, the BTAM DFTRMLST must be of the SWLST,AD type.
For
a TWX, TRMADDR is not required if ANSWRBK=TERMINAL is specified
on the DFETCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction.

~RMS!AT:
Specifies the type of activity that may occur at a given
terminal.
This terminal status is initially set in the TCTTE and is
a combination of the processing status and the service status.
possible
status designaticns are TRANSACTION, TRANSCEIVE, RECEIVE, INPUT and/or
'aU! OF SERVICE'.

A terminal with TRANSACTTON status is used in the processing of
transactions such as inquiries or erder entries.
A display station is
normally classified as a TRANSACTION terminal.
A hard-copy terminal
to which no messages are sent withcut a terminal request and through
which transactions are entered is a TRANSACTION terminal. If no other
status designatien is made, the terminal status defaults to TRANSACTION.
A terminal with TRANSCEIVE status is a TRANSACTION terminal but one
to which messages are sent automatically by the user.
The automatic
transaction initiation created by a transient data destination reaching
a trigger level sets a condition in an appropriate Terminal Control
Table terminal entry.
If the terminal status is TRANSCEIVE and if
there is no transaction at the terminal, Terminal Control initiates
the user-defined task.
This task is expected to send messages to the
terminal.
A terminal with RECEIVE status is one to which messages are sent
but from which nc input is allowed.
An example of this type of terminal
is one which is located in a remote location, such as a warehouse, is
unattended, but may receive messages.
No!~:

RECEIVE should be specified for a System/7 with the station
Centrol feature.
This allows polling to be suspended until the
System/7 is IPL'd by the host, at which time the status is
changed to TRANSCEIVE. If the System/7 is IPL'd remotely, the
master ter~inal must be used to change the terminal status to
enable the System/7 to transmit.

A terminal with INPUT status is one which can send messages to CICS
tut cannot receive messages from CICS.
]Q!~:

System messages may be routed to input terminals under certain
ccnditions (e.g., Invalid Transaction Identification, ATP batch
count) causing DFHTACP to be scheduled.
For this reason, the
user should code a Terminal Error Program (DFHTEP) to perform
any user-required action.
See DFHTEP Programming Considerations.

A terminal with an 'OUT OF SERVICE' designation is one which can
neither receive messages nor transmit input.
such terminals are not
polled by CICS.
The 'OUT OF SERVICE' parameter can be used in
combination with TRANSACTION, TRANSCEIVE, or RECEIVE; if such a
co.bination is nct specified, the terminal status defaults to
TRANSACTION.
All terminals except the master terminal can be designated as 'OUT
OF SERVICE'.
When appropriate, the terminals can be placed IN SERVICE
by the master terminal and polling is resumed.
COMPAT: This operand is used to indicate that the 2260/2265 terminal
or 1053 printer specified in the "device type" parameter is to be
simulated on the 3270 Information Display System. The keyword
parameters are positional and must be replaced by a comma if they are
omitted. The default is COMPAT=NO.
The "number of characters" parameter is used to specify the screen
Applicable parameters are 240, 480,
and 960.

size of the 2260/2265 terminal.

The "number of lines" parameter is used to indicate the number of
lines applicable to the 2260/2265 terminal or to insert new line (Nt)
symbols into the 3284/3286 printer output data stream where Nt symbols
are not provided by the user in the output data stream.
Applicable
parameter values are 6, 12, and 15. The default value for a
960-character screen is 12.
The "device type" parameter is used to specify either a 1053, 2260,
L2260, or 2265 terminal.
The default is 2260.
Note that the
specification COMPAT=(960,15) results in an error condition since the
2260 (as~umed by default) cannct support 15 lines.
The "model number" parameter is used to specify a model number for
the 2260 terminal being simulated. This parameter provides an interface
for any user-written application programs that currently test the
TCTTEMN field before building device-dependent 2260 data streams.
For further informaticn concerning the use of the COMPAT operand,
see the section "2260 Ccmpatibility for the 3270".
FEATURE: This operand is used to specify applicable features for the
3270 Infcrmation Display System and corresponding 3284 Printer Model
3 on the 3275 Display station.
FEA!UBE=PTRADAPT specifies the Printer Adapter feature and
corresponding 3284 Printer Model 3 on the 3275 Display Station.
Note
that a separate DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAt macro instruction cannot be coded
for the 3284 Printer Model 3 because the 3284 Model 3 shares the buffer
of the 3275 Display Station.
FEATURE=SELCTFEN specifies the Selector Pen feature for a 3275
Display Station or a 3277 Display Station.
FEATURE=AUDAtARM specifies the Audible Alarm feature for a 3275
tisplay Station or a 3277 Display Station.
FEATURE=COPY specifies the Copy featUre for a 3277 Display Station,
3284 Printer, or 3286 Printer attached to a 3271 Control unit.
FEATURE=BUFEXP specifies the Buffer Expansion feature (RPQ835503)
for the 2980 General Banking Terminal System.
Applicable only to the

first terminal ~ntry of a control group, the BUFEXP parameter increases
the statien buffer size to 96 characters.
FEATURE=DCKYBD specifies the typewriter keyboard and/or operator
censole keyboard for a 3275 Display station or a 3277 Display station.
Both uppercase and lowercase data can be transmitted with either of
these keyboards.
'FEATURE=UCTRAN specifies translation of all lowercase data to
uppercase. If FEATURE=UCTRAN is specified, the EBCDIC and/or ASCII
parameter must be specified through the UCTRAN operand of the DFHSG
fROGRAM=TCP macro instruction.
For further informatien concerning the use of the FEATURE operand,
see the section "2260 Compatibility for the 3270".
FCLLPCS:
This operand is used to specify, as a decimal integer, the
position (relative to 1) of the FoIling characters associated with this
terminal in the DFTRMLST supplied for the line.
If GENPCLL=YES is
specified (or implied by default) for the line entry, POLLPOS=1 is
specified for each terminal entry associated with control unit 1,
FOtLPOS=2 is specified for each terminal entry associated with control
unit 2, etc.
TRANSID:
The TRANSID operand is used to specify a four-character
transaction code whose use is dependent upon the terminal type for
which it has been specified.
If the access method being used is TCAM,
the TRANSID operand is applicable only to Terminal Control Table
terminal entries associated with the TCAM output queue.
For the 2740 Communication Terminal/2760 Optical Image unit
combination (TRMTYPE=2740,TRMMODL=7), the TRANSID operand is used to
specify the transacticn code of the transaction that is to be initiated
when input is received from the 2760 and there is no active task.
If
input is received from the 2740, the first four characters of the input
data stream are used as the transaction code.
For the 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal, the TRANSID operand is
used to specify the transaction cede of the transaction that is to be
initiated,for a batch transmission initiated by the terminal operator.
If an inquiry message is received from the 3735, the transaction code
used consists of the first four characters following the inquiry header
(NULL I NULL).
See Appendix G for an example of a user-written 3735
transaction.
For all other terminals, the TRANSID operand is used to specify the
transacticn code of a transaction that is to be initiated each time
input is received from the terminal and there is no active task.
If
the TRANSID operand is omitted, the first fbur characters of the data
passed in the TIOA, or, in the case of a formatted 3270 data stream,
the four characters fellowing the first Set Buffer Address (SBA) order
sequence, are used as the transaction code unless a TRANSID
specification has been made in a DFHPC TYPE=RETURN request issued by
the previous transaction.
The transaction code used is the one supplied
by the last specification of the TRANSID operand in the DFHPC macro
instruction.
The TFANSID oFerand is required for the following terminals.
1.
2.

1030 Badge Reader
2740 communication Terminal/2760 Optical Image unit
combination

3735 programmable Buffered Terminal if batched input processing
is required

STN2980: This oFerand is used to specify the station for which the
alternate station address and no~mal station address are to be generatec
for each terminal entry in the Terminal Cont~ol Table corresponding to
a 2980 General Banking Terminal System. In response to a given STN2980
specification, an aFFropriate (hexadecimal) alternate station address
and normal station address are generated by CICS as follows:
]~RM!1

40
F1
F2
F3
F8
5C
61
E2
E3
E8

!L1]]]!1]
F4
F5
F6
F7
34
E4
E5
E6
E7
24

~~!11Qli

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

For example, for normal station address X'40', the user specifies
STN2980=0 ana the alternate station address X'F4 1 is generated.
TAB2980: This operand is used to specify, as a single-digit hexadecimal
value (O-F), the number of tabs to the passbook area as defined by the
user and physically (uniquely) set on the terminal.
The default is
TAB2980=0.
TIOAL:
Applicable only to terminals on binary synchronous lines, this
operand is used to specify the minimum size of the Terminal Input/Output
Area (TIOA) to be passed to a transaction by the Terminal Control
program. If the size of an input message exceeds the value specified
in this operand, the size of the TIOA corresponds to the size of the
message.
]ot~:

The minumum size TIOA passed to a transaction which is running
under cont~ol of 2260 Compatibility is governed by the CMPT60L
operand in the generation of the Terminal Control program.

TCTUAL: This ope~and is used to specify the length, in bytes (0-255),
of the Process Centrol Information field (PCI) for this terminal. The
default is the TCTUAL value specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro
instruction; if not specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction,
the default is TCTUAL=O.
DEFINE DIGITAL RESPONSE MESSAGES FOR 7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT
For CICS to communicate with an aUdio terminal (for example, the
2721 Portable Audio Terminal), two digital response messages (an error
message and a ready message) must be defined in the Terminal Control
Table for each line. This is accomplished by issuing the
symbol DFHTCT TYPE=7770MSG,
MESSAGE='message'

macro instruction, which must immediately precede the DFHTCT TYPE=FINAL
macro inst~uction. To avoid confusion, these messages should be unique;
76

that is, these messages should not also be defined in
applicaticn ~rograms.

user-writt~n

The ready message is used by CICS:
1.
2.
3.
4.

In response to a valid Terainal Identification being entered
subsequent to line ccnnection.
When the sign-on sequence has been completed.
When a 7770 Audio ResFonse Unit is connected to a line and no
transaction is associated with the 7770.
In response to a READ request if the request sequence was not
a IoIRITE, READ.

The error message is used by CICS:
1.
2.

3.
4.
S.
6.
7.

In response to an invalid ~erminal Identification being entered
subsequent to line ccnnection.
When a valid Terminal Identification has been entered but (1)
the terminal has an "out of service" status, or (2) the terminal
has an "in service" status but the Terminal Identification has
already been entered on another line.
In resFonse to an invalid Transaction Identification.
In response to an error during the sign-on/sign-off sequence.
If the input message is teo long.
If the transaction associated with the 7770 is abnormally
terminated.
If a 32-second timeout occurs, or if a five-second time out
occurs while entering infermation required by CICS.

MESSAGE:
This operand is used to define digital response messages for
the 7770 Audio Response Unit.
These messages must be constructed in
the form of hexadecimal constants, enclosed within single quotes, and
may contain up to 48 hexadecimal digits (24 bytes).
The first two
digits must contain binary zeros (00) to represent a one-byte "silence"
track address on the 7770; subsequent digits may be used to represent
up to 23 additional one-byte 7770 track addresses.
Por further details,
see the publicaticn ~Q~!~~~n~ ~g§~!!E~iQn l11Q ~~giQ B§§fon~~ Uni1
]Qg~1 ~ (GA27-2712).

See Appendix B for an example of a typical digital response
specification.

SPECIFY END OF TERMINAL CONTROL TABLE

The end of the Terminal Control Table is indicated to the control
system by the

DFHTCT TYFE=FINAL
macro instruction, which must be contained on the last control card
for the Terminal Ccptrol Table assembly.
An Assembler END card that
includes the label DFHTCTEA must te Frovided by the user to end the
assembly.

TERMINAL CONTROL TABlE EXAMPLE
Figure 2 illustrates the coding that is required to create a CICS
Terminal Control Table.
The terminal network described includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
]Q!~:

One DASD
Two 2260
Two 2740
feature
Two 1050

sequential terminal
Display Stations and one 1053 printer (local attachment)
Telecommunication terminals with the Station Control
Data Communication terminals (dial-up)

DFTRMLST macro definitions are required by BTAM devices. These
entries should be coded immmediately preceding DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
entries or immediately following DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL entries.

To be applicable to CICS/OS, or if converting from CICS/DOS to
CICS/OS, the fcllowing changes must be made to Figure 2:
• The DDNAME o~erand must be included unless the name specified in
the tSCNAME o~erand is an acceptable default.
• The MODE, MACRY and NCP operands must be included unless the
respective default values for these operands are acceptable.
• The FLNNAME operand must be included to specify the name of the
first communication line entry defined by the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
macro instruction.
If converting from CICS/DOS to CICS/OS, operands applicable only to
CICS/DOS need not be removed, since they are ignored by CICS/OS.
For other examples of Terminal Control
Appendix B.

~able

preparation, see

DFHTCT TYPE=INITIAL
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYS001,
DEVICE= 2314,
DSCNAME=DISKIN1
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYS006,
DEVICE=2314,
DSCNAME=DISKOT1
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=SEQUENTIAL,
TRMTYPE=DASD,
ISADSCN=DISKIN1,
OSADSCN=DISKOT1,
INAREAL=80
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=SAMB,
TRMPRTY=11,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2848,
DEVICE=L2260,
LINELST=(037,038,039) ,
SWITCH=NO,
DSCNAME=DTF60L
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=L2260,
DSCNAME=DTF60L,
INAREAL=960
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=L60A,
TRMPRTY=64,
LVUNIT=1
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=GAMB,
TRMPRTY=63,
L.VUNIT.=2
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=L600,
TRMTYPE=1053,
LVUNIT=3,
TRMPRTY=32,
TRMSTAT=RECEIVE,
LASTTRM=LINE
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2703,
DEVICE=2740,
FEATURE=(STC,CHK),
LINELST= (027) ,
SWITCH=NO,
DSCNAME=DTF40MD
Figure 2

(Part 1 of 2).

START OP TCT
SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL
INFORMATION

*
*

SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL
INFORMATION

*
*
*

DASD LINE ENTRY

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DASD TERMINAL ENTRY
DASD SYMBOLIC NAME
SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL
INFORMATION

*
*

LOCAL 2260 LINE ENTRY

2260 TERMINAL ENTRY
2260 SYMBOLIC NAME

*
*
*
*
*

**
*

FIRST UNIT ON A DTF
2260 TERMINAL ENTRY
2260 SYMBOLIC NAME

*
*
*
*
**

SECOND UNIT ON A DTF
1053 TERMINAL ENTRY
THIRD UNIT ON A DTF

*
*

SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL
INFORMATION

Coding for terminal control table

*
*
*
*
*
*

PL2740L1 DFTRMLST OPENLST,(46,45)
POLL LIST TERMINAL
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
2740 LINE ENTRY
*
ACC~lETH=,.BTAM ,
TRMTYPE=2740,
*
TRMMODL=1,
*
DSCNAME=DTF40MD,
*
BTAMRLN= 1,
*
LISTADR=PL2740L1,
POLL LIST NAME
*
INAREAL=240,
FEATURE=(SCONTROL,CHECKING)
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
2740 TERMINAL ENTRY
*
TRMIDNT=T41L,
2740 SYMBOLIC NAME
*
TRMADDR=46,
TERMINAL ADDRESS = L
*
TRMPRTY=127,
*
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
2740 TERMINAL ENTRY
*
2740 SYMBOLIC NAME
TRMIDNT=T41K,
*
TRMADDR=45,
TERMINAL ADDRESS = K
*
TRMPRTY=128,
*
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
*
LASTTRM=LINE
LAST TERMINAL ON LINE
SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
*
CU=2703,
INFORMATION
DEVICE=1050,
*
LINELST= (031) ,
*
SWITCH=YES,
*
DSCNAME=DTF1050
IDL1050 DFTRMLST DIALST,O, (6215,6415)
DIL1050A DFTRMLST DIALST,7,1239876, (6213)
DIL 10 SOB DFTRMLST DIALST, 7,1239875, (6413)
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
1050 LINE ENTRY
*
ACCME TH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=1050,
**
DSCN AME= DTF 1050,
INAREAL=80,
*
BTAMRLN=1,
*
LISTADR=IDL1050,
POLL LIST NAME
*
FEATURE=(AUTOANSR,AUTOCALL) ,
POOLADR=T50POOL,
*
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL
T50POOL DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
1050 TERMINAL ENTRY
*
TRMIDNT=T50A,
*
TRMADDR=DIL1050A,
*
TRMPRTY=203,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
1050 TERMINAL ENTRY
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
*
TRMIDNT=T50B,
TRMADDR=DIL1050B,
*
TRMPRTY=204,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
*
LASTTRM=POOL
LAST TERMINAL ON LINE
DFHTCT TYPE=FINAL
END OF TCT
END DFHTCTBA
POINT TO REQUIRED ENTRY LABEL

*
*

Figure 2 (Part 2 of 2).

Coding for terminal control table

The File Control Table is used to describe to CICS any user data
sets (f iles) that are processed by file management.
(Note that
sequential data sets should be defined as extrapartition destinations
using the DFHDCT macro.) The DFHFCT macro instruction is used to
generate entries in the table and to request the following services:
80

3.
4.

Set up the open list for the data sets to be used when
initializing and terminating the system.
Describe characteristics of the data sets, such as access method
used, record characteristics, types of service allowed.
Define use of the data set as a cross index and provide the
information to locate the next data set via indirect access.
Define the segments and segment sets of a record.

The data control information for each data set is included in the
DFHFCT macro instruction.
The indirect access and segmenting services
are mutually exclusive; the entry for one data set cannot specify both
services.
The following operands can be included in the DFHFCT macro
instruction:
DFHFCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET,
DATASET=name,
ACCMETH=BDAM,ISAM,DL/I,
SERVREQ=(GET,PUT,UPDATE,NEWREC,INDACC,SEGMENT,BROWSE,
KEY, NOEXCTL) ,
BLKKEYL=decimal value,
EXTENT=number,
CYLOFL=number,
INDAREA=symbolic name,
IN DSIZE=number,
INDSKIP=YES,
MSTIND=YES,
NRECDS=number,
IOSIZE=number,
IOWORK=symbolic name,
DEVICE=(n,m),
SRCHM=YES,number,
VERIFY=YES,
RELTYPE=DEC,HEX,BLK,
LRECL=(length,length) ,
BLKSIZE=(length,length) ,
RK P=nu mber ,
RECFORM=(format,characteristic,DCB record format),
OPEN=INITIAL,DEFERRED,
KEYLEN=length

*
**
*
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
**
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=INDACC,
OBJDSID=name,
IARLKP=number,
IALKFL=length,
IADADMI=RELREC,KEY,
IADIII=hexadecimal character,
DUP DS I D= n am e

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGHEAD,
SEGLENG=length,
INDDISP=number,
TSEGIND=BIT,DISPLACEMENT

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF,
SEGNAME=name,
SEGCHAR=(format,alignment) ,
S E GLENG=l ength

*
*
*

**
*
*
*
*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGSET,
SEGSET=name,
SEGNAME=(name1, ••• ,nameN)

*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGLAST
DFHFCT TYPE=F1NAL
DFHFCT TYPE=LOGICMOD
ESTABLISH CONTROL SECTION FOR FILE CONTROL TABLE
The control section into which the File Control Table is assembled
is established by means of the
DFHFCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

macro instruction, which must be coded as the first statement in the
source deck used to assemble the File Control Table.
SUFFIX:
This operand specifies a two-character alphameric suffix (other
than 'NO' which is reserved) for the File Control Table being assembled.
This suffix, if specified, is appended to the standard module name
(DFHFCT) and is used to name the module on the linkage editor output
library.
If this operand is omitted, a suffix is not provided.
DESCRIBE DATA SET FOR FILE MANAGEMENT
The physical characteristics of a data set are described to CICS
File Management by the
DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET
macro instruction. This macro instruction includes
provide information abou~ the access method, record
and the types of service allowed for the data set.
is used to generate a DTF for CICS/DOS or a DCB for

operands that
characteristics,
This information
CICS/OS.

If the DL/I facility of the IBM Information Management System
(IMS/360) is to be accessed under CICS/OS, the DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET
macro instruction is used to provide information about Data Language/I
(DL/~ data bases.
In this c~se, DATASET and ACCMETH are the only
operands required.
Physical characteristics of the DL/I data bases
need not be specified since they are specified during generation of
1MS Data Base Descriptions (DBD's).
The DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET macro instruction can include the following
operands:
DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET,
DATASET=name,
ACCMETH=BDAM,ISAM,DL/I,
SERVREQ=(GET,PUT,UPDATE,NEWREC,INDACC,SEGMENT,BROWSE,
KEY, NOEXCTL) ,
BLKKEYL=decimal value,
EXTENT=number,
CYLOFL=number,
INDAREA=symbolic name,
INDSIZE=number,
INDSKIP=YES,
MSTIND=YES,

*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*
*

N.RECDS=number,
IOSIZE=number,
IOWORK=symbolic name,
DEVICE=(n,m) ,
SRCHM=YES,number,
VERIFY=YES,
RELTYPE=DEC,HEX,BLK,
LRECL=(length,length),
BLKSIZE=(length,length) ,
RKP=number,
RECFORM=(fcrmat,characteristic,DCB record format),
OPEN=INITIAL,DEFERRED,
KEYLEN=length

*
*
**
*

*
**
*
*
*
*

DATASET:
Specifies the synbelic data set name te be used as the File
Centrol Table entry fo~ a specific data set.
This data set name can
consist cf from one to seven characters in the CICS/DOS systems or from
one to eight characters in the CICS/OS system.
Since this data set
name is used when generating the operating system control block
(DCB/bTF), it must be the same as the DOS file name or the as DDNAME
used in the job control statement defining the data set.
For a DL/I data base the DATASET operand must specify the same data
rase name as was specified in the Program Communication Block (PCB)
statements of Program Specification Block (PSB) generation (PSBGEN).
ACCMETH:
Specifies the method of organizatien for a specific data set.
ACCMETH=ISAM, ACCMETH=BDAM, or ACCMETE=DL/I must be specified.
SEFVREQ:
Used to define the types of service request that can be
Frocessed against the data set.
The parameters that can be included
are as fellows:

1•

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

]Q1g~

GET
PUT
UPDATE

Records on this data set may be read.
Records may be written on this data set.
Records may be updated on this data set.
UPDATE requires
that GET and PUT also be specified.
NEWREC Records may be added to the data set.
NEWREC requires
that PUT also be specified.
NEWREC must be specified
for OS ISAM data sets with variable-length records if
updating is to be performed.
INrACC Data set is used as a cross index. If INrACC is
specified, the DFEFCT TYPE=INrACC macro instruction must
be coded immediately fellowing this DATASET definition.
SEGMENT Records are segmented. If SEGMENT is specified, the
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGHEAD, DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF, DFHFCT
TYPE=SEGSET, and DFHFCT TYPE=SEGLAST macro instructions
mu.st be coded immediately following this DATASET
definition.
BROWSE Records may be sequentially retrieved from the data set.
When BROUSE is specified, DFHFCT TYPE=LOGICMOD must also
be specified.
KEY
Records are to be retrieved by key from DAM data set.
This parameter should be specified only if ACCMETH=BDAM.
NCEXCTL Records are net te re placed under exclusive control
when a read for update is requested.
Unless this
parameter is specified, a read-for-update will cause
the record to be Flaced under exclusive central (within
the crcs partition/region).
INrACC and SEGMENT cannot both be coded for the same data set.

·A data set used as a cross-index data set may not be defined as
blocked BtAM.
BIKKEYL: Specifies a decimal value from 1-255 which represents the
physical key length for a direct access record.
This operand must
always be specified for ISAM data sets and DAM data sets with physical
keys.
If a DAM aata set contains blocked records, and deblocking is
to be performed by using a logical key (that is, a key embedded within
each logical record), the logical key length is specified by using the
KEYLEN operand. If records are to be placed under exclusive control
during update operations, the physical key may not exceed 225 bytes.
EXTENT:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand
represents the maximun number of extents that are specified for a data
set.
This operand is required if ACCMETH=ISAM.
EXTENT=2 represents
a minimum value (one for prime data area and one for cylinder index).
If ACCMETH=BDAM, the presence of the EXTENT operand indicates that
relative addressing (as opposed to actual addressing) is being used
and the BELTYPE cperand must also be used.
CYLOFL:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is
required only if ACCMETH=ISAM.
It is used to specify the number of
tracks per cylinder which are reserved for cylinder overflow records.
INDAREA:
This operand is applicable only if ACCMETH=ISAM and specifies
the unique symbolic r.ame which is used by the DFHFCT macro to
automatically generate a main storage area (within the File control
Table) that will contain all or part of the cylinder index.
This
operand is required only if the cylinder index is to be processed in
main storage.
INDSIZE: This operand specifies the length (in bytes) of the cylinder
index area specified in the INDAREA operand.
The minimum number of
bytes can be calculated as:
(m+3)

(keylength + 6)

where "m" is the number of entries to be read into main storage at one
time, 3 is the number of dummy entries, and 6 is an abbreviated pointer
to the cylinder. If m is set to the number of prime data cylinders +
1, all of the cylinder index is read into main storage at one time.
This operand is applicable only if ACCMETH=ISAM and the INDAREA operand
is specified.
INDSKIP: Applicable only ~o the CICS/DOS systems, the INDSKIP=YES
operana indicates that the index skip feature is to be used if index
entries reside in main storage.
This operand is applicable only if
ACCMETH=ISAM and the INDAREA operand are specified.
MSTIND:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, the MSTIND=YES operand
indicates that a master index exists for the ISAM data set. This
operand is applicable only if ACCMETH=ISAM and should be specified only
if a master index exists for the data seti.
NR!CDS: This dperand specifies the number of logical records in a
block, and is called the blocking factor.
This operand is applicable
only to the CICS/DOS systems and only if ACCMETH=ISAM, and should be
84

specified only if the records are blecked.
For DOS ISAM data sets with
variable-length records within fixed-length blocks, this number has no
relation to the actual number of records within the block.
However,
the number specified multiFlied by the LRECL parameter must equal the
actual block size en the data set.
rOSIZE:
!his operand specifies the number of bytes in the main storage
arEa used when acding records to an ISAM data set.
This operand should
be used only when SERVREQ=NEWREC is also specified. For CrCS/DOS
systems, this operand causes a static work area to be generated as part
of the PCT entry for the data set being defined.
For the CICS/OS
system, the rOWORK oFerand must also be used to supply a symbolic name
te be associated with the work area. Por further details, refer to
DTFrs generaticn in the publication, ~Q2 2YQ§~Yi§Q~ ~ng lLQ ~~~Q§
(GC24-5031) or ISAM data set processing in the publication, Q2 ]~1~
~gngg§ID~n! 2§~~j~~§ (GC26-3746).

]Q!g:

Under CrCS/DOS with multi FIe ISAM files, whenever NEWREC services
are requested and some files specify rOSIZE while ethers do not,
two ISAM logic modules will be link-edited into the system. To
prevent this, specify IOSIZE for all ISAM files requesting NEWREC
services.

IOWORK:
Applicable only to the crcS/OS-STANDARD system, this operand
is used to specify the symbolic name of a main storage work area to be
used by the acc~ss method when adding records to ISAM data sets.
If
the data set contains variable-length records, this operand must be
specified.
It is permissible for the same symbolic name to be specified in more
than one data set definition, thus causing an area to be shared.
CICS
prevents the shared area from being used concurrently by more than one
transaction.
A static work area is generated within the PCT for each unique
symbclic name encountered during PCT generation.
The size of each area
is equal to the largest IOSIZE specified for each symbolic name.
DEVICE:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, the DEVICE=(n,m)
oFerand is used for both DAM and ISAM data sets.
"n" and "m" specify
2311, 2314, 2321, or 3330. For DAM, "n" specifies the device type on
which the data set resides.
("m" dces not apply to DAM.) Por rSAM,
"n" specifies the device type on which the prime data area (and overflow
area if present) reside.
For ISAM, "m" specifies the device type
containing the high-level index.
If this operand is omitted, the
default is DEVICE=(2314,2314).
SRCHM: This operand is aFplicable only to DAM keyed data sets and
provides for a multiple track search for keyed records.
If this operand
is omitted, multiple track search does not occur.
For CrCS/DOS systems, SRCHM=YES is the only allowable form of the
operand. If fixed-length keyed records are to be added to the file,
SRCHM=YES must be specified.
For the CICS/OS system, SRCHM=number is the only applicable form of
the operand, where "number" represents the number of tracks or blocks
to be searched.
The default is SRCHM=O.
For further details, see the SRCHM operand under DTFDA generation
in the publication, ~Q§ 2~Q~!V~§Q~ Eng lLQ Hg£~Q§ (GC24-5031) or BDAM
85

data set processing in the publication,
(GC26-3746) •

Q2 Q212

~2nsg~m~n! ~~r!i£~§

The VERIFY=YES operand indicates that the user wants to check
VERIFY:
the parity of disk records after they are written.
If this operand is
omitted, records are not verified after a write request.
RELTYPE: This operand applies only to tAM data sets and specifies that
relative addressing is being used in the block reference portion of
the Record Identification field.
If the RELTYPE operand is omitted,
absolute addressing is assumed (that is, MBBCCHHR).
If RELTYPE=DEC,
the zoned decimal format is being used. If RELTYPE=HEX, the hexadecimal
relative track and record format is being used.
If RELTYPE=BLK (Crcs/os
only), relative tlock addressing is being used.
For further details,
see "Data Base Considerations" in the CICS Application Programmer's
Reference Manual (SH20-1 0 47) •
IRECL:
Specifies the maximum length (in bytes) of the logical record.
For DOS ISAM data sets with variable-length records within fixed-length
blocks, this numter has no relation to the actual length of any logical
record.
However, the number specified, multiplied by the NRECDS
parameter, must equal the actual block size on the data set. This
operand must always be specified.
For CICS/DOS, this operand should contain only one value (parameter).
This value should not be enclosed within parentheses.
If the user of CICS/OS wishes to have a LRECL value generated in
the DCE, he must specify that value in the second parameter of the
operand; for example, LRECL=(50,50), where the first "50" pertains to
the FCT and the second "50" pertains to the DCB.
If the second
parameter is not specified, the DCB is generated without a LRECL value.
If the data set is BtAM organized, the second parameter should n~Y~r
be specified.
]Q!~~

NRECDS=1,LRECL=blocksize, is not allowed.
The most advantageous
specification is NRECDS=2,LRECL=(blocksize/2).

BIKSIZE: Specifies the length (in bytes) of the block.
If blocks are
variable-length, the length specified should be the maximum block
length.
If the NEWREC or BROWSE operands are used for DAM fixed-length
data sets with keys, BLKSIZE must be (LREeL + BLKKEYL) for unblocked
records or (LRECL * BLOCKING FACTOR + ELKKEYL) for blocked records.
If blocks are undefined, for CICS/OS the length specified should be
the maximum block length, for CICS/DOS the length should be the maximum
block length + 8. This operand must always be specified.
For CICS/DOS, this operand. should contain only one value (parameter).
This value should not be enclosed within farentheses.
If the user of CICS/OS wishes to have a BLKSIZE value generated in
the DCE, he must specify that value in the second parameter of the
operand; for exaRple, BLKSIZE=(250,250), where the first "250" pertains
to the FCT and the second "250" pertains to the DCB.
If the second
paramete~ is not specified, the DCB is generated without a BLKSIZE
value.
The DCB value (second parameter) should always specify the true
block size while the FCT value (first parameter) may, for DAM data
sets, include the BLKKEYL value.
In no case should the first BLKSIZE
value specified, be less than the actual blocksize of the data set.

RKP:
Specifies. the starting position of the key field in the record
relative to the beginning of the record (position zero for DAM and rSAM
data sets except position one for DOS ISAM data sets).
with
variable-length records, this operand must include the four-byte LLbb
field at the beginning of each logical record.
This operand must always
be specified for data sets that have keys within each logical record
or when crowsing.
]g.:t.§:

SEBVREQ=EROWSE requires embedded keys in 'the data field in DOS
ISAM, therefore the RKP parameter is required.
In DOS ISAM, if
records are unblocked, the following MNOTE will be generated in
the DTFIS: O,'KEYLOC INVALID,PARAMETER IGNORED'.

RECFORM: Describes the format and characteristics of records on the
data set. If this operand is omitted, the default is UNDEFINED.
For CrCS/DOS, if NEWREC is specified for undefined records, BLKSIZE
must include an additional eight bytes for the ceunt field.
The fermat of the data set is described using one of the following
parameters:
1.
2.
3.

FIXED
VARIABLE
UNDEFINED

Records are fixed length.
Records are variable length.
Records are of undefined length.

The characteristic of the data set is specified using one of the
fcllowing parameters:
1.
2.

ELCCKED
UNBLOCKED

Records are blocked.
Records are not blocked.

If the user of crcs/os wishes to have the record format specified
in the DCB, he must specify that value in the third parameter of the
operand; for exareple, RECFCRM=(FIXED,BLOCKED,FBS).
If the third
parameter is not specified, the record format is not specified in the
DCB.
]Q!~:

For CICS/OS ISAM data sets with BROWSE option specified, a DCB
RECFM parameter of VB or FB is always generated regardless of
whether or not the data set is blocked.

OPEN:
The OPEN operand is used to specify the initial status of the
data set. OPEN=INITIAL causes the data set to be opened by System
Initialization, while OPEN=DEFERRED will not open the data set until
the user indicates he wishes it opened by using the Master Terminal
Open/Close service function or the use of a DFHOC macro instruction in
an applicatien prcgram.
If this oFerand is omitted, the default is
CFEN=INITIAL.
KEYLEN:
The KEYLEN operand is used to specify the length of the logical
key for the deblecking of DAM data sets.
This key is usually embedded
and located through use of the RKP operand.
The length of the recorded
(physical) key for DAM and ISAM data sets is specified in the ELKKEYL
oFerand, and may be different from the value specified for KEYLEN.
This operand must always be specified when logical keys are used.
DESCRIBE CBOSS-INtEX tATA SET RECOBD
The record on a cross-index data set that points to the next data
set to be read is describ8d using the
87

DFHFCT TYPE=INDACC
macro instruction. This macro instruction may also contain information
regarding duplicate records which may be referenced by this index
record, including a pointer to a duplicate data set which contains
additional identifying information.
If this macro instruction is used,
the SERVREQ operand of the DFHFCT !YPE=DA!ASET macro instruction must
include GET and INDACC.
For further information on indirect accessing,
refer to "Data Base Considerations" in the CICS Application Programmer's
Reference Manual (SH20-1047).
The DFHFCT TYPE=INDACC macro instruction Can include the following
cperands:
DFHFCT TYPE=INtACC,
OBJDSID=name,
IARLKP=number,
IALKPL=length,
IAIADMI=RELREC,KEY,
IADIII=hexadecimal character,
DUPDSID=name

*
*
*
*
*

OBJDSID:
specifies the name of the data set referenced by the
cross-index data set record.
This name can consist cf from one to
seven characters in the CICS/DOS systems or from one to eight characters
in the CICS/OS system. This operand must always be specified.
IABLKP:
specifies the relative location within the cross-index data
set record of the Record Identification field which is to be used to
access the object data set. The displacement is relative to the
beginning of the record (position zero).
This operand must always-be
specifiea.
IALKFL:
Specifies tbe length (in bytes) of the Record Identification
field that is to be used to access the object data set.
This operand
must always be specified.
IADADMI: Supplies tbe argument type (RELREC or KEY) for the deblocking
of a record from a blocked BDAM data set. IADADMI=RELREC signifies
that the deblocking technique is relative record.
IADADMI=KEY signifies
that the aeblocking technique is key. This operand can be used only
if the data set (file) to which this index data set points is the
primary (target) data set.
If this operand is omitted, and if the data
set to which this index data set points is a blocked BDAM data set,
the entire block is returned to thE user in the File Control area.
IADIII:
This operand is used to specify a one-byte user-assigned code
which signifies that the data in the Record Identification field refers
to a duplicate data set rather than the normal object data set. This
code must be contained in the first position of the Record
Identification field and must be different from any other data that
would normally appear in this position. This operand must always be
specified if a duplicates data set name is specified (DUPDSID).
DUPDSID: This operand is used to specify the identification for the
duplicate aata set associated with the cross-index data set. This
identification can contain up to seven characters for CICS/DOS and up
to eight characters for CICS/OS.
This operand may be omitted if a
d~plicates data set does not exist.
88

DEFINE HEADER OF SEGMENTED RECORD
If the records on a data set are segmented, the
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGHEAD
macro instruction defines for File Management the header portion (root
or control segment) of a segmented record.
TYPE=SEGHEAD is the first
of four operands which must be coded to specify segmented records.
The DFHFCT TYPE=SEGHEAD macro instructisn includes the following
operands:
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGHEAD,
SEGLENG=length,
INDDISP=number,
TSEGIND=BIT,DISPLACEMENT

*
*

specifies the length (in bytes) of the header portion (root
SEGLENG:
segment) of the record.
This operand must always be specified.
INDDISP: Provides the displacement of the segment indicator field
relative to the beginning of the record (position zero).
This operand
must always be specified.
TSEGIND:
specifies the type of segment indicator field
DISPLACEMENT).
The default is TSEGIND=BIT.

(BIT or

DESCRIBE EACH SEGMENT OF A SEGMENTED RECORD
Each segment of a segmented record is described by means of the
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF
macro instruction. TYPE=SEGDEF must be coded for every segment in the
record in the sequence in which it occurs within the record.
Definition
of the last segment must be followed by the TYPE=SEGLAST operand which
must precede the coding of the TYPE=SEGSET operands to automatically
generate SEGSET=ALL as the first segment pattern in the File Control
Table.
The DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF macro instruction includes the following
operands:
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF,
SEGNAME=name,
SEGCHAR=(format,alignment) ,
SEGLENG=length
SEGNAME:
segment.

*
*
*

Specifies the eight-character symbolic name (label) of the
This operand must always be specified.

SEGCHAR: Indicates characteristics (format, alignment) of the segment.
If the SEGCHAR operand is omitted, the defaults are FIXED format, BYTE
alignment. If one characteristic is specified, both must be specified.
The format of a segment is described using one of the following
parameters:

FIXED, the segment is fixed length.
VARIABLE, the segment is variable length.
The first byte of
the segment indicates the length of the segment.

When a segment is brought into main storage, the alignment is
described using one of the following parameters:
1.

2.
3.
4.

BYTE, the segment has no aligLment.
HALF, the segment is halfword aligned.
FULL, the segment is fullword aligned.
DOUBLE, the segment is doubleword aligned.

SEGLENG:
Specifies the length (in bytes) of the segment; up to 255
bytes can be specified (the length of the largest segment allowed).
If the segment is variable length, this value represents the maximum
length.
This operand must always be specified.
DESCRIBE SEGMEN! SETS
The pattern of segments for a particular data set is described using
the
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGSET
macro instruction.

As many segment sets as desired may be specified.

The DFHFCT TYPE=SEGSET macro instruction includes the following
operands:
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGSET,
SEGSET=name,
SEGNAME=(name1, ••• ,nameN)

*
*

SEGSET:
Specifies the eight-character symbolic name (label) assigned
to a particular pattern of segments.
This label is used in coding the
DFHFC macro instruction when segment services are required.
The label
may be the same as one of the segment names specified previously in a
SEGDEF macro instruction but must be different from any other SEGSE~
name specified.
The label ALL should not be used since CICS
automatically creates a universal segment set with this label.
This
operand must always be specified.
.
SEGNAME:
specifies the name of each segment to be included in the
segment set, in the sequence in which the segment occurs in the
segmented record.
SEGNAME must the same name as that specified in a
previous DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF macro instruction.
SPECIFY LAST SEGMENT SET
The end of the segment definitions and the end of the segment set
definitions is indicated by the
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGLAST
macro instruction, which must be coded immediately following the last
macro segment definition (TYPE=SEGDEF) and immediately following the
last segment set (TYPE=SEGSET) for a data set. This macro instruction
generates SEGSET=ALL, which includes all the segments in the record,
as the first entry in the segment set portion of the File Control Table.

SPECIFY END OF FILE CONTEOL TABLE
The end of the File Centrel Table is indicated by the
DFHFCT TYPE=FINAL
macro instruction, which creates a dummy table entry to signal the
tacle end. This macro instruction is the last statement before the
Assembler END statement, except in the CICS/DOS systems where the user
may also elect te code the DFHFCT TYPE=LOGICMOD macro instruction.
The
Assembler END statement must include the label DFHFCTBA.
CREA!E SUPERSET ISAM LOGIC MODULE (CICS/DOS only)
A superset ISAM logic module can be assembled in the CICS/DOS systems
cy issuing the
DFHFCT TYPE=LOGICMOD
macro instruction as the last statement before the Assembler END
statement.
The resulting logic module meets all the processing
requirements for defined ISAM data sets with the following exception.
If multiple ISAM data sets have been d.efined with the "add" function
(SEBVBEC=NEWBEC) and some of the data sets have the "prime data in main
sterage" characteristic (IOSIZE=number) while other data sets do not,
an additional logic module is required to support those data sets which
do not have the "prime data in main storage" characteristic.
The user
can circumvent this situation by ensuring that ISAM data sets with the
"add" feature are all defined either with or without the "prime data
in main storage" characteristics (IOSIZE=number).
If the user is required to assemble an additional ISAM logic module,
he is so notified in a series of diagnostic messages at the end of the
File Control Table listing.
Also included in these messages are the
required parameter values he must ~pecify to create a superset logic
module.
]Qi~:

If SERVBEQ=BBOUSE is specified by any DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET macro
instruction, then DFHTCT TYPE=LOGICMOD must also be specified
in that File Control Table.

Fer further details ccncerning logic module preparation, see the
~1~~L~2~ QE~!~!i2~~ gYig~·

FIlE CeNTROL TABLE EXAMPLE
Figure 3 illustrates ·the coding that is required to create a File
Control Table for three data sets.
The first data set in the table is
a cross-index data set that provides indirect access to a master data
set and may reference a duplicate data set.
The master data set
requires segmenting services.

DFHFCT TYPE=INITIAL
DFHFCT 'IYPE=DATASET,
DA'IASET=INDEX,
ACCMETH=ISAM,
SERVREQ=(GET,
PUT,
UPDATE,
NEWREC,
INtAct) ,
RECFORM=(FIXED,BLOCKED)
LRECL=37,
BLKSIZE=370,
ELKKEYL=5

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=INDACC,
OBJDSID=MASTER,
IARLKP=26,
IALKFL=11,

THIS tATA SET REFERENCES
A DATA SET NAMED MASTER,
WHOSE KEY IS FOUND AT
POSITION 26 OF THIS
RECORD. IT IS 11 CHARACTERS.
IADIII=FF,
IT MAY POINT TO A DUPLICATES
IUPDSID=DUPLICA
DATA SET NAMED DUPLICA.
DFHFCT 'IYPE=DATASET,
TABLE ENTRY FOR A EDAM
tATASET=DUPLICA,
DUFLICATES DATA SET WHICH
ACCMETH=BDAM,
CONTAINS KEYS TO THE MASTER
LRECL=22,
DA'IA SET. IT IS A READ-ONLY
SERVREQ=(GET),
DATA SET.
RECFORM=(FIXED,UNBLOCKED),
BLKSIZE=22

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET,
TABLE ENTRY FOR AN ISAM DATA
DATASET=MASTER,
SET WHICH MAY BE UPDATED AND
ACCMETH=ISAM,
ADDED TO, AND WHOSE RECORDS
SERVREQ=(GET,
ARE SEGMENTED.
PUT,
UPDATE,
NEWREC,
SEGMENT) ,
RECFORM=(FIXED,BLOCKED),
LRECL=310,
ELKSIZE=1550,
RKP=11,
ELKKEYL=5

*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGHEAD,
SEGLENG=2,
INDDISP=2,
'ISEGIND=BIT
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF,
SEGNAME=SEGMENT1,
SEGCHAR=(FIXED,
DOUBLE) ,
SEGLENG=50
DFHFCT 'IYPE=SEGDEF,
SEGNAME=SEGMENT2,
SEGCHAR=(VARIABLE,
HALF),
SEGLENG=70

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Figure 3 (Part 1 of 2).

START OF FILE CONTROL TABLE
TAELE ENTRY FOR AN ISAM
DA'IA SET USED AS A CROSSINDEX DATA SET FOR A DATA SET
NAMED MASTER.
THIS DATA SET MAY BE
UPIATED AND ADDED TO.

SEGMENT HEAtER DESCRIPTION

SEGMENT *1 OF THE RECORD IS
A FIXED-LENGTH, I?OUBLEWORD
ALIGNED FIELD.
SEGMENT #2 OF THIS RECORD IS
A VARIABLE LENGTH HALFWORD
ALIGNED FIELD WHOSE MAXIMUM
LENGTH IS 70 BY'IES.

Coding for fi Ie control table

*
*
*

*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF,
SEGMENT #3 OF THE RECORD IS
SEGNAME=SEGMENT3,
A FIXED-LENGTH UNALIGNED
SEGLENG=45
FIELD
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGLAST
END OF SEGMENT DEFINITIONS
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGSET,
SEGSET=PATTERN1,
SEGNAME=(SEGMENT1,SEGMENT2,SEGMENT3)
DFHFCT TYPE=SEGLAST
LAST SEGMENT ENTRY FOR MASTER
DFHFCT TYPE=FINAL
END OF FILE CONTROL TABLE
DFHFCT TYPE=LOGICMOD
CREATE DOS ISAM LOGIC MODULE
END DFHFCTBA
POINT TO REQUIRED ENTRY LABEL
Figure 3 (Part 2 of 2).

*
*

Coding for file control table

The Destination Control Table (DCT) is used to describe to CICS the
destination name and certain other characteristics of data that is
transient to CICS (that is, to be processed by the Transient Data
Control program).
Entries are made to the DCT by coding the Destination
Control Table macro instruction (DFHDCT).
Sequential extrapartition destinations are used for storing data
external to the CICS partition/region or for retrieving data from
outside the partition/region.
Data stored for this purpose includes
data received from terminals or other data created internally as the
result of some transaction requirement identified by a user-written
program.
Extrapartition data may be both input and output data and is
processed using QSAM under CICS/OS or SAM under CICS/DOS.
Destination Control Table macro instructions are also used to specify
intrapartition destinations.
A single data set is used as intermediate
storage for data to be directed to multiple intrapartition data
destinations.
Intrapartition data may be ultimately either transmitted
upon request to the destination terminal or retrieved sequentially from
the temporary data set for other uses.
The user can specify, through
the Destination Control Table, that a task is to be created when a
certain number of records (trigger level) has been accumulated for an
intrapartition destination.
Included in the Destination Control Table is the appropriate
user-prepared data set control information for all resident
extrapartition data sets~
This data set control information must follow
the DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction.
The extrapartition data
sets supported under CICS are:
blocked, unblocked, fixed, or variable.
CICS provides the capability, in conjunction with the Dynamic
Open/Close facility, to have nonresident (transient) data set control
blocks and associated input/output areas and logic modules.
Main
storage normally encumbered for these storage areas is therefore
available to the dynamic main storage area until the use of the storage
ar€as is required.
Nonresident data set control blocks are defined
through the combination of DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL and DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI
macro instructions.
Whether the specified destinations are extrapartition or
intrapartition (or indirect destinations pointing to either
extrapartition or intrapartition destinations), the symbolic names of
the destinations must be provided by the user.
Refer to Appendix A
for a listing of the required destination identification (DESTID)
entries.

The following operands can be included in the Destination Control
Table (DFHDCT) macro instruction:
DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx,
TRNSUFX= (xx, ••• ) ,
SEPASMB=YES,NO

*
*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=name,
MODNAME=name,
DEVICE=1403,1404,1443,1445,2311,2314,3330,TAPE,
BLKSIZE=length,
DEVADDR=symbolic address,
RECFORM=FIXUNB,FIXBLK,VARUNB,VARBLK,
FILABL=STD,NO,
TYPEFLE=INPUT,OUTPUT,RDBACK,
RECSIZE=length,
REWIND=UNLOAD,NORWD,LEAVE,REREAD,
TPMARK=NO,
BUFNO=number,
ERROPT=SKIP,IGNORE,
SUFFIX=xx

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA,
DSCNAME=name,
DESTID=name,
OPEN=INITIAL,DEFERRED,
RESIDNT=YES,NO

*
*
*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA,
DESTID=name,
REUSE=YES,NO,
TRIGLEV=number,
DESTFAC=TERMINAL,FILE,
TRANSID=name

*
*
*
*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=INDIRECT,
DESTID=name,
INDDEST=name

*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL
ESTABLISH CONTROL SECTION FOR DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE
The entry point and beginning address for the Destination Control
Table being defined are established by the
DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx,
TRNSUFX= (xx, ••• ) ,
SEPASMB=YES,NO
macro instruction.
SUFFIX:
Specifies a two-character alphameric suffix (other than 'NO'
which is reserved) for the Destination Control Table being assembled.
This suffix, if specified, is appended to the standard module name
(DFHDCT) and is used to name the module on the linkage editor output
library. If this operand is omitted, a suffix is not provided.

*
*

TRNSUFX: Specifies a list of one- or two-character alphameric suffixes
associated with nonresident data set control blocks.
Any suffix
appearing subsequently in the SUFFIX operand of the DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI
macro instruction must also appear in this list.
These suffixes are
used to punch the control cards for the CICS/DOS Linkage Editor
(DFHLINK) or for the OS Linkage Editor (LINKEDIT).
Up to 255 suffixes
can be specified.
Notg~

During link-edit of DFHDCT there is one unresolved ADCON in each
phase created under direction of TRNSUFX in DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL.
This message does not imply an error.

SEPASMB: The SEPASMB=YES operand is used to indicate that only data
set control information is to be generated; that is, the DFHDCT
TYPE=INITIAL, DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI, and DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL macro
instructions are the only DFHDCT macro instructions to be included.
The default is SEPASMB=NO.
SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL INFORMATION
The data set control blocks (DTF's in CICS/DOS; DCB's in CICS/OS)
are generated in response to the
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI
macro instruction.
This macro instruction is needed only for
extrapartition transient data and must have a DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA macro
instruction associated with it for resident data set control blocks.
Note that all DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instructions must be is~ued
immediately following the DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction and
preceding any DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA, DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA, or DFHDCT
TYPE=INDIRECT macro instructions.
The DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction can include the following
operands:
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=name,
MODNAME=name,
DEVICE=1403,1404,1443,1445,2311,2314,3330,TAPE,
BLKSIZE=length,
DEVADDR=~ymbolic address,
RECFORM=FIXUNB,FIXBLK,VARUNB,VARBLK,
FILABL=STD,NO,
TYPEFLE=INPUT,OUTPUT,RDBACK,
RECSIZE=length,
REWIND=UNLOAD,NORWD,LEAVE,REREAD,
TPMARK=NO,
BUFNO=number,
ERROPT=SKIP,IGNORE,
SUFFIX=xx

*
*
*
**
*
**
*
*

*
*
*
*

DSCNAME: Specifies the data set control name.
This name must be the
same as that specified in the DSCNAME operand of the DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA
macro instruction and is limited to seven characters in CICS/DOS or
eight characters in CICS/OS. For CICS/OS, the DSCNAME is also the
DDNAME and DCBNAME.
MODNAME:
Applicable only to the CICS/DOS systems, this operand is used
to specify the name of the logic module to be used to process the

transient data set. If this operand is omitted, a standard DOS name
is generated for calling the logic module.
This operand can be used in conjunction with the DOS Subset/Superset
Logic Module facility to reduce the number of logic modules required
to process sequential data sets (where supersetting is permissible).
DEVICE:
Applicable only to CICS/DOS, this operand specifies the type
of input/output device.
Valid device types are:
1403, 1404, 1443,
1445, 2311, 2314, 3330, and TAPE. This operand is ignored in CICS/OS;
instead, the device specified through the data definition (DD) statement
is used.
BLKSIZE:
Specifies the length (in bytes) of the block (maximum length
for variable length records).
For DOS disk output data sets, add eight
bytes required by Logical IOCS for creation of the count field.
DEVADDR:
Applicable only to CICS/DOS, this operand specifies the
symbolic unit address.
This operand is not required for disk data sets
when the symbolic address is provided via the CICS/DOS EXTENT card.
RECFORM:
Specifies the record format of the data set.
Valid entries
are:
FIXUNB, FIXBLK, VARUNB, and VARBLK. For CICS/DOS, the default
is RECFORM=FIXUNB. For CICS/OS, no default is provided; the record
format specified in the data definition (DD) statement is used.
FILABL:
Applicable only to CICS/DOS, this operand specifies the type
of label on tape data sets.
Valid entries are STD or NO. The default
is FILABL=NO.
Indicates whether the data set is an input or output data
TYPEFLE:
set. The default is TYPEFLE=INPUT •. For CICS/OS, TYPEFLE=RDBACK
specifies an input data set to be read backwards.

!2ig:

An extrapartition data set may be either INPUT ·or OUTPUT but
not both.
A system ABEND or unpredictable results may occur if
output operations are specified for an INPUT data set or if
input operations are specified for an OUTPUT data set.

RECSIZE: Specifies the length (in bytes) of the record (maximum length
for variable length records).
REWIND:
Indicates the disposition of a tape data set.
Valid entries
are UNLOAD and NORWD for CICS/DOS, and LEAVE and REREAD for CICS/OS.
TPMARK:
Applicable only to CICS/DOS, the TPMARK=NO operand indicates
that the writing of a tapemark at end of data set (file) is to be
suppressed.
BUFNO:
Specifies the number of buffers to be provided.
For CICS/DOS,
any value other than 2 defaults to 1. For CICS/OS, any number up to
255 may be specified; the default value is 1.

ERROPT:
Specifies the error option to be performed in the event of
error.
Valid parameters are SKIP and IGNORE.
ERROPT=SKIP causes the
block that caused the error to be skipped.
ERROPT=IGNORE causes the
block to be accepted.
The default is ERROPT=IGNORE.
SUFFIX:
Specifies a one- or two-character alphameric suffix for the
nonresident data set control block being generated.
The use of this
operand indicates that the data set control block being generated is
nonresident.
Nonresident data set control blocks reside on the
Real-Time Relocatable Library (DFHRPL) under the unique name DFHTRNxx,
where "xx" is the suffix specified in this operand.
The user-provided
suffix characters must also be specified in the DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL,
TRNSUFX= (xx, ••• ) list.
For each data set control block generated via the DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
SUFFIX=xx macro instruction, the same suffixed name must be specified
in the preparation of the Program Processing Table (DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY,
PROGRAM=DFHTRNxx) •
For further information on the above operands, refer to the
publication QQ~ ~~ggrvi§Q£ ~nQ In~Y~LQut£gi Mac£Q§ (GC24-5037) or the
publication Q~ ~ypervisQ£ ~nQ n~ta Man~ggmeni tl£££Q In§i~~iion2
(GC28-6647) •
SPECIFY EXTRAPARTITION DESTINATIONS
Destinations external to the system are specified using the
DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA
macro instruction.
This macro instruction must be coded once for every
extra partition destination.
Extrapartition destinations that use nonresident data set control
blocks are not required to be associated with a specific data set
definition.
When such destinations are opened, a one- or two-character
suffix must be supplied to the Dynamic Open/Close program that indicates
which nonresident data set control blocks are to be used for the
destinations.
The DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA macro instruction includes the following
operands:
DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA,
DSCNAI1E=name,
DESTID=name,
OPEN=INITIAL,DEFERRED,
RESIDNT=YES,NO

*
*

DSCNAME:
Specifies the data set name the user must include in the
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction for destinations that use resident
data set control blocks.
This operand is not applicable for
destinations that use nonresident data set control blocks.
Nonresident
data set control blocks are identified when the destination is opened.
DESTID:
Specifies the symbolic name of the extrapartition destination.
The symbolic name is the same as that used in the transient data macro
instruction (DFHTD) to specify the destination.
Any destination
identification of more than four characters is truncated on the right.
Refer to Appendix A for a listing of the required destination
identification entries.
97

OPEN:
Applicable only to extrapartition destinations that use resident
data set control blocks, this operand is used to specify how the data
set associated with this destination is to be opened.
OPEN=INITIAL
indicates that the data set is to be opened during system
initialization.
OPEN=DEFERRED indicates that the user will open the
data set during real-time execution of CICS.
The default is
OPEN=INITIAL for destinations that use resident data set control blocks.
RESIDNT:
Indicates whether this destination is to use resident or
nonresident data set control blocks.
The default is RESIDNT=YES.
Those
CICS/DOS extrapartition sequential disk data sets that are to be closed
and re-opened by the dynamic Open/Close function of the Master Terminal
Program must be defined as nonresident or records may be lost.,
SPECIFY INTRA PARTITION DESTINATIONS
Destinations for messages that are to be logged temporarily by CICS
are specified using the
DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA
macro instruction.
This macro instruction must be coded once for every
intrapartition destination.
The DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA macro instruction can include the following
operands:
DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA,
DESTID=name,
REUSE=YES,NO,
TRIGLEV=number,
DESTFAC=TERMINAL,FILE,
TRANSID=name
DESTID:
Specifies the symbolic name of the intrapartition destination.
The symbolic name is the same as that used in the Transient Data macro
instruction (DFHTD) to specify the destination.
Any destination
identification of more than four characters is truncated on the right.
Refer to Appendix A for a listing of the required destination
identification entries.
If the ultimate destination of the data is a terminal and if
automatic task initiation is associated with the destination, the name
specified in the DESTID operand must be the same as the name specified
in the TRMIDNT operand of the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction.
The user may find it convenient to use the same naming convention for
terminal destinations and data set destinations, regardless of whether
automatic task initiation is requested.
REUSE:
REUSE=YES specifies that intra partition storage tracks for this
destination are to be released as they are read and returned to the
pool of available tracks.
REUSE=NO specifies that intrapartition
storage tracks for this destination are not to be released until a
Transient Data PURGE macro instruction is issued; the PURGE macro
instruction causes all tracks associated ·with this DESTID to be
released. The ~efault is REUSE=YES.
TRIGLEV:
Specifies the number of data records (trigger level) to be
accumulated for a destination before automatically requesting the
creation of a task to prot~~s these records.
The ultimate destination
98

*
**
**

is normally a data set or terminal.
If the TRANSID operand has been
used, and if no trigger level has been specified, TRIG LEV defaults to
a value of 1.
The maximum which may be specified is 32767.
(If the
ultimate destination is a 2741 Communication terminal, the task to be
initiated is not initiated until that terminal receives data.)
If TRIGLEV=O, automatic task initiation does not occur; the data
records accumulate until some program, however initiated, is executed
and issues a DFHTD TYPE=GET macro instruction to access the records.
If the execution of a DFHTD TYPE=PUT macro instruction results in the
trigger level being reached (or exceeded) for a non-terminal
destination, and if either a "maximum tasks" or "short on storage"
condition exists for CICS, the task to be automatically initiated is
not initiated until a subsequent PUT to the same destination occurs
with the stress condition no longer existing.
DESTFAC: If TRANSID has been specified, DESTFAC specifies the type of
destination (TERMINAL or FILE) that the queue represents.
If no
destination is specified, the default is DESTFAC=TERMINAL.
If DESTFAC=TERMINAL, task initiation to process the queue is by
Terminal Control.
If DESTFAC=FILE, task initiation is by Transient
Data Control.
TRANSID:
Provides identification for the transaction that is to be
automatically initiated when the trigger level is reached.
If this
operand is omitted, the application program must initiate the read
operation.
SPECIFY INDIRECT DATA DESTINATIONS
"'--.-

Indirect data destinations can be specified within the Destination
Control Table using the
DFHDCT TYPE=INDIRECT
macro instruction.
The indirect data destination does not point to an
actual data set but instead points to another destination.
For example, assume the user develops functional symbolic names for
the destinations of several message types.
These, in turn, may point
to one actual destination.
At a later time the user might choose to
direct one of the message types to another destination.
The user does
not change his programs but only alters the indirect destination name.
The DFHDCT TYPE=INDIRECT macro instruction can include the following
operands:
DFHDCT TYPE=INDIRECT,
DESTID=name,
INDDEST=name

DESTID:
Specifies the four-character symbolic name of a particular
indirect destination.
The symbolic name is the same as that used in
the Transient Data macro instruction (DFHTD).
Refer to Appendix A for
a listing of the required destination identification entries.
INDDEST:
Specifies the symbolic identification of an intrapartition
or extrapartition destination.
This identification must be the same
as the DESTID of the actual destination.

TERMINATE ENTRIES FOR THE DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE
Entries for the Destination Control Table are terminated by the
DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL
macro instruction.
This macro instruction must be the last statement
in the assembly of every Destination Control Table before the Assembler
END statement.
The Assembler END statement must include the label
DFHDCTBA.
NONRESIDENT EXTRAPARTITION DATA SET DEFINITION
The definition of nonresident extrapartition data sets is
accomplished through use of the DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL and DFHDCT
TYPE=SDSCI macro instructions.
The data set control blocks and
associated input/output areas are generated and cataloged to the
Real-Time Relocatable Program Library (DFHRPL) as a separate table for
each nonresident data set control block to be used.
There must be an
entry in the Processing Program Table (PPT) for each nonresident data
set control block.
The format of the name is DFHTRNxx, where "xx"
represents the suffix character(s) specified in the DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
SUFFIX=xx macro instruction.
The PPT entry for these data set control
blocks must include the RELOAD=YES operand.
In CICS/OS, the necessary access methods are acquired when data sets
are opened.
Therefore references to transient access methods (logic
modules) in the following discussion are applicable primarily to
CICS/DOS.
In the CICS/DOS systems, the logic modules for the nonresident data
set control blocks may also be transient. If the use of nonresident
logic modules is desired, the logic modules must be assembled and
cataloged to DFHRPL prior to execution.
The logic modules are assembled
using the standard DOS SAM macro instructions and must be cataloged
with the same program name generated by the nonresident data set control
block for which it is to be used.
The name can be found in the assembly
of the data set control block.
Unless otherwise specified in the DFHDCT
TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction, this name is the standard DOS logic module
name.
The PPT entry for each nonresident logic module must include the
RELOAD=YES operand.
In CICS/DOS, if the DCT is generated to include the nonresident data
set control block definitions, the logic modules for both the resident
and nonresident data set control blocks are link edited into the DCT.
To allow the logic modules to be transient, the DCT should be assembled
including only the resident data set control block definitions (DFHDCT
TYPE=SDSCI).
A separate assembly can then be accomplished to generate
only the nonresident data set control blocks.
To perform this
operation, include a DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL, TRNSUFX=(xx, ••• ) ,SEPASMB=YES
macro instruction, followed by DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instructions
for all nonresident data set definitions, followed by the DFHDCT
TYPE=FINAL macro instruction.
DESTINATION

CO~TBOL

TABLE EXAMPLES

Figure 4 contains an example of the coding required to generate a
Destination Control Table that uses resident data set control blocks.

100

DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=DFHXTRA,
DEVADDR=SYSLST,
DEVICE=1403,
RECFORM=FIXUNB
DFHDCT TY PE=EXTR A,
DS CNAME= DF HXTRA,
DESTID=CASH
DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA,
DESTID=GAMA
DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA,
DESTID=SAMA
DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA,
DESTID=DAMA,
TRIGLEV=5,
DESTFAC=TERMINAL,
TRANSID=AUTO
DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL
END DFHDCTBA
Figure 4.

START OF DEST CONTROL TABLE
SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL INFO
RELATED DESTINATION
SYMBOLIC UNIT ADDRESS
DEVICE TYPE
RECORD FORMAT
EXTRA PARTITION DESTINATION
SYMBOLIC NAME
INTRAPARTITION DESTINATION
SYMBOLIC NAME
SYMBOLIC NAME
SYMBOLIC NAME
TRANSACTION ID
END OF DEST CONTROL TABLE
POINT TO REQUIRED ENTRY LABEL

DCT using resident data set control blocks

,--

101

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Figures 5 and 6 show how the generation of a DCT can include
€xtrapartition destinations that use nonresident data set control
blocks.
Figure 5 shows a DCT with nonresident data set control blocks
and resident logic modules.
Figure 6 shows a DCT with nonresident data
set control blocks and nonresiqent logic modules.
DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL,
TRNSUFX=(AA,BB,CC,DD} ,
SUFFIX=22
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE1,
RECFORM=FIXBLK,
TYPEFLE=OUTPUT,
BLKSIZE=2000,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
BUFNO=2,
RECSIZE=200,
SUFFIX=AA
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE2,
RECFORM=FIXBLK,
TYPEFLE=INPUT,
BLKSIZE=2000,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
BUFNO=2,
RECSIZE=200,
SUFFIX=BB
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE3,
RECFORM=FIXUNB,
BLKSIZE=1240,
TYPEFLE=INPUT,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
SUFFIX=CC
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE4,
RECFORM=FIXUNB,
BLKSIZE=1240,
TYPEFLE=OUTPUT,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
SUFFIX=DD
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=PRINT,
RECFORM=VARUNB,
BLKSIZE=121,
DEVADDR=SYSLST,
DEVICE=1403
DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA,
DSCNAME=PRINT,
DESTID=PRNT
DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA,
RESIDNT=NO,
DESTID=TAPE
DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL
END DFHDCTBA
Figure 5.

102

DCT using nonresident data set control blocks and resident
logic modules

*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*
*

The assembly of the macro instructions contained in Figure 5 results
in a Destination Control Table with suffix 22 (DFHDCT22) that contains
one data set control block for the printer (TYPE=SDSCI,DESTID=PRNT).
When the output of this generation is link edited, the logic modules
for tape and printer are automatically included, and the four tape data
set control blocks are cataloged separa~ely to DFHRPL as DFHTRNAA,
DFHTRNBB, DFHTRNCC, and DFHTRNDD.
the
set
can
set

The extrapartition destination (DESTID=TA?E) can be openEd through
CICS Dynamic Open/Close program with any of the four suffix~d data
control blocks (DFHTRNAA, DFHTRNBB, DFHTRNCC, or DFHTRNDD).
It
then be closed and reopened with any of the other nonresident data
control blocks.

Program Processing Table (PPT) entries must be included for the four
data set control blocks cataloged separately.
PPT entries must include
the RELOAD=YES operand.
DPHDCT TYPE=INITIAL,
TRNSUFX=(AA,BB,CC,DD) ,
SEPASMB=YES
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE1,
RECFORM=PIXBLK,
TYPEFLE=OUTPUT,
BLKSIZE=2000,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
BUFNO=2,
RECSIZE=200,
SUFFIX=AA
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE2,
RECFORM=FIXBLK,
TYPEFLE=INPUT,
BLKSIZE=2000,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
BUFNO=2,
RECSIZ E=200,
SUFFIX=BB
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE3,
RECFORM=FIXUNB,
BLKSIZE=1240,
TYPEFLE=INPUT,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
SUFFIX=CC
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=TAPE4,
RECFORM=FIXUNB,
BLKSIZE=1240,
TYPEFLE=OUTPUT,
DEVADDR=SYS011,
DEVICE=TAPE,
SUFFIX=DD
DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL
END DFHDCTBA
Figure 6 (Part 1 of 2).

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*
*

*
*

DCT using nonresident data set control
blocks and nonresident logic modules

103

DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=YY
DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=PRINT,
RECFORM=VARUNB,
BLKSIZE=121,
DEVADDR=SYSLST,
DEVICE=1403
DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA,
DSCNAME=PRINT,
DESTID=PRNT
DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA,
RESIDNT=NO,
DESTID=TAPE
DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL
END DFHDCTBA
Figure 6 (Part 2 of 2).

*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
**

DCT using nonresident data set control blocks
and nonresident logic modules

The result of the generation of the macro instructions contained in
Figure 6 (Part 2 of 2) is a Destination Control Table with a suffix of
YY (DFHDCTYY).
The DCT contains one data set control block £or the
printer (TYPE=SDSCI, DESTID=PRNT) and one logic module for the printer.
The four data set control blocks for tape are generated by the
assembly of the macro instructions contained in Figure 6 (Part 1 of
2).
When the output of that assembly is link edited, the data set
control blocks are cataloged as DFHTRNAA, DFHTRNBB, DFHTRNCC, and
DFHTRNDD.
However, the user must have cataloged the logic modules used
by these four data set control blocks to DFHRPL using DFHLINK, and must
have included entries in the PPT that specify the RELOAD=YES operand
for those logic modules.
When using the generated DCT of Figure 6, no storage is used for
the data set control blocks or for the logic modules until the
extra partition destination (DESTID=TAPE) is opened via the CICS Dynamic
Open/Close program (DFHOCP).
The Dynamic Open/Close program will ensure
that only one logic module of the same name is in storage at anyone
time.
If the logic module is not resident in the DCT, the Dynamic
Open/Close program frees the storage associated with the logic module
when the data set is closed.
For further details concerning the use of the Dynamic Open/Close
facility, see the discussion of dynamic open/close in the "Master
Terminal" section and the "Dynamic Open/Close Function" section of this
manual.

The Program Control Table is the means for the user to describe the
control information to be used by CICS for identifying and initializing
a newly-arrived transaction.
Task Control uses a portion of each PCT
entry for the purpose of accumulating transaction statistics. This
table is required by the control system to verify the incoming
transaction, supply the transaction priority and security key, supply
the length of the Transaction Work Area, and keep transaction
statistics.

104

The following operands can be included in the DFHPCT macro
instruction:
DFHPCT !YPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=name,
TRNPRTY=decimal value,
TnANSEC=decimal value,
TwASIZE=decimal value,
PROGRAM=name,
TPURGE=YES,NO,
SPURGE=YES,NO,
COMPAT=NO,FORMAT,FULLBUF

*
*

*
**
*
*
*

DFHPCT TYPE=FINAL
ESTABLISH CONTROL SECTION FOR PROGRAM CONTROL TABLE
The control section into which the Program Control Table is assembled
is established by the
DFHPCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

macro instruction.
This macro instruction must be coded as the first
statement in the source deck used to assemble the Program Control Table.

SUFFIX:
Specifies a two-character alphameric suffix for the Program
Control Table being assembled.
This suffix, if specified, is appended
to the standard module name (DFHPCT) and is used to name the module on
the linkage editor output library.
If this operand is omitted, a suffix
is not provided.
SPECIFY TRANSACTION CONTROL INFORMATION
Transaction control information is provided to CICS program
management services by the
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY
macro instruction.
Included in this macro instruction is information
on priority, security key, program identification, purge indicators,
and size of the Transaction Work Area.
The DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY macro instruction includes the following
operands:
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=name,
TRNPRTY=decimal value,
TRANSEC=decimal value,
TWASIZE=decimal value,
PROGRAM=name,
TPURGE=YES,NO,
SPURGE=YES,NO,
COMPAT=NO,FORMAT,FULLBUF

**
**

*
*
*
*

TRANSID:
Used to specify the four-character identification assigned
to the individual transaction.
Note that TRANSID=DISC should not be
105

specified if terminals are to be supported on switched\lines.
For
further details concerning the use of terminals on switched lines, see
the £IC~ 19£min~1 QE§ra1Q±~~ Guigg.
TRNPRTY: Used to define the transaction priority.
This three-position
decimal value (000-255) is used in establishing the overall transaction
processing priority.
(Transaction processing priority is equal to the
sum of the terminal priority, transaction priority, and operator
priority, not to exceed 255.) If this operand is omitted, the default
is TRNPRTY=OO 1.
TRANSEC:
Used to define the transaction security, the TRANSEC parameter
is a three-position decimal value with a range 001 through 024.
The
default is TRANSEC=001.
Used to define the Transaction Work Area required.
A
TWASIZE:
five-position decimal value that determines the size (in bytes) of the
Transaction Work Area to be acquired for this transaction.
Refer to
Appendix A for the minimum values that must be specified for programs
provided by CICS.
The default is TWASIZE=O.
PROGRAM:
Used to define the initial program identification; this
operand specifies the name of the program to which control is to be
given to process this transaction.
TPURGE:
Used to set the terminal error purge indicator.
TPURGE=YES
indicates that the terminal error purge indicator is to be set to allow
the transaction to be purged when a terminal error occurs.
The default
is TPURGE=NO.
SPURGE:
Used to set the system stall purge indicator.
SPURGE=NO
indicates that the transaction is not purgeable when a system stall
condition is detected.
The default is SPURGE=NO.
COMPAT:
Used to flag those transactions that are to be run in 2260
compatibility mode on the 3270 Information Display System.
The default
is COMPAT=NO.
COMPAT=FORMAT indicates that the transaction is to be run in FORMAT
mode; COMPAT=FULLBUF indicates that the transaction is to be run in
FULLBUF mode.
For a discussion of FORMAT and FULLBUF modes of
compatibility operation, see the section "2260 Compatibility for the
3270 11 •
SPECIFY END OF PROGRAM CONTROL TABLE
The end of the Program Control Table is indicated by the
DFHPCT TYPE=FINAL
macro instruction, which is the last statement in the assembly of the
Program Control Table before the Assembler END statement. This macro
instruction creates a dummy entry to signal the table end.
The
Assembler END statement must include the label DFHPCTBA.

106

PROGRAM CONTROL lABLE EXAMPLE
Figure 7 illustrates the coding that is required to create a Program
Control Table.
The transactions include:
1.

2.
3.

Three transactions of a higher priority than the default priority
(TRNPRTY=1 is the default)
Two transactions with security key protection
Total of nine transactions

See Appendix A for a list of all the entries required to create a
Program Control Table.
DFHPCT TYPE=INITIAL
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=COB1,
TWASIZE=64,
PROGRAM=COBPGM1
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=COB2,
TRNPRTY=100,
TRANSEC=10,
PROGRAM=COBPGM2
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=COB3,
TWASIZE=100,
TRANSEC=5,
PROGRAM=COBPGM3,
TPURGE=YES
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=COB4,
PROGRAM=COBPGM4,
TPURGE=YES
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=CSAC,
TRNPRTY=5,
TWASIZE=40,
PROGRAI1=DFHACP
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSI D=CSMT,
TWASIZE=160,
PROGRAM=DFHMTPA
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=CSST,
TWASIZE=100,
PROGRA M=DF HMTPA
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=CSTA,
TWASIZE=OOO,
PROGRAM=DFHTAJP
DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=CSSN,
TRNPRTY=99,
TWASIZE=OOO,
PROGRAM=DFHSNP,
SPURGE=YES
DFHPCT TYPE=P,INAL
END DFHPCTBA
Figure 7.

*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

Coding for program control table

107

The Processing Program Table provides a means for the user to
describe to Program Control the control information concerning the
processing programs. In addition, Program Control uses portions of
each table entry to retain certain information for maintaining control
of the user's programs and to capture specified program statistics.
This table is required by CICS to verify the processing program
identification, to keep count of the number of transactions using that
prog£am, to maintain the address of the processing program, to
communicate to CICS the type of load used for the program, to maintain
the direct access address and size of the program, and to maintain
statistics on the processing program.
The Processing Program Table macro instruction (DFHPPT) specifies
processing programs to be recognized by CICS.
The following operands
can be included in the DFHPPT macro instruction:
DFHPPT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY,
PROGRAM=name,
PGMLANG=ASSEMBLER,COBOL,PL/I,
RES=YES,NO,
RELOAD=YES,NO

*
*
*
*

DFHPPT TYPE=FINAL
Those programs most often used during execution of CICS should be
specified first during preparation of the Processing Program Table.
ESTABLISH CONTROL SECTION FOR PROCESSING PROGRAM TABLE
The control section into which the Processing Program Table is
assembled is established by the
DFHPPT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

macro instruction, which must be coded as the first statement in the
source deck used to assemble the Processing Program Table.
SUFFIX:
Specifies a two-character alphameric suffix for the Processing
Program Table being assembled.
This suffix, if specified, is appended
to the standard module name (DFHPPT) and is used to name the module on
the linkage editor output library. If this operand is omitted, a suffix
is not provided.
DESCRIBE PROCESSING PROGRAMS
A specific processing program is described to CICS program management
services by the
DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY
macro instruction. Included is information on the program name and
the type of program.
The DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY macro instruction includes the following
operands:
108

DFHPPT TYFE=ENTRY,
PRCGRAM=name,
PGMLANG=ASSEMBLER,COBOL,PL/I,
RES=YES,NO,
RELOAD=YES,NO

*
*
**

FROGBAM: Specifies the program identification, up to eight characters
in length. The indicated program must have been previously link edited
into the Real-Time Relocatable Program Library (DFHRPL).
PGMLANG: Specifies the type of program. The default is
PGMLANG=ASSEMBLER. omit this parameter when preparing PPT entries for
BMS maps regardless of the cempiler used.
RES: Used to indicate wnether or not the program is to be made resident
in main storage when CICS is initialized. In the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system,
the designated programs become permanently resident, and the size of
dynamic storage (subFool 0) is reduced. For the CICS/DOS-STANDARD and
CICS/OS~STANDARD systems, the designated programs are "packed" into
the high portion of the user's dynamic main storage. The default is
BES=NO.
RELOAD: RELOAD=YES indicates that a fresh copy of the program is to
be loaded by the Program Centrol pIogram each time a load request for
that program is issued. It is the user's responsibility to release
the storage, it is not automatically released when the transaction
terminates. A Storage Control FREEMAIN, rather than a Program Control
DELETE, must ce used to free the storage. The default is RELOAD=NO.
If the Dynamic Open/Close program is to be used, RELOAD=YES must be
specified in each PPT entry that defines a nonresident data set control
block.
RELOAD=YES must also be specified for all CICS/DOS transient logic
modules. The Dynamic Open/Close program maintains a use count for the
logic modules to ensure that only one copy is in main storage at any
one time. If the logic module is resident in the Destination Control
Table, no entry is necessary in the PP~. In the DOS-ENTRY System,
storage for the prog~am is obtained from sub Fool o.
SPECIFY END OF PBOCESSING PROGRAM TABLE
The end of the processing program Table is indicated to the control
system by the
DFHPPT TYFE=FINAL
macro instruction, which is the last statement in the assembly of the
Processing Program Table before the Assembler END statement. This
macro instruction creates a dummy entry to signal the tacle end. The
Assembler END statement must include the label DFHPPTBA.
FROCESSING FROGR!M TABLE EXAMPLE
Figure 8 illustrates the coding that is required to create a
Processing Program Table. The programs include:
1.
2.

Four Assembler language programs, one of which is resident
Four ANS CCBOI programs

109

See A~pendix A for a list of all the entries required to create a
Processing Program Table.
DFHPPT TYFE=INITIAL
DFHPPT TYFE=ENTRY,
PRCGEAM=COBPGM1,
PGMLANG=COBOL
DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY,
PROGRAM=COBPGM2,
PGMLANG=CCBOL
DFHPPT TYFE=ENTRY,
PRCGRAM=COBPGM3,
PGMLANG=COEOL,
RELOAD=YES
DFHPPT TYFE=ENTRY,
PROGEAM=COBPGM4,
PGMLANG=COEOL
DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY,
PRCGEAM=DFHACP
DFHPPT TYFE=ENTRY,
PROGRAM=DFHTAJP
DFHPPT TYFE=ENTRY,
PROGEAM=DFHMTPA
DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY,
PROGRAM=DFHSNP
DFHPPT TYPE=FINAL
END DFHPPTBA
Figure 8.

*
*
*
*
*
*

Coding for processing program table

The system service tables (optional) provide the user with increased
centrol over the operation of CICS. The system service tables are:
1.

Sign-on Table that contains the operator security and priority
data to permit an o~eratoI to sign on the system.

Terminal List Tables that contain, by groups, the identification
of terminals that are related logically; for example, the
terminals in a remote location or all terminals whose operators
are under the contrcl of a supervisor.
A supervisor, through
his table, may alter the status of a terminal under his control.
For example, he could place a terminal in an out-of-service
condition.

The Sign~on Table and the Terminal List Tables reside on a direct
access storage dEVicE and are called into main storage as required.
The use of a Sign-on Table or a Terminal List Table requires that
FCPLOAD=YES be specified for DFHSG PBOGRAM=PCP macro instruction.
Refer
to the CICS Terminal Operator's Guide for the terminal operator
~rocedures using the system service tables and programs.
SIGN-ON TABLE (SNT)
The Sign-on Table provides the means for permanently retaining
terminal operator data.
It is accessed when a terminal operator
initiates the sign-cn procedure.
During the sign-on procedure, the name of the terminal operator is
entered at the terminal and is used to locate the appropriate operator
entry in the table. The operator entry in the table contains data used

110

to verify the operator name and to establish a priority and a security
key for the transactions which the operator subsequently enters.
The priority value related to the operator is used to develop the
task priority for processing a transaction.
The operator's security
key is used in a security check of all transactions subsequently
entered. The security key which is placed in the appropriate Terminal
Control Table entry for the operator is matched with the transaction
security contained in the transaction's Program Control Table (PCT)
entry.
If the operator security key contains any position that matches the
security value in the PCT entry, the transaction is accepted.
Otherwise, a security check has occurred and the transaction is
terminated.
A security key of 1 is the default option in the creation
of the Sign-on Table, the Program Control Table, and the Terminal
Control Table; this value is present in the Terminal Control Table
until altered by a sign-on procedure. The security key default option
allows transactions with a transaction security of 1 to be entered into
the system by the operator without the sign-on procedure.
The Sign-on Table macro instruction (DFHSNT) specifies the terminal
operator data for the users of CICS.
A DFHSNT entry should be present
in the Sign-on Table for each terminal operator who is expected to sign
on.
The Sign-on Table must be assembled, link edited with the name
DFHSNT, and represented in the Processing Program Table (PPT).
The following operands can be included in the DFHSNT macro
instruction:
DFHSNT TYPE=INITIAL
DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY,
OPNAME='operator name',
PASSWRD=password,
OPIDENT=operator identification,
SCTYKEY=(n1, ••• ,n24} ,
OPPRTY=operator priority

*
*
*

DFHSNT TYPE=FINAL

The control section into which the Sign-on Table is assembled is
established by the
DFHSNT TYPE=INITIAL
macro instruction, which must be coded as the first statement in the
source deck used to assemble the Sign-on Table.

111

Each terminal operator is described to CICS through an entry in the
Sign-on Table.
These entries are made by issuing the
DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY
macro instruction.
Included in this macro instruction is information
on password, operator identification, security key, and operator
priority.
The DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY macro instruction includes the following
operands:
DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY,
OPNAME='operator name',
PASSWRD=password,
OPIDENT=operator identification,
SCTYKEY=(n1, ••• ,n24) ,
OPPRTY=operator priority
OPNAME:
Specifies the name of the terminal operator for this table
entry.
The operator name may be 1 to 20 characters long and must be
unique for each entry.
The operator name in this entry must be matched
exactly by the operator name entered in the sign-on procedure.
PASSWRD:
Specifies a four-character password (identification) created
by the user.
The password entered by a terminal operator as a part of
the sign-on procedure must be matched exactly by the password in the
operator's Sign-on Table entry.
Passwords may be unique to each
operator or the same for a logical group of operators.
OPIDENT:
Used to specify the three-character operator identification
code assigned by the user to each operator.
This code is placed in
the appropriate Terminal control Table terminal entry (TCTTE) when the
operator signs on so that the identity of the operator is known to
CICS. This operator identification is made available to the master
terminal when a security violation is detected.
SCTYKEY:
Specifies one or more decimal security-key values from 1 to
24.
The security key for a terminal operator is comprised of those
values which are to be matched with the transaction security of an
appropriate program control table entry.
The security key may be built
with from 1 to 24 individual values.
Each decimal value in the range
of 1 to 24 specified in the operand of the SCTYKEY keyword has a
corresponding bit position in a three-byte SCTYKEY field.
The presence
of each value in the operand causes the corresponding relative bit
position to be set on.
The transaction security in a Program Control Table entry is
specified as only one of the possible 24 individual values.
The same
value must be contained in the operator's security key to allow the
operator to process that transaction. The operator's security key is
not limited to just one value and likely contains several values.
The default is SCTYKEY=1.
it is specified.

It will also be a value whether or not

OPPRTY:
Specifies a decimal operator priority value from 0 to 255.
An operator priority is assigned optionally by the user and is used in
112

*
*

developing the task processing priority for each
default is OPPRTY=O.

2£g£iiY End

transactio~.

The

~ign-Qn 1~~1~

The end of the Sign-on Table is indicated by the
DFHSNT TYPE=FINAL
macro instruction, which is the last statement in the assembly of the
Sign-on Table before the Assembler END statement.
This macro
instruction creates a dummy entry to signal the table end.
The
Assembler END statement must include the label DFHSNTBA.

Figure 9 contains an example of coding for the Sign-on Table.
In
this example, there are two cases of the operator name being actual
names and one instance of the name being a function.
The first operator
has access to transactions whose transaction securities are 1,2,7, or
24.
The other two operators have access to the same transactions as
the first plus additional transactions.
The second operator has a
default priority of zero.
DFHSNT TYPE=INITIAL
DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY,
OPNAME='DON GIBSON',
PASSWRD=DIST,
OPIDENT=DG,
SCTYKEY=(1,2,7,24) ,
OPPRTY=128
DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY,
OPNAME='R. J. JONES',
PASSWRD=DIST,
OPIDENT=RJJ,
SCTYKEY=(1,2,7,9,24)
DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY,
OPNAME='MASTER TERMINAL ",
PASSWRD=MAST,
OPIDENT=MT1,
SCTYKEY=(1,2,3,4,7,9,24) ,
OPPRTY=255
DFHSNT TYPE=FINAL
END DFHSNTBA
Figure 9.

*
*
*
*
*

**
*
*
*

*
*
*

Coding for sign-on table

TRRMINAL LIST TABLES (TLT)
The Terminal List Tables provide the user of CICS with the means of
retaining the terminal identifications in logical groupings.
A logical
grouping of terminals could be all the terminals that are under the
control of a supervisor.
Each supervisor might have a Terminal List
Table.
All terminals which serve a similar function represent a logical
grouping, or class of terminals.
The user might create a grouping of
terminal identifications to facilitate the dispatching of general
messages to terminals.
The system service programs of CICS use Terminal List Tables to
perform terminal status change operations.
A unique Terminal List
113

Table must be created for each supervisor who is to have the ability
to alter the terminal status of any terminal under his control.
Any
operation which is to change the status of an entire group of terminals
requires a Terminal List Table containing the identifications of all
terminals in that group.
Unique identification is assigned to each
table by the user.
The creation of the Terminal List Tables is accomplished through
the assembly procedure by using the DFHTLT macro instruction. The
following operands can be included in this macro instruction:
DFHTLT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHTLT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRMIDNT=terminal identification

DFHTLT TYPE=FINAL
The Terminal List Table must be assembled and link edited with a
name that conforms to the format:
DFHTLTxx.
The base name is DFHTLT.
The two-character suffix (xx), uniquely identifying this table, consists
of the same characters entered by a user of the system service programs
for terminal status change. These two characters are appended to the
base name (DFHTLT) for the retrieval process, and may represent either
a supervisor's identification or the identification of a class of
terminals.
There must be an entry in the Processing Program Table (PPT)
each Terminal List Table the user wishes to access.

for

The control section into which the Terminal List Table is assembled
is established by the
DFHTLT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

macro instruction, which must be coded as the first statement in the
source deck used to assemble the Terminal List Table.
SUFFIX:
This operand is used to specify a two-character suffix for
the Terminal List Table being assembled.
This suffix, if specified,
is appended to the standard module name (DFHTLT) and is used to name
the module on the linkage editor output library.
If this operand is
omitted, a suffix is not provided.
§£eciiY !ermina1 lQggtifi£~iiQn
The terminal identifications to be included in the Terminal List
Table are specified through the
DFHTLT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRMIDNT=terminal identification list
macro instruction. Any number of these macro instructions can appear
in a Terminal List Table assembly.
TRMIDNT:

114

Specifies a list of terminal identifications to be included

in the table.
Any symbolic identification used must first have been
defined in the TRMIDNT operand of the DFHTCT macro instruction.

The end of the Terminal List Table is indicated by the
DFHTLT TYPE=FINAL
macro instruction, which is the last statement in the assembly of the
Terminal List Table before the Assembler END statement.
The Assembler
END statement must include the label DFHTLTBA.

Figure 10 illustrates the coding required to create a Terminal List
Table.
DFHTLT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=AA
DFHTLT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRMIDNT=(NYC,CHI,LA,WDC)
DFHTLT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRMIDNT=(SF,ATL)
DFHTLT TYPE=FINAL
END DFHTLTBA
Figure 10.

*
*

Coding for terminal list table

115

CICS provides a technique for incorporating user-written source code
into most of the CICS management programs.
This source code may extend
various CICS management functions.
So long as the user conforms to
certain restrictions and conventions, this facility should minimize
the impact of CICS source code modifications when installing new
releases of CICS.
To include a user-written exit routine in a particular CICS
management program, the user must place his source code in a CICS source
library member (book) which has the naming convention:
DFHxxEXT
where xx is the two-character designation for the management program
into which the user-written code is to be included.
The two-character
designations are:
KC
SC
PC
TC
FC
IC
TD
TS

(Task Control)
(Storage Control)
(Program Control)
(Terminal Control)
(File Control)
(Interval Control)
(Transient Data Control)
(Temporary Storage Control)

The code provided by the user in a given member (book) may consist
of more than one routine (function) depending upon the number of
linkages provided in the particular CICS management program.
For
example, File Management provides linkage to user-written exit routines
both before and after an input operation.
Thus, user-supplied code in
the member (book) DFHFCEXT might contain two routines, each identified
by a unique symbolic name.
Linkage from the CICS management program to the appropriate
user-written exit routine is accomplished by one of the following
methods:
1.

An Assembler BAL instruction that uses the user-defined symbolic
name as the "branch to" label and general register 14 as a return
register.

Register 14 is loaded with an address constant for the user
defined symbolic name and a BALR 14, 14 instruction is issued.

Noig:

The user-written exit routines are located at the end of the
management programs.
The length of some programs is such that
the exit routines are not addressable by the program's base
register(s). This situation forces the use of method two above,
and requires the exit routine to establish its own addressability
upon gaining control.
Under method one at least some beginning part of the user exit
routine is addressable by a management program base register.
Another base register may be required for the rest of the exit
routine.

116

The symbolic name of the exit routine is specified in the appropriate
operand when the management program is generated.
For example, in
response to the
DFHSG PROGRAM=SCP,
XTYPREQ=ORANGE

specification, user exit linkage in the form of an Assembler
BAL

14,ORANGE

instruction is generated in the appropriate place in the storage Control
program.
In this example, source code similar to the following should
have been provided by the user in the member (book) DFHSCEXT:
ORANGE DS

USER EXIT ENTRY

User code

Upon entry to a user exit routine, registers can be saved in the
CSA register save ar€a (CSAOSRSA).
The following example shows the
use of OS/DOS SAVE and RETURN macro instructions to save registers 4
through 6 and to use register 4 as a base register.
ORANGE DS
OH
SAVE (4,6)
BALR 4,0
USING *,4

RETURN

(4,6)

USER EXIT ENTRY
SAVE REGS 4,5,6
IN CSAOSRSA
USE REG 4 AS BASE

R~G

RESTORE REGS 4,5,6
AND RETURN VIA REG 14

Using the CSA for register saving is a non-reentrant method and
therefore the exit routine should not issue any CICS or OS/DOS macro
instructions that might require use of this CSA area.
This includes
releasing control to another task which might use this samE (or another)
exit routine that saves registers in the CSA.
When creating the CICS management program assembly jobs during system
generation, a COpy DFHxxEXT statement is included immediately preceding
the Assembler END statement.
In the above example, the following would
be generated:
COpy DFHCSADS
COpy DFHTCADS

COpy DFHSCP
COpy DFHSCEXT
END DFHSCNA
When coding user exits for CICS management programs, the user should
adhere to the following conventions and guidelines:

117

Since user exits are essentially "in line" with the management
programs, the coder should be familiar with the functions of
the program to which the exit code is being added.

User-written exit routines must never alter the contents of
registers that provide addressability to control blocks, unless
the original contents are restored before return to the CICS
management program.

User-written exit routines must never violate restrictions of
the management programs.
For example, an exit routine in Storage
Control cannot issue a DFHSC TYPE=GETMAIN macro instruction.
In general, it is best if exit routines do not issues requests
for CICS services.

User-written exit routines must be coded in Assembler language.

Symbolic names (labels) used to define user exit entry points
must not be duplicates of labels in the CICS management program.

Base register addressability for the user-written exit routine
exists only to the extent of the base register(s) associated
with the management program. The user exit must never alter
the base register(s) of the management program.
The user is
responsible for saving registers and establishing addressability.

Register contents differ depending on the management program
and particular exit function.
However, the contents of the
following registers are always constant:

14
13
12

Return address
CSA address
TCA address

Depending on the management program and functional user exit, certain
general registers contain information that the user may find useful.
The following is a summary, by exit, of the contents of these registers:

118

REQQBli!1

SYSGEN
EXIT
ID]l!!

DFHKCP

XDSPCHR

Before dispatch

TCACBAR

XTYPREQ

Before request
analysis

TXACBAR

XFETCH

After load

PPTCBAR

DFHPCP

PCECREG
DFHICP

TXA
with task
only)

Address of PPT entry
for loaded program
Entry point address
of loaded program

After expiration
of time interval

ICECBAR

XTYPREQ

Before request
analysis

N.A.

Address of Interval
Control Element (ICE)
just expired
N.A.

DFHSCP

XTYPREQ

Before request
analysis

N.A.

DFHTCP

XATTACH

Before task attach

TCTTEAR
TCTLEAR
TIOABAR
Before output event TCTTEAR
TCTLEAR
TIOABAR
After input event
TCTTEAR
TCTLEAR
TIOABAR

Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address
Address

XOUTPUT

Before output event FWACBAR
FCTDSBAR

XINPUT

Before input event

FCTDSBAR

XINPUTC

After input event

FCTDSBAR

FWA
FCT entry
data set
FCT entry
data set
FCT entry
data set
FIOA

XTYPREQ

Before entry
Analysis

Address of
Address of
for target
Address of
for target
Address of
for target
Address of
N.A.

XOUTPUT

Before output event DCTCBAR

XINPUT

Before input event

DCTCBAR

XYTPREQ

Before request
analysis

DCTCBAR

Address of
for target
Address of
for target
Address of
for target

DCT entry
destination
DCT entry
destination
DCT entry
destination

XOUTPUT

Before output event TSWKREG

XINPUT

After input event

TSWKREG

XTYPREQ

Before request
analysis

TSDA

XINPUT

'--

TCA being

XICEEXP

XOUTPUT

Address of
dispatched
Address of
associated
(CICS/DOSE

DFHFCP

DFHTDP

DFHTSP

l!ot~:

FIOABAR
N.A.

of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of

TCTTE
TCTLE
TIOA
TCTTE
TCTLE
TIOA
TCTTE
TCTLE
TIOA

Address of data being
read or written
Address of data being
read or written
Address of data area
specified by requesting
program

CICS provides a set of dummy exit members (books) as part of
its distributed source library. These members contain only
dummy labels and a BR 14 instruction, and should be replaced by
user-written exit routines.

119

The CICS terminal error handling structure is based on the assumption
that most users will want to expand and refine certain CICS operations
in response to various terminal errors.
Since it is impossible for
CICS to anticipate all courses of action, the error handling facilities
have been designed to allow the user maximum freedom in providing unique
solutions for errors occurring within his terminal network.
Three CICS components are involved in the detection and correction
of terminal errors:
1. Terminal Control program (DFHTCP)
2. Terminal Abnormal Condition program (DFHTACP)
3. Terminal Error program (DFHTEP)

DFHTCP and DFHTACP are provided by CICS to perform certain basic
detection and correction functions.
DFHTEP is provided by the user
who wishes to expand or alter the basic functions performed by DFHTCP
and DFHTACP.
A dummy DFHTEP is distributed with CICS containing only
a DFHPC TYPE=RETURN macro instruction.
TERMINAL ABNORMAL CONDITION LINE ENTRY (TACLE)
When an abnormal condition occurs that is associated with a terminal
or line, DFHTCP places the terminal out of service and dynamically
creates a Terminal Abnormal Condition Line Entry (TACLE) which is
chained off the real line entry on which the error occurred.
The TACLE
contains all the error information necessary for proper evaluation of
the error, plus special action indicators that can be manipulated to
alter the error correction procedure.
DFHTACP is then attached by the Terminal Control program and provided
with a pointer to the real line entry (TCTLE) on which the error
occurred. After performing certain basic error analysis and
establishing default actions to be taken, DFHTACP gives control to
DFHTEP by issuing a DFHPC TYPE=LINK macro instruction.
DFHTACP passes
the TACLE to DFHTEP so DFHTEP can examine the error and provide an
alternate course of action.
Once the user has performed his desired function in DFHTEP, he should
return control to DFHTACP by issuing a DFHPC TYPE=RETURN macro
instruction.
DFHTACP then performs the necessary actions as dictated
by the action flags within the TACLE.
When DFHTEP receives control from DFHTACP, the TCA Facility Control
Address (TCAFCAAA) contains the address of a TACLE.
The TACLE is
created by the Terminal control program when the error occurs and
contains all the I/O error information provided by BTAM.
To symbolically access the information contained in the TACLE, CICS
provides two symbolic storage definitions (DSECT's) which can be copied
into DFHTEP.
These DSECT's are DFHTACLE and DFHTCTLE.
DFHTACLE
describes the first twelve bytes of the TACLE which contain CICS error
information; DFHTCTLE describes the remainder of the TACLE which
contains a copy of the Data Extent Control Block (DECB) at the time
the error occurred, plus other valuable information.
To establish addressability to the TACLE, DFHTEP must provide, upon
entry, the instruction:
L

120

TCTLEAR,TCAFCAAA

LOAD TACLE BASE REGISTER

where TCTLEAR is symbolically defined as the base register for the
TACLE.
If the user desires to access the real line entry in the TCT,
its address is at location TCTLEDCE within the TACLE.
It is the user's
responsiblitity, under these circumstances, to maintain addressablity
bEtween the TACLE and the real line entry.
DFHTEF PROGRAMMING

CONSIDERA~IONS

There are some situaticns in which CICS may attempt to send a message
to an inFut cnly terminal.
These might be, for example, an Invalid
Transaction Identification message, an ATP batch count, or a message
erroneously sent by an aFFlication Erogram.
The user should provide
a Terminal Error Program (named DFHTEP) to re-route these messages to
a system destination such as CSMT or CSTL or other destinations through
the facilities of Transient Data or Interval Control.
A simular situation exists when a message is sent to a 3735 terminal
operating as an input batch device.
An attempt to write to the 3735
before the receipt of the End of Transmission (EOT) gives control to
DFHTACP.
If no DFHTEP is provided, the current transaction will be
abnormally terminated and the line will be disconnected.
!he TACLE is the basic interface that should be used by user-written
DFHTEP to d~termine the nature of the error that occurred and to
indicate what course of actien is to be taken.
Before giving DFHTEP control, "DFHTACP establishes certain default
actions tc be taken, depending uFcn the error condition.
within DFHTEP,
the user may choese to accept the default action under certain
circumstances and alter the action under ether circumstances.
To
indicate that an alternate action is to be taken, the user must modify
the action flags contained in the two-byte field of the TACLE labeled
TCTLEECB+1 and TCTLEECB+2 (the second and third bytes in the DECB copy).
"---

The default actions scheduled by DFHTACP before entry to DFHTEP are
described in the following; the error code is found in the TACLE at
TCTLEPFL.
1
2
3
4
5
6

=
=
=
=
=
=

Line out of service
Terminal cut of service
Abend transaction
switched line disconnected
Disconnect switched line
Release TCAM TIOA

(X'80'
(X '08 '
(X'04'
(X'20'
(X' 10'
(X'80'

at
at
at
at
at
at

TCTLEECB+1)
TCTLEECB+1)
TCTL E EC B+ 1)
TCTLEECB+1)
TCTLEECB+1)
TCTLEECB+2)

ERROR CODE

ACTION SET
~X ~!]TA~~

(.2.x11]Q1I~ 1A]]1)

X' 81'
X' 82'

(TCEMC MTL)
(TCEMCTRL)

Input msg exceeds read length
Translation error
(lCT does not correspond to TCP)

X' 84'

(TCEMCTCT)

TCT search error
a. switched line - Real terminal
h. switched line - Dummy terminal
c. Non-switched line

X'85'

(TCEMCROT)

Invalid write request
a. A write request was made to a
terminal in INPUT status.
b. A write request was made to a
3735 before 'EOT' (EOF condi tion)
was received from the 3735 during

3
2

o
1
3

121

EInOR CODE
(~!11].Q11~

ACTION SET

1A]]1)

~! ~:f]TA~R

batch transmiEsion.
X'S6'
X' S 7'

X' S S'

(TCEMCPL)
(TeEMCUI)

(TCEMCIER)

polling list error
Unsolicited input
a. TCAM
Terminal "Receive Only";
Terminal "out of Service";
Task has not issued READ
b. Input has occurred on an outof-service terminal.
(3735)
ETAM return code on read
a. Local 3270 open failure,
Invalid RLN, unreliable
information (DOS), device
under OPTEP
b. All other conditions

2
6
2,6

2,3

1,3

X'S9'

(TCEMCSM)

Error status received frcm remote 3270·s.
a. 3270 operation check
3
b. 3270 intervention required
0
c. 3270 all other conditions
2,3
d. 3735 all conditions
0

X' SA'

(TCEMCTO)

7770 32-second timeout

X' SB'

(TCEMCOBE)

Hardware buffer exceeded (shift
character net pIoperly accounted for)

X' SC'

(TCEMCOER)

ETAM return cede on write
a. Local 3270 open failure,
Invalid RLN, unreliable
information (DOS), device
under CLTEP
b. All other conditions

X'SD'
X'SE'
X' SF'

(TCEMCOLZ)
(TCEMCNOA)
(TCEMCOAE)

output length zero
No output area provided
Output area excEeded (TIOATDL
value larger than output area)

X' 94'
X' 95'

(TCEMCUC)
(ICEMCUCS)

unit
unit
a.
b.

check (actionE same as TCEMCUCS)
check (should not occur)
Not ETAM line or L3270
Switched line disabled (CICS/OS)
in combination with following:

Intervention sense
c. Switched line
d. Dummy terminal
e. Non-switched line

3,5
3

2,3

1,3
3
3
3

1
4

3,4
1
2,3

Data check sense

f. Real terminal
g. Dummy terminal

2,3
1

Timeout sense
h. READ text command/Start-Stop device
i. Real terminal
j. Dummy terminal

0
2,3
1

All other Eense
122

ACTION SET

EBBOB CODE

(.2111]Q1!f

] ! In::l! T A£~

1!ln~1)

X' 96'
X' 97'

(TCEMCUE)
(TCEMCUES)

Unit
Unit
a.
b.
c.

X' 98'

(TCEMCNR)
(TCEMCUDT)
(TCEMCICR)

Negative response to addressing
Undetermined unit error
The terminal entries on the 'to'
and 'from' device did not specify
the COPY feature (3270).

X' 99'

X' 9B'

exception (actions same as TCEMCUES)
exception (shculd not occur)
switched line
3,4
Real terminal
2,3
Dummy terminal
1
2,3
1,3
3

Tpe device address specified for
the 'to' device does not exist
on the control unit.
The length of the COpy command
was not specified as one.
X'9C'

(TCEMCIMB)

Invalid message blcck received.
a. An unidentified message block
was received from a local or
remote 3270.
b. The type of input block received
from a 3735 did not agree with
the mode of the active transaction inquiry/batch.

2,3

X'9D'

(TCEMCICM)

An incomplete message was received
from a remote 3270.
The device
terminated transmissicn prior to
message completion (that is, EOT
received prior to ETX).

2,3

X' 9F'

(TCEMIDR)

TeAM has issued-an invalid destinaticn return code to CICS.

X' AO'

(TCEMCWOT)

Invalid Read request:
a. A Read request was issued to a
terminal in RECEIVE status.
h. A Read was issued to a 3735
terminal after EOT (EOF condition)
was received from the terminal
during batch transmission.

X' A1 II

(TCEMCIDB)

3
3

A transaction has requested a DFHTC
TYPE=(RESET,DISCONNECT) on a switched
binary synchronous line and no EOT has
been receive~ from the terminal;
this indicates more data is to
fellow.
Terminal Control issues
a read to the terminal if an ~OT has
been received. If the EOT is not
received on that read, the error
code is set and passed to DFHTACP.

Following is a diagram of the Terminal Abnormal Condition Line Entry
(TACLE) which is Foin~ed to by the TCAFCAAA field upon entry to DFHTEP:

123

TEBMINAL ABNORMAL CONDITION LINE ENTRY
r--

*
------4 BYTES--------->**
*******************************************************

*
*
STORAGE ACCOUNTING AREA
**---------------------------------------------------*
*

1!..§Z·* <------

o
4

TCTLEPSA

TCTLEPCH

*
*
ACDRESS OF TRANSIEN! DATA OUTPUT AREA
**---------------------------------------------------*
*

TCTLEFFL

TCTLEPTE

*
*
*
*---------------------------------------------------*
*
TCTLEDCB
*
*

* ERROR FLAGS * SPECIAL IND * TCTTE DISPLACEMENT
*
*---------------------------------------------------*
TCTL~ECB
BTAM
*
*
*
*
*
ACTION
* BEGINNING *
* RESERVED * RETURN
*
CODE
OF DECB
FLAGS
*FOR DFHTACP*
*
*
*
*---------------------------------------------------*
*

TCTLEPF2

NOT USED

*
*
ACTUAL LINE ENTRY ADDRESS
**---------------------------------------------------*
*
*
*
NO! USED
**
*
*---------------------------------------------------**
*
*

*
*

NO! USED

TCTLECSW

*
*

BSAM STATUS

*
*
*
*---------------------------------------------------*
* TCTLEALP *
*

*
ESAM
*
NOT USED
*
SENSE
*
*
*
*****************************************************
~.!§£1~ce.ID§n1
12.§.f~

]ex~

~gg§

].Y1§.§

1~~..§1

l1..§~n.!ng

TCTLEPSA
TCTLEPCH

Storage accounting
Pcinter to 100 bytes of user
storage that can be used to
write to Transient Data.
This storage must not be
freed by DFHTEP, as DFHTACP
may reuse it.

TCTlEPFL

Error flags
Input error
Translation error
TCT search error
Invalid write

81
82
84

124

86
87
88
89

Polling list error
Unsolicited input
Input event rejected
status message received
7770 32-second timeout
Hardware buffer exceeded
output event rejected
Output length of zero
No output area
Output area exceeded
unit check
unit check (should not occur)
Unit exception
unit exception (should not
occur)
Negative response
Undetermined I/O error
copy error (3270)
Invalid message block
Incomplete message
Invalid TCAM destination
Invalid read
Invalid disconnect

8A
8B

8C
8D
8E

8F
94
95

96
97
98
99
9B
9C
9D

AO
A1

(All code s not listed are reserved)
9

TCTLEPF2

Special indicator
Dummy terminal

01
10

TCTLEPTE

Displacement from line
entry to terminal in error

TCTLEECB

DECB/copy of line when
error occurred

Following is the definition of the action bits (0,3,4,5,6 and 7)
and information bits (1 and 2) and is the only portion of the copy of
the DECB that can be altered.
They are located at label TCTLEECB+1.
In the second interface byte (TCTLEECB+2), bit 0 is used to process
TCAM unsolicited errors.
Upon entry to TEP if this bit is set for
unsolicited input, it indicates that the data is destined for a terminal
entry that is either out of Service or in Receive Only status.
If not
set· in this manner, the terminal entry for which the data is destined
has a task which has not issued a READ request.
Upon entry to TEP,
this data is on the Input Queue Terminal Entry ·storage chain, and is
located by label TCTLEIOA in the TACLE.
Upon return to TACP from TEP,
this bit (if set) is used to free unsolicited data or to allow another
time delay cycle if not set.

Bit 0

TCTLEECB+1

Interface byte

o•••

Place line in service
Place line out of service
Information Bit
Not used
Non purgeable task exists

1 •••

Bit 1
• O••
• 1 ••

125

.!!§£.!.

Bytg§

l!~l£.!.

1£Q~1

k1~ani!EI

on terminal
Bit 2

Information Bit
Not used
Switched line has been
disconnected by BTAM

• .0.
• • 1•
Bit 3

• •• 0
• •• 1

Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6

• 1 ••
• • O.

Bit 7

O•••

1 •••
.0 ••

1
Bit 0

· ...

• • 1.

Take terminal's associated
control unit off poll list

· ...

• •• 0

Do not abort WRITE or
free terminal storage
on task abend or no task
present on terminal

· ...

• •• 1

Abort terminal WRITE
requests and free terminal
storage on task abend or
no task present on terminal

TCTLEECB+2

Interface byte 2

o•••

Do not release TCAM TIOA
Release TCAM unsolicited
input TIOA

1 •••
Bit 1-7
15
20
42
44

F
14
2A
2C

1
4
2
1

Do not disconnect line
Disconnect line
Place terminal in service
Place terminal out of service
Do not abend task
Abend task
Leave terminal's associated
control unit on poll list

TCTLEECB+3
TCTLEDCB
TCTLECSW
TCTLEALP

Reserved
BTAM return code
Actual line entry address
BSAM status
BSAM Sense

The following factors should be considered when altering the action
bits in the TACLE:

126

If the "task abend" flag is set by DFHTACP (X'04' at TCTLEECB+1),
the "non-purgeable" flag (X'40') is also set if the task is
non-purgeable.

If the "task abend" bit is on upon return to DFHTACP from DFHTEP
and a non-purgeable task exists on the terminal, the terminal
is placed out of service and the task remains attached to the
terminal.
.

If a dummy terminal is indicated (X'01') at TCTLEPF2, a
disconnect request from DFHTEP is not honored by DFHTACP.
(A
dummy terminal is created whenever an error occurs on a terminal
whose address does not exist in the TCT.)

The "switched line disconnected" bit is used by DFHTACP upon
return from DFHTEP to logically disconnect the switched line
that has been physically disconnected.
If DFHTEP determines

that the line has not been physically disconnected, DFHTEP may
reset this bit.
5.

If the "switched line disconnected" bit or the "disconnect
switched line" bit is on, upon return from DFHTEP, the "task
abend" bit should also be set to purge the task from the
disconnected terminal. If this is the· case and if the task is
not terminal purgeable, DFHTACP writes an INTERCEPT REQUIRED
message to destination CSMT and places the terminal out of
service.

The dummy terminal indicator at TCTLEPF2 is set on errors such
as:
(1) BTAM return on input, (2) binary synchronous outputs
performed for TCP where no terminal is indicated, and (3) other
errors where no terminal error conditions are indicated.
Therefore, if Dummy Terminal is indicated, task abend and write
abort are not set. The Dummy Terminal is only used to identify
the line.

The write abort hit (bit 7 at TCTLEECB+2)
task abend request in TACP as a default.
the write abort bit is used as follows:

is always set with
Upon return from TACP,

Causes the Terminal control write requests to be aborted.

If the task is being abended and is terminal purgeable
or task exists on the terminal, the Terminal storage
will be freed.

The following is an example of the logic steps necessary to design
a portion of the Terminal Error program.
In this example ten retries
are provided per terminal; however, the logic could be used for any
number of retries.
The following assumptions are made:
USER FIELD A
(PCISA VE)

Represents a six-byte field in the Process Control
Information (PCI) area of the TCTTE (see the TCT macro
definition of the TCTUAL operand).
This field is used
to preserve the count of input and output from the TCTTE
when the first error occurs.
These counts are contained
in three-byte fields located at TCTTENI and TCTTENO
within the TCTTE.

USER FIELD B
(PCICNT)

Represents a user-defined field used to
accumulate the count of recursive errors.
It would most
likely he in the Process Control Information (PCI) area
of the TCTTE.

SYSTEM COUNT
(TCTTENI)

Represents the six-byte field in the TCTTE that contains
the terminal input and output counts (TCTTENI+TCTTENO).
In the example, these two adjacent fields are considered
as one six-byte field.

Since this example requires access to the TCT terminal entry (TCTTE)
to examine the SYSTEM COUNT and to also locate the Process Control
Information (PCI) area, the DFHTCTTE symbolic storage definition is
included so fields may be symbolically referenced.

************************************************************************

*
*
DFHTEP RECURSIVE RETRY ROUTINE
*
*
**************************************************************************
127

TEPBAR EQU
TCTTEAR EQU
PCIBAR EQU
COPY
EJECT
COpy
COPY
EJECT
PCIAREA DSECT
PCISAVE DS
PCICNT DS
EJECT
DFHTEP CSECT
BALR
USING
L
L

*
*

2
9
8
DFHTCTTE

TEP PROGRAM BASE
BASE REGISTER FOR TCTTE
BASE FOR PCI
COPY TCTTE DEFINITION

DFHTACLE
DFHTCTLE

COPY TACLE SYMBOLIC DEFINITIONS
COPY DECB DEFINITION

6X
PL2

USER FIELD A
USER FIELD B

TEPBAR,O
*,TEPBAR
TCTLEAR,TCAFCAAA
TCTTEAR,TCTLEDCB

ESTABLISH PROGRAM ADDRESSABILITY

TCTTEAR,TCTLEPTE

L
PCIBAR,TCTTECIA
USING PCIAREA,PCIBAR
TM
PCICNT+1,X'OC'
BO

CKCOUNT

RESET

MVC

PC IC NT, = PL 2 ' + 0 '

MVC

PCISAVE(6) ,TCTTENI

PCICNT,=P' l'

PCICNT,=P'10'

BNE

RETRY

ZAP
MVC

PCICNT ,=P' 0'
PCISAVE(6) ,TCTTENI
NORETRY
PCISAVE(6) ,TCTTENI

*
*

INCR

*
*
*

CKCOUNT CLC

*
*

BNE

RESET

INCR

NORETRY DS

*
*
*RETRY

128

LOAD TACLE ADDRESS
LOAD TCTTE BASE WITH
REAL LINE ADDRESS
INCREMENT BASE BY THE
TCTTE DISPLACEMENT~
THIS
GIVES ADDRESSABILITY TO TCTTE.
LOAD PCI AREA ADDRESS
ESTABLISH ADDRESSABILITY
HAS USER FIELD B EVER BEEN
INITIALIZED TO A PACKED
DECIMAL NUMBER?
•• YES, SO COMPARE THE
SYSTEM COUNT WITH THE
EXISTING COUNT IN FIELD B;
•• NO, SO INITIALIZE FIELD
B TO A PACKED DECIMAL O.
SAVE THE CURRENT SYSTEM
COUNTS.
THIS IS A NEW
ERROR, OR FIRST TIME THROUGH
INCREMENT THE NUMBER OF
TIMES THIS SAME ERROR HAS
OCCURRED.
(RECURSIVE COUNT)
HAS THE MAXIMUM RECURSIVE
ERROR LIMIT BEEN REACHED?
•• NO, SET ACTION
INDICATORS FOR RETRY ATTEMPT
CLEAR AND RESET USER FIELDS
* FOR NEXT ERROR SET
ACTION INDICATORS FOR NO-RETRY.
HAS SYSTEM COUNT CHANGED SINCE
LAST ENTRY TO TEP?
•• YES; THAT MEANS THIS IS
A NEW ERROR SINCE SOME I/O
ACTIVITY HAS OCCURRED ON
TERMINAL
•• NO; THAT MEANS THIS IS A
RECURSIVE ERROR, SO
INCREMENT THE RECURSIVE COUNT
AND CHECK FOR RETRY.
THE USER WOULD INCLUDE HERE
THE CODE NECESSARY TO ALTER
THE FLAGS IN THE TACLE SO
THAT A RETRY CAN BE PERFORMED
ON THE TERMINAL.
THE USER WOULD INCLUDE HERE
THE CODE NECESSARY TO ALLOW
DFHTACP TO TAKE FINAL ACTION
ON THE TERMINAL (I.E., ABEND TASK,
PUT LINE OUT OF SERVICE, ETC.)

The above example is intended only to serve as an illustration of
a recursive error handling technique and the steps necessary to
establish addressability to the applicable control blocks.
BFRTEP ALTERNATE INTERFACE (CICS/OS only)
An alternate interface is provided in the CICS/OS-STANDARD system
for the purpose of maintaining compatibility with the CICS/OS-STANDARD
Version 1 user who currently has code dependent upon this interface.
This interface is provided when the user specifies V1CMPAT=YES in the
BFHSG ~YPE=CSO macro instruction during system generation.
Upon detection of an error, control is passed to DFHTEP for analysis;
the TWA ccntains the following information:
]

1!]]1

Q~£:JBI!I01!

TnACOEA

Contains the status byte from BTAM

TWACOBA+1

Contains the sense byte from BTAM

T~ACOEA+2

contains the teleprocessing OP code
being issued

TlrIACOEA+3

Reserved

TWACOBA+4

contains the transaction ID if one exists
for the terminal in error

Y'I~.§

User-~ritten IFHTEP must place the line or terminal in service or
cut of service if so desired.
If the task is to ce abended, DFHTEP
must place a X'FE' at label TWACOEA before returning control to DFHTACP.

7770 32-SECOND TIMEOUT CONSIDERATIONS
If a terminal ccnnected to the 7770 Audio Response Unit goes "on
hook" while no I/O operation is outstanding, the 7770 does not present
the unit exception to the channel.
This situation can occur when the
terminal operator makes an inquiry and hangs up before receiving a
response.
After this occurs, all writes to the line appear to complete
normally.
All reads complete normally at the end of the 32-second
timeout with a zero data length.
When a 32-second timeout occurs, either the terminal operator has
not entered anything for 32 seconds, or the terminal operator has hung
up and the 7770 did not inform CICS.
CICS cannot distinguish between
these two conditions; therefore, CICS handles every 32-second timeout
as an error condition.
DFHTACP goes to DFHTEP with defaults of
tISCCNNECT SWITCHED LINE and ABEND THE TRANSACTION.
If DFHTEP does
not disccnnect the switched line, CICS writes the "ready" message and
initiates another read.
2740 MODEL 2 CONSIDEBATICNS
When DFHTACP detects a negative resFonse from a 2740 Model 2, the
write operation will be retried after a 26.64 second time delay.
This
delay allows for operator reaction time etc.
If the delay time factor
is to ce changed it may be done by storing the new time delay factor
at TCTTEBC.
The value is a positive binary number representing
hundredths of seconds, (10 seconds would be a value of F'1000' or
X'C00003E8').
The cause of the negative response may be determined by
examining the field TCTLERSP.
129

Contents of TCTLERSP meanings are as follows:
X'04'
X'02'
X 1 20'
X'10'
X'13'

x'oa'

Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Contents

in
in
in
in
in
of

bid mode
communicate mode
communicate mode with document device down
local mode
communicate mode but out of paper
buffer are being printed.

Failure to set a time delay of a sufficiently large value
may cause a loop at the terminal wherein pressing the reset
key will not be recognized.

To initial program load (IPL) the System/7 from CICS, the user must
write a transacticn that issues an automatic transaction initiation
request to either Interval Contrel br Transient Data Control. This
transaction is usually initiated from the master terminal or from a
seguential terminal.
The initiated transaction is started on the
System/7; it then writes the IPL records to the System/7.
The 1PL records are prepared by the user and consist of:
1.
2.
3.

UZERO, a utility module
U~IPL, a utility module
System/7 storage load

UZERO and UTIEL are provided in object deck form on the MSP/7
distribution tape under member names CAAUZERO and CAAUTIPL,
respectively. If link edited into the user-written application program,
UZERO and UTIPL are available for transmission in a suitably translated
format.
The first two bytes of each of these modules is a count of the number
of characters in the remainder of the module.
These two bytes must be
placed in the user's TIOA at TIOATDL by the application program.
The
remainder of the module is moved to TIOADBA.
UZERO and UTIPL may then
be transmitted to the System/7 by issuing the DFHTC TYPE=(WRITE, WAIT)
macro instruction in the application program.
The System/7 storage load is generated using the TELETRANS option
of the MSP/7 Output Handler.
The storage load is comprised of
aO-character records that may be read via the Transient Data or File
Control facilities of CICS and transmitted to the System/7 by issuing
a series of DFHTC TYPE=(WRITE, WAIT) macro instructions.
If a DFHPC
Type=Return macre instruction is used to allow the System/7 to begin
execution, the user must ensure that no automatically initiated
transaction is scheduled to begin on the System/7 until at least 10
seconds have elapsed following execution of the DFHPC Type=Return macro
instruction.
For more informatien concerning the preparation of 1PL records for
the System/7, SEe the publication ~Qg~l~~ ~Y2tem ~~Qg£E~§ (~~EL1)
g~99~~~~jng guigg (GC34-0013).

2260-compatibility sUFPort for the 3270 Information Display System
allows the user to run his currently operational 2260-based transactions
frcm a 3270.

130

During CICS· system generation, the user must request 2260
compatibility to be included, thereby generating the necessary code to
provide conversion of 2260 data streams fIom user-written application
programs to the appropriate 3270 data stream format.
When the 3270
operates with a "compatibility" transaction, incoming data from the
3270 is converted and presented to the user-written application program
in 2260 format.
In most cases, no changes are required to the
user-written program.
Because 2260 ccmpatibility is specified by transaction as well as
by terminal, non-2260-based transactions have full access to all
facilities of the 3270.
Only when a 2260-compatible transaction is
attached to a 2260-compatible 3270 does CICS perform the editing of
the input and output data streams.
If the transaction is not specified
as 2260 compatible, or if the terminal is not specified as supporting
2260 compatibility, no editing occurs for the data streams.
In that
case, if the data streams are not valid 3270 data streams, the results
are unpredictable.
Two modes of compatibility operation aIe provided:
FULLBUF.

FeRMAT and

130.1

FORMAT mode takes full advantage of the 3270 formatting and data
compression facilities, and is the preferred method of 2260
compatibility, particularly for the operation of remote 3270·s.
However, some 2260 facilities cannot be supported under FORMAT mode.
For information concerning which facilities are available, see the
discussion under the topic "Screen Techniques".
FULLBUF mode does not use the 3270 data compression facilities and
must therefore be used when all lines of input data are desired.
For
each operator interaction involving a data entry key (ENTER, PF1 PF12), the number of characters transferred is approximately ~qual to
the total number of characters on the simulated 2260 screen.
The exact
number of characters transferred varies depending upon whether the 3270
is local or remote and which model of the 2260 is being mapped onto
which model of the 3270.
Note~

A terminal is considered to be in compatibility mode from the
time a 2260-compatible transaction is initiated until (1) the
CLEAR key is depressed, or (2) a 3270 native mode transaction
is initiated.

For local 3270 operation, the extra data transfer of FULLBUF mode
should be transparent to the user with regard to response time.
For
remote 3270 operation, the response time is a complex function of the
present method of 2260 operation and the line speeds used for the 2260
and 3270; however, the increase in the response time (on a transaction
basis) should be less than 20% at the same line speed.
CICS TABLE PREPARATION FOR 2260 COMPATIBILITY
Individual transactions can be flagged for FORMAT or FULLBUF 2260
compatibility through the DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY macro instruction.
The
mode of compatibility chosen depends on the 2260 functions required
for the application programs that run under this particular transaction
code.
The characteristics of the 2260/2265 terminal (which the 3277/3275
replaces) are specified by additional operands for the DFHTCT
TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction.
They are as follows:
COMPAT=NO, (number of characters,number of lines,
device type,model number),
FEATURE=(PTRADAPT,SELCTPEN,AUDALARM,COPY,BUFEXP,
DCKYBD, UCTRAN)

The "number of characters" parameter is used to specify the screen
size of the 2260/2265 terminal.
Applicable parameter values are 240,
480, and 960.
The "number of lines" parameter is used to indicate the number of
lines applicable to the 2260/2265 terminal or to insert new line (NL)
symbols into the 3284/3286 printer output data stream where NL symbols
are not provided by the user in the output data stream.
Applicable
parameter values are 6, 12, and 15. The default value for a
960-character screen is 12.
The "device type" parameter is used to specify a 2260 or 2265
terminal or a 1053 printer. The default is 2260.
Note that the
specification COMPAT=(960,15) results in an error condition since the
2260 (assumed by default) cannot support 15 lines.
The "model number" parameter is used to specify a model number for
the 2260 terminal being simulated.
This parameter provides an interface
131

for any user-written application programs that currently test the
TCTTETM field before building device-dependent 2260 data streams.
The FEATURE operand has been included in the CICS DFHTCT
TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction to indicate the presence of 3270
Information Display System features (for example, Printer Adapter,
Selector Pen, Audible Alarm, Copy feature, Buffer Expansion, uppercase
translation, dual case keyboard) and to specify the corresponding 3284
Model 3 Printer on the 3275 Display station.
BQig~

A separate DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction cannot be
coded for the 3284 Model 3 Printer because the 3284 Model 3
shares the buffer of the 3275 Display Station.

2260 MODEL-DEPENDENT DATA STREAM
Some users require the capability of building 2260 device-dependent
data streams. CICS allows the user to build such data streams by
providing the terminal type at TCTTETT in the Terminal Control Table
eTCT) and the terminal model number at TCTTETM in the TCT.
The TCTTETT and TCTTETM fields always contain the 2260 or 2265
terminal type codes and user-assigned model number (as specified in
the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction) whenever a transaction
flagged for CICS 2260 compatibility is dispatched.
At all other times,
TCTTETT and TCTTETM contain the codes for the 3270 terminal.
SCREEN TECHNIQUES
Various techniques have been used for entering data using a 2260
screen and keyboard.
The following are examples of four basic
techniques that may be used.
1.

Formatted 2260 screen technique; for example:
~ USER KEYED DATA

X-CONSTANT DATA

X----XA

x------x

X------XA

x----X
X-----X

X----XA

X----X

x--~-

X------x

With this technique, the constant data is optional and is sent
to the user at the start of the transaction.
Either FORMAT or
FULLBUF mode may be specified, depending upon the user's
formatting requirements.

132

2260 tab feature technique; for example:
~

NAME:

INITIAL:

STREET:

NUMBER:

CITY:

STATE:

For CICS 2260 compatibility operation, the colon-tab character
combination is replaced by 3270 "unprotected attribute"
characters.
FORMAT mode may be specified if data is always
keyed into every field.
FULLBUF mode must specified if any
field is to be left blank.
(Unlike the 2260, the 3270 does not
transmit blank characters unless FULLBUF is specified.) If
FULLBUF is not specified, any heading following the blank field
is not transmitted to the application program.
~

INITIAL:

JONES

NAME:

NUMBER:

STREET:
CITY:

1515 A

STATE:

NEW YORK --

FORMAT data stream:

NAME:JONES

INITIAL:J(NL)

:1515(NL)

:NEW YORK

FULLBUF data stream:

NAME:JONES

STREET:

INITIAL:J (NL)

NUMBER:1515(NL)

CITY:NEW YOR ..

"Endless screen" technique; for example:
X

NEW DATA A

X
X

X--X

OLD DATA

~ t:lE~

0818

•

with this technique, the 2260 screen is treated as unformatted.
The operator keys off the screen, and, wrapping around to the
start of the screen, over keys any old data still there.
The
2260 transmits a data stream delimited by SMI (start of message)
and EOM (end of message) characters, irrespective of any screen
wraparound.
Either FORMAT or FULLBUF can be specified.
In either case, CICS
ensures that the data stream is correctly ordered before sending
it to the 2260-based transaction.
with this technique, there is a difference in operation between
FORMAT and FULLBUF modes only in the case of a 480-character
2260 mapped onto a 480-character 3270.
Use of FORMAT mode causes
133

the loss of the last character of every 2260 outp~t line.
Use
of FULLBUF mode limits the data loss to the last character
position of the last line but at the expense of transferring a
full 480 characters (479 characters plus one attribute character)
for each interaction involving a data entry key.
It is the responsibility of the user to determine whether his
2260 transaction can tolerate the loss of the last character of
each output line.
CICS appends a blank character to the end of
each 2260 input line, except where the line is terminated
prematurely by a new-line (NL) symbol.
4.

"Change and enter" technique; for example:

~JONES

ORIGINAL

OLD ROAD EAST

1515

RECORD

NEW YORK

N. Y.

10010_

~JONES

UPDATED

OLD ROAD WEST

1515

RECORD

NEW YORK
N. Y.

10010

The FORMAT data stream looks like this:

JONES

1515

OLD ROAD WEST

The FULLBUF data stream looks like this:

JONES
NEW YORK

1515
OLD ROAD WEST
N. Y. 10010

The 2260 transaction sends an existing record to the screen.
After making any necessary corrections to data fields, the
operator depresses the ENTER key; the 2260 transaction receives
the entire record in its updated version.
.
with this technique, FULLBUF must be specified for this
transaction to ensure that the transaction receives a
2260-compatible data stream.

134

START OF MESSAGE INDICATOR (SMI)
For the 2260, X'4A' is displayed as the SMI (~) character.
If the
SMI character is contained in an output data stream, it is displayed
on the 3270 screen as follows:
COUN!]!

SM! SYM]Q1
¢

U.S.A.
U.K.
France
Germany

$
¢ or 9

At the user's discretion, a different character may be specified
during CICS system generation to represent the SMI.
Whatever character
is chosen, it remains the same for all transactions.
If an SMI character is not placed on the screen by the user's 2260
data stream, the operator must then key an SMI character somewhere on
the screen.
Failure to do so results in no data being transmitted to
the application program.
After the data has been read in, CICS 2260 compatibility transmits
a single blank character to overwrite the SMI character.
NEW LINE SYMBOL

(NL)

For CICS 2260 compatibility, the new line (NL) function is replaced
by a field mark character followed by the NL key.
Any incoming field
mark characters are treated as 2260 NL characters, and the remiinder
of the line is discarded.
Including the NL symbol in the 2260 output data stream causes the
substitution of a 3270 field mark character; the output continues at
the beginning of the next line.
(The 3270 field mark character displays
as a semicolon.)
LINE ADDRESSING
For a 3270 operating under CICS compatibility, any requests for
write at line address are honored.
CICS 2260 compatibility converts
the line address to the equivalent 3270 buffer address before
transmitting the data stream to the screen.
2848 LOCK FEATURE
The optional lock feature available on the 2848 Display Control
Models 21 and 22 is supported by CICS 2260 compatibility.
Any read/lock
request is honored by CICS 2260 compatibility by leaving the 3270
keyboard inhibited.
The keyboard is reset only if the transaction
changes or if a WRITE macro instruction is issued by the application
program.
2845/2848 TAB FEATURE
The optional tab feature available on the 2845/2848 Display Control
is supported by CICS 2260 compatibility.
Any tab character (colon)
found in the output data stream is replaced by an attribute byte. This
attribute byte is converted back to a 2260 tab character on a read
operation.
135

Because the tab feature uses an attribute byte, the terminal operator
cannot key a tab character from the keyboard.
The tab does not display
on th~ screen, but is present in the user's input data stream.
For proper operation, transactions using the tab technique are
required to operate in FULLBUF mode.
A tab character should not be
inserted as the last character of a line.
Because the tab feature uses an attribute byte, the cursor stops at
the beginning of each line before stopping at the authorized attribute
position, except in the case of 480/480 FULLBUF conversion.
The cursor
stops only at the authorized attribute position and the last position
in the buffer.
INITIATING TRANSACTIONS
The terminal operator can initiate either 2260 compatibility or 3270
native mode transactions by entering the appropriate four-character
CICS transaction code.
While in compatibility mode, any start of
Message Indicator (SMI) character in the input data stream is recognized
by CICS; the succeeding four characters are interpreted as a CICS
transaction code. The transaction code must be contiguous and may not
span two fields.
CICS then initiates the specified transaction.
If the specified
transaction is a 2260 compatibility transaction, CICS automatically
formats the 3270 screen.
To allow easy transition between 2260 compatibility and 3270 native
mode transactions, some conventions should be followed.
Three
acceptable methods of transition between transactions are:
1.

Clear the screen; then enter the transaction code and any data
to be presented to the transaction.
In this case, the operator must enter the transaction code at
the first position of the screen.
The transaction code may be
preceded by the SMI character, in which case the next four
characters are interpreted as the transaction code.
A
transaction code may not contain an SMI character.

For a terminal in compatibility mode, enter the SMI character,
the transaction code, and data.
If the transaction to be
initiated is a compatibility transaction, all data from the SMI
character to the cursor position is treated as a 2260
compatibility data stream and is mapped into 2260 format.
For
a native mode transaction, the data stream is identical with
the data stream from an unformatted screen buffer.

For a terminal in native mode with a formatted screen, the SMI
character and transaction code must be the first data characters
in the data stream. If the transaction code calls for a
compatibility transaction, the screen is formatted for 2260
compatibility but no data is presented to the transaction.

Always clear the screen before initiating a CICS transaction.

136

}73~

PRQQBAMMINQ

£QM~ID~B!~lON~

(Not applicable to CICS/DOS-ENTRY)

SYSTEM GENERATION
BTAMDEV=3735D and ANSWRBK=EXIDVER must be included in the DFHSG
PROGRAM=TCP macro instruction during system generation if support for
the 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal is to be generated for switched
lines.
TERMINAL CONTROL TABLE PREPARATION
FEATURE=AUTOANSR must be specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro
instruction for all terminals on switched-line networks.
To support
the 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal, the following must also be
specified:
1.
2.
3.

DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,ANSWRBK=EXIDVER.
BTAM DFTRMLST macro instruction of the form:
SWLST,AN; the user
portion of each 3735 DFTRMLST entry must point to the
corresponding TCTTE.
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,TRMTYPE=3735.

If FEATURE=AUTOCALL is specified in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro
instruction, the following must also be specified:
1.
2.

BTAM DFTRMLST macro instruction of the form:
SWLST,AD.
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,TRMADDR=name, and for batch input,
TRANSID=name.

INQUIRY MODE
CICS deletes the inquiry header on input and inserts it on output.
Therefore, inquiry applications require that:
1.
2.
3.

A single output record is transmitted.
The output block does not exceed 233 bytes (plus a three-byte
inquiry header).
The output data stream does not contain characters which are
invalid for a 3735.
(See the 1732 R£Qgramm§£~§ Quig§,
GC30-3001.)

If multiple inquiries are required in a single connection on a
switched line, the user must make provision in his DFHTEP program to
keep the line open.
To accomplish this he may check for the IOERROR
- TIMEOUT condition, a WRITE TR or READ TQ instruction, and TCTTEMIQ
set to a hexadecimal blank character (X'40') in TCTTEMCI.

Most independent teleprocessing applications require a dedicated
network.
The Telecommunications Access Method (TCAM) permits multiple
applications to share a single network, resulting in more efficient
use of terminals and lines.
The CICS/TCAM Interface enables CICS to
run as an application under TCAM.
TCAM is an optional access method that may be used alone or in
combination with other access methods currently supported (BTAM, BSAM,
and BGAM).

137

One practical use of the CICS/TCAM Interface is to run a "production"
CICS in one region and a "test" CICS in another.
Running in separate
regions, the applications are protected from one another. Operating
under TCAM, terminals and lines can be shared by the two CICS
applications. Other TCAM applications such as the Time Sharing Option
(TSO) can also be running concurrently.
In most cases, CICS user tasks that run under BTAM can run under
TCAM without modification to the task code.
This assumes that the user
has properly designed and coded his TCAM Message Control program (MCP).
Modifications to his CICS Terminal Error program (DFHTEP) are required
to take advantage of the new error codes used in the CICS/~CAM
Interface.
There are basic differences between TCAM and BTAM design methods.
crcs was designed to operate in the BTAM environment.
The CICS/TCAM
Interface, although resolving most of the differences, must impose some
restrictions when crcs is run in a TCAM environment.
These restrictions
as well as some of the ramifications of selecting various user options
are addressed in this section.
Also described are the user facilities
available and how the user implements and operates his system via the
interface.
TCAM APPLICATION PROGRAM INTERFACE
The TCAM Application Program Interface is a portion of the TCAM
Message Control program (MCP).
It consists of two types of control
blocks, the Process Control Block (PCB) and the TPROCESS block.
The PCB defines the application program interface of a
partition/region in the system using TCAM.
rts purpose is to control
communication and storage protection across partition/region boundaries.
It also defines the user-written message handler (MH) responsible for
processing messages to and from the application program.
Since a PCB
is required for each application program running with the MCP, a PCB
is required to define the CICS application program.
The TPROCESS control block controls communication to and from the
application program.
A separate block is required for both ~nput and
output to the application program.
The application program ~s
frequently referred to in TCAM as the Message processing program (MPP).
A TPROCESS block is required for each input queue to CICS and for each
output queue from eICS.
In CICS there are corresponding Terminal
Control Table line entries (TCTLE's) for each input queue and for each
output queue (that is, for each TPROCESS block).
DD cards (such as those shown in Figure 11) are used to correlate
the TCAM control blocks with the crcs control blocks. The crcs Terminal
Control Table contains the DCB.
The DDNAME specified in the Terminal
Control Table macro instruction (DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,DDNAME=name) names
the DD card.
In the DD card, the QNAME field names the TCAM TPROCESS
block.
No exceptions are required for crcs to the TCAM Application Program
Interface just described.
For additional information, refer to the
1CA~ f~Qgramm~~~§ gyid~ ~nQ Refe£~£~ ~~ll~al (GC30-2024).

138

MCP (TCAM)
APPLICATION
PROGRAM INTERFACE

APPLICATION
r'lESSAGE HANDLER

MPP (CICS)

~I_~
)

STARTMH

Figure 11.

DD card correlation of TCAM and CICS control blocks

CICS/TCAM INTERFACE
A TCAM input process queue is considered to be a "line" to CICS.
For each input process queue there is a CICS Terminal Control Table
line entry (TCTLE).
Note that TCAM requires the application program
(CICS) to have a DCB for each TPROCESS block; separate TPROCESS blocks
are required for input to and output from the application.
Therefore,
each TeAM output process queue is also considered to be a line and has
a corresponding CICS TCTLE.
Each TCTLE references its own DCB generated
by the DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction in CICS.
The CICS Terminal Control Table terminal entries (TCTTE's) define
the terminals associated with a particular line entry (TCTLE).
For
each physical terminal communicating with CICS via TCAM, a corresponding
TCTTE containing the terminal identification must be associated with
a TCTLE.
Duplicating individual TCTTE's for both the input TCTLE and
the output TCTLE is avoided by attaching a single, special TCTTE to
the input TCTLE and attaching all the individual TCTTE's to the output
TCTLE.
Although attached to the output TCTLE, they are used for both
input and output processing.
Each input record from TCAM must contain the source terminal
identification (OPTCD=W specified in the CICS DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro
instruction).
Using this identification as a search argument, the
corresponding TCTTE can be located by CICS.
Using the POOL feature (POOL=YES of the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro
instruction), it is possible to establish a pool of common TCTTE's on
the output TCTLE that do not contain terminal identifiers.
As required,
terminal identifiers are assigned to the TCTTE's or removed from
association with the TCTTE's.
This POOL feature necessarily imposes
a number of restrictions and should be thoroughly understood before
being implemented.
For additional information, see the discussion of
the POOL operand.

139

When TCAM is specified, CICS assumes that the user transaction data
passed to it from the TCAM queue is in the proper format to be passed
directly to the user task.
Except for the removal of the source
terminal identification, CICS does not alter the data it receives.
It
is the user's responsibility (via his MCP) to properly prepare the
data, such as translating to EBCDIC, stripping line control characters,
and deblocking.
The user may optionally bypass the CICS routine that
removes the source terminal identification by returning from the
user-written input exit (XTCMIN) in TCP with a displacement of zero
bytes.
Similarly, CICS assumes that the user transaction data passed to it
for TCAM has been properly formatted for direct placement on the TCAM
output process queue.
Except for the insertion of the destination
identification and the device-dependent control character, CICS does
not alter the data it receives.
It is the user's responsibility (via
his MCP) to properly prepare the data for the destination terminal,
such as translating and inserting line control characters.

Below is a generalized description of the sequence of events that
occurs in CICS when interfacing with TCAM.

TCAM notifies CICS that it has data for a
particular input TCTLE by posting its ECB.

CICS gets a TIOA and attaches it to the
special input TCTTE in the TCTLE.

CICS issues a READ to TCAM which results in
TCAM passing the data over the partition or
region boundaries to the CICS TIOA.
CICS
indicates at this time that it has data to
process.
(See Figure 12.)

The input TCTLE points to the corresponding
output TCTLE in response to the OUTQ
specification of the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE
macro instruction.

The individual TCTTE's on the output TCTLE
are searched for a matching source terminal
identification.
If POOL=YES has been
specified, a free TCTTE is assigned to this
: source terminal identification.
(See Figure 13.)

If an input user exit (XTCMIN) has been
specified, CICS links to the user exit routine
where the user may edit his input data prior
to passin g it to his task.
(See the discussion of XTCMIN in the section "TCAM User
Exits". )
If no exit has been sped:tfied, CICS removes
the eight-byte source terminal identification
field inserted by TCAM.
No other editing of
the data is performed.

140

A check is made to determine whether a task
is attached to the individual TCTTE.
If not,
go to Step H.

If a task is attached, a check is made to see
if the task has issued a READ.
If a READ
request exists, go to Step J.
If not, CICS
halts the processing of data in the queue
until the TCTTE becomes available or the
attached task issues a READ.
H

CICS attaches the appropriate task.
A user
exit is available prior to the actual attach.
(See the discussion of XATTACH in the
section "TCAM User Exits".)
If the task could not be attached (e.g., a
"maximum task" or "short on storage"
condition exists), CICS remembers it has data
to process and exits DFHTCP.
On the next
scan, it again tries to attach the task.

Once a task is attached, CICS stores the
TCAM segment identifier in the TCTTE (if
segment processing was specified by including
the C parameter in the OPTCD operand of the
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction).

CICS passes control to the attached task.

TCAM INPUT
PROCESS QUEUE

INPUT
TCTLE

SPECIAL
TCTTE
TIGA
Figure 12.

CICS issues a TCAM read

141

TCAM INPUT
PROCESS QUEUE
INPUT
TCTLE
QUTQ=

SPECIAL
TCTTE

(ABC)
TIOA

OUTPUT
TCTLE

INDIVIDUAL
TCTTE'S
Figure 13.

142

After TCAM read CICS attaches TIOA to corresponding TCTTE

The user issues a WRITE request in his
application program.

The TCP terminal scan recognizes the WRITE
request.

CICS checks to determine if an output user exit
(XTCMOUT) has been specified.
If specified,
CICS links to the user exit routine where the
user may edit his output data prior to passing
it to TCAM.
(See the discussion of XTCMOUT
in the section "TCAM User Exits".)

CICS checks the four-byte TCTTE field
TCTTEDES for a destination saved as a result
of DEST=NAME or DEST=YES having been specified
in the DFHTC TYPE=WRITE macro instruction.
If present, CICS inserts it in the eightbyte destination field and left justifies the
field, padding blanks to the right.
Otherwise,
CICS moves the source terminal identification
from the TCTTE to the destination field.

CICS moves a one-byte communication control
character into the ninth byte of the TCAM work

area.
See the section "Device Dependent
Considerations".
F

CICS issues a TCAM WRITE to transfer the data
to TCAM.

After checking for successful completion of
the WRITE to TCAM, CICS posts the user task
"dispatchable" if a task is still attached
to the TCTTE. Otherwise, CICS frees the
TCTTE for a new task.

The CICS/TCAM Interface implementation has resulted in the expansion
of the CICS Terminal Error program (DFHTEP) error codes and conditions
previously existing in CICS.
The additional codes and conditions are
described in the section "Creating a Terminal Error Program {DFHTEP)".

The DEST operand of the DFHTC TYPE=WRITE macro instruction can be
used to route an output message to a destination defined by the user
in the TCAM MCP.
This operand can be used to send a message to a
destination other than the source terminal (such as to another terminal,
a list of terminals, or another application).
If DEST=name is specified, "name" is stored in the four-byte field
TCTTEDES. If DEST=YES is specified, it is the user's responsibility
to have placed the destination name in TCTTEDES prior to issuing the
WRITE macro instruction.
CICS moves the data from TCTTEDES into the destination identification
field prior to placing the data on the TCAM output process queue.
The
user may bypass the CICS routine that inserts the destination field by
taking the XTCMOUT user exit and returning to CICS from the exit with
a displacement of zero.
In this case the user must ensure that the
TCAM header is properly formatted for output.
If the DEST operand is omitted, CICS inserts the source terminal
identification from the TCTTE into the destination identification field.

The CICS/TCAM Interface supports the TCAM segment processing
capability.
It permits segments of a message to be forwarded to CICS
rather than waiting for the entire message to be received.
If the user
specifies segment processing (by including the parameter "C" in the
OPTCD operand of the DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI macro instruction), CICS passes
the segment to the user and places the one-byte position field control
byte in the TCTTE field labeled TCTTETCM.
Similarly on output, the
user must supply the control byte in TCTTETCM for CICS to pass to TCAM.
For additional information on segment processing, refer to the
discussion of the OPTCD operand of the application input and output
DCB in the OS/MI! ~ng QS/MV! TCA~ gfQgf~~£~2 Qyide (GC30-2024).

143

In generating the TCAM Message Control program the user defines each
physical terminal to TCAM by means of a TCAM TERMINAL macro instruction.
since CICS also requires terminal definitions, the user must prepare
a Terminal Control Table terminal entry (TCTTE) for each terminal
through use of the DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL macro instruction.
As a result,
a one-far-one correlation exists between terminal definitions in TCAM
and in CICS.
In a highly restricted environment, this duplication of terminal
definitions can be reduced through use of the POOL feature (DFHTCT
TYPE=tINE,POOL=YES).
Instead of a one-for-one relationship, a "pool"
of generalized TCTTE's is defined for a TCAM process queue (line).
When a transaction is received over the TCAM "line", a search is made
for an available TCTTE in the pool.
When one is found, it is assigned
the source terminal identification for the duration of the task.
Upon
completion of the task, the TCTTE is available for reassignment.
If
there are no available TCTTE's to handle the next transaction from the
line, the line remains locked until a TCTTE becomes available through
task completion. The number of TCTTE's in the pool influences the
degree of multitasking.
Because the TCTTE's are not permanently assigned, the use of the
POOL feature is possible only in a restricted environment.
The POOL
feature is applicable only for those applications in which each record
received over the input process queue is a new transaction.
Thus, the
user should thoroughly analyze his environment before specifying the
POOL=YES option in the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction.

The following are line pool restrictions of which the user must be
aware:

144

Only one terminal type is permitted per TCAM line (process queue)
because of certain device dependencies within CICS.

Tasks attached from transactions over the TCAM line are not
permitted to issue Terminal Control READ requests.
This includes
GET, PAGE, and CONVERSE because they contain implied READ's.
Violation of this restriction can cause a permanent line lock
on the input process queue, thereby preventing any further
transactions on the queue from reaching CICS.

Segment processing requires multiple READ's which can cause a
permanent line lock.
Therefore, segment processing (OPTCD=WUC)
must not be specified.

Automatic task initiation is not applicable in the pool
environment.

Statistics are accumulated for each TCTTE in the pool; however,
the statistics cannot be correlated to the physical terminals.

Only one sign on
line pool at any
is propagated to
on is rejected.
terminal entries
accepted.

Master terminal functions require multiple READ's and cannot,
therefore, be used on terminals with pooled TCTTE's.

can exist for all terminal entries in a given
one time. The first sign on received by CICS
all terminals in the pool.
Any subsequent sign
A sign off clears the sign-on data from all
in the pool; a subsequent sign on is then

Line locking of two types can occur:
(1) a temporary lock that
resolves itself in time, and (2) a permanent lock that remains permanent
unless the user takes action in his Terminal Error program.
Adherence
to the pool restrictions outlined in the previous topic should eliminate
the permanent lock situation.
A temporary line lock occurs when no TCTTE's are available in the
pool and a new transaction appears on the input queue.
CICS locks the
queue until an existing task completes execution, thus freeing a TCTTE.
In this case, the completion of existing tasks is not dependent upon
additional input from the queue.
A permanent line lock can occur when multiple reads are required to
complete a task.
For example, assume that there are two TCTTE's in
the pool, that a task is attached to each, and that the segments in
the input queue are in the following order:
1.

Segment #1 for a third transaction
Subsequent segments for the two active' tasks

Since no TCTTE is available in the pool for the third transaction,
it must wait for a task to complete for a TCTTE to become available.
Because the TCAM input queue is processed sequentially, tasks 1 and 2
are unable to receive their subsequent segments.
Hence, they cannot
complete, and the queue remains permanently locked (because line pool
restriction 2 of the previous topic was not observed).

Since a queue is a sequential data set, the SEcond record on the
queue cannot be retrieved until the first record has been processed.
To keep records flowing smoothly through the queue, it is essential
that each record be processed as soon as it arrives.
In the CICS/TCAM
Interface, "processing the record" means detaching the TIOA (containing
the record) from the special input TCTTE and attaching it to the
individual TCTTE correlated to the actual physical terminal.
Each
individual TCTTE may be considered to be a "destination" for the purpose
of this discussion.
If a particular destination (TCTTE) is not ready to accept the
current record on the queue, the queue necessarily "locks" until the
destination can accept the record.
Queue locks are only a problem when
a queue is serving more than one destination.
Then, if a queue locks,
any new transaction on the queue or data records queued for existing
tasks are not processed until the re~uired destination has accepted
the current record.
Since queue locks can adversely affect system performance, it is
important that the user understand their cause and effect.
Proper
configuration of TCAM process queues and CICS Terminal control Tables,
reduces to a minimum the occurrences and duration of queue locks.
Because TCAM can read ahead from the terminals, it is possible for
TCAM to present to CICS a new transaction record destined for a TCTTE
that is already processing a task.
Also, TCAM can present a data record
for an existing task prior to that task issuing a READ request.
In
either case, CICS cannot "process" the record (as described above)
until the TCTTE is ready to accept the new TIOA.
Such input is called
"unsolicited input".
Three conditions can produce unsolicited input: (1) the CICS terminal
for which the data is destined is OUT OF SERVICE, (2) the CICS terminal
145

for which the data is destined is in RECEIVE status, or (3) the CICS
terminal for which the data is destined has an associated task that
has not issued a READ and the period of time indicated by the NPDELAY
specification has expired.
In all cases, the action taken by the
CICS/TCAM Interface is to place the input line OUT OF SERVICE and attach
DFHTACP to process the error condition.
The default action taken by DFHTACP (which can be altered by
user-written DFHTEP) for conditions 1 and 2 is to discard the data and
place the input line IN SERVICE.
No default action is taken by DFHTACP
for condition 3; therefore, the input line remains OUT OF SERVICE,
thereby preventing CICS from reading any subsequent records from the
input queue.
To allow processing of input to continue, DFHTEP must take
appropriate action.
If the input line is placed IN SERVICE by DFHTEP,
the CICS/TCAM Interface retries the operation; in this case, a count
mechanism is recommended in DFHTEP to prevent a loop in the event the
task never issues a READ.
Alternative action, perhaps when a count
limit is reached, might be to abend the task, dispose of the data, and
place the line IN SERVICE.
For further information concerning DFHTEP,
see the section "Creating a Terminal Error Program".
The problem of unsolicited input
a separate TCAM input process queue
However, as the number of terminals
become prohibitive in terms of main

can be eliminated entirely by having
for each CICS terminal (TCTTE).
increases, this solution may quickly
storage requirGments.

The user should analyze the type of traffic he anticipates over the
queues.
If he uses a 2770 Data Communication System or 2780 Data
Transmission Terminal to read in volumes of cards, he should consider
separate queues for these devices.
The Asynchronous Transaction
Processing (ATP) function in CICS should be seriously considered for
processing batches of data to minimize the time between task READ
requests. For conversational traffic with short-lived tasks, the
sharing of queues is certainly feasible.
The same TCAM output process
queue can be specified for multiple input process queues.
(See the
discussion of the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,OUTQ=symbolic name specification in
the section "System Table Preparation".)
The user need not be concerned with locking of the TCAM output
process queue since TCAM requeues the data by final destination once
it arrives over the output queue.
It is possible for the TCAM output process queue to become congested
due to lack of queuing space.
In this case, CICS has a WRITE to the
queue outstanding until TCAM accepts the data.
TCAM DEVICE CONSIDERATIONS
In the non-TCAM environment, the CICS Terminal Control program is
responsible for polling and addressing terminals, code translation,
transaction initiation, task and line synchronization, and the line
control necessary to read from or write to a terminal.
When TCAM is
specified, Terminal Control relinquishes responsibility to the TCAM
MCP for polling and addressing terminals, code translation, and line
control.
To take advantage of TCAM facilities, the user must accept
the responsibility of coding in the MCP Message Handler functions such
as code translation previously handled by the CICS Terminal Control
program.
For some terminal services, it is necessary for CICS to pass the
user request on to the TCAM MCP Message Handler.
A communication
control byte in the TCAM work area has been established for this
146

purpose.
It is passed to TCAM along with the eight-byte destination
name field.
Based on the communication byte, the user must execute
the proper MCP Message Handler macro instructions to accomplish the
necessary function.
The terminal services parameters that do not set bits in the
communications byte are WRITE, READ, WAIT, and SAVE.
Bits in the
communications byte are set for the 2260 parameters WRITEL and READL,
the 2760 parameter OIU, and the DISCONNECT parameter.
The CICS/TCAM Interface does not support the RESET parameter or the
3270 parameters READB and COPY.
All messages to TeAM from CICS are prefixed with the standard
CICS/TCAM communication byte. This byte is used to convey to TCAM
request functions that cannot be issued within CICS (such as WRITEL to
a 2260).
Request functions maintained are DISCONNECT (X'08'), READL
(X' 10'), and HRITEL (X' 20' ) •

The following CICS screen control macro instructions are passed to
the TCAM Message Control program (MCP):
1.
2.
3.

DFHTC TYPE=WRITE,LINEADR=number
DFHTC TYPE=WRITE,LINEADR=YES
DFHTC TYPE= (WRITE,ERASE)

These macro instructions are passed in the following format:

8 Bytes

Start of message

Destination

~---------Line

addressing character
specified)

(if

~--------------Screen

control (1 byte):
X'AO', Set WRITE direct
X'BO', LINEADR request
X'EO', ERASE request

L--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Standard communication byte t ha t
heads all messages to TCAM

For a 2848 Control Unit Model 21 or 22, the communication byte is
used to transmit READL and WRITEL requests to be executed by the TCAM
MCP.

147

Messages passed to CICS from TCAM are of the following format:

'8 Bytes f

tl--__ Message

Destination

Cursor (2 bytes)
~--------------Aid

(1 byte)

Messages passed from CICS to TCAM are of the following format:

Bytes

I
I

I
,~

D estination

I
"

I
,~

I
H

I
Message
WCC (Write Control Character
Command
Escape character
Standard CICS-to-TCAM
communication byte

All SOH% status messages input to CICS are passed to DFHTACP/DFHTEP.
DFHTC TYPE=COPY and DFHTC TYPE=READB are not supported by the
CICS/TCAM Interface.
In addition to normal read/write functions, the ERASEAUP, CTLCHAR,
UCTRAN, and COMPAT operands are also valid for the 3270.
TCAM USER EXITS
The three user exits applicable to the TCAM user are XATTACH, XTCMIN,
and XTCMOUT.
Whereas XATTACH is shared by other users, XTCMIN and
XTCMOUT are applicable only to TCAM users and are used in place of the
XINPUT and XOUTPUT exits used by others.
SEe the section nCreating
User Exits for CICS Management Programs" for further information
concerning CICS user exits.

This operand is used to generate linkage in the Terminal Control
program TCAM module in TCP to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage
is generated at the point prior to issuing a Task Control ATTACH for
a transaction identification received in response to polling.
In the
CICS/TCAM Interface this information is received over the TCAM input
process queue.

148

This operand is used to generate linkage in the Terminal Control
program TCAM module to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is
generated at the point following the completion of any input event.
If specified, the linkage is executed after the individual TCTTE is
located, just before CICS checks to see if a task is attached to 'the
TCTTE.
At this time the TIOA contains the 12-byte storage accounting
field and the work area from TCAM.
The work area contains an eight-byte
source terminal identfication header and the work unit (user data) •
TIOADBA points to the user data area.
The user has two options in returning from the user exit.
If the
user returns with a displacement of four bytes (an Assembler B 4(14)
instruction), CICS removes the eight-byte source terminal identification
field.
Upon completion, the TIOA contains the 12-byte CICS storage
accounting field and the work unit.
(See Figure 14.)
If the user returns from the exit with a zero displacement (an
Assembler B 0(14) instruction), CICS does not alter the data in the
TIOA. It is then the user's responsibility to handle the TCAM header.
For a discussion of TCAM work areas and work units, refer to the
section IIDefining the Application Program Work Area" in the Q.2:LliIT ~!l£
Q~Y1 1~AM ££Qgf~mmer~§ Guigg (GC30-2024).

This operand is used to generate linkage in the Terminal Control
program TCAM module to a user-written exit routine.
The linkage is
generated for output events at the point prior to placing data on the
TCAM output process queue.
The user has two options in returning from the exit.
If the user
returns from the exit with an Assembler B 4(14) instruction, CICS
inserts in the TIOA, between the 12-byte CICS storage accounting field
and the work unit, a TCAM header consisting of an eight-byte destination
field and a one-byte communication control character required for TCAM.
If the user returns from the exit with an Assembler B 0(14) instruction,
CICS bypasses this insertion routine. It is then the user's
responsibility to ensure that the TCAM header is properly formatted.
Figure 14 shows the composition of the TCAM Work Area and the CICS
Terminal Input/Output Area (TIOA) at the various stages of operation.
On input, it shows the information available from the TCAM input process
queue, the TIOA after input event completion, and the TIOA as it is
passed to the user task after CICS has edited out the origin field.
On output, it shows the TIOA (after CICS has edited in the destination
field) in the format in which it is placed on the TCAM output process
queue.
The TCAM origin field contains the source terminal identification
fteld.
Since CICS uses four-byte Terminal ID's, the name is
left-justified and the field is padded to the right with four blanks.
]gig:

The TCAM destination field contains the destination
identification for TCAM to properly route the data.

If the user specifies the output user exit and returns from the exit
with a zero displacement, CICS does not alter the TIOA work area. The
user must provide the data length at TIOATDL and must prepare the work
area for TCAM, including the eight-byte destination field and the
communication control byte.

149

User
Transaction Data

TCAM WORK AREA from
the input process queue

Start \ of
Work \ Area
\

Start of
Wor~ Unit

End\of
Work \\ Area

\
\

TIOA after Input
Event Completion:

User Transaction Data

CRQli])

I
I
I

I
I

TIOA after CICS editing
User Transaction Data
/

/
/

TIOA before output Event
Completion after CICS
insertion routine:

User Transaction Data
TIOA

Start of
Work Area

Commu ni ca t ion
Control Byte

t
End of
Work Area

The Work Area is placed on
the TCAM output process queue

Figure 14.

Stages of the TCAM work area and CICS terminal input/output
area (TIOA)

CICS/TCAM STARTUP
The TCAM MCP must be in operation prior to completing CICS system
initialization.
When the user brings up CICS with the CICS/TCAM
Interface,CICS checks for the presence of a TCAM partition/region and
issues the operator message:
DFH1500 - CICS CHECKING FOR TCAM MCP
If CICS discovers the MCP is not operational, the following messages
are issued:
DFH1520 - TCAM MCP IS NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE
DFH1520 - REPLY RETRY OR CANCEL OR CONTINUE
The operator must then respond:
RETRY
when the TCAM partition/region becomes active; or
CANCEL
to terminate CICS; or
CONTINUE
to continue initialization of CICS in the absence of the TCAM partitionl
region.

150

If the operator responds CONTINUE, all DD cards that reference a
TCAM queue must have been previously removed from the startup deck to
avoid an abnormal termination of CICS. The CONTINUE response is
applicable to a mixed BTAM/TCAM mode of operation when TCAM lines are
not being used during execution of CICS.
CICS/TCAM ABEND/RESTART
If the TCAM Message Control program (MCP) terminates abnormally,
any TCAM application programs currently active are automatically
terminated abnormally, providing there is at least one open line group
in the MCP.
The CICS application program is no exception.
For further
information, see the discussion concerning "Coordinating MCP and
Application Program Restarts" in the Q~~Il ~nQ Q~~Y1 1£!tl R£Qg£~~m~f~§
guide (GC30-2024). CICS does not provide RESTART capability.
CICS/TCAM TERMINATION
CICS is terminated in the normal manner.
No modifications to
termination procedures are required to support the CICS/TCAM Interface.
If both CICS and TCAM are being terminated, CICS ahould be terminated
first to avoid an abnormal termination of CICS.

151

Administration of a real-time data base/data communications (DB/DC)
system involves considerations not ordinarily applicable to the
traditional batch processing environment.
These real-time DB/DC
considerations include:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Multiple application environment, often involving common or
related data bases
Managing data centrally on behalf of all applications
Transactions arriving on a random nonscheduled basis for
asynchronous (concurrent) processing upon arrival
Transaction processing sometimes of long duration (for example,
continuous 24-hour operation)
Communication across multiple time zones (sometimes involving
foreign as well as domestic interstate communication)
Interface with multiple vendors of data processing services and
equipment

It is the responsibility of the system administrator to deal
creatively with these new dimensions and complexities in data
processing, seeing to it that the system is "tuned" for optimum
performance and service.

The dynamics of the database/data communication (DB/DC) environment
make it necessary to be able to change system control parameters.
certain of the parameters are changeable, if allowed by the system
administrator or by the supervisor and terminal operators.
Those
facilities and the considerations for invoking them are described in
the 1~£illinal QE~~~to£~2 Guig~ (SH20-1044). The primary system control
is provided through the master terminal.
The master terminal function is a logical rather than a physical
consideration.
This function can be invoked from any terminal that
the system administrator allows, but is intended for use by a master
terminal operator.
In addition to the administrative terminal
facilities described i.n the Ter!!!in~l Q~~ato£~2 Guidg, the master
terminal may alter other system parameters that control the performance
of the system.
These control parameters are to be changed in the
day-to-day operation of the system to effect the desired performance.
They can also be changed in the process of tuning the system to obtain
optimum performance under differing conditions.
The terminal administration facilities are described in the Terminal
The system administration functions intended-for---exclusive use from a master terminal are described below.

QE§rato~~§ Q~igg.

MASTER TERMINAL
The Master Terminal program is a conversational program that leads
the user through each transaction if sufficient information to perform
the requested service was not entered in the original data entry.
The services provided by the Master Terminal program allow the master
terminal operator to:
152

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.

Inquire about or change the partition exit time interval value.
Inquire about or change the runaway task interval value.
Inquire about or change the stall detection interval value.
Inquire about or change the storage cushion size.
Inquire about or change the maximum number of tasks value.
Inquire about or change the maximum number of batch tasks value.
Inquire about or change the maximum number of ATP tasks value.
Inquire about or change the negative poll delay for a terminal.
Inquire about or change the trigger level or a transient data
intrapartition data set.
Turn the CICS Trace function on or off.
Inquire about or change the status of a single terminal.
Change the status of a list of terminals.
Change the status of a class of terminals.
Change the status of all the terminals in the system.
Inquire about or change the status of a line.
Inquire about or change the status of a control unit.
Inquire about or change the status of one or more data base
data sets.
Open one or more data base data sets.
Open one or more transient data extrapartition data sets.
Open the dump data set.
Close one or more data base data sets.
Close one or more transient data extra partition data sets.
Close the dump data set.
Switch the dump data set to the alternate dump data set.
Inquire about the status of a program.
Terminate a task.
Terminate CICS.

The partition/region exit time interval is the maximum interval of
time that CICS will release control to the operating system in the
event there are no transactions ready to resume processing.
This binary
time interval can be any three-to-ten-digit decimal value in the range
from 100 to 27962020 milliseconds.
A typical range of operation might
be 100 to 2000 milliseconds.

Any task given control through the Task Control program returns
control to Task Control within a user-defined interval of time.
Tasks
not meeting this time requirement are considered to be in a runaway
(logical loop) state and are deleted from the system.
This binary time
interval can be any three-to-ten-digit decimal value that is not less
than the partition/region exit time interval and not greater than
27962020 milliseconds.
A typical runaway task time interval might be
5000 milliseconds.
If the runaway task time interval is set to zero,
the feature is made inoperative.

If CICS remains in an overload condition for the duration of the
stall time interval, it is assumed that a system stall exists and
corrective action is initiated.
This binary time interval can be any
three-to-five-digit decimal value that is not less than the
partition/region exit time interval and not greater than 32767
milliseconds.
A typical stall time interval might be 20000
milliseconds.
'---._-

153

The system storage cushion is used by CICS to minimize system
overload conditions.
The cushion size does not actually change until
the existing cushion is released.
When the cushion is then regained,
the cushion is of the size indicated by the new value.
If a cushion
size change is requested and the existing cushion is not released, the
cushion size remains unchanged.
The cushion size can be any
two-to-five-digit decimal value (representing number of bytes) in the
range from 20 to 65535.

The negative poll delay function allows the user of CICS to delay
the polling of BTAM devices on a line when negative responses are
detected. This facility allows some control over the CPU overhead
required to service negative poll interrupts.
The request must be made
in milliseconds and has a range from 0 to 20000.
Once a terminal on
that line enters into a conversational-mode transaction, that terminal
receives a full poll until the transaction is completed.

CICS limits the number of tasks that can be in the system at any
one time to the number indicated by this user-defined value.
This
value can be changed dynamically in the range from 1 to 999.
In the
CICS/DOS-ENTRY system, the maximum number of tasks cannot be changed
dynamically since the Rollout facility is initialized at a specified
number during system initialization and cannot change unless CICS is
reinitialized.

The consecutive dispatch limit is valid only in the CICS/DOS-ENTRY
system.
When a transaction has performed the number of input/output
operations (other than terminal input/output) specified by the
consecutive dispatch limit, a task switch is initiated by CICS.
The
consecutive dispatch limit can be any value between 1 and 999.

If a Transient Data intrapartition data set is marked for automatic
task initiation, CICS automatically initiates the task when the
specified number of requests for output operations (indicated by the
trigger level for that destination) have been issued for that
destination.
The trigger level can be any value between 0 and 32767.

If the CICS trace function is not generated as part of the
nucleus, the trace function cannot be turned on.
If the CICS
function is generated as part of the CICS nucleus, turning it
not remove it from the system; the trace function is still in
storage, but is not executed.

CICS
trace
off does
main

The status of data base data sets reflects one or more of the
following:
154

1.
2.
3.

Read
Update
Add
Exclusive control

Optionally, the user can define two dump data sets (DFHDMPA and
DPHDMPB), alternating between them during real-time execution of CICS.
If there are two dump data sets, a 'switch' request closes the dump
data set that is currently open and opens the other dump data set.
This allows the user to print the CICS formatted dumps on the first
dump data set without having to terminate CICS.

The status of a program is comprised of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

The language in which the program was written
The size of the program in bytes
Whether or not the program is permanently resident in main st~rage
Whether or not the program is currently in main storage
The number of times the program has been used
The number of transactions that are currently using the program

The optional CICS dynamic open/close facility allows the user to
dynamically open/close his data sets as often as desirEd during the
real-time execution of CICS.
For example, this makes it possible for
the user to defer the opening of data sets at System Initialization
and open/close them later through the master terminal as they are
needed.
The dynamic open/close capability is applicable to File
Management (data base data sets), Dump Management (dump data sets),
and Transient Data Management (extrapartition data sets). Those
CICS/DOS extrapartition sequential disk data sets that are to be closed
and re-opened by the dynamic OPEN/CLOSE function of the Master Terminal
Program must be defined as nonresident or records may be lost.

The only time a task is not terminated upon request is when the
requested task is currently reading from or writing to a terminal.

CICS can be terminated from the master terminal by entering the
transaction identification:
CSMT
The system responds:
WHAT SERVICE IS REQUESTED?
The master terminal operator should enter:
SHUTDOWN

155

The system will respond:
IS SHUTDOWN TO BE IMMEDIATE?
The operator can respond with one of the following:
NO
NO, DUMP
YES
YES,DUMP
If the system is to be terminated without regard to the existence
of any active transactions (tasks), the operator should enter 'YES'.
If the operator wishes to wait until there are no active transactions
in the system, he should respond 'NO'.

]Ql§:

If the user of the CICS/DOS-STANDARD system requests immediate
termination of CICS while active transactions are communicating
with terminals, unpredictable results could occur; that is,
active terminals could receive input/output data from other
active terminals within CICS.

If the master terminal operator wishes to receive a main storage
dump upon completion of the termination process, he should respond
either 'YES,DUMP' or 'NO,DUMP'.
If immediate termination is not requested, if Asynchronous
Transaction Processing (ATP) is being used, and if there are batches
currently in a HOLD status, the operator must respond:
CATP STOP
to complete the quiescing process.
When termination is initiated, the following message is displayed
on the system console and on the master terminal:
DFH1701 - CICS IS BEING TERMINATED
When termination is complete, the following message is displayed on
the system console:
DFH1702 -

NORMAL TERMINATION COMPLETE

If a dump is requested, the following message is displayed on the
system console when termination is complete:
DFH1791 - ABNORMAL TERMINATION COMPLETE
DATE AND TIME OF DAY CONTROL
In the course of normal operation, CICS maintains the current date
and time of day within the Common System Area (CSA).
The current
(Julian) date of the form YYDDD is maintained in packed decimal
representation at CSAJYDP, where YY is years and DDD is days.
The
current time of day is maintained in three formats:
(1) in packed
decimal at CSATODP of the form HHMMSSS, where HH is hours, MM is
minutes, and SSS is seconds to tenths of a second, (2) in binary decimal
at CSACTODB to hundredths of a second, and (3) in binary decimal timer
units at CSATADJT to 300ths of a second.
The current date is initially
set by the CICS system Initialization program to agree with the date
maintained by the operating ~ystem.
The time of day values are updated
during task dispatching to reflect the time of day maintained by the

156

operating system. The accuracy of these values depends upon the task
mix and frequency of task switching occurrences.
Since the time of day maintained by the operating system can be
changed either by the operating system (for example, OS resetting the
clock to zero at midnight) or by the console operator, CICS must
recognize the situation where a "negative" change in the time of day
has occurred, and must adjust expiration times maintained by CICS
accordingly.
If the optional time adjustment feature of CICS Time Management is
not included in CICS, any change to the operating system time o~ day
involving midnight is represented by CICS as a value larger than the
previous value (for example, 1:00 a.m. is represented as 2500 hours);
the date remains unchanged.
If the optional time adjustment feature
is included in CICS (by including the ICPTIME=YES operand in the DFHSG
PROGRAM=ICP specification), and if either the time-ordered task
synchronization feature or automatic task initiation feature of CICS
Time Management is also included, any change to the operating system
time of day is automatically reflected in the expiration times
maintained by CICS; the date maintained by CICS is reset to agree with
the data maintained by the operating system.
In the case of CICS/OS, when the operating system time of day is
set to zero at midnight (and the time adjustment feature has been
included in CICS), CICS/OS adjusts the expiration times of day it
maintains, changes the date, and then resets its time of day to zero.
In the case of both CICS/OS and CICS/DOS, when the operating system
time of day is changed by the console operator to a value less than
the previous value, CICS adjusts the expiration times it maintains to
reflect the negative value and then resets its date and time of day to
those values maintained by the operating system.
The optional time
adjustment feature thus makes it possible for CICS to be operated on
a continuous round-the-clock basis.
The optional time adjustment feature is included in CICS by
generating the Time Adjustment program (DFHTAJP) as part of the Control
System Operational group (CSO).
The user must provide a corresponding
entry in the Processing Program Table (PPT) and the appropriate
Transaction Identification (CSTA) as an entry in the Program Control
Table (PCT) referencing DFHTAJP.
When a negative change in the time of day maintained by the operating
system is detected by CICS, transaction CSTA is automatically initiated.
A message is then sent to the console operator informing him that the
CICS time of day has been changed to reflect the change in the time of
day maintained by the operating system.
CICS does not recognize a change to just the date field.
However,
if transaction CSTA is initialized after the date maintained by the
operating system has been changed, the date maintained by CICS is
updated accordingly.
SYSTEM STATISTICS
Statistics maintained by the various CICS management programs can
be displayed during the day in part or in their entirety on the request
of any terminal operator whose security code allows the request of such
information.
Statistics are transmitted to the Transient Data destination CSSL
as variable-length, unblocked records (maximum block size equal to 136)
when the system is normally terminated or when requested by the terminal

157

operator. When requested by a terminal operator, an alternate
destination may be specified.
To request all system statistics, the following transaction is
entered by the terminal operator:
CSTT AOR destid
To request selected statistics, the following transaction is entered
by the terminal operator:
CSTT SOR destid label,label,label,DONE
The 'destid' is used to specify the four-character destination
identification to which statistics are to be sent.
If this field is
blank (consisting of six blank characters between "SOR" and "label"),
CSSL is the default destination.
The 'label' corresponds to any of the following labels which request
a particular set of statistics.

TERM
PROG

FILE
TASK
STaR
DUMP
TRAN
TEMP

Terminal statistics
Program statistics
File statistics
Task statistics
Storage statistics
Dump statistics
Transient data statistics
Temporary storage statistics

The optional CICS Dynamic Open/Close facility allows the user to
dynamically open/close his data sets as often as desired during the
real-time execution of CICS. This makes it possible for the user to
defer the opening of data sets during system initialization and
open/close them later as they are needed.
The dynamic open/close
capability is applicable to File Management (data base data sets), Dump
Management (dump data sets), and Transient Data Management
(extrapartition data sets) and may be invoked via the Master Terminal
program or through the use of the DFHOC macro instruction in an
Assembler language application program.
For a discussion of open/close via the Master Terminal program, see
the section "Master Terminal" in this publication.
The Open/Close macro instruction (DFHOC) is used to request any of
the following services:
1.

2.
3.
Noig~

Open, close, or switch dump data sets.
Open or close data base data sets.
Open or close transient data extra partition data sets.
The DFHOC macro instruction is intended for use by the system
programmer as a means of system control; it should not be used
by the application programmer to open/close his data sets , as
improper use of this macro instruction can cause serious
degradation of system performance.

The following operands can be included in the DFHOC macro
instruction:

158

DFHOC TYPE=OPEN,

*
*
*
*
*

DA~ASE~=TRANSDATA,DATABASE,DUMP,

lIS~ADR=(register),

(symbolic register),YES,
SYMEADR=symbclic address,
DSE~ID= (name, (xx), ••• ),
CHECK=symtolic address

DFHOC TYPE=CLOSE,

BA~ASET=TRANSDATA,D~TAEASE,DUMP,

*
*
*

LIS'IADR= (register) , (symbolic register), YES,
SYMEADR=symbclic address,
DSETID= (name, ••• ) ,
CHECK=symtclic address

BFHOC TYPE=SWITCH,
DA'IASET=DUMP
OPEN

DA~A

SE'IS

(CPEN)

The programmer can open a data set or series of data sets by issuing
the
DFHOC TYPE=OPEN,

*
*
*
*
*

DATASE~=TRANSDATA,DATABASE,DUMP,

LIS~ADR=

(register) , (symbolic register), YES,
SYMEADR=symbelic address,
DSE'IID= (name, (xx) , ••• ) ,
CHECK=symbolic address
macro instruction.
He must provide the parameters needed by specifying
them in the macre instruction or, in the case of LISTADR, by placing
the address of the parameter list (built by the user) in the TCA at
TCAOCLA and specifying LISTADR=YES.
]Q1~:

Parameters and/or parameter lists built in conjunction with this
macro instructien should be built in the TWA or in storage
acquired by th€ crcs Storage Contrel macro instruction as data
in a program area could be lost.

A discussion ef the operands that can be included in the DPHOC
TYFE=OPEN macro instructicn follows.
DATASET:
Specifies whether the request is for a transient data
extrapartition data set (TRANSDATA), a data base data set (DATABASE),
cr a dump data set (DUMP).
LISTADR:
Not applicable if DATASET=DUMP is specified.
Specifies the
register or symbolic register name containing .the address of the
open/close parameter list built by the user.
If LISTADR=YES is
specified, this address can be placed in the TCA at TCAOCLA.
If the
LISTADR operand and SYMBADE operand are omitted, execution of the DPHOC
macrc instruction causes the list to be built for the user starting
with the first byte of the TWA. In this case, it is the user's
responsibility to make sure that the required space is available in
the TWA.
The space can be calculated using the formula:
Space = (n x 12)

+ 4

where Un" is the decimal number of twelve-byte entries in the open/close
parameter list and the "4" represents four bytes of hexadecimal P's to
signify the end of the parameter list.

159

The symbolic storage definition (DFHOCLDS) of a parameter list entry
is provided by CICS.
The format of a twelve-byte entry in the
open/close parameter list is:

WORD 1: Four-byte Destination 10.
WORD 2: Four bytes of the form bbxx where bb is two bytes of
blanks and xx is a two-byte suffix of the data set
central block created by the DCT assembly.
The contents
of this field are ignored when using resident control
blocks.
WORD 3: Error byte plus three-byte address of DCT entry (this
informatien is supplied by CICS).

WORDS 1 and 2:
Data set name (left justified, padded with blanks).
WORD 3: Error byte plus three-byte address of FCT entry (after
cempletien) •
In CICS/OS, the user can optionally specify, in WORD 2 of a TRANSDATA
entry, the parameter list address pointing to a storage area.
This
storage area contains information to be placed into a dummy DCB before
opening it.
If an address is placed in this field, the first byte must
be set to a hexadecimal FF.
The symbolic storage definition (DFHOCODS)
of this parameter list is ~rovid€d by CICS.
The format of the parameter
list is as fellows:
Byte 1:
Byte 2:
Byte 3:
Byte 4:
Bytes 5,6:
Bytes 7,8:
Bytes 9-16:

Open Options byte
BUFNO byte
RICFM byte
EEROPT byte
LRECL
BLKSIZE
DENAME

The first eight bytes must contain the correct hexadecimal codes for
the desired parameters, since the 16 bytes of the open/close parameter
list are moved into the DCB.
SYMEAtR:
Not applicable if EATASET=DUMP is specified, this operand
indicates the syncelic address of an open/close parameter list built
by the user.
If the SYMEADR and LISTADR operftnds are omitted, execution
of the DFHOC maCIO instruction causes the parameter list to be built
for the user starting with the first byte of the TWA.
For a discussion
of the parameter list, see the discussion of the LISTADR operand in
this section.
DSETID:
Not applicable if DA!ASET=DUMP is coded or if the LISTADR or
SYMBADR operand is used, this operand specifies the data set names or
destination identifications to be used in constructing a parameter
list.
If a suffix is specified, it must ce separated from the name or
destinatien identificatien by a comma and must be enclosed in
parenthesis.
If DA!ASE!=DA!ABASE is coded, up to 255 data set names can be
specified with a single use of the DSETID operand.
If DATASET=TRANSDATA
is coded, up to 255 destination identifications can be specifed with
a single use of the DSETID operand.
If TYFE=OPEN is coded and if the
destinations are nonresident, "xx", a two-character suffix of the data
set contrel block (DCB for CICS/OS, DTF for CICS/DOS) must be provided

160

with each destination identification; if the destination is resident,
the "xx" suffix is ignored.
In CICSjOS, if "xx" consists of more than two characters, it is
assumed to be the syrebc1ic address of a list of options and parameters.

160.1

to be moved into the DCB.
For the format of this list, see the
discussion of the LISTADR operand in this section.
CHECK:
Specifies the symbolic address of a user-written routine to
which control is passed if any error is detected during the OPEN
operation. The user-written routine is given control whenever TCAOCTR
in the TCA contains a nonzero return code.
It is the responsibility
of the user to examine the return code in the TCA and, if necessary,
examine the individual error codes in the list that was built either
by the user or by the expansion of the DFHOC macro instruction.
The
error code appears in the first byte of the third word of each entry
in the parameter list.
Upon return from the Dynamic Open/Close program, TCAOCTR may contain
one of the hexad~cimal codes:
00 - No error
FF - Invalid request
or, if TCAOCTR contains neither of these codes, it will contain one or
. more of the following hexadecimal codes:
80
40
20
10

Open error
Close error
No space available for OPEN
Invalid control block name

While performing the requested service on the list of data sets,
the individual error bytes in the list entry are filled with a
hexadecimal 00 or with the proper error code each time an error is
encountered.
If more than one error is encountered while processing
the parameter list, TCAOCTR reflects all the errors and may show a bit
configuration different from those shown above.
For example, if there
are six data sets to be opened, if four are successfully opened, if
one has an invalid control block identification, and if one has an open
error, the TCAOCTR field contains a hexadecimal 90.
When there is not enough main storage available to open any data
sets, TCAOCTR contains a hexadecimal 20, and all the entries contain
a fullword (four bytes) of zeros in the third word.
CLOSE DATA SETS (CLOSE)
The programmer can close a data set or series of data sets by issuing
the
DFHOC TYPE=CLOSE,
DATASET=TRANSDATA,DATABASE,DUMP,
LISTADR=(register), (symbolic register),YES,
SYMBADR=symbolic address,
DSETID= (name, ••• ) ,
CHECK=symbolic address

*
**
*

macro instruction.
The DATASET, LISTADR, SYMBADR, and CHECK operands
have the same significance as for the DFHOC TYPE=OPEN macro instruction.
The DESTID operand is used as follows.
DSETID:
Specifies the names of the data sets to be closed.
No suffix
is required.
Up to 255 data set names can be specified with a single
use of this operand.

161

SWITCH DUMP DATA SETS (SWITCH)
The programmer can switch from the dump data set currently being
used to the alternate dump data set by issuing the
DFHOC TYPE=SWITCH,
DATASET=DUMP
macro instruction.
This macro instruction causes the current dump data
set, if open, to be closed, and the alternate dump data set to be
opened.
A TYPE=CLOSE,DATASET=DUMP macro instruction does not cause a
switch but only closes the current dump data set.

During the course of CICS execution, certain exceptional conditions
can occur of which system administration should be aware.
These
conditions cause control system messages to be sent to appropriate
destinations through the CICS Transient Data Control facility.
The
user interested in this information should direct it to the desired
queue or log by defining the appropriate entries in the Destination
Control Table (DCT).
Although these control system messages may be routed to an
extrapartition output log, it is strongly recommended that the user
route them to a terminal (preferably hard copy) so that appropriate
administrative action can be taken.
Control system messages that originate in the Terminal Abnormal
Condition program (DFHTACP) are time stamped; that is, the time that
the exceptional condition occurred is printed as part of the message.
The time is expressed in the form "hhmmsss", where "hh" represents
hours, "mm" represents minutes, and "sss" represents seconds to tenths
of a second.
Control system messages that originate in the Abnormal
Condition program (DFHACP) are not time stamped.
The system actions described in connection with the following
messages are the default actions provided by DFHTACP.
These system
actions are subject to modification by the user-written Terminal Error
program (DFHTEP).
In the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system, it is not always possible to determine
the transaction identification.
Therefore, in the following message,
the program identification (PROG yyyyyyyy) may be substituted for the
transaction identification in the case of the CICS/DOS-ENTRY system.
1.

TCT SEARCH ERROR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
TCT SEARCH ERROR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE zz, hhmmsss

~~ElanatiQnl

BTAM input only.
An invalid terminal address was
received for a read operation on a line defined by terminal
xxxx.
If the line supports the TWX, relative line zz is also
printed.

~yst§ID !£iiQn~

Terminal request for service is ignored and the
data which was input is lost.
The line associated with terminal
xxxx is placed out of service on non-switched lines; the system
continues polling other lines.
On remote 2260 terminals, the
control unit skip flag is turned on in the polling list and the
line continues in service.

162

E~ogr~mm~£

Action:
Examine the Terminal Control !able to be
sure there Is-ail-entry for every terminal on each line.
Regenerate it to include a missing terminal.
Bad transmission
of data on remote 2260 terminals can cause this message to occur.

TRANSLATE ERROR AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
TRANSLATE ERROR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
TRANSLATE ERROR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE zz, hhmmsss

~!El~natiQQ~

BTAM.
Terminal type for Terminal Identification
xxxx is not present in the Terminal Control Table, or the
Terminal Control program was not generated to support the device
type specified in the Terminal Control Table.

~ystgill !£tio~~

Request for service is ignored and the data is
lost.
The system continues polling.
Terminal xxxx is put out
of service.

EfQg~Q£ ActiQn~

Regenerate the Terminal Control Table to
provide the correct terminal type, or regenerate the Terminal
Control program to support the required terminal type.

POLLING LIST ERROR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss

]~ElanatiQn~

The address for a terminal identified as xxxx in
the Terminal Control Table does not correspond to the polling
list.

~ystQill !£tiQn~

The system continues processing.
is put out of service.

Terminal xxxx

g£Qg£~me£

Action~
Examine the Terminal Control Table and
polling list for discrepancies.
If the assemblies of each are
correct, check to see if the program has inadvertently affected
either the table or the list. Correct the error and either
regenerate the table or resubmit the program.

OUTPUT EVENT REJECTED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, RETURN CODE zz,
hhmmsss

BTAM output only.
The return code zz was generated
by BTAM when the writ~ was attempted.

E!£1~nation~

~ystgill

!£iiQn: The line (defined by terminal xxxx) is placed
out of service, and the transaction yyyy is abended.

g£Qg££~~£

A£tion: Take appropriate action as determined from
the BTAM return code.

INPUT EVENT
hhmmsss
INPUT EVENT
INPUT EVENT
RETURN CODE

REJECTED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, RETURN CODE zz,
REJECTED ON LINE W/TERM xxx x RETURN CODE zz, hhmmsss
REJECTED ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE aa,
zz, hhmmsss

163

]~E1~~1iQlll

BTAM input only.
Return code zz was generated by
BTAM when the READ was attempted.

~ystgID !£!iQn~

The line defined by terminal xxxx and relative
line aa (for switched lines) is placed out of service.
The
transaction yyyy is abended.

RIogr~NIDgf

!£tiolll Take appropriate action as determined from
the BTAM return code.

TCT CODING OR TCP PROGRAM ERROR AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
TCT CODING OR TCP PROGRAM ERROR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
TCT CODING OR TCP PROGRAM ERROR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE
LINE aa, hhmmsss

~~ElallatiQlll

Generated as a result of a BTAM return code of 04
(BUSY), OC (invalid OPTYPE), or 10 (AUTOPOLL or program polling
error) •

RfQg£~mm~f

Actiolll To further analyze the BTAM READ/WRITE return
code, see the publication OS/36Q ~asi£ %g1§£Qill~ni£~!ion§ !££g§§
~ethoQ, !§£§iQB l
(GC30-2004).

OPEN FAILURE, USE LOPEN TO RECOVER ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
OPEN FAILURE, USE LOPEN TO RECOVER ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE
LINE aa, hhmmsss

]~£lanatiQnl

Generated as a result of BTAM return code 14 (line
error during OPEN) •

~l§te!!!

!£tionl

None.

RfQgf~mmef !£!iQn~

Use the Master Terminal facility to place

the line in service.
8.

MISSING DD CARD ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE aa, hhmmsss

]xplan~tionl

Generated as a result of BTAM return code 08
(invalid RLN). This error most commonly occurs as a result of
omitting one of the DD cards of a switched-line pool.

R~ogr~!!!mef !£tion~

Ensure that all DD cards for a switchedline Fool are present in the job stream used to bring up CICS.

164

SHOULD NOT OCCUR RETURN CODE zz AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
SHOULD NOT OCCUR RETURN CODE zz ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
SHOULD NOT OCCUR RETURN CODE zz ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE
LINE aa, hhmmsss

~!planatlQn~

Generated as a result of BTAM return codes 18,
1C, or 20. These return codes are undefined for CICS and
indicate that the DCB probably contains dynamic buffering
operands.

RI~~mme~ !£iion~

Ensure that no buffering operands exist in
the DCB for the line involved.

10.

BUFFERED DEVICE BUFFER EXCEEDED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

~!21~natiQn~

On a device with the buffer receive feature (for
example, the 2740-2), the output message length exceeded the
hardware buffer size.

2Y§ig~ !£!ion~

storage is freed

The write request is aborted, the terminal write
(if possible), and the task is abended.

~~ggra~N~~ !£tiQn~

Ensure that the data length plus the carrier
control characters does not exceed the hardware buffer size.

11.

OUTPUT LENGTH ZERO AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

~!El~n~tiQn~

A write was requested on terminal xxxx by
transaction yyyy, but the contents of the TIOATDL field was
zero.

~Y§!gN !£!lQn~

storage is freed

The write request is aborted, the terminal write
(if possible), and the task is abended.

Rrog££mm~£ !£~Qn~

Ensure that the transaction in error
initializes the TIOATDL field of the TIOA.

12.

NO OUTPUT AREA PROVIDED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

]!21~n£tiQ~

A write was requested on terminal xxxx by
transaction yyyy; the TCTTEDA field was not initialized.

~ystgill

Aciion:
abended.

The write request is aborted and the task is

~IQgrammg~ !£tiQn~

Ensure that the transaction in progress
obtains necessary storage and initializes the TCTTEDA field, as
necessary.

13.

OUTPUT AREA EXCEEDED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

~!plan£tiQn~

The Terminal 1/0 Area (TIOA) was not large enough
to contain both the data and carrier control characters.

165

~Y§tem

Ac!iQn~

storage is freed

The write request is aborted, the terminal write
(if possible), and the task is abended.

R~Qg~mmg£

ActiQn~
Ensure that the transaction in error obtains
TIOA's large enough to contain messages in addition to carrier
control characters.

14.

UNIT CHECK AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
UNIT CHECK ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmrnsss
UNIT CHECK ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE zz, hhmmsss

~ZE!£ngtiQ~~

A unit check error occurred on the line defined
by terminal xxxx, transaction yyyy, and relative line zz (as
appropriate) .

~~§!§N~£1ion~

The line is placed out of servicp. on GAM or SAM
lines and on BTAM I/O errors (with the exception of Intervention,
Data Check, or Time out error conditions).

Intervention on a switched line causes the task to be abended
and the line to be logically disconnected.
Intervention on a
non-switched line with a dummy (unidentified) terminal causes
the line to be placed out of service; with a real terminal,
causes the terminal to be placed out of service and the
transaction (task) to be abended.
Data check with a dummy terminal causes the line to be placed
out of service; with a real terminal, causes the terminal to be
placed out of service and the transaction to be abended.
Time out on a Read Text command causes a MESSAGE TOO LONG
response to be sent to the terminal.
Time out with a dummy
terminal causes the line to be placed out of service; with a
real terminal, causes the terminal to be placed out of service
and the transaction to be abended.
R~Qgra~N~£ ActiQn~

Examine the System Console Log message
generated by BTAM for this error and have the unit error
corrected.

15.

UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
LINE

CHECK SHOULD NOT OCCUR AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
CHECK SHOULD NOT OCCUR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
CHECK SHOULD NOT OCCUR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE
zz, hhmmsss

]z]1gnatiQn~

A unit check error (which is undefined by BTAM)
occurred on the line defined by terminal xxxx, transaction yyyy,
and relative line zz (as appropriate).

~Y§i~m

A£tion~
The line is placed out of service on GAM or SAM
lines and on BTAM I/O errors (with the exception of Intervention,
Data Check, or Time Out error conditions).

Intervention
and the line
non-switched
the terminal
(task) to be

166

on a switched line causes the task to be abended
to be logically disconnected.
Intervention on a
line with a dummy (unidentified) terminal causes
to be placed out of service and the transaction
abended.

Data check with a dummy terminal causes the line to be placed
out of service; with a real terminal, causes the terminal to be
placed out of service and the transaction to be abended.
Time out on a Read Text command causes a MESSAGE TOO LONG
response to be sent to the terminal.
Time out with a dummy
terminal causes the line to be placed out of service; with a
real terminal, causes the terminal to be placed out of service
and the transaction to be abended.
g!Qgf~~~g£ Action~

Examine the System Console Log message
generated by BTAM for this error and have the unit error
corrected.

16.

UNIT EXCEPTION AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
UNIT EXCEPTION ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
UNIT EXCEPTION ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE zz, hhmmsss

~!£1~natiQQ~

A unit exception error occurred on the line defined
by terminal xxxx, transaction yyyy, and relative line zz (as
appropriate).
This error was posted 41 by BTAM.

~yst~~£tiQn~

with a switched line, the transaction is abended
and the line is logically disconnected.
With a dummy terminal,
the line is placed out of service; with a real terminal, the
terminal is placed out of service and the transaction is abended.

R!Qg~~ill~£ ~£tiQn~

Examine the System Console Log message
generated by BTAM for this error and have the unit error
corrected.

17.

UNIT
UNIT
UNIT
LINE

EXCEPTION SHOULD NOT OCCUR AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
EXCEPTION SHOULD NOT OCCUR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
EXCEPTION SHOULD NOT OCCUR ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE
zz, hhmmsss

~KE1~ti~

A unit exception errror (undefined by BTAM)
occurred on the line defined by terminal xxxx, transaction yyyy,
and relative line zz (as appropriate).

~y§~gm-A£tion~

With a switched line, the transaction is abended
and the line is logically disconnected.
With a dummy terminal,
the line is placed out of service; with a real terminal, the
terminal is placed out of service and the transaction is abended.

g!Qg£~mN~E ~£!ion~

Examine the system Console Log message
generated by BTAM for this error and have the unit error
corrected.

18.

NEGATIVE RESPONSE AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
NEGATIVE RESPONSE ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
NEGATIVE RESPONSE ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE zz, hhmmsss

EXE1~atiQ~
An invalid negative response occurred on the line
defined by terminal xxxx, transaction yyyy, and relative line
zz (as appropriate).

167

~ystg.!!!

!£tion1. The terminal is placed out of service and the
transaction is abended.

R~Qg£~'!!!~~

!£tion1. Examine the System Console Log message
generated by BTAM for this error and have the unit error
corrected.

19.

UNDETERMINED UNIT ERROR AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss
UNDETERMINED UNIT ERROR ON LINE Vi/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
UNDETERMINED UNIT ERROR ON LINE Vi/TERM xxxx, RELATIVE LINE zz,
hhmmsss
Qg§tinatig1!1.

CSMT

]~Bl~D~tigll1.

An I/O error (which was not unit check, unit
exception, or negative response) occurred on the line defined
by terminal xxxx, transacton yyyy, and relative line zz (as
appropriate).

~yst~.!!!

!£ii2n1. The line associated with terminal xxxx is placed
out of service.

R~Qg££ill.!!!g~

Ac1iQn1. Examine the System Console Log message
generated by BTAM for this error and have the unit error
corrected.

20.

SECURITY VIOLATION HAS BEEN DETECTED TERM ID=xxxx, TRANS ID=xxxx,
OPERATOR NAME=xxxxxxxx

]~plaDatign1.

The operator at terminal xxxx has requested a
transaction whose security key does not match the corresponding
security key for the operator who is signed on.

~Y§igill

!£1 ion1.

Continues polling cycle.

R~oqr~.!!!g~

!£iiol!1. Determine whether the operator should be
allowed to request the transaction.
If so, correct the security
key for the operator in the Sign-on Table (DFHSNT).

21.

INTERCEPT REQUIRED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

]~l~D~~~Qn:

The task associated with terminal xxxx, transaction
yyyy, and relative line zz (as appropriate) was to have been
abnormally terminated, but TPURGE=NO was specified in the
corresponding entry of the Program Control Table (peT).

~ystgill

!ctiQl!:

R~Qg~me~

The terminal is placed out of service.

ActiQg:
Use the Master Terminal facility to intercept
or terminate the task.

168

22.

TRANSACTION xxxx ABEND xxxx AT xxxx

]~£l£B~tion~

The identified transaction attached to the
identified terminal has been abnormally terminated.
The ABEND
code indicates the origin or cause, and may be originated by
the user or by CICS.
Following are the ABEND codes for abnormal
terminations initiated by CICS.

AACA

Abnormal Condition

Invalid error code passed to DFHACP
in the TCA at location TCAPCABR.
A
complete system dump is provided to
assist in problem determination.

AICA

Interval control

A runaway task condition has been
detected and the task is being
abnormally terminated.
The condition
indicates a possible logical loop
within the user's program.

AKCA

Task Control

Another CICS task has requested Task
Control to abnormally terminate this
task as a result of actions initiated
by:
• Terminal Abnormal Condition program
(DFHTACP); the appropriate message
is found at destination CSMT.
• Task Termination portion of
the Master Terminal facility.
The Asynchronous Transaction Control
program (DFHATP) terminates
asynchronous tasks when:
• User requests deletion of a batch
via CWTR delete option while CICS
is actively processing that batch;
DFHATP abnormally terminates the
task and purges all remaining data
from the queues.
• An asynchronous task tries to read
more data than is available;
DFHATP abnormally terminates the
task.

AKCD

Task Control

Invalid code in the dispatch control
indicator field.
The invalid code
can be found in the TCA at symbolic
location TCATCDC.
Valid Codes:
X'10'
Not dispatchable (not
applicable to CICS/DOS-ENTRY)
X'20'
Dispatchable
X'40'
wait on list of events
X'SO'
wait on single event

AKCP

Task Control

A stall condition has been detected
and this task is being abnormally
terminated.
This task carries a
code indicating it is purgeable.

169

AKCR

Task Control

The type of request code is invalid.
The invalid code can be located in
the TCA at symbolic location TCATCTR.
Valid Codes:

X'01'
X'02'
X'04'
X'OS'
X'10'
X'11'
X'12'
X' 14'
X'20'
X'40'
X'SO'
AKCS

Task Control

The request exceeds available Subpool
1 storage.
CICS/DOS-ENTRY only.

APCC

Program Control

An attempt was made to execute an
ANS COBOL program but ANS COBOL
support was not generated in Program
control.

APCI

Program Control

An attempt was made to execute a
PL/I program but PLII support was
not generated in Program Control.

APCL

Program Control

There is insufficient main storage
available for the requested program.

APCP

Program Control

An error occurred on the read of a
requested program from the library.

APCR

Program Control

Task request for service is invalid.
The invalid code can be located in
the TCA at TCAPCTR.
Valid Codes:
X' 01'

X'02'
X'04'

X'OS'
X '1 0'

X'40'

X'60'
X'90'

LINK
XCTL
LOAD
DELETE
RETURN
ABEND
ABEND with DUMP
RETURN from Task
Control program

APCT

Program Control

A task issued a request for a program
which is not in the PPT.
The invalid
program ID is in the TCA at TCAPCPI.

APIA

Program Interrupt

A program check has occurred during
the subject task execution.
The
PSW at the time of interrupt is
saved in the task's TCA.

ASCR

storage Control

The request for service is invalid.
Valid codes:

X'20'
X' 40'

110

Enqueue
Dequeue
Reserved
Reserved
Task Origination
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Priority Change
Task Wait
Task Termination

Released Storage
Release Storage

X'SO'

Acquire storage

ASCT

storage Control

The request exceeds available Subpool
1 storage. CICS/DOS-ENTRY only.

ATDI

Transient Data

The type of destination code is
invalid.
The invalid code can be
located in the DCT at symbolic
location TDDCTDT.
Valid Codes:
X'20'
X'40'

X'SO'
ATDT

Transient Data

Indirect
Extrapartition
Intrapartition

Request for service is invalid.
The
invalid code is in the TCA and can
be located at TCATDTR.
Valid codes;
X'20'

Forced end of volume on
extrapartition data set.

X'40'

Output service on
intrapartition.

X'SO'

Input service on
intrapartition.

DLDY

DL/I Interface

A DL/I CA~L was issued, but the DL/I
Interface dummy program under CICS/OS
was loaded at system initialization.

DLIA

DL/I Interface

An irrecoverable error occurred
during execution of the CICS-DL/I
Interface program under CICS/OS.
The DLIA code is returned to all
transactions from which DL/I CALL's
are subsequently issued.

DLPA

DL/I Interface

A DL/I abend (or pseudo abend)
occurred during transaction
processing.
The ABEND code is found
in the TCA at TCADLECB.

~Y§ig~

!£tioll: In addition to the dump services requested by
application programs, CICS also requests dumps for abnormal
conditions and places specific dump codes in the dumps for ready
identification.

!ctiQll:
code.
23.

Analyze the error condition indicated by the abend

INVALID COPY REQUEST AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyy, hhmmsss

]zB1gnatiQll.i.
a. The Terminal Control Table Terminal entry of the "from"
device did not specify the COpy feature.
b. The device address specified for the "from" device
does not exist on the requested control unit.
c. The length specified for the COpy request was not one.

171

§!§1~m

Action~

The transaction is abended.

R~Qg~amm~~-A£!ion~

Ensure that the application program is aware
of the device configuration as necessary.

24.

INVALID MSG BLOCK ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss

~~Elan~!iQll~

a.
b.

An unidentifiable message was received from a remote 3270
device. The message block did not correspond with known
identification patterns.
The type of data block received from a 3735 was incorrect
for the mode of the active CICS transaction.
For example
an inquiry message block was received for a batch transaction
or conversely. This will probably occur if the 3735 is
disconnected during a transaction and, upon reconnection,
the operator initiates a different mode of operation.

§y§te~-A£!ioQ~

The terminal is placed out of service and the
transaction is abended.

g~QgI~illIDgI

Action~
For condition (a), ensure that the hardware
difficulty is corrected.
For condition (b), ensure that the
terminal operator understands the correct operating and recovery
procedures for 3735 transactions.

25.

INCMPLT MSG BLOCK ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
INCMPLT MSG BLOCK AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

~~Ela~tiQn~

An incomplete message was received on term xxxx;
that is, end of transmission was received prematurely or prior
to end of text.

§!§iem_!£tiQQ~

The terminal is placed out of service and the
transaction is abended.

g&Qg~mm§~ Action~

Ensure that the hardware difficulty is

corrected.
26.

INTERV ON PRINTER ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
INTERV ON PRINTER AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

~~£1~natiQ~

This message is sent to the 3270 Information
Display System on a printer intervention situation:
a.
Normal out of paper condition, cover open, offline, etc.
b. No printer present, but transaction request to start printer.
c. Printer adapter feature not present.

§I§t§m Action:

No action is performed.

gIQg~~I-A£tion:

Ensure that the Terminal Control Table is
properly defined and that the transaction requests proper printer
operations. If the 3277 Display Station is plugged in the wrong
position on the 3270 Information Display System, the operator
may depress the CLEAR key to proceed.

172

21.

INTERV REQUIRED ON LINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
INTERV REQUIRED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

This message occurs when an intervention situation
arises on the 3210 Information Display System.

]ZE!gDgtiQn~

~~QB~g~~~_Ac~ion~

28.

Correct the intervention situation.

EBBOB STA!US MSG eeee RECEIVED CN LINE w/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
EBBOR STA!US MSG eeee RECEIVED AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

BTAM error status message "eeee" was received from
a remote 3210 Infcrmation Display System cr from a 3135
Prcgrammable Buffered Terminal. For a remote 3210, an
"intervention required" condition causes an INTERVENTION REQUIRED
message in lieu of this message.

]~E.!gnE:ti.Q.D':'

2Y§!~~_Af!1Qn.:.

The transaction is abended and the terminal is
placed out of service; however, if operation check status is
present and if the terminal is a 3210, the terminal is left in
service.

Analyze the error status to determine the
proper course of acticn tc correct the unit erro~ or program
error.

~fQgfsIDIDgf_Af!i.Q.D~

29.

UNSOLICITED INEUT CNLINE

W/~ERM

xxxx, hhmmsss

Input has occurred on a control unit (general
poll) for which the associated terminal is "out of service" or
has a task that has not issued a DFHTC TYPE=READ macro
instructicn.

E~El~~tiQn:

No action is performed by CICS.
given to user-written DFHTEP.

~~steID ~~!1Qn:

~fQgfgIDIDg~ ~£!ion:

Control is

Code DFHTEP as dictated by envircnmental

needs.
30.

DESTINATIO~ dddd INVALID CNIINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
DESTINATION addd INVALID AT TERM xxxx, TRANS yyyy, hhmmsss

An application program has attempted to write to
an invalid TCAM destination.

]~E.!~.D~tiQn:

!f!iQn:
request.

~~~ID

Abend the transaction and abort the write

EfQgf~ID~~~

!£!iQn: Ensure that application programs write to
proper TCAM destinations.

113

31.

INVALID RIAD REQUEST AT TERM xxxx, TRANS 111Y, hhmmsss

]Z12!s!H!1i£1! :
a. A ~ransaction has requested a BEAD from a terminal that
presently has a terminal status of RECEIVE.
b.

A transaction has issued a READ request to a 3135 terminal
during batch transmission after receipt of the end-of-file
(BOP) condi tion.

ElsteID !£1i2n:

Abort the READ request and abend the transaction.

~~Q~~g~~~

!£1ion: For condition (a), ensure that transactions
de not issue DFHTC TYPE=READ macro instructions to terminals in
RICEIVE status. For condition (b), ensure that the 3135 batch
transacticn makes ~roper use of the EOF o~erand in the DFHTC
macro instruction so that no reads are issued after the EOF
condition has occ~rred.

32.

INVALID

WBI~E

REQUEST AT TERM xxxx, TRANS Y1YY, hhmmsss

]Z12.!§:1!atjQn:
a. A transaction has issued a WRITE to a terminal that presently
has a terminal status of INPUT.
b.

A transaction has issued a WRITE to a 3135 during batch
transmission prior to receipt of the 'EOF' condition.

~lsteID

!£tion:
transactien.

Abort the WRITE request and abend the

~~Qg~§:mme~

!£!i2n: For condition (a), ensure that transactions
do not issue WRITE requests to terminals in INPUT status. For
condition (b), ensure that the 3735 batch transaction does not
issue its first WRITE request b~fore receiving the EOF condition.

33.

TIME OUT CNLINE W/TERM xxxx, hhmmsss
TIME OUT AT TERM xxxx, TRANS YY11, hhmmsss

]~E12~~iQ1!:

A 32-second timeout has occurred on a 7710 Audio

Response Unit.
§lsteID !£!ion: The 1110 terminal received an error message and
is disccnnected, and the transaction abended.

34.

DFHSF001 xxx 11YY1 ZZZ
CSML
The operator has signed off a terminal where:
xxx
YY11Y

114

= operator

identification from Sign-on Table;
= number of transactions processed;

zzz

= number of transaction 8rrors.

~ystg~

!£iion: CICS continues processing. The operator is no
longer signed on the terminal. The message SIGN OFF IS COMPLETE
is returned to the terminal.

175

The following destination identification entries are required and
must be provided by the user in the DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA, DFHDCT
TYPE=INTRA, or DFHDCT TYPE=INDIRECT specification:
1.

DESTID=CSMT

DESTID=CSTL

DESTID=CSSL

DESTID=CSML

The Terminal Abnormal Condition program (DFHTACP)
and Abnormal Condition program (DFHACP) write
terminal error and abend messages, respectively,
to this destination.
DFHTACP writes terminal I/O error messages to
this destination.
statistics programs write data to this
destination.
Sign-off program outputs data to this
destination.

If the Transient Data Control program (DFHTDP) is not included in
the generation of CICS, messages to these destinations are lost
(ignored) •

The following entries are required in the PCT and must be provided
through the DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY macro instruction.
Minimum values for
TWASIZE are indicated.

l!Q1g:

!RAl!.2.!~

RB OGRA l1

!J!ASIZ~

CAQP***
CATP***
CRDR***
CSAC
CSFE**
CSMT**
CSOT**
CSSF**
CSSN**
CSST**
CSTA**
CSTE
CSTT
CWTR***
8888*
9999*

DFHAQP
DFHATP
DFHRD1
DFHACP
DFHFEP
DFHMTPA
DFHMTPA
DFHSNP
DFHSNP
DFHMTPA
DFHTAJP
DFHTACP
DFHSTKC
DFHWT1
DFHSNP
DFHSNP

100
100
100
40
100
160
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
160
0
0

Entries marked with a single asterisk are required only when
numeric-only terminals are used to sign on.
Entries marked with a double asterisk are required only when
the associated program is desired.
Entries marked with a triple asterisk are required only when
the Asynchronous Transaction Processing facility is being used.

Any transaction codes specified for the TRANSID parameter in any
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAl macro instruction must also be included in the
PCT.
176

Transaction code CSXX is reserved for 3270 support and should not
be generated in the PCT.
(CSXX is used to generate an "invalid
transaction code" message when a zero length data message is received.)
The user-assigned transaction security key for entries CSAC, CSSN,
and CSSF must always be the value 1.
A high priority (for example, 255) is recommended for transactions
CSAC, CSTA, CSMT, CSOT, and CSST.
A low priority (for example, 001)
is recommended for transactions CSFE, CSSF, CSSN, and CSTT.
CSMT, CSOT, and CSST do not run in 2260 compatibility mode.
COMPAT=NO must be specified or the operand omitted.

The following entries are required in the PPT and must be provided
through the DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY macro instruction:

gROG.E!1:! l!!1:!]
DFHACP

Abnormal Condition program.

DFHAQP

Asynchronous Queue Purge program (required only
if the Asynchronous Transaction Processing
facility is being used).

DFHATP

Asynchronous Transaction Control program
(required only if the Asynchronous Transaction
Processing facility is being used).
Basic Mapping Support program (required only if
3270 Basic Mapping support is desired).
Terminal Test program (optional).
Master Terminal program (required only if master
terminal or system termination functions are
desired).

Dynamic Open/Close program (required only if
dynamic open/close facility is desired).
Asynchronous Transaction Input processing
programs (required only if the Asynchronous
Transaction Processing facility is being used).
Sign-off program linked to by DFHSNP (required
only if sign-on/sign-off function is desired).
Sign-on program (required only if sign-on/signoff function is desired).
Sign-on Table (required only if sign-on/sign-off
function is desired).
System Statistics program.
System Termination program linked to by DFHMTP.

177

178

DFHSTTD

Transient Data and Temporary Storage statistics
program linked to by DFHSTKC.

DFHSTTR

Terminal and Data Base statistics program linked
to by DFHSTKC.

DFHTACP

Terminal Abnormal Condition program.

DFHTAJP

optional Time Adjustment program that
automatically adjusts the date and time of day
maintained by CICS to reflect the date and time
of day maintained by the operating system.

DFHTDCP

Device-Dependent Output program for 1030
terminals.

DFHTEP

Terminal Error program linked to by DFHTACP.

DFHTRNxx

non-resident data set control blocks as specified
by the user in DCT.

DFHWTl
DFHWT2

Asynchronous Transaction output Processing
programs (required only if the Asynchronous
Transaction processing facility is being used) •

DFHXITxx

User-written exit routine used with Asynchronous
Transaction Processing transactions CRDR and
CWTR.

User-specified
name

User-written program to edit input data and
transfer control to the appropriate transaction.

This section illustrates the coding required to prepare the CICS
Terminal Control Table (TCT). The terminal network described includes:
1.

start/stop transmission
a. Multipoint line (serving more than one terminal)
(1)
1030 Data Collection System
(2)
2260 Display Sta tion (remote)
b. Point-to-point line (serving only one terminal)
(1)
2740 Communication Terminal and 2760 Optical Image unit
(2)
2741 Communication Terminal with correspondence code
c. switched line (dial-up)
(1)
7770 Audio Response unit under CICS/OS
(2)
7770 Audio Response unit under CICS/DOS
(3)
Common Carrier Teletypewriter Exchange Terminal (TWX)

Binary synchronous transmission
a.
Multipoint line (serving more than one terminal)
(1)
2980 General Banking Terminal System
(2)
3270 Informa tion Display System (remote)
b. Point-to-point (serving only one terminal)
(1)
2780 Data Transmission Terminal
c. Switched line (dial-up)
(1)
2770 Data Communication System
(2)
System/3
(3)
3735 Programmable Buffered ~erminal (CICS/OS only)

Transmission via sequential devices
a. Card reader/line printer
(1)
2540 Card Read Punch and 1403 Printer
b. Disk
(1)
2314 Direct Access Storage Facility

Transmission via devices locally attached
a. Graphics devices
(1)
2260 Display Station (local)
(2)
3270 Information Display System (local)

',-- -

Each of the following is a functional example if as shown in the
first example, (1) the DFHTCT TYPE=INITIAL macro instruction is inserted
at the beginning of each example, {2} the DFHTCT TYPE=FINAL macro
instruction is inserted at the end of each example, and (3) an Assembler
END card that includes the operand DFHTCTBA is inserted following the
DFHTCT TYPE=FINAL macro instruction.

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=270 2,
DEVICE=1030,
LINELST= (024) ,
SWITCH=NO,
DSCNAME=DTF1030
OPL1030 DFTRMLST OPENLST,(64,62)
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=1030,
DSCNAME=DTF1030,
BTAMRLN=l,

*
*
*

**
*
*

*
179

LISTADR=OPL1030,
INAREAL=120
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=T30A,
TR ANSID= 1 030,
TRMADDR=64,
TRMPRTY=202,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=T30B,
TRANSID=1030,
TRMADDR=62,
TRMPRTY=201,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=LINE

l26Q

QI2RLAI 21!lION (REMOTE)

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2701,
DEVICE=2260,
LINELST=(026) ,
SWITCH=NO,
DSCNAME=DTF60R
OPL2260 DFTRMLST OPENLST,(40FF,41FF)
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=2260,
TRMMODL=3,
DSCNAME=DTF60R,
BTAMRLN= 1,
LISTADR=OPL2260,
INAREAL=960
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=R60A,
TRMADDR=40AO,
TRMPRTY=61,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=R60B,
TRMADD R=40A 1,
TRI1PRTY=62,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=R530,
TRMTYPE=1053,
TRMADDR=40A4,
TRMPRTY=32,
TR!iSTAT=RECEIVE
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=R65A,
T RMT YP E= 226 5 ,
TRMADD R=4151 ,
TRMPRTY=64,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=LINE

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2703,
DEVICE=2740,
FEATURE=(CHK,OIU),
180

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*

**
*

*
*
*
*
*

*
**
*

*
*
*
*

LINELST=(029) ,
SWITCH=NO,
DSCNAME=DTF40B
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=2740/2760,
FEATURE=CHECKING,
DSCNAM E=DTF40 B,
INAREAL=120,
BTAMRLN=1
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRr1IDNT=T40C,
TRANSID=2760,
TRMPRTY=202,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=LINE

l.!!l1

~Q~~uNI~!TIQ]

1]RMIM!1

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2703,
DEVICE=2741C,
LINELST= (030) ,
SWITCH=NO,
DSCNAME=DTF41C
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=2741C,
DSCNAME=DTF41C,
INAREAL=120,
BTAMRLN=1
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINA1,
TRMIDN'1=T41A,
TRMPRTY=129,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=LINE

DCB

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=7770,
DSCNAME=DCB7770,
APPENDG=Z3
L1777) DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCNAME=DCB7770,
INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=1,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,
CONVTAB=ABB,
RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR,
POOLADR=T17770
L27770 DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCNAME=DCB7770,
INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=2,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
181

co NVTA B=ABB,
L37770 DFHTCT

L47770 DFHTCT

T17770 DFHTCT

T27770 DFHTCT

T37770 DFHTCT

T47770 DFHTCT

READY

DFHTCT

ERROR

DFHTCT

IIIQ
DTF

RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR
TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCNAME=DCB7770,
INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=3,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,
CONVTA B=ABB,
RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR
TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCNAME=DCB7770,
INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=4,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,
CONVTAB=ABB,
RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7771,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7772,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7773,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7774,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=POOL
TYPE=7770MSG,
MESSAGE='001DOB'
TYPE=7770MSG,
MESSAGE='OOOAOF'

AU~!Q E~SPO]~~

UNII

UN~~E ~ICSLDO~

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=7770,
DSCNAME=DTF7770,
SWITCH=YES,
LINELST=(080,081,082,083) ,
BLKSIZE=256,
FLNNAME=L17770
L17770 DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCNAME=DTF7770,
182

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

L27770 DFHTCT

L37770 DFHTCT

L47770 DFHTCT
,
'-.,--

T17770 DFHTCT

T27770 DFHTCT

T37770 DFHTCT

T47770 DFHTCT

READY

DFHTCT

ERROR

DFHTCT

INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=1,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,
co NVTA B= ABB,
RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR,
POOLADR=T17770
TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCN AM E=DTF777 0,
INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=2,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,
CONVTA B=ABB,
RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR
TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCNAME=DTF7770,
INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=3,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,
CONVTAB=ABB,
RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR
TYPE=LINE,
AC CMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=7770,
DSCNAM E=DTF777 0,
INAREAL=256,
BTAMRLN=4,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL,
CONVTA B=ABB,
RDYMSG=READY,
ERRMSG=ERROR
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7771,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7772,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7773,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=7774,
TRMPRTY=30,
TRMTYPE=7770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=POOL
TYPE=7770MSG,
MESSAGE='001DOB'
TYPE=7770MSG,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
183

MESSAGE='OOOAOF'

DPHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2702,
DEVICE=TW35,
LINELST= (039) ,
SWITCH=YES,
DSCNAME=TWXONE
IDLTWX DFTRMLST IDLST,O,19,01B151FFC393C3CB052BEB1BB151E1E1E1E1A1
TWXIDA DFTRMLST IDLST,7,4931683,10,500AB222C3052B2B9AB1
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=TWX,
DSCNAME=TWXONE,
INAREAL=120,
BTAMRLN=1,
LISTADR=IDLTWX,
FEATURE=(AUTOANSR,AUTOCALL),
POOLADR=TWXAUTO,
ANSWRBK=AUTO
TWXAUTO DPHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=TWXA,
TRMADDR=TWXIDA,
TRMPRTY=201,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=POOL

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2703,
DEVICE=BSCMDMPT,
BSCODE=EBCDIC,
SWITCH=NO,
DSCNAME=DTF2980
TCT29POL DFTRMLST AUTOWLST, (C1C1F02D,37373737)
TCT29PA1 DFTRMLST OPENLST, (8181402D)
TCT29PA2 DFTRMLST OPENLST, (8181F12D)
TCT29PA3 DFTRMLST OPENLST, (8181F22D)
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=2980,
DSCNAME=DTF2980,
INAREAL=480,
BTAMRLN=1,
LISTADR=(TCT29POL,WRAP),
PEATURE=AUTOPOLL
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=T801,
STN2980=O,
TAB2980=04,
POLLPOS=01,
TRMADDR=TCT29PA1,
TRMMODL=1,
TRMPRTY=10,
TIOAL=200,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=T802,
STN2980=1,
TRMADDR=TCT29PA2,
184

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
POLL CU
ADDRESS STATION 1
ADDRESS STATION 2
ADDRESS STATION 3

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

TRMMODL=2,
TRMPRTY=10,
TIOAL=200,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

TRMS~A~=TRANSCEIVE

DFHTC'I TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=T803,
STN2980=2,
TAE2980=02,
TRMADDR=TCT29PA3,
TRMMODL=4,
TRMPRTY=10,
TICAL=200,
TRMS'IAT=TRANSCEIVE,
LASTTRM=LINE
]Q1~:

l11Q

This is a functional example for CICS/DOS if the
(C1C1F02D,37373737) parameters in the above TCT29POL DFTRMLST
statement are changed to 3732,C1C1F02D.
lB~~]~ATIOM ]1~g1AX ~1~1]~

POLL77
LSTR77A
LSTn77B
LSTR77C

DFTRMLST AUTOWLST, (40407F7F2D,C1C17F7F2D,3737373737)
CFTRMLST CPENLST,(6Q6040402D)
DFTRMLST OPENLST,(616140402D)
DFTRMLST CPENLST,(6161C1C12D)
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=BSCMDMPT,
DSCNAME=REMOTE77,
ESCOCE=EBCBIC
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCME'IH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=3277,
LISTADR=(POLL77,WRAP) ,
BTAMRLN=1,
DSCNAME=REMOTE77,
INAREAL=256,

*
**

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

TR~MODL=2,

FEATURE=AUTOPOLL
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=R77A,
TRMMODL=1,
TRMTYPE=3275,
TRMADDR=LSTR77A,
POLLPOS=1,
CCMPAT= (480,12,2260,2) ,
FEATURE=PTRACAPT,
TIOAL=500
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=R7:JB,
TRMADDR=LSTR77B,
P01LPOS=2,
COMPAT=(960,15,2265,2) ,
FEATURE=(COPY,DCKYEC,SELCTPEN) ,
TIOAL=1500
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=R77C,
TRMTYPE=3286,
FEATURE=COPY,
TRMADDB=LSTR77C,
LASTTRM=LINE,
TRMSTA'I=TRANSCEIVE,
TIOAL=1500
]ot~:

This is a functional example for CICS/DOS if (1)

the (40407F7F2D,
185

ClC17F7F2D,3737373137) parameters in the above POLL?7 DFTRMLIST
statement are changed to 3732,40407F7P2D,ClC17F7F2D, and (2)
the LINELST=(029) and CU=2703 operands are included in the DFHTCT
TYPE=SDSCI specification.

,678Q DA%A

N2780

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
BSCOtE=EBCDIC,
DDNAME=DDN2780,
DEVICE=2780,
DSCNAME=DCBN2780,
CU=2703,
LI NELS!= (023) ,
FEATURE=(BSC,SLV),
MODELST=O,
CONFIG=PPT,
SWITCH=NO,
MA CRF= (R, W)
DFHTCT TY'PE=LINE,
TRMTYPE=2780,
DSCNAME=DCBN2780,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
ETAMRLN= 1,
BSCOIJE=EBCDIC,
INAREAL=520
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDN'I=T80A,
LASTTRM=LINE,
TRMTYPE=2780,
TIOAL=100,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
TRMPRTY=126

l:11Q ]A1A

D2770

186

~]A~~~l~SIQn 1~]~1]A1

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

~~~~~Bl~ATIOn ~X~1~~

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
BSCODE=EBCDIC,
DDNAME=DDD2770,
DEVICE=2770,
DSCNAME=DCBD2770,
MACRF= CR, W) ,
CU=2103,
LINELST=(020) ,
FEATURE=(BSC,SLV) ,
MODELST=O,
CONFIG=PPT,
SWITCH=YES
DFHTCT TYFE=LINE,
TRMTYPE=2770,
DSCNAME=DCBD2770,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
ETAMRLN=1,
BSCOtE=EBCDIC,
FCCLADR=D2770,
INAREAL=520,
FEA'IURE=AUTOANSR,
LISTADB=LA2170,
ANSWRBK=TEEMINAL
DFHTC'I TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDN'I=D10A,
LASTTRM=FOOL,
TICAL=100,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

TRMTYPE=2770,
TRMADDR=TA2770,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE,
TRMPRTY=126
LA2770 DFTRMLST BSCLST,0,1,2D,2,1070
TA2770 DF~RMLS~ BSCLST,0,2,1070,1,2D

*
*
*

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
BSCOtE=EBCDIC,
DDNAME=DDDSYS3,
DEVICE=SYS/3,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DSCNAM~=DCBDSYS3,

MACRF= (R, il) ,
CU=2703,LINELST= (020) ,
FEATURE=(BSC,SLV),
I10DELS'I=0,
CONFIG=PPT,
SiiITCH=YES
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
TRMTYPE=SYS/3,
DSCNAME=DCEDSYS3,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
BTAMRLN=1,
BSCOtE=EBCDIC,
EOCLAD"R=SYS3D,
INAREAL=500,
FEATURE=AUTOANSR,
LISTADR=LASYS3,
ANSWRBK=TERMINAL
SYS3D DFHTCT TYPE=TEBMINAL,
TRMIDN'I=DSY3,
LASTTRM=POOL,
TICAL=100,
TRMTYPE=SYS/3,
TRMADDR=TASYS3,
TRMSTA'I=TRANSCEIVE,
TRMPRTY=126
LASYS3 DFTRMLST BSCLST,O,1,2D,2,1070
'lASYS3 DFTRMLST BSCLST,0,2,1070,1,2D

]12.2

A3735

~.BQg13l!1111AB1]

96 X 5 + 20 PAD

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

lH!!FE]]Q ~~E111]!1 (Not applicable to CICS/DOS-Entry)

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=BSCMDSW,
CU=2703,
BSCOtE=EBCDIC,
PSCNAME=DTF35D
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=3735,
DSCNAME=DTF35D,
INAREAL=480,
ETAMRLN=1,
LISTADR=LISTA,
FEATURE=(AUTCANSR,AUTOCALL) ,
POCLADR=A3735,
ESCODE=EBCDIC,
ANSWRBK=EXIDVER
DFHTCT 'IYPE=TERMINAL,
TBMIDNT=3735,
187

TRMTYPE=3735,
LASTTRM=POOL,
TRMADDR=LISTB,
TRMS!A~=TRANSCEIVE,

TRANSID=37 35,
TICAL=476
LISTA DF~RMLST SWLST,AN,11 ,4,2,1070, (98FOF3F5182D"A3735)
LISTB DF'IRMLST S'HLST,AD,4,3374,8,0,1,2D, (98FOF3F5181C70,1)

12!!Q

£~]~ B!!~ RY~fBL~Ql RB1]TE]

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYSIPT,
DEVICE=2540,
DSCNAME=READER
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYSLST,
DEVICE=1403,
DSCNAMF=PRINTER
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BSAM,
TRMTYPE=CRLP,
ISADSCN=READER,
OSADSCN=PRINTER,
INAREAL=80
DFHTC~ TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDN~=SAMA,

TRMTYPE=CBLP,
TRMS~A~=TRANSCEIVE

111!!

~1~R1!I ~I!IIQ!!

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

.(LOCAL)

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
CU=2848,
DEVICE=L2260,

188

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

~l]!~I !~f]~~ ~lQ]!Q~ f!£~111!

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYS001,
DEVICE=2314,
DSCNAME=DISKIN1
DFHTCT TYPF=SDSCI,
DEVADDR=SYSOO6,
DEVICE=2314,
1::S CNAM E=DISKOT 1
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=SEQOENTIAL,
TRMTYPE=DASD,
ISADSCN=DISKIN1,
OSADSCN=DISKOT1,
INAREAL=80
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=SAMB ,.
TRMPRTY=11,
TRMSTAT=(TRANSCEIVE,'OUT OF SERVICE' )

l26Q

*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*

LINE1

DFHTCT

DPHTCT

DFHTCT

32]Q
-'-

T010

N0ig:

LINELST= (021 ,022,023) ,
FEATURE=KBL,
SWITCH=NO,
FLNNAME=LINE1,
DSCNAME=DTF60L
TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
TRMTYPE=L2260,
CLASS=VIDEO,
DSCNAM E=DTF60L,
INAREAL=960,
FEATURE=KBRDLOCK
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=L60A,
LVUNIT=1,
TRMPRTY=32,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=L60B,
LVUNIT=2,
TRMPRTY=32,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE
TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=L530,
TRMTYPE=1053,
LVUNIT=3,
T3MPRTY=32,
TRMSTAT=RECEIVE,
LASTTRM=LINE

lBE~RMATIQN

QISPLAX

~X~1~~

*
**
*
ACCMETH=BGAM FOR CICS/OS

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*

*
*

(LOCAL)

DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=L3277,
DSCNAME=L3270
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=BTAM,
DSCNAME=L3270,
TRMMODL=2,
TRMTYPE=L3277,
POOLADR=TO 10,
INAREAL=2500,
POOLCNT=2
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=L77A,
LVUNIT=1,
FEATURE=(SELCTPEN,AUDALARM) ,
COMPAT=(480,12,2260,2)
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=L77B,
LVUNIT=2,
TRMTYPE=L3277,
LASTTRM=POOL,
TRMSTAT=TRANSCEIVE

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

This is a functional example for CICS/DOS if (1) the CU=3272
and LINELST=(030,031) operands are included in the DFHTCT
TYPE=SDSCI specification, and (2) if the POOLCNT=2 operand is
deleted from the DFHTCT TYPE=LINE specification.

189

The following illustrates the interrelationship between the TCAM
Message Control program (MCP) and the TCAM Message Processing program
(MPP).
CICS is regarded as a Message Processing program by TCAM.

CICS

~1PP

DD CARDS
/ /QINI
/ /QOUTI
/ /R2260Itl
/ /R2260UT

DD QNAME=RISI
DD QrJAME=WI SI
DD QNAME=R601
DD Qi~AME=R600

The following is an example of a CICS Terminal Control Table and a
TCAM Message Control program.

DFHTCT TYPE=INITIAL,SUFFIX=TV
DFHTCT TY PE=S DSCI,
DEV ICE=TCAM,
DSCNAME=L1,
DDNAME=QIN1,
OPTCD=WU,
MACRF=R,
RECFM=U,
BLKSIZE=500
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=TCAM,
DSCNAME=L2,
DDNAME=QOUT1,
OPTCD=WU,
MACRF=W,
RECFM=U,
190

*
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

BLKSIZE=500
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=TCAM,
QU:EUEID=F1,
INAREAL=500,
TRMTYPE=L2260,
DSCNAME=L1,
OU'IQ=OUTQ
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=DMMY,
TRMPRTY=32,
LASTTRM=LINE
OUTQ
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=TCAM,
QUEUEID=FO,
INAREAL=500,
TRMTYPE=L2260,
tSCNAM:E=L2
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMIDNT=TRM1,
TRMPRTY=32
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAl,
TRMIDNT=TRM2,
LASTTRM=LINE,
TRMPRTY=32
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=TCAM,
DSCNAME=R60IN,
DDNAME=R2260IN,
OP'ICD=WU,
MACRF=R,
RECFM=U,
BLKSIZE=500
DFHTCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DEVICE=TCAM,
DSCNAME=R600UT,
DDNAME=R2600UT,
OP'ICD=WU,
MACRF=W,
RECFM=U,
BLKSIZE=500
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=TCAM,
INAREAL=500,
DSCNAM:E=R60IN,
OU'IQ=OUTQ60,
TRMTYPE=2260
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAl,
TRMIDNT=1260,
TRMPRTY=32,
LASTTRM=LINE
OUTQ60 DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=TCAM,
INAREAL=500,
DSCNAME=R600UT,
TRMTYPE=2260
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMPRTY=32,
TRMIDNT=S60A
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMPRTY=32,
TRMIDNT=S60B
DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
TRMPRTY=32,
TRMIDN'I=S65A,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
*

*
*
*
*
*

*
**
*
*

*
**
*

*
**
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*

'--

191

LASTTRM=LINE
DFHTCT TYPE=FINAL
END
DFHTCTEA

MCPCICS
TCAMINIT

NOEXEC
OPEN LINE

FINISH
LG2260

FG2260
QPROC

RIS1
WIS1
R60I
R600
S60A
S60B
S65A
TRM1

192

CSECT
INTRO

LTR
BZ
ABEND
OPEN
TM
BNO
TM
BNO
WTO
READY
CLOSE
L
RETURN
nCB

DISK=NO,
PROGID=TCAM/CICS,
LNUNITS=40,
MSUNITS=20,
KEYLEN=133,
CBOSSRF=4,
DLQ=TRM1,
S'IARTUP=CY,
TRACE=10,
LINETYP=BOTH,
OL'IEST=O
15,15
OFENLINE
123,DUMP
(LG2260, (INOUT) ,PG2260, (INOUT»
LG2260+48,DCBOFLGS
NOEXEC
PG2260+48,DCBOFLGS
NOEXEC
'TIME TO START APPLICATION PROGRAM'

(LG2260" PG2260)
13,4 (13)
(14,12)
DSORG=TX,
MACRF=(G,P) ,
CPRI=S,
DDNAME=DDLG2260,
MH=TOTCAM,
PCI= (N, N) ,
BUFSIZE=464,
INVLIST=(POLLST1",FOILST2),TEANS=EBCD
DCB
DSORG=TX,MACRF=(G,P),CPRI=S,DDNAME=DDPG2260,
MH=MH2260,PCI=(N,N) ,BUFSIZE=464,
INVLIST= (POLL60R,,) ,TRANS=2260
PCB
MH=TOCICS,
BUFSIZE=464,
RESERVE= (20)
TTABLE LAST=TRM2
TFROCESS FCB=QPROC,
QUEUES=MO
TFROCESS PCB=QPROC
'IFROCESS PCB=QPROC,QUEUES=MO
'IFROCESS PCB=QPROC
TERMINAL QBY=T,DCB=PG2260,RLN=1,TERM=226R,QUEUES=MO,
AtDR=40AOEOFF
TERMINAL QBY=T,DCB=PG2260,RLN=1,TERM=226R,QUEUES=MO,
ADDR=40A1EOFF
TERMINAL QBY=T,DCB=PG2260,RLN=1,TERM=2265,QUEUES=MO,
ADDR=4151EOFF
TERMINAL CBY=L,
DCB=LG2260,
RLN= 1,
TERM=226L,
QUEUES=MO,
AtDR="FFFFFFFF,
SECTERM=YES

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

TRM2

POLLST1
POLLST2
POLL60n
TOTCAM

INMSG

MH2260

TOCICS

DCBOFLGS

TERMINAL QBY=L,
DCB=LG2260,
RLN=2,
TERM=226L,
ADDR=FFFFFFFF,
QUEUES=MO
INVLIST ORDER= (TRM1+02)
INVLIST ORDER= (TRM2+02)
INVLIST ORDER=(S60A+40A040,S60B+40A140,S65A+415140)
STARTMH LC=OUT
INHDR
CODE
FORWARD DEST=C'RIS1'
EQU
INMSG
INEND
OUTHDR
OUTEND
STARTMH LC=OUT
INHDR
CODE
SETSCAN 1
MSGEDIT «R"SCAN»
FORWARD DEST=C'R60I'
INMSG
INEND
OUTHDR
SETSCAN 1
MSGEDIT ( (R, , SCAN) )
MSGFORM BLOCK=460
CODE
OUTEND
STARTMH LC=OUT
INHDR
CODE
FORWARD DEST=PUT
INEND
OUTHDR
OUTEND
EQU
X' 10'
END

*
*
*
*
*

193

This section is intended to aid the system programmer in the
preparation of the Terminal Control Table (TCT) as he uses operands of
the DFHTCT macro instruction to:
1.
2.
3.

Specify data set control information
Describe communication lines
Describe terminal types

Included in this section is an indication of whether the operands of
the DFHTCT macro instruction are:
1.
2.
3.

194

Optional or required
Applicable only to CICS/DOS, only to CICS/OS, or to both CICS/DOS
and CICS/OS
Applicable or required only under special circumstances

D
E

V
A
D
D

DEVICE R

D
S
C

R
R
0
P

E
A

I
N

T
U

M T
E

E
L
S
T

N
A

S C
W U
I
T

C
H

C
0
N
F
I
G

B
S
C

M R
0
E
D T
E R
L Y
S
T

0
D
E

T
E

M
T
S
T

B
A
D
R

D I M F
D A L
u
C N
l'
A R N
Ii

S
Y

M 'B
L
D K
E S
I

M
E

C
P

R
E

A
P
P

0
P
T

M D

*
1030
1050
1130
1403
R
1404
R
1442
R
1443
R
1445
R
2020
2260
L2260
2265
2311
R
2314
R
2501
R
R
2520
2540
R
2740
2740/2760
2741C
2741E
2770
2780
2980
3275
3277
L3277
3284
L3284
3286
L3286
3330
R
3735
7770
BSCMDMPT
BSCMDPPT
BSCMDSW
DASD
R
DISK
R
SYS/3
SYS/7
S360
TAPE
R
TW33
TW35
TCAM
Not~:

I
i

R 0
R 0
R 0
R
R
R
R
R I
R :0
R 0
R
R 0
R
R
R
R
R
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R
R 0
R
R 0
R
R
R 0
R
R 0
R 0
R 0
R
R
R 0
R
0
R 0
R
R 0
R 0
R

R
R
0'': R
I

0
0
0

R
R
R

i
0

* * *

* *\* * *
0

;

0
0
0

0
0

R
R
R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R

0
0
0
0
0
0

R
R
R
R
R
R
R

R
R
R
R
R

R
R

R
R
R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

R
R
R

0
0

a
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 !O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 i
0 !
0 I
0
0
0
0

R
R
R

0
0
0

R
R
R

R
R

0
0

R
R

0
0

R
o

Optional.

CICS/DOS only.

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0

I
j

0
I

I
I
I

0
0

0
0
"

0
0
0
0
0
-.- ---_.

-.----

....

0
0

---- -_.- _.,,- -_._0

__ .-_0.

-- ..-

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

R
0
0

0
0

0-_.- 1-----"
0 -0- - - 1---_.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R R

0
0
0

----- _..----- ------

0
0

---

0
0

Required.

195

..-.

ClCS/OS only.

A C
C L
C A
M S
E S
T
H

TRMTYPE

D
S
C
N

S
A
D
S
C
N

A
D

A S
M C
E

I
N

T
R

A
R
E

M
M
0

D
L

B
T
A
M
R
L
N

L
I

S
T
A
D
R

F
E
A
T

U
R

P
D
E
L
A
Y

a
a

L
A
D
R

A L
I
S N
W S
R T
B A
K T
N

S
C
0

D
E

R
D
N Y
M
V
T S
A G
B

E
R
R
M
S
G

G
E
N
P
0

R3 0 R
R3 0 R
R2 0 R
R3 0 R
R3 0 R
R3 0 R
R3 0 R
R2 a R
R3 0 R
R3 a R
R3 0 ---R
R3 a R -'---'R
~.f_~ . "_.. _._, R3 a
R3 (f- R
2741E
R3 0 R
2770
R3 a R
2780
R3 f--2980
0
R -_.
-R3 0 R
3275
R3 0 R
3277
R3 0 R
L3277
R3 0 R
3284
R3 0 R
L3284
R3 0 R
3286
R3 a R
L3286
R3 a R
3735
R3 a R
7770
R3 a R
SYS/3
R3 a R
SYS/7
R3 0 R
S360
Rt a
CRLP
R
Rt 0
DASD
R
Rt 0
TAPE
R
R3 0 R
TWX
Rl a
R
U/R

-----

Not~:

L
C

L
L

T
#

R
R
R
R

.,,--.-.-

R
R
R

R9
R9 R
a R
0
R
0
R
0
R
R R
R R
R R
R
R R
R
R R
R
R
0
R
R

0
0
0

R
R
R
R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

R
R

R
R
R

R
R

R
RB R

R
R
R

f..---.-

R~
R~

0
0

0
0
0

a
a
a
a

R
R

0
0-

R~
R~

R
R
R

~--

a
a
a
a
R
0
0
0

a
a

0
0

R
R

0
0
R6
0
0
0
0
0
R6 - - - 0 ..- --a..- r---- r---a 0 _.... --- ."- _9 .
a
0
a
-_Qf---.-- - - - - - 1 - - - - -0
0
a
0
0
a R6 R6 a

R
RS
RS a
-----

RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO

R6 R6

R5 R7

--.--

R6
R6
R6
R6
R6

R6 1--a
R6 a
R6 a

---::-

R6 0
R6 0
0

a
a
R - - r---'
a

---- ----

a a
a a
a --a
a

R
R6
R6
R6
R6
R6

R6
R6
R6
R6
R6

-- f----

RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO

---- __ ._--.

0
----'.

"._---

_R~__

-- _. __.- - - - - - f - - . - f - -

---- ------

~----

0
R
0 --- a
-- --- ---- -,--- rR
0-0
0
0

a
a
a
a

1fO

-_.

a
a

Required.
Optional.

ClCS/OS only.
TRMMODL may be specified in TYPE=LINE or TYPE=TERMlNAL.

Required if a terminal work area (PCl) field is to be
defined for all terminal entries associated with this line.
Specify ACCMETH=SAM, ACCMETH=BSAM, or ACCMETH=SEQUENTlAL.
Specify ACCMETH=BGAM or ACCMETH=GRAPHlCS.
Specify ACCMETH=BTAM or ACCMETH=TELECOMMUNICATlON.
Required for switched (dial-up) lines and multipoint lines.
Required if FEATURE=(AUTOANSR,AUTOCALL,SCONTROL).
Required for first line in switched-line pool; specify
ANSWRBK=EXlDVER for 3735 under ClCS/OS and CICS/DOS-STANDARD.

1
2
3
4
5
6

RO
RO
RO
RO

--Ifo

196

R
R

C
T
U
A
L

*
1030
1050
1053 OS
1053 DOS
1130
2020
2260
L2260 as
L2260 DOS
2265
2740
2740/2760

P
0

RO
RO
RO
RO
RO

7
8
9

Checking required; other features optional.
Required for component polling; default: poll all components.
Required for the 2740 Model 2 or the 2740 with 2760.

T
R

M
I

P
R

TRMTYPE

D
N
T

1030
1050
1053 OS
1053 DOS
1130
2020
2260
L2260
2265
2740
2740/2760
2741C
2141E
2770
2780
2980
3275
3277
L3277
3284
L3284
3286
L3286
3735
7770
SYS/3
SYS/7
S360
CRLP
DASD
TAPE
TWX
U/R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Noig:

o
1

2
3

4
5

T C
R L
M A
M S
0
S
D
L
0

R5 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R6 0
R 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
R 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

A
S
T
T
R

U
N
I

0
0
Rl 0
Rl 0
0
0
0
R 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R 0
0
R 0
0
R 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

T T
R R
M M
A S
D T
D A
R T
R3
R3
R2
R2
R4
R4
R3
R3
R3
R3
R4
R4
R
R
R
R
R
R4
R3
R4

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

F
E
M A
P T
A U
T R

L
L
P

T
R
A
N
S

0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

S
T

N
2
9
8
0

T
A
B
2
9
8

T
I
0

A
L

0
0
0

R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

R
R
R
R
R

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

R
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0

T
C

T
U
A
L

R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7
R7

Required.
Optional.
Required only for local devices.
Required only for remote devices; specify hexadecimal
addressing characters.
Required; specify hexadecimal addressing characters for
non-switched lines; specify name of DFTRMLST for switched
lines.
(For TWX, not required if ANSWRBK=TERMINAL is
specified) •
Required for multipoint lines and for switched lines if
FEATURE=AUTOCALL has been specified in the
DFHTCT TYPE=LINE macro instruction; specify name of DFTRMLST.
Required for component polling; defaults to polling all
components.
197

6
7

198

Required for the 2740 Model 2 or the 2740 with 2760.
Required for terminals when the user defines a 0-255
byte terminal work area (Process Control Information field).

This section is intended to aid the system programmer in the
preparation of the File Control Table (FCT) as he uses the DFHFCT
TYPE=DATASET macro instruction to describe the physical characteristics
of the data sets.
These descriptions include information about the
access method (BDAM or IS AM) and record characteristics for the data
sets.
CICS/DOS
I SAM
Q

r:LJ

0
H

m
BLKKElL
EXTENT
CYLOFL
INDAREA
INDSIZE
INDSKIP
MSTIND
NRECDS
IOSIZE
IOWORK
DEVICE
SRCHM
VERIFY
RELTYPE
LRECL
BLKSIZE
RKP
RECPORM
OPEN
KEYLEN
SERVREQ=KEY
Not~:

o
1

2
3

4
5

7
8

r:LJ

m
:z;
::::>

BLOCKED
:>t
r:LJ

r:LJ

..........

R
R
R
R2
R3

R4
R

0
0

R
R
R
R

R
R

R
Rl

:>t

CICS/OS
DAM
UNBLOt
~
~

..........

I SAM

BDAM
BLOCKED UNBLOCKED

:>t

J:il

..........

R
Rl

0
H

.c:Q

::::>

..........

J:il

IX}

:z;

:>t

J:il

..........

J:il

..........
~

R2
R3

05
05

0
0

Rl
R
R
R7
R

Rl
R
R6
R7
R

Rl
R
R
R7
R

0
0
0

Rl
R
R6
R7
R

Rl
R
R
R7
R

Rl
R
R6
R7
R

Rl
R
R
R7
R

R
R
R
R

Rl
R
R6
R7
R

0
Re

0
0
0

:>t

R"
R

Required.
Optional.
Specifies relative type addressing; RELTYPE must also be
specified.
Required if main storage high-level index processing is
used.
Required if INDAREA is specified.
Required only if a master index exists.
Optional; used only if SERVREQ=NEWREC; for ISAM data sets
under CICS/OS, IOWORK should also be specified.
If SERVREQ=BROWSE or SERVREQ=NEWREC, this value must be
BLKSIZE plus BLKKEYL.
Required if key exists within logical records.
Required if deblocking by key for BDAM (CICS/DOS and
CICS/OS); required for variable-length ISAM records in
fixed-length blocks (CreS/DOS only).

199

This section lists the CICS macro instructions used for system
generation and table preparation.
These macro instructions are written
in Assembler language and, as all Assembler language instructions, are
written in the following format:

blank DFHxxxxx
or
symbol

One or more operands
separated by commas

The name field of a CICS macro instruction must be left blank if
the macro instruction is used in conjunction with a high-level language
(ANS COBOL or PL/I); if a label is desired for the macro instruction,
it may be placed on the card preceding the macro instruction.
The operation field of a CICS macro instruction must begin before
card column 16 and must contain the three-character combination "DFH"
in the first three positions of the operation field.
Up to five
additional characters can be appended to DFH to complete the symbolic
name for the appropriate program or table.
Since DFH is reserved for
CICS macro instructions, no other statement may begin with this
three-character combination.
The operand field of a CICS macro instruction contains one or more
operands separated by commas.
In this publication, parentheses are
used to indicate those operands where more than one applicable parameter
(keyword and otherwisej can be specified with a single use of the
operand.
Where parentheses are not used, only one parameter at a time
can be specified as part of the operand; a choice must be made in the
case of more than one applicable parameter.
Since a blank character
indicates the end of the operand field, the operand field must not
contain blanks except after a comma on a continued card or after the
last operand of the macro instruction.
The first operand on a
continuation card must begin in column 16.
When a CICS macro instruction is coded on more than one card, each
card containing part of the macro instruction (except the last card)
must contain a character (for example, an asterisk) in column 72
indicating that the macro instruction has been continued on the next
card.
In the following listing of CICS macro instructions, default
parameters (where applicable) are indicated by an underscore.
An
asterisk in card column 72 indicates that th~ macro instruction is
continued on the next card.
Because the flexibility and modularity of CICS allows a wide
combination of options during system generation and table preparation,
no attempt is made in this section to indicate which operands are
optional and which are mandatory.
For this information, refer to the
previous sections of this pUblication.

200

DFHSG TYPE=INITIAL,
STATUS=FIRST,
ASMBLR=Assembler name,
OPSYS=(VS1,VS2,number) ,
TRACE=lES,NO,
TIMECTL=YES,NO,
DSIZE=number,l,
MPS=YES,NO,
JOBNAME=jobname,CI~~,
ACCTID=accounting information,~ICSQli!,
PGMERID='programmer's name','~X~TE~ RROQRA~MEE',
MSGLVL=Q, 1,
DEVICE=2311,2314,3330,
CONDCD= (code, operator) , ••• , (code, operator) ) ,
PRIORTY=nn,
MSGCLAS=x,!,
CLASS=jobclass,!,
REGION=(n1K,n2K) ,
PROCNMS=procedure names, (DFli!~~Y~,Q~liLNKYl,
DFHUP~!l,DF]AUPLK) ,
DL1=YES,.!ill,
ATP=YES,!Q,
PREFIX=prefix,
TCTUA=(V1CMPAT,!ARIA~1])

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSO,
MPS=XES,NO,
NSD=number,2,
DEVICE= 2311,2314,3330,
SVC=number,20Q,
CAA=appendage suffix,
V1CMPAT=YES,
TCAMSIP=YES

*
*
*
*
**
*
*
*
**
**
**
*
*

*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSS

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSD

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSU,
DEVICE=(TAg~,~111,1J1~,3330)

DFHSG PROGRAM=KCP,
CONSEC=YES,
RUNAWAY=YES,
STALCTL=YES,
ENQUEUE=YES,
OPSECUR=YES,
ICPTIME=YES,

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
201

ICPAUTO=YES,
ICPSYNC=YES,
SUFFlX=program suffix,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XDSPCHR=symbolic name,
DEVlCE=(2311,2314,3330)

DFHSG PROGRAM=SCP,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
SUFFlX=program suffix

*
*

DFHSG PROGRAM=PCP,

PCPLOAD=YE~,NO,

LANG=(COBOL,PL/l) ,
HLLTR=YES,MQ,
COBOL=(V2,V3,V4,SUBSET) ,
XFETCH=symbolic name,
SUFFlX=program suffix

DFHSG PROGRAM=PIP,
SUFFlX=program suffix
IN!~BVA1

CONTBQ1

RBQGR!~

*
*
*
*
*

(lCP)

DFHSG PROGRAM=lCP,
RUNAWAY=YES,
,lCPTlME=YES,
lCPAUTO=YES,
ICPSYNC=YES,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYPREQ=symbolic name,
XICEEXP=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

DFHSG PROGRAM=DCP,
DEVICE=TAP~,2311,2314,3330,

DEVADDR=nnn,
CICSDMP=YES,
SUFFIX=program suffix,
DUMMY=YES

DFHSG PROGRAM=TCP,
ACCMETH=(BTAM,BSAM,SAM,BGAM,TCAM),
DEVICE=(1403,1404,1442,1443,1445,2311,2314,3330,
2501,2520,2540,CRLP,DASD,DISK,TAPE) ,
BTAMDEV=(1030,1050,1050D,1053,1130,1130D,2020,2020D,
2260,L2260,2265,2740,2740D,2740-2,2741C,2741E,
2741DC,2741DE,2760,2770,2770D,2780,2780D,
2980/1,2980/2,2980/4,3275,3277,L3277,3284,
202

*
*
*

*
*
*
*

**
*

*
*

**
*

*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*

L3284,3286,L3286,3735D,7770,SYS/3,SYS/3D,SYS/7,
SYS/7D,Sj360,S/360D,Sj370,S/370D,TWX,BISYNC),
FEATURE=(AUTOANSW,AUTOPOLI,BUFFRECV,PSEUDOEIN),
ANSWRBK=(EXIDVER,TERMINAL,AUTOMATIC,7770TERM,7770NULL),
INI~RL=YES,

LOCKF=YES,
WRAFLST=YES,
BscoDE=(~]~]!£,!~£!!,1]!]2~Qn~),

AUTCTRN=YES,
UCTRAN=]Q, (EBCDIC,ASCII) ,
COMPAT=]Q, (FORMAT,FULLBUF) ,
FMT2260=(§~~Q,12X40,12X80,15X64),

FMT3270= l11~~Q, 24X80) ,
CMPT60L= (n1 ,n2,n3) ,
SMI=user character,~,
TAB=YES,]Q,
CCNVTAE= lA~],A]~) ,
XATTACH=symbolic name,
XOU'IPUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbclic name,
XTCMIN=symbolic name,
XTCMOUT=symbolic name,
TCM3270=YES,
TCM7770=YES,
BMS=YES,!Q,
SUFFIX=program suffix

DFHSG PROGRAM=FCP,
CONSEC=YES,
FILSERV=(INDA,INIS,tAUPD,ISUPD,DAADD,ISADD,INDIRACC,
EXCTL,INSEG,OUTSEG,DABLKNG,VLR,HEXAD,tECAD,
ACTAD,IVBR,LOCATE,IBBOWSE,DBROWSE),
SUFFIX=program suffix,
XTYPEEQ=symbolic name,
XOU~PUT=symbclic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
XINPUTC=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YBS
1]!B~1]N1

]!1!

~~N1]Q1 R~QQ]!~

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*
*

(TDP)

DFHSG PEOGRAM=TDP,
INTRA=YES,TRANSINIT,
EXTEA= (ACQUISITION, DISPOSITION) ,
SUFFIX=program suffix,

*
*
*
*
**
*
*

DEVICE=~111,2314,3330,

XTYPEEQ=symbclic name,
XOU~PUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,
DUMMY=YES

DFHSG PROGBAM=TSP,
DEVICE=2111,2314,3330,
VIRTUAL=(VIRTUAL,REAI),
SUFFIX=program suf£ix,
XTYPEEQ=symbolic name,
XOU~PUT=symbolic name,
XINPUT=symbolic name,

*
*
*
*
*
**
203

DUMMY=YES

DFHSG PROGRAM=CSA,

*
*

WRKAREA=number,21~,

SUFFIX=program suffix

DFHSG PROGRAM=MTF,
TLT=YE.§,NO
~l]A~I£ ~~]]L~1Q'§] R]gg]!~

*
(OCP)

DFESG PROGRAM=OCP

DFHSG PROGRAM=GAP

DFHSG PROGRAM=HLL,
LANG=(CCBOL,FL/I) ,
PL1= (O,l)
~]]~INA1

~]R]NDE]l ~Q~1]Q1 R]Qg]A~

(TDCP)

DFHSG PROGRAM=DDM

DFRSG PROGBAM=ATP,
INBUFF=number,
OUTBUFF=number
1]]]lNA11 0 N QI

~l~~QQ'§ '§X'§1]~ g]~~]ATIQM

DFHSG TYPE=FINAL

204

*
*

DFHSIT

TYPE=CS~£I,DSECT,

SUFFIX=xx,
TRT=decimal value,Q,
SCS=decimal value,200,
SP1=decimal value,Q,
DVT=2311,2314,3330,
MSGLVL=O,l,
TSBLK=decImal value,1&25,
ICV=decimal value,100Q,
ICVS=decimal value,~QQOO,
ICVR=decimal value,5000,
CDL=decimal'value,5-,--MXT=decimal value,~,
TCT=xx,
PPT=xx,
PCT=xx,
FCT=xx,NO,
DCT=xx,NO,
CSA=xx,
KCP=xx,
SCP=xx,
PCP=xx,
DCP=xx,NO,
ICP=xx,NO,
TCP=xx,
FCP=xx,
TDP=xx,
TRP=xx,NO,
PIP=xx, NO,
TSP=xx,NO,
OSCOR=decimal value,Q,
PL1=YES,.!!Q,
DL1=YES,.!!Q,
PSB=name,CICSPSB,
PSBPL=number,4~
DMBPL=number,~,
BUFPL=number,g,
AT P=YES, !iQ,
ATPMT=number,l
ATPMB=number,RXI §Eg£ifica!iog ~n~ Qllg,
SIMODS=(!~,~l,£l,~~,~J,Ql,~l) or
(!~, ~l, Cl , Ql,1!l)

*
**
*

*
*
*
*
*
**
*

*
**
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
**
**
*
*
*
*
*

205

TERM1NA1 cOl!I.BQ1 TAB1] (TCT)
DFHTCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

*
*
*
*

ERROPT=~,R,W,C,N,RW,T,

FEATURE=(STC,CHK,BSC,KBL,OIU,SIX,SXW,SIW,RIX,
RXW,RIW,MAS,SLV,APL),
LINELST=(nnn1, ••• ,nnn31),
SWITCH=YES,!Q,
CU=2701,2702,2703,2848,3272,
CONFIG=PP!,MPT,
BSCODE=EB~~!£,ASCII,TRANSCODE,

MODELST=(nl, ••• ,n31),
RETRY=number,l,
TERMTST=YES,NO,
LERBADR=symbolic address,
DDNAME=name,ggi auli§ lQ DS£NA~],
MACRF=(R,W),
FLNNAME=name,
NCP=number,l,
MODE=(,CNTRL,! or B,A or B),
BLKSIZE=length,
RECFM=F,V,Q,
SYNAD=symbolic name,
OPTCD=W,WU,WC,wUC,
APPENDG=appendage suffix
symbol DFHTCT TYPE=LINE,
ACCMETH=SAM,BSAM,BTAM,BGAM,TCAM,SEQUENTIAL,GRAPHIC,
TELECOMMUNICATION,
TRMTYPE=1030,1050,1053,1130,2020,2260,L2260,2265,
2740,2740/2760,2741C,2741E,2770,2780,2980,
3275,3277,L3277,3284,L3284,3286,L3286,3735,7770,
SYS/3,SYS/7,S360,CRLP,DASD,TAPE,TWX,U/R,
CLASS=(CONV,BATCH,VIDEO,HARDCOPY,BISYNC,AUDIO),
DSCNAME=name,
ISADSCN=name,
OSADSCN=name,
INAREAL=length,
TRMMODL=number or character,
BTAMRLN=number,
LISTADR=(name,WRAP),
FEATURE=(AUTOANSR,AUTOCALL,AUTOPOLL,CHECKING,
SCONTROL,BUFFRECV,KBRDLOCK),
NPDELAY=number,
POOLADR=symbolic address,
ANSWRBK=AUTOMATIC,TERMINAL,NULL,EXIDVER,
LINSTAT='OYT OF SERVICE',
BSCODE=EBCDI~,ASCII,TRANSCODE,

CONVTAB=EBCDIC,ASCII,TRANSCODE,TEXTMODE,ABB,ABC,
RDYMSG=symbolic address,
ERRMSG=symbolic address,
GENPOLL=YES,
POOLCNT=number,
TCTUAL=number,Q,
206

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*

*
*

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

OUTQ=symbolic name,
POOL=YES,
QUEUEID=hexadecimal number

symbol DFHTCT TYPE=TERMINAL,
*
TRMIDNT=name,
*
TRMPRTY=number,Q,
*
TRMMODL=number,character,
*
TRMTYPE=1030,1050,1053,1130,2020,2260,L2260,2265,
*
2740,2740/2760,2741C,2741E,2770,2780,2980,
*
3275,3277,L3277,3284,L3284,3286,L3286,3735,7770, *
SYS/3,SYS/7,S360,CRLP,DASD,TAPE,TWX,U/R,
*
CLASS=(CONV,BATCH,VIDEO,HARDCOPY,BISYNC,AUDIO),
*
LVUNIT=number,
*
LASTTRM=LINE,GACB,POOL,
*
TRMADDR=address,name,
*
TRMSTAT=(1RAN~!~TIQli,TRANSCEIVE,RECEIVE,'OUT OF SERVICE',*
INPUT) ,
*
COMPAT=NO, (number of characters, number of lines,
*
device type,model number),
*
FEATURE=(PTRADAPT,SELCTPEN,AUDALARM,COPY,BUFEXP,
*
UCTRAN,DCKYBD) ,
*
POLLPOS=number,
*
TRANSID=name,
*
STN2980=number,
*
TAB2980=number,Q,
*
TIOAL=number,
*
TCTUAL=number
symbol DFHTCT TYPE=7770MSG,
MESSAGE='message'

DFHTCT TYPE=FINAL
"- ..

DFHFCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET,
DATASET=name,
ACCMETH=BDAM,ISAM,DL/I,
SERVREQ=(GET,PUT,UPDATE,NEWREC,INDACC,SEGMENT,BROWSE,
KEY, NOEXCTL) ,
BLKKEYL=decimal value,
EXTENT=number,
CYLOFL=number,
INDAREA=symbolic name,
INDSIZE=number,
INDSKIP=YES,
MSTIND=YES,
NRECDS=number,
IOSIZE=number,
IOWORK=symbolic name,
DEVICE= (n,m) , (231!!,231!!) ,
SRCHM=YES,number,
VERIFY=YES,
RELTYPE=DEC,HEX,BLK,
LRECL=(length,length) ,
BLKSIZE=(length,length),
RKP=number,
RECFORM=(format,characteristic,DCB record format),
OPEN:INITIAb,DEFERRED,
KEYLEN=length

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
**

*
*

*
*
*
*

*
**
*
*
*
*
207

DFHFCT TYPE=INDACC,
OBJDSID=name,
IARLKP=number r
IALKFL=length,
IADADMI=RELRECrKEY,
IADIII=hexadecimal character,
DUPDSID=name
DFHFCT

TYPE=SEG~EAD,

SEGLENG=length,
INDDISP=number,
TSEGIND=BIT,DISPLACEMENT

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGDEF,
SEGNAME=name,
SEGCHAR=(format,alignment} ,
SEGLENG=length

*
*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGSET,
SEGSET=name,
SEGNAME=(name1, ••• ,nameN)

*
*

DFHFCT TYPE=SEGLAST
DFHFCT TYPE=FINAL
DFHFCT TYPE=LOGICMOD

DFHDCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx,
TRNSUFX= (xx, ••• ) ,
SEPASMB=YES,NO

*
*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=SDSCI,
DSCNAME=name,
MODNAME=name,
DEVICE=1403,1404,1443,1445,2311,2314,3330,TAPE,
BLKSIZE=length,
DEVADDR=symbolic address,
RECFORM=lIXUNB,FIXBLK,VARUNB,VARBLK,UNDEFINED,
FILABL=STD,l!Q,
TYPEFLE=INgUT,OUTPUT,RDBACK,
RECSIZE=length,
REWIND=UNLOAD,NORWD,LEAVE,REREAD,
TPMARK=NO,
BUFNO=number,l,

**
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

ERROPT=SKIP,!~l!0R!,

SUFFIX=xx
DFHDCT TYPE=EXTRA,
DSCNAME=name,
DESTID=name,
OPEN=!l!IT!AL,DEFERRED,
RESIDNT=YE,2,NO

*
*
*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=INTRA,
DESTID=name,

*
*
*
*
*

REUSE=~,NO,

TRIGLEV=number,
DESTFAC=IERMINAL,FILE,
TRANSID=name
208

DFHDCT TYPE=INDIRECT,
DESTID=name,
INDDEST=name

*
*

DFHDCT TYPE=FINAL

DFHPCT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHPCT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRANSID=name,
TRNPRTY=decimal value,QQ1,
TRANSEC=decimal value,OOl,
TWASIZE=decimal value,Q,
PROGRAM=name,
TPURGE=YES,l!Q,
SPURGE=YES,!!Q,
COMPAT=!!Q,FORMAT,FULLBUF

*
*

*
*
*

DFHPCT TYPE=FINAL

DFHPPT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHPPT TYPE=ENTRY,
PROGRAM=name,

*
**
*

PGMLANG=!~SEMB1~E,COBOL,PL/I,

RES=YES,l!Q,
RELOAD=YES,!!Q

"--

DFHPPT TYPE=FINAL
SIGN.=ON

TAB1~

(S NT)

DFHSNT TYPE=INITIAL
DFHSNT TYPE=ENTRY,
OPNAME='operator name',
PASSWRD=password,
OPIDENT=operator identification,
SCTYKEY=security keY,l,
OPPRTY=operator priority,Q

*
*
*
*
*

DFHSNT TYPE=FINAL
1~RMl!!!1

1 IS 1:

1ABLE~

(TLT)

DFHTLT TYPE=INITIAL,
SUFFIX=xx

DFHTLT TYPE=ENTRY,
TRMIDNT=terminal identification

DFHTLT TYPE=FINAL

209

210

DFHOC TYPE=OPEN,
DATASET=TRANSDATA,DATABASE,DUMP,
LISTADR={register), (symbolic register) ,YES,
SYMBADR=symbolic address,
DSETID= (name, (xx) , ••• ) ,
CHECK=symbolic address

DFHOC TYPE=CLOSE,
DATASET=TRANSDATA,DATABASE,DUMP,
LISTADR={register), (symbolic register) ,YES,
SYMBADR=symbolic address,
DSETID= (name, ••• ) ,
CHECK=symbolic address

*
*
*

DFHOC TYPE=SWITCH,
DATASET=DUMP

*
*
*

This section contains examples of user-written transactions.
source coding is written in Assembler language.

The

The following example of a 1030 transaction:
1.

Analyzes the terminal transaction code in the first byte of
data.

Matches the transaction code with the entry in the Program
Control Table (PCT) for the desired transaction.

Issues a Program Control XCTL macro instruction for the program
name found in the table search.

]ot~:

The 1030 transaction must take into account the size of the
largest Transaction Work Area (TWA) needed by the program to
which control is to be transferred.

COpy
COpy
TCTTEAR EQU
COpy
TIOABAR EQU
COpy
PCTCBAR EQU
COPY
TRAN1030 CSECT
ENTRY
T1030
EQU
BALR
USING
L
L
L

PCTLOOP

END
TRANCTL

MVC
EQU
CLC
BE
LA
CLI
BNE
EQU
DFHPC
EQU
MVC
DFHPC
END

DFHCSADS
DFHTCADS
7
DFHTCTTE
6

DFHTIOA
5
DFHPCTDS
T1030

2,0

*,2
TCTTEAR,TCAFCAAA
TIOABAR,TCTTEDA
PCTCBAR,CSAPCTBA
TIOADBA(80) ,TIOADBA+1

*PCTTI,TIOADBA
TRANCTL
PCTCBAR,PCTEA
PCTTI,X'FF'
PCTLOOP

TYPE=RETURN

TCAPCPI,PCTIPIA
TYPE=XCTL
T1030

COpy CSA SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
COPY TCA SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
TERM CONTROL TABLE ADDRESS REG
COPY TCT SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
TERMINAL I/O AREA ADDRESS REG
COPY TIOA SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
PROG CONTROL TABLE ADDRESS REG
COpy PCT SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
CONTROL SECTION - 1030 INPUT ED
1030 INPUT EDIT ENTRY ADDRESS
1030 INPUT EDIT ENTRY ADDRESS
ESTABLISH BASE ADDRESS REGISTER
USING REGISTER 2 FOR BASE REG
LOAD FACILITY CONTROL ADDRESS
LOAD TERMINAL IIO AREA ADDRESS
LOAD PROGRAM CONTROL TABLE AD DR
SHIFT INPUT DATA ONE BYTE
PROGRAM CTL TABLE SEARCH ENTRY
COMPARE TRANSACTION IDENT
GO TO TRANSFER CONTROL IF EQUAL
ADVANCE TO NEXT TABLE ENTRY
TEST FOR END OF TABLE
CONTINUE SEARCH IF NOT EQUAL
END OF TABLE SEARCH ENTRY
PROGRAM CONTROL RETURN
TRANSFER CONTROL ENTRY
MOVE PROGRAM NAME TO TCA
PROGRAM CONTROL TRANSFER CONTROL

The following example of a 2760 transaction:
1.

Analyzes input data that CICS has translated to EBCDIC
representation.
211

Changes index numbers (11, 12) to frame numbers.

Converts horizontal/vertical coordinates received from the 2760
to points ranging from 1 to 252.
These points represent screen
positions arranged (top to bottom, left to right) on a screen
of 21 vertical columns and 12 horizontal rows.

Indicates how to detect reserved points on the screen, some of
which are built into the hardware and some of which are assigned
by the user.

Shows a procedure for generating the necessary control (function)
information and Move Amount Character codes so that CICS can
transmit output data to the 2760.
Before output transmission
to the 2760 occurs, CICS translates the data to 2740 code.

COpy
COpy
TCTTEAR EQU
COpy
TIOABAR EQU
COpy
PCTCBAR EQU
COpy
REG8
EQU
REG9
EQU
REG10
EQU
REG1S
EQU
TRAN2760 CSECT
ENTRY
T2760
EQU
BALR
USING
L
L
L
BAL
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
CLI
BE
B
FORWARDl EQU
MVl
212

DFHCSADS
DFHTCADS
7
DFHTCTTE
6
DFHTIOA
5
DFHPCTDS
8
9
10
15
T2760
*
2,0
*,2
TCTTEAR,TCAFCAAA
TIOABAR,TCTTEDA
PCTCBAR,CSAPCTBA
REG10,COMPIHV
POINTNO+ 1 ,132
FORWARD1
POINTNO+1,144
FORWARD2
POINTNO+1,156
FORWARD3
POINTNO+l,168
FORWARD4
POINTNO+1,180
FORWARD5
POINTNO+l,240
REVERSE1
POINTNO+l,228
REVERSE2
POINTNO+l,216
REVERSE3
POlNTNO+1,204
REVERSE4
POINTNO+1,192
REVERSES
POINTNO+l,245
UNLOAD
POINTNO+l,246
LOAD
END
*
FUNCTION,X 1 F1 1

COpy CSA SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
COpy TCA SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
TERM CONTROL TABLE ADDRESS REG
COpy TCT SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
TERMINAL I/O AREA ADDRESS REG
COPY TIOA SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
PROG CONTROL TABLE ADDRESS REG
COPY PCT SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
REGISTER EIGHT
REGISTER NINE
REGISTER TEN
REGISTER FIFTEEN
CONTROL SECTION - 2760 INPUT ED
2760 INPUT EDIT ENTRY ADDRESS
2760 INPUT EDIT ENTRY ADDRESS
ESTABLISH BASE ADDRESS REGISTER
USING REGISTER 2 FOR BASE REG
LOAD FACILITY CONTROL ADDRESS
LOAD TERMINAL I/O AREA ADDRESS
LOAD PROGRAM CONTROL TABLE ADDR
LINK TO COMPUTE Il, 12, H, & V
FORWARD ONE
FORWARD TWO
FORWARD THREE
FORWARD FOUR
FORWARD FIVE
REVERSE ONE
REVERSE TWO
REVERSE THREE
REVERSE FOUR
REVERSE FIVE
UNLOAD
LOAD

FORWARD, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED

MVC
B

FORWARD2 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

FORWARD3 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

FORWARD4 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

FORWARD5 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

REVERSE1 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

REVERSE2 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

REVERSE3 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

REVERSE4 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

REVERSE5 EQU
MVI
MVC
B

LOAD

EQU
MVI
MVC

UNLOAD

EQU
MVI
MVC
EQU
LA
STH
MVC
BAL
MVC
DFHTC

WR2760

END
COMPIHV

EQU
DFHPC
EQU
TR
SR
IC
SLL
SR
IC
AR
STH
TR

ADVANCE,=H'1'
WR2760

*
FUNCTION,X'F1'
ADVANCE,=H'2'
WR2760
*

FUNCTION, X' F1'
ADVANCE#=H' 3'
WR2760

FUNCTION,X'P1'
ADVANCE,=H'4'
WR2760

FUNCTION,X'F1'
ADVANCE,=H'5'
WR2160

*FUNCTION,X'40'
ADVANCE,=H'1'
WR2160

*FUNCTION,X'40'
ADVANCE,=H' 2'
WR2160
*FUNCTION,X'40'
ADVANCE,=H'3'
WR2160

FORWARD ONE FRAME
FORWARD, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
FORWARD TWO FRAMES
FORWARD, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
FORWARD THREE FRAMES
FORWARD, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
FORWARD FOUR FRAMES
FORWARD, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
FORWARD FIVE FRAMES
REVERSE, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
REVERSE ONE FRAME
REVERSE, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
REVERSE TWO FRAMES
REVERSE, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
REVERSE THREE FRAMES

FUNCTION,X'40'
ADVANCE,=H' 4'
WR2160

REVERSE, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
REVERSE FOUR FRAMES

*
FUNCTION,X'40'
ADVANCE, = H' 5'
WR2760

REVERSE, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
REVERSE FIVE FRAMES

*
FUNCTION,X'F1'
ADVANCE,=H'8'
WR2760

LOAD
FORWARD, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
FORWARD EIGHT FRAMES

*
FUNCTION,X'40'
ADVANCE,=H'255'

UNLOAD
REVERSE, AUTO EOM, MFA DISABLED
REVERSE 255 FRAMES

*REG9,3
REG9,TIOATDL
TIOADBA(1),FUNCTION
REG10,COMPADV
TIOADBA+ 1 (2) , ADVA NCE
TYPE= (WRITE,OIU)
END

TYPE=RETURN

*
TIOADBA+2(2),TRTBL
REG9,REG9
REG9,TIOADBA+2
REG9,5
REG8,REG8
REG8,TIOADBA+3
REG8,REG9
REG8,FRAMENO
TIOADBA+4(2),TRTBL

LINK TO COMPUTE FRAME ADVANCE

END OF TABLE SEARCH ENTRY
PROGRAM CONTROL RETURN
COMPUTE 11, 12, HORIZ, AND VERT
TRANSLATE 2 CHARS 11 AND 12
CLEAR REGISTER NINE
PLACE 11 IN REGISTER NINE
MULTIPLY 11 BY 32
CLEAR REGISTER EIGHT
PLACE 12 IN REGISTER EIGHT
SUM OF I1X32 AND 12 IN REG 8
STORE 2760 FRAME NUMBER
TRANSLATE 2 CHARS VERT & HORIZ
213

SR
IC
MH
LR
SR
IC
AR
LA
SR
STH
BR
FRAMENO DC
POINTNO DC
TRTBL
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
COMPADV DS
LH
SR
LA
DR
STC
STC
TR
BR
FUNCTION DC
ADVANCE DS
LCXTRTBL DC
DC
END
~!AMg1~

QI !

REG8,REG8
CLEAR REGISTER EIGHT
REG8,TIOADBA+5
PLACE HORIZONTAL IN REGISTER 8
REG8,=H'12'
MULTIPLY HORIZONTAL BY TWELVE
REG9,REG8
12H RESULT IN REGISTER NINE
REG8,REG8
CLEAR REGISTER EIGHT
REG8,TIOADBA+4
PLACE VERTICAL IN REGISTER 8
REG9,REG8
12H + V RESULT IN REGISTER NINE
REG8,255
LOAD 255 IN REGISTER EIGHT
255-12H-V RESULT IN REGISTER 8
REG8,REG9
REG8,POINTNO
STORE 2760 POINT NUMBER
REG10
COMPUTE 11, I2, H, AND V EXIT
H'O'
2760 FRAME NUMBER
H'O'
2760 POINT NUMBER
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFFFPPFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'OOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'03FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'0205FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF01FFFFFF'
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FF070BOF13171B1FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FF060AOE12161A1EFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FFFF090D1115191DFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
X'FF04080C1014181CFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'
OH
COMPUTE MANUAL FRAME ADVANCE
REG9,ADVANCE
LOAD 2760 MANUAL FRAME ADVANCE
REG8,REG8
CLEAR REGISTER EIGHT
REG15,32
LOAD DIVISOR OF 32
REG8,REG15
DIVIDE FRAME ADVANCE BY 32
REG9,ADVANCE
STORE SECOND BYTE OF ADVANCE
REG8,ADVANCE+1
STORE FIRST BYTE OF ADVANCE
ADVANCE(2},LCXTRTBL
TRANSLATE MANUAL FRAME ADVANCE
REG10
COMPUTE FRAME ADVANCE EXIT
X'OO'
2760 FUNCTION
H'O'
2760 MANUAL FRAME ADVANCE
X'407C6050F1619181F2A29282F3A39383'
X'F4A49484F5A59585F6A69686F7A79787'
T2760
373 2

lR~ACTIQN

(Not applicable to CICS/DOS-ENTRY)

The following example of a 3735 transaction:
1.

Reads data from the 3735 and spools to an extrapartition data
set.

Upon receipt of the end-of-file condition, writes an FDP header
record, FDP records, an FDP trailer record, and data.

Sends a powerdown message.

Disconnects the line.
COpy
COpy
COpy
COpy
COpy

214

DFHCSADS
DFHTCADS
DFHTCTTE
DFHTIOA
DFHTDIA

COMMON SYSTEM AREA DSECT
TASK CONTROL AREA DSECT
TERMINAL CONT TABLE DSECT
TERMINAL I/O AREA DSECT
TRANSIENT DATA I/O AREA DSECT

'IC'ITEAR
TIOAEAR
TDIAEAR
EASEREG
WORK REG

BLOOP

HEADER

WLCOFF

TRAILER

WLCOFD

FINISH

FORTY
BLKLGTH
HREC
TREC
FWRDiN

EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
EQU
CSECT
BALR
USING
L
L
DFHTC
EQU
DFHTD

3
4
5
6
7

TC~TE BASE REGISTER
TIOA BASE REGISTER
TDIA BASE REGISTER
PRCGRAM BASE REGISTER
WORK REGISTER

BASEREG,O
LeAD PROGRAM BASE REGISTER
*,EASEREG
TCITEAR,TCAFCAAA
ADDRESSABILITY TO TERM CONT TBL
TIOAEAR,TCTTEDA
ADDRESSABILITY TO TERM I/O AREA
EOF=HEADER
TEST FOR END-OF-FIIE CONDI~ION
*
BATCH READ LOOP
TYPE=PUT,
WRITE DATA RECORD
DESTID=OUTQ,
TO OUTPUT QUEUE
TtADDR=TIOAtBA
DATA IS IN TIOA
DFHTC TYPE=GET,
READ NEXT RECORD
ECF=HEADER
AND TEST FOR END-OF-FILE
L
IIOAEAR,TCTTEDA
AtDRESSABILITY TO TIOA
B
RLOOP
LOOP
EQU
*
WRITE FDP HEADER RECORD
L
TIOAEAR,TCTTEDA
ADDR~SSABILITY TO TIOA
MVC
'IIOATDL(7),HREC
MOVE HEADER RECORD TO TIOA
ST
TIOABAR,TCTTEDA
SPECIFY TIOA ADDRESS
DFHTC TYPE=(PUT,SAVE)
WRITE TO 3735, SAVE TIOA
EQU
*
BATCH FDP WRITE LCOP
DFHTD TYPE=GET,
GET FDP RECORD
DESTID=FDPQ,
FRCM FDP QUEUE
QUEZEFO=TRAILER
SEND TRAILER WHEN DONE
L
TtIABAR,TCATDAA
ADDRESSABILITY TO DATA
MVC
TIOADBA(240),0(TDIAEAR) MOVE tATA
MVC
TIOADBA+240 (236) ,240 (TDIABAR) TO TIOA
MVC
'IIOATtL,BIKLGTH
SET LENGTH FOR WRITE
ST
TIOAEAR,TCTTEDA
SPECIFY TIOA ADDRESS
DFHTC TYPE=(PUT,SAVE,NOTRANSLATE)
WRITE TO 3735
B
WLCOPF
LOOP
EQU
*
WRITE FDP TRAILER RECORD
MVC
TIOATDL(7) ,TREC
MOVE TRAILER RECORD TO TIOA
ST
TIOAEAR,TCTTEDA
SPECIFY TIOA ADDRESS
DFHTC TYPE=(PUT,SAVE)
WRITE TO 3735, SAVE TIOA
EQU
*
BATCH DATA WRITE LOOP
DFHTD TYPE=GET,
GET DATA
DESTID=DATQ,
FROM DATA QUEUE
QUEZERO=FINISH
EXIT WHEN DONE
L
TDIABAR,TCATDAA
ADDRESSABILITY TO DATA
MVC
TIOADBA (240) ,0 (TDIABAR) MOVE DATA
MVC
TIOADBA+240 (236) ,240 (TDIABAR) TO TIOA
MVC
IIOATDL,BlKLGTH
SET LENGTH FOR WRITE
ST
TIOAEAR,TCTTEDA
SPECIFY TIOA ADDRESS
DFHTC TYPE=(PUT,SAVE)
WRITE TO 3735, SAVE TIOA
E
WLCOPD
LOOP
EQU
*
END UP
MVC
TIOATDL(7),PWRDWN
MOVE POWER DOWN MESSAGE TO TIOA
DFHTC 'IYPE=PUT
SEND POWEE DOWN MESSAGE
DFHTC TYP~=DISC
DISCONNECT LINE REQUEST
DFHPC TYPE=RETUEN
EXI~
EC
H'40'
DC
H'476'
DC
H' 3'
DC
C'
NULL F NULL
X'OCC600'
DC
DC
H'3'
DC
C'
NULL E NULL
DC
X' 00C500'
DC
H' 3'
DC
C'
215

*
*
*

*
*

tc
LTORG
:END

216

X'OOD700'

POWER DOWN MESSAGE

INDE~.

This index has been prepared by an automated
indexing program. Your comments and suggestions
will be apprecia ted.
The intent is to list primary pago
references first.

ASSEMBLER END CARD
44
ASSEMBLER END STATEIIENT
13,91,100,117,106,109,113,115
ASSEMBLER F
20
ASSEMBLE R H
20
ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE
13,118,200,211
ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE APPLICATION PROGRAM
158
ASSEMBLER NAME
19-20,13,201
FIRST THREE CHARACTERS OF THE 20
ASSEMBLER PROGRAM
48
ASSEMBLY
20,22,46-41,71
ATDI
171
ATP
14,16-17,19,22,44,53,204,146,156,49,201
205
ATP TASKS VALUE
MAXIMUII NUMBER OF 153
ATPMT
53,49,205
ATPMT OPERAND
53
ATTACH
140-141
ATTRIBUTE BYTE
135-136
ATTRIBUTE POSITION
AUDALARM
131,55,70,189,207
AUDIBLE ALARM
132
AUDIBLE ALARM FEATURE
74
AUDIO
62- 63,54-55,10,12,206-207
AUDIO RESPONSE DEVICE LV UNIT
72
AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT UNDER CICS/DOS
179,182
AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT UNDER CICS/OS
179,181
AUTOANSR
196,181-183,54,62,67,81),1811,186-188,206
AUTOANSW
32,34,15,203
AUTOCALL
137,196-197,54,62,67,80,184,188,206
AUTOMATIC
67,54,62,206
AUTOMATIC POLLING FEATURE
34
AUTOMATIC TASK INITIATION
98-99,144,154
AUTOPOLL
67,32,34,15,54,56,62,164,203,206
AVAILABLE TCTTE
144

-A-

AACA
169
ABB
32,37,181-183,15,54,62,68,203,206
ABB CODE
68
ABB SPECIFIES CONVERSION
36
ABB TRANSMISSION CODE
36
ABC
32,37,15,54,62,68,203,206
ABC CODE
68
ABC SPECIFIES CONVERSION
36
ABC TRANSMISSION CODE
36
ABEND
173-174,129,146,192
ABENC CODE
169,171
ABEND CODE INDICATES
169
ABEND TASK
128
169
ABNORMAL CONDITION INVALID ERROR CODE
ABNORMAL CONDITION LINE ENTRY
DIAGRAM OF THE TERMIN AL
123
ABNORMAL CONDITION PROGRAM
23,162,177,176
ABNORMAL TERIIINATION COMPLETE DATE
156
ABORT
173-174
ABORT TERIIINAL WRITE REQUESTS
126
ACB'S
46
ACCESS
88,113,120-121,1,9,99,114
ACCESS DL/I
ACCESS IIETHOD
6,32,63,82,199
ACCESSED UNDER CICS/OS
82
ACCMETH
82-84,32-33,37,196,24,62-63,66,182-183
191,79-80,189,15,54,81,92,179-181,184-185
186-189,202,206-207
ACCTID
19-20,14,201
ACQUISITION
39,15,203
ACQUISITION INDICATES INPUT
40
ACTAD
38,15,203
ACTION
140-143,124,153,171
ACTION QUEUE PURGE DYNAIIIC OPEN/CLOSE
17
ACTION SET
121-122
ACTIVE CICS TRANSACTION
MODE OF THE
172
ACTIVE TASKS SINCE NO TCTTE
145
ACTUAL DESTINATION
ADD
91
ADD DAl 6
38
ADD ISAM
7
ADDITIONAL ISAM LOGIC 1I0DULE
91
ADDITIONAL SENSEG STATEIIENT
45
50
ADDITIONAL SYSTEM INITIALIZATION /lODULES
ADDR
192-193
ADDRESS
ERROR BYTE PLUS THREE-BYTE 160
SYrlBOLIC 54,206,62,95-96,159,210,56,68,94,159,161
SYMBOLIC 208
ADDRESS DFHOC TYPE
SYMBOLIC 159,210
ADDRESSABILITY
215,118,128
ADMINISTRATIVE TERIIINAL FACILITIES DESCRIBED
152
AICA
169
AKCA
169
ALIGNIIENT
89-90,81,208
ALTERNATE DUMP DATA SET
11-12,162,153
ALTERNATE STATION ADDRESS
75-76
AMERICAN STANDARD CODE
59,68
ANALYSIS DFHTDP
119
ANS COBOL
4,28,200
ANS COBOL VERSION 2 COIIPILER
28
ANS COBOL VERSION 3 COMPILER
28
ANS COBOL VERSION 4 COMPILER
28
ANSIIRBK
32-34,57,59,62,66,73,137,181-183,67-68
15,54,80,184,186-188,197,203,206
APAR NO. Pl0780
21,41
APCI
170
APIA
170
APL
56,58,54,206
APPENDAGE SUFFIX SYMBOL DFHTCT TYPE
54,206
APPENDAGE 7770 SVC
APPENDAGE END 18
APPENDG
56,61,54,181,206
APPENDG OPERAND
24
APPENDIX
93,97-99,106-107,110
NONE 74
175
APPENDIX B
77-78,179
APPENDIX C
190
APPENDIX E
199
APPENDIX F
200
APPENDIX G
75
APPLICAT ION INPUT
DISCUSSION OF THE OPTCD OPERAND OF THE 143
138,171-17 3,19,22,130,35,43,81,
APPLICATION PROGBAM
133,135,139,142
USER-IlRITTEN
1,8,76,130
APPLICATION PROGRAM RESTARTS
151
APPLICATION PROGRAII 1I0RK AREA
H9
APPLICATION PROGRAIIS THAT CURRENTLY TEST
74,132
APPLICATION UNDER TCAII
137
AREA
124,127,11,24,85,143
AREAS
1024-BYTE 21
1116,3,5,7,21,25,36,45,58,77,82,90
92, 100,105,108,111,114,121,132-133,135-136,139
H2, 144, 151, 190, 194, 199
ASCII
32-33,35,54,62,66,206,15,56- 57,68,203
ASIIBLR
19-20,13,201
ASSEMBLER
109,13,108,209
ASSEMBLER B 0
149
ASSEMBLER B 4
149
ASSEMBLER 0
USE OF 72

-B-

BASE NAME
114,48
BASE REGISTER
128,117-118,121
BASIC ERROR RECOVERY PROCEDURES
57
BASIC MAPPING SUPPORT PROGRAM
177
BASIC SEQUENTIAL ACCESS IIETHOD
32
BASIC TELECOMIIUNICATIONS ACCESS IIETHOD
32,66
BATCH
62-63,54-55,70,72,206-207,3,152,215
BATCH IMS JOB
9
BATCH IIIS/360 PROGRAIIS
EXECUTING 45
BATCH TRANSACTION IIAKES PROPER USE
174
BDAM
82-84,199,81,92,86,201
BCAII DATA SET
85
BGAM
62-63,65,32,12,131,196,15,54,189,202,206
BINARY
63-64,12,16,51-60,68,127,179
BINARY CODED DECIl'JAL INTERCHANGE CODE
59
BISAI!
45
BISYNC
32,54-55,62-63,70,12,206-201,15,203
BISYNC BINARY
33
BISYNC PARAIIETER INCLUDES 1130
34
BISYNC 2
34
BISYNCH DEVICES
61
BLK
86,81,83,201
BLKKEYL
86,82,84,81,199,201
BLKKEYL OPERAND
81
BLKKEYL VALUE
86
BLKSIZE
56,60,86,102-104,190-191,95-96,54,81,83
92,94,182,206-208
BLKSIZE BYTES 9-16
160
BLKSIZE PLUS BLKKEYL
199
BLKSIZE VALUE
86
BLOCK
84-86,60,96-91
BLOCK SIZE
44
BLOCKED
87
BLOCKED BDAII DATA SET
88
BLOCKING FACTOR
86,84
BLOCKS
NUIIBER OF 1024-BYTE 52
1024-BYTE 52
BLOCKS FEATURE OF DL/I
PRE-BUILT 46
BLOCKSIZE
86,64
BIIS
32,31,15,203
BNE
128
BR 14 !NSTRUCTION
119
BROIlSE OPERANDS
86
BSAII
62-63,65-66,32-33,137,196,15,54,124,188
202,206
BSAII DATA SET CONTROL NAIIE
64
BSAII STATUS
124
BSAM STATUS 44
126
BSCIIDIIPT
56,54,184-185,206
BSCMDPPT
56,54,206
BSCIIDSIl
56,54,181,206
BSCODE
32-33,35,56-57,59,68,54,186-188,206,15
62,184-185,203
BSCODE OPERAND
BTAII
163,166-168,62-64,66,32-33,31,24,59,120
131,196,182-183,80,15,54,79,124,179-181,184
185-187,189,202,206
BTAII DEVICE TYPES
33
BTAM DEVICES
11,13
POLLI NG OF
154
BTAM DFTRIILST IIUST
LABEL OF THE 13
BTAII ENVIRONIIENT
138
BTAII I/O ERRORS
166
BTAM INPUT ONLY
162,164
BTAM LINE ERROR
LABEL OF THE 60
BTA II LINE GROUPS DEFAULTS
60
BTAII LOCAL LINE GIiOUP
69
BTAII IIANUAL
66
BTAII NON-SIlITCHED LINE
12
BTAII OUTPUT ONLY
163

217

88,157,160,185,189,194,199
GENERATION OF
13
CICS/DOS ENVIRONIIENT
11
CICS/DOS EXTENT CARD
96
CICS/DOS LINKAGE EDITOR
13,95
GENERATION OF THE
19
CICS/DOS OPERATIONS GUIDE
91
13
CICS/DOS REAL-TIllE RELOCATABL.E PROGRAM LIBRARY
CICS/DOS REAL-TIllE SYSTEM
13
CICS/DOS SYSTEM DATA SETS RESIDE
50
CICS/DOS SYSTEII GENERATION
NUIIBER TERIIINATION OF 20ll
TERIIINATION OF lIli
CICS/DOS SYSTEMS
56-60,83-85,19-21,23-24,31, 3l1-35, 50
CICS/DOS-ENTRY
53,68,137,169,187,214
CICS/DOS-ENTRY SYSTEII
26-27,50-51,6,38,41,53,109,154,162
CICS/DOS-STANDARD
53,6,109,196
CICS/DOS-STANDARD SYSTEM
6,22,41,53
CICS/OS
57-61,95-96,77-78,160,20,62,65,69,5
19,51,82,86,88,100,122,189,194,199
GENERATION OF
13
USER OF
86-87
CICS/OS APPLICATION PROGRAIIS OPTIONAL ACCESS
45
CICS/OS DATA LANGUAGE/I FACILITIES
GENERATION OF 22,45
CICS/OS ENVIRONIIENT
11
CICS/OS ISAII DATA SETS
87
CICS/OS OPERATIONS GUIDE
39,46
CICS/OS STANDARD SYSTEII
21,24
CICS/OS STANDARD VERSION 2.3
41
CICS/OS SYSTEII
32,37,83,85,19,42-43,56,69,72,88
CICS/OS VERSION 1
19
CICS/OS VERSION 1 USERS
22,24
CICS/OS VERSION 2
19
CICS/OS 3
194
CICS/OS-STANDARD
22
20-22,57-58,60-61,52-53,24,
CICS/OS-STANDARD SYSTEM
6,35,43,51,85,109,129
CICS/OS-STANDARD VERSION 1 USER
129
CICS/OS-STANDARD V1
5
CICS/OS-STANDARD V1 COIIPATIBILITY
33
CICS/OS-STANDARD V2
5
CICS/TCAII ABEND/RESTART
151
CICS/TCAM INTERFACE
145-146,138-139,147-148,150-151
CICS/TCAM INTERF ACE CONSIDERATIONS
37,69,137
CICS/TCAII INTERFACE ENABLES CICS
137
CICS/TCAM INTERF ACE IIIPLEIIENTATION
143
CICS/TCAM INTERFACE SUPPORTS
143
CICS/TCAM PROGRAM INTERRELATIONSHIP
190
CICS/TCAM STARTUP
150
151
CICS/TCAM TERIIINATION
CICSGEN
20,201
CLASS
19,21,54-55,62-63,70,72,206-207,14,189
CLOSE
161-162,158-159,153,192,210
CLOSE DATA SETS
161,11
CLOSE ERROR 20
161
CNTRL
56,54,206
COBOL
28,43,108,14,16,18,202,109-110,204,209
COBOL DFHPPT TYPE
110
CODED DECIMAL INTERCHANGE CODE 2
68
CODES
CODING
79-80,92-93,107,110,113,90,93,115,179
CODING DFHSG TYPE
45
COMMON CARRIER TELETYPEliRITER EXCHANGE TERMINAL
33,179,184
COMMON SYSTEM AREA
42,156
EXTENSION OF THE 5
COMMON SYSTEM AR EA KCP
51
COMMON TCTTE'S
POOL OF
139
COMMON 1I0RK AREA
OPTIONAL USER-DEFINED 5
COMMUNICATE
68,61,76,108
COMMUNICATION LINES
34,65-66,68,71
COMMUNICATION TERMINAL/2760 OPTICAL IMAGE UNIT
180
COMPAT
32,35-36,106,70,74,185,15,55,105,131,177
189,203,207,209
COMPAT OPERAND
SINGLE USE OF THE 36
USE OF THE 74
COMPAT OPERANDS
148
COMPATIBILITY MODE
136,131
COMPATIBILITY OPERATION
FULLBUF MODES OF
106
TIiO MODES OF
36,130
COMPATIBILITY TRANSACTION
136
CONFIG
56,59,54,186-187,206
CONSEC
26,14-15,38,201,203
CONSECUTIVE I/O
NUl1BER OF 26
CONSECUTIVE I/O EVENTS
NUl1BER OF 38
CONSOLE OPERATOR
157
CONTINUE RESPONSE
151
CONTROL DUMMY
CONTROL PROGR DUMP
17
CONTROL PROGR FILE 17
CONTROL PROGR ABNORI!AL CONDITION
17
CONTROL PROGR CICS DUMMY CSA
17
CONTROL PROGR COM!!ON SYSTEI! AREA
17
CONTROL PROGR DUMP UTILITY
17
CCNTROL PROGR PROGRAM INTERRUPT
17
CONTROL PROGR SY STEM SERVICE PROGRAl1S
17
17
CCNTROL PROGR TABLE 1
CONTROL PROGR TEMPORARY STORAGE
17
CONTROL PROGR TRANSIENT DATA DUMMY
17
CONTROL PROGRAM
GENERATED AS PART OF THE FILE 26
CONTROL SECTION
211-212,82,105,108,111,114
CONTROL SYSTEM DUMl1Y GROUP
25
CONTROL SYSTEM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS
26
CONTROL SYSTEM MESSAGES
162
CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL GROUP
23,201
CONTROL SYSTEM SERVICE GROUP
24
CONTROL SYSTEM UTILITY GROUP
25
CONTROL UNIT
56,59,123,126,173

BTAM READ/WRITE RETURN CODE
164
BTAM RETURN CODE
121, 163-16l1, 122
BTAM SIiITCHED-LINE PROCESSING
73
BTAM-EXPANDED ID VERIFICATION
68
BTAMDEV
32-34,37,211,15,57,137,202
BTAMDEV OPERAND
34
BTAMDEV 2
32
BUFEXP
131,55,70,207
BUFEXP PARAMETER INCREASES
74
BUFFRECV
67,32,34,15,54,62,203,206
BUFNO
102-103,S5-96,94,208
BUFPL
52,lI5,49,205
BUILT
159-160,46,112,212
-C-

CAA
23-2l1,14,201
CAA OPERANDS
23
CAAUTIPL
130
CALL'S
INDICATE lIHAT TYPE OF
45
CARD READER
57,60,63,72
165-166
CARRIER CONTROL CHARACTERS
CATP STOP
156
CDL
49,51,205
CHANNEL END/ABNORMAL END APPENDAGE ROUTINE
2l1,61
CHECK
85,141,159,161,210,128,161,163
CHECK OPERANDS
161
CHECKING FEATURE
57-58
CHK
56,58,54,79,180,206
CICS
178,190,201
ABNORMAL TERMINATION OF
151
ACCESSED DURING EXECUTION OF
52
ACTIVATE
11
AUTOMATIC TASK INITIATION FEATURE OF
CICS OPTIONS DURING GENERATION OF
lI5
DUMP MANAGEMENT FACILITY OF
11
FILE CONTROL FACILITI ES OF
130
GENERATION OF
13,18,176
INITIALIZATION OF
48
NAMES OF 22
NEll RELEASES OF
116
OPERATION OF 110
OS SUBTASK OF 9
REAL-TIME EXECUTION OF 24,155,158
USER OF
111,113,154
CICS APPLICATION PROGRAM
61,138,151
CICS ATTACHES TIOA
142
CICS CATALOGED PROCEDURES
19
CICS CHECKING
150
CICS CONFIGURATION
52
CICS COllTROL BLOCKS
138-139
CICS CONTROL TABLES
176
CICS DFHTCT TYPE
132,139
CICS DUlU' UTILITY PROGRAM
7
155,158
CICS DYNAMIC OPEN/CLOSE FACILITY ALLOIiS
CICS DYNAdIC OPEN/CLOSE PROGRAM
103-1011
CICS EXECUTION
COURSE OF
162
CICS EXECUTION DECK
24
CICS FILE MANAGEMENT
82
CICS FUNCTIONS
CHOICE OF
10
CICS MACRO INSTRUCTIONS
FOLLOWING LISTING OF
200
CICS MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
116
CICS MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS
39,116-118,37,40-lI2,10,27
30,5,13,27 ,28,1l18,1 0
CICS MASTER TERMINAL SIiITCH FUNCTION
11
CICS NUCLEUS
51
52,83,93
CICS PARTITION/REGION
CICS PROGRAMS
6
ASSEMBLY OF
22
LINK EDIT OF
22
CICS SCREEN CONTROL IIACRO IN STRUCTIONS
1117
CICS STORAGE
12-BYTE
149
CICS SYNAD
61
CICS SYSTEM DATA SETS
22
CICS SYSTEII INITIALIZATION
COMPLETING
150
CICS SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROGRAM
6,156
CICS TABLE PREPARATION
131
CICS TASK
67
CICS TASK ISSUES
67
CICS TERMINAL
1l15-146
CICS TERMINAL CONTROL PROGRAII
1lI6
CICS TERIIINAL CONTROL TABLE
77,145,179,190
EXAIIPLE OF A 190
CICS TERIIINAL CONTROL TABLE CONTAINS
138
CICS TERMINAL ERROR HANDLING STRUCTURE
120
CICS TERMINAL ERROR PROGRAII
138
EXPANSION OF THE
143
CICS TERMINAL INPUT/OUTPUT AREA
1l19-150
CICS TERMINAL OPERATOR GUIDE
106,110
CICS TIOA
140
CICS TRACE FUNCTION
154,153
CICS TRACE TABLE
50
CICS TRANSACTION
136
CICS TRANSACTION ROLLOUT DA'rA SET
50
CICS TRANSIENT DATA CONTROL FACILITY
162
CICS USER EXITS
148
CICS USES FOUR-BYTE TERMINAL ID'S
149
CICS UTILITY PROGRAM
1
CICS 2260 COIIPATIBILITY
132,135
CICS. LOADLIB
22
CICS-DL/I INITIALIZATION
45
CICS-DL/I INTERFACE
52,45-46
CICS-DL/I INTERF ACE 1I0DULES
LINK EDIT OF THE
22
CICS-DL/I INTERF ACE USES
lI6
CICS-PROVIDED PROGRAMS
CICS-PROVIDED UTILITY PROGRAM
11
CICS-TO-TCAM COIIMUNICATION BYTE ALL SOH
148
218

3211
66,14
CONTROL UNIT 31
REMOTE 3211
33
CONTROL UNIT 33
REMOT'! 3211
33
CONT ROL VALUE
66
CONV
62-63,54-55,70,12,206-201 Y
CONVTAB
32-33,35-31,181-183,15,54,57,62,68,203
206
CONVTAB OPERAND
SINGLE USE OF THE
36
COORDINATING MCP
151
COPY CSA SYMBOLIC STRG DEFN
211
COPY DPHXXEXT STATEMENT
111
COPY FEATURE
74,132,111
CREATE SUPERSET ISAM LOGIC MODULE
91
CREATING USER EXITS
39,37,40-42,27,30,28,148
CRLP
62-63,70,72,32,54-55,188,206-207,15,202
CSA
42,16-11,117,204,5,26,38,156,49,205
COMMON WORK AREA PORTION OF THE
42
CS ACTODB
156
CSAJYDP
156
CSAKCCDL
26,38
CSAOSRSA
111
CSAOSRSA BALR 4,0
111
CSAPCTBA
211-212
CSATADJT
156
CSD
11,25,201
CSD CONTROL SYSTEM UTILITY GROUP
201
CSD MACRO INSTRUCTION
30-31,39-40,42,18,25
CSECT
49-50,205
CSML
116
CSML EXPLANATION
174
CSMT
177,11,176,107,155
CSMT EXPLANATION
162-169,111-114
CSMT FILE SERVICE 1'UNCTIONS
38
CSO
14,11,23,2Dl,21,151
CSO MACRO INSTRUCTION
61,18
CSOT
177
CSS
17,24,201
CSS1'
171
CSSL
158,116
CSSN
117,107
CSST
171,107
CSTA
107,157,177
CSTT
177
CSU
14,17,25,201
CSXX
177
CTLCHAR
148
CU
56,59,79,54,80,179-181,184,186-189,206
CURRENT DATE
156
CURRENT DUMP DATA SET
162
CURRENT RECORD
145
CURRENTLY OPERATIONAL 2260-BASED TRANSACTIONS
35,130
CUSHION
154
CWA
5
CWTR
118
CYL01'L
82,84,81,207

DAUPD
38,15,203
DAY
CICS TIME OF
157
OPERATING SYSTEM TIME OF
157
SPECIFIED TIME OF
30
TIME OF
156-157,178,1
DAY CONTROL
TIME OF
156
DBD'S
46,82
DBROWSE
38,15,203
DCB
86-87,61,160-161,82,95,138-139,192-193.165,181
DCB RECORD FORMAT
81,83,207
DCB VALUE
86
DCBNAME
95
DCP
15,17,31,202,49,205
DCP MACRO INSTRUCTION
31
OCT
93,102,104,49,51,100,162,171,40,116,118,205,208
OCT ASSEMBLY
160
OCT ENTRY
ADDRESS OF
119
DO
60-61,44,96,72,102-103
DO CARD
138,164
DDIR
46,22
DDNAME
56,60,138,95,160,190-192,511,186-181,206
DEBLOCKING TECHNIQUE
88
DEC
124-125,86,81,83,201
DECAD
38,15,203
DECB
61,120-121,1211
DECIMAL VALUE
49-51,105.53.82,84,81,201
DE1'AULT VALUE
67,21,53.14,71,96,131
DESCRIPTIOli 7170 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT
71
DEST
1113,193,1112
DESTFAC
98-99,94.101,208
DESTID
102-104,93-911,101,176,208-209,215,97-99
DESTID OPERAND
161
DESTINATION
98-99.91,160,101,1112-1113,1115
ULTIMATE
98-99
DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE
93-94,100,110,71,911,109,162,176,103-1011
DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE BE1'ORE
DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE CSA
51
DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE EXAMPLES
100
DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE MACRO INSTRUCTIONS
93
DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE USING
99
DESTINATION CSMT
169,127
DESTINATION FIELD
EIGHT-BYTE
149,61
DESTINATION IDENTIFICATION
160,71,149
DETECTING PROGRAM
169
DEVADDR
31,102-104,56-51,79,95-96,188,15,54,911
101,202,206,208
DEVADDR VALUE
31
DEVICE ADDRESS
31,13,122,171
DEVICE DEPENDENT CONSIDERATIONS
143
DEVICE-DEPENDENT OUTPUT PROGRAM
17 8
DEVICE-DEPENDENT 2260 DATA STREAMS
711,132
D1'H
200
DFHACP
162,169,17,23,116-111
D1'HAQP
17,411.176-177
DFHASMV2
22,201
DFHATP
53,169,44.17,116-177
DFHAUPLK
22.201
DFHBMSMM
37,11,177
D1'HCAA70
18,23
D1'HCSA
17,51
DFHCSADS
211-212,214,111
.Dl'HDCP
17,51
DFHDCPDY
11
D1'HDCSA
17,52
Dl'HDCT
93-94,51,911
D1'HDCT MACRO
80
DFHDCT MACRO INSTRUCTION
DFHDCT TYPE
97,93-911,98-99,116,95,102-103,208,100-101
DFHDCT22
103
Dl'HDEB10
18.23
DFHDLA
18,23
Dl'HDLDBD
46
DFHDLDBD TYPE
111
D1'HDLE
18,23
D1'HDLI
18,23
D1'HDLIDY
18,23
DFHDLPSB PSB
46
D1'HDLPSB TYPE
116
Dl'HDLQ
18,23,46
D1'HDMPA
7,155
D1'HDMPB
7,155
D1'HDUP
11,17,25
D1'HFCP
17,51,10
DFH1'CPDY
17
D1'HFCPXX
119
DFHFCT
51,82
D1'H1'CT MACRO
811
D1'H1'CT MACRO INSTRUCTION
80':81
DFHFCT TYPE
83,90,87-89,91,81-82,199,93,201-208,90
91-92
SERVREQ OPERAND 01' THE
88
D1'HFCTXX DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE
118
D1'H1'EP
17,25,176-171
D1'HGAP
17
D1'HIC MACRO INSTRUCTION
30
DFHICP
10,17,51
D1'HICPDY
17
D1'HKCP
10,17,51,119
D1'HKCPB1 TASK CONTROL MODULE
51
DFHLINK
19,21,6,95,13
GENERATION OF
19
D1'HLNKV2
22,201
D1'H!!TP
11,177
D1'HMTPA
176,17,177
D1'HMTPA D1'HPCT TYPE
107
D1'HMTPA D1'HPPT TYPE
110
D1'H!!TPB
11
DFHNPL
19
D1'HOC
158
DFHOC MACRO INSTRtJCTION
158
EXPANSION OF THE
161

-0-

DAM
38,85-87,7-8
DAM DATA SETS
83-84,86,8
DAM PIX ED-LENGTH DATA SETS
86
DAM KEYED DATA SETS
85
DASD
62-63,32,56,54-55,206-201,70,72,15,79
188,202
DATA AREA
PRI~E
84-85,9
DATA BASE BUFFER POOL SI ZE
52
DATA BASE CONSIDERATIONS
8,86,88
DATA BASE DESCRIPTIONS
46
DURING GENERATION OF IMS
82
DATA BASE STATISTICS PROGRAM
178
DATA BASE SYSTEM
2,9
DATA BASES
3,2,5.7,52,82
ADDRESS OF
119
DATA CHECK
166-167,58
DATA DEFINITION
60-61,96
DATA DESTINATION CSSL AS VARIABLE-LENGTH
151
DATA ENTRY KEY
36,131,134
DATA EVENT CONTROL BLOCK
61
DATA EXTENT CONTROL BLOCK
120
DATA FIELDS
87,134
DATA FORMAT
140
DATA LANGUAGE/I
2.9,22,45
DATA MANAGEMENT BLOCK
52
DATA MANAGEMENT BLOCK DIRECTORY
22
DATA MAN AGEMENT MACRO INSTRUCTIONS
60,97
DATA MANAGEMENT STATISTICS PROGRAM
23
DATA QUEUE
215
DATA RECORD
145,99
DATA SET
DATA BASE
154-155,158-159
OBJECT
88
DATA SET CONTROL BLOCK
97-98,100,103-104.93,95,109
DATA SET CONTROL BLOCK DEFINITIONS
100
DATA SET CONTROL BLOCKS
DATA SET CONTROL INFORMATION
51.63
DATA SET CONTROL NAME
64,95
DATA SET RECORD
DESCRIBE CROS S-IN DEX
87
DATA SETS
86-81,92,82- 85,88,98,2,5,8-9,11
24,48,60,64,81,89-90.96,99,104,155,158
159,161,199
DATA LANGUAGE/I
9
NAMES OF THE
160,88,97,161
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
82,199
DATA STREAM
136,130,133,135
DATA WRITE LOOP DFHTD TYPE
215
DATABASE
160,159,210,161
DATASET
160,82,161-162.81,159,210,92,207
DATASET MACRO INSTRUCTION
82,199
219

USE OP THE
87,158
DFHOC TYPE
161,159,162,210
DPHOCLDS
159
DFHOCODS
160
DFHOCP
17,104
DPHPC MACRO INSTRUCTION
75
DFHPC TYPE
28,75,120,130
EXECUTION OF THE
130
DPHPCP
10,17,51,119
DPHPCT
51,105
DPHPCT MACRO INSTRUCTION
105
DFHPCT TYPE
105,131,176,106-107,209
DFHPCTXX
48-49
DFHPIP
51,17
DPHPLlI
43
DFHPL10I
43,18
DFHPPT
51,108
DFHPPT MACRO INSTRUCTION
108
DFHPPT TYPE
109,97,108,177,209,109-110
DFHPPTXX
48
DFHPRPR
18,43
DPHRDl
17,44,176-177
DFHRD2
17,44
DPHRPL
19,97,100,109,13
DPHRPL AS DFHTRNAA
103
DPHRPL USING DFHLINK
104
DPHRlIP70
18,23
DFHSAP
18,43
DPHSCEXT
117
DPHSCP
10,17,51,117
DPHSFP
17 , 25,171
DPHSG
13,18
DFHSG MACRO INSTRUCTION
13,5
DFHSG PROGRAM
23-24,30-31,38-39,41-42',26-29,32,42
43- 4 4 , 11 0, 137 , 157, 14 , 1 6, 1 8 , 201 ,25,68 , 117
201-204
DFHSG TYPE
23,29-30,13,19-20,44,129,201,204
OPERAND OP
24,27
PARAMETERS OF
21
TCTUA OPERAND OF THE
69
DFHSI
53
DFHSIP
23-24,17,19,11,52
EXCESS OP THE SIZE OF
52
SIZE OF
52
DFHSIP PLUS
DPHSIT
48,50
DFHSIT MACRO INSTRUCTION
49
DFHSIT MACRO IIHICH
DPHSIT TYPE
49,205
DPHSITXX TERMINAL CONTROL TABLE
48
DPHSIUS
53
DPHSNP
177,17,25,176,1 C7
DFHSNT
111,168,177
DFHSNT IIACRO INSTRUCTION
111
DPHSNT TYPE
112,111,209,113
DFHSTKC
177-178,11,23,176
DFHSTP
11,23,18,117
DPHSTTD
11,23,18,178
DPHSTTR
11,23,18,178
DFHTACLE
120,128
DPHTACP
123-124,126,128,120,162,169,23-24,146,178,17
129,121-122,176
DFHTACP/DPHTEP
148
DFHTAJP
157,17,23,176,178
DFHTC TYPE
141-148,130,123,142,173
DEST OPERAND OP THE
143
SERIES OF
130
DFHTCADS
211-212,214,117
DPHTCP
120,51,10,17
DFHTCT
53,55,51
DPHTCT MACRO
19
DFHTCT MACRO INSTRUCTION
53
OPERANDS OF THE
194
TRUDNT OPERAND OF THE
115
USES OPERANDS OF THE
194
DFHTCT TYPE
70-73,76,61-63,65-69,137,35,179,56,60
18-79,144,24,131-132,138-139,182,197,189,80
179-180,187,190-191,54-55,76-71,180-181,184
185-188,206
NAME OPERAND OF THE
57,62
OPTCD OPERAND OF THE
143,141
TRMIDNT OPERAND OF THE 98
DFHTCTBA TCAM MESSAGE CONTROL PROGRAM
192
DFHTCTLE
120,128
DFHTcrTE
211-212,214,128
DFHTCTXX FILE CONTROL TABLE
48 9
DFHTD
97-99
DFHTDCP
17,178
DFHTDIA
214
DPHTDP
11,51,176,10
DFHTDPDY
17
DPHTEP
123-124,126-127,120,23-24,143,11,121,129,138
162,146,178
USER-IiRITTEN
121,146,173
DPHTEP PROGRAM
131
DFHTEP PROGRAMMING CONSIDERATIONS
121
DFHTEP RECURSIVE RETRY ROUTINE
127
DFHTIOA
211""212,214
DFHTLT
114
DFHTLT MACRO INSTRUCTION
114
DPHTLT TYPE
114-115,209
DFHTLTXX
114
DFHTR
28
DFHTRNAA
103
DFHTRNBB
103-104
DFHTRNCC
103-104
DFHTRNDD
103-104
DPHTRNXX
97,100,178
DFHTRP
51,23,18
DFHTRPDY
23,50
DFHTSP
10,17,51
DFHTSPDY
17
DFHUPDV2
22,201
DFHlIT1
17,44,176,118
DFHlIT2
17,44
DPHXTRA
101

DFH1500
150
DFH1520
150
DFH1701
156
DFH1702
156
DFH1791
156
DFTRMLST
65-66,71,75,68
SPECIFY NAME OF
197
DFTRMLST ENTRIES SHOULD
66
DPTRMLST MACRO DEPINITIONS
77
DIAL-UP
33,179,77,196
DIAL-UP CONNECTION
67-68
DIRECT ACCESS
38,7-8,33
DIRECT ACCESS DEVICE
33,57,72
DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE DEVICE
63,110
DISCONNECT PARAMETER
147
DISCONNECT SIlITCHED LINE
DEFAULTS OF
129
DISCONNECTS
147,123,126,121,214
DISK
32-33,56-57,70,192,1-2,11,15,54,119
202,206
DISPLACEIIENT
124-125,88-89
DISPLACEMENT SEGLENG
89
DISPLA Y STATION SMI
1920-CHARACTER 3275/3277
36
DISPLAY STATION 2
480-CHARACTER 3275/3277
36
DL/I
22,82,2,9,45,52,81,207
DL/I ABEND
171
DL/I APPLICATION PROGRAM
23
DL/I CALL EXECUTION PROGRAM
23
DL/I DATA BASE
83
DL/I INITIALIZATION PROGRAM
23
DL/I INTERFACE
171
DL/I INTERFACE DUMIIY PROGRAII
23
DL/I INTERFACE PROGRAM
23
DL/I MODULES
DL/I REQUIRES
USE OF
2
DL/I UNDER CICS
DLIA
171
DLPA
111
DL1
23,19,22,45,52,14,46,49,201,205
DMB
52
DMB DIRECTORIES DURING CICS GENERATION
46
DMB DIRECTORY LI ST
46
DMBPL
52,45,49,205
DOS
28,1,20,29,122
DOS BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD
58
DOS CORE IMAGE LIBRARY
53
DOS DISK OUTPUT DATA SETS
96
DOS FILE NAME
83
DOS ISAM DATA SETS
86,84
DOS IS AM VARIABLE-LENGTH RECORDS
9
DOS LBLTYP JOB CONTROL STATEMENT
24
DOS SUBSET COMPILER
28
DOS SUBSET/SUPERSET LOGIC MODULE FACILITY
96
DOS SUPERVISOR
85
DOS SYSTEII
20,23
DOS-ENTRY ONLY
24
DOS-ENTRY SYSTEM
109
DSCNAME
62-64,56-57, 95,102-~04, 190-191,79,182-183
80,206,54,94,101,179-181,184-189,208,97
DSCNAME OPERAND
77
DSECT
19,49,120,205
DSETID
159-161,210
DSETID OPERAND
SINGLE USE OF THE
160
DSIZE
19-20,13,201
DTP
82,95,160,79,182
DTF40B DFHTCT TYPE
181
DTF40MD
80
DTP40MD FIGURE 2
79
DTF41C
181
DTF41C DFHTCT TYPE
181
DTF60L
79,189
DTF60L DFHTCT TYPE
79
DTF60L LINEl DFHTCT TYPE
189
DTF60R
180
DTF60R OPL2260 DFTRMLST OPENLST
180
DTF7770
182-183
DUMMY
15-16,29-31,38-42,166,10,202-203
DUMMY CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATIONAL PROGRAMS
17
DUMMY CSA
42
DUMMY CSA PROGRAM
52
DUMMY DPHTEP
120
DUII!!Y DUMP CONTROL PROGRAM
31
DUIIIIY FCP
51
DUIIIIY PILE CONTROL PROGRAII
39
DUIIIIY INTERVAL CONTROL PROGRAM
29-30
DUIIIIY PROGRAII
18,25,30-31,39-40,42
DUIIIIY TDP
51
DUIIIIY TEIIPORARY STORAGE CONTROL PROGRAII
42
DUMII! TERIIINAL
126-127,167
DUIIIIY TRANSIENT DATA CONTROL PROGRAII
40
DUMP
160,156,159,210,1,4,12,155,161,171
DUIII' APPENDIX G
210
DUMP CONTROL DATA SET
]1
DUIIP CONTROL PROGRAM
31,7
DUMP CONTROL PROGRAII ICP
51
DUMP DATA SET
11,15],155,158-159
DUMP MACRO INSTRUCTION
162
DUIIP IIANAGEIIENT
1,155,158
DUIIP IIANAGEIIENT 7
4
DUMP OPEN DATA SETS
159
DUMP UTILITY PROGRAM
4,12,25
DUIIP X'90 RETURN
170
DUPDSID
88,81,92,208
,
DUPLICATES DATA SET
88,91,92
DYNAMIC OPEN/CLOSE FACILITY
93,177
USE OF THE
104
DYNAMIC OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION
104
DYNAIIIC OPEN/CLOSE PROGRAII
43,109,161,177
186-188,203,184

220

-E-

FIXED-LENGTH
92-93
FIXED-LENGTH DAII DATA SET RECORD
1
FlIED-LENGTH PCI FIELD
CASE OF A 69
FIXUNB
95-96,94,102-103,101,208
FLAGS
124,126,128
FLNNAIIE
56,60,54,182,189,206
FIIT2260
32,36,15,203
FIIT3210
15,32,203
FORIIAT
32,36,105,130-131,81,89,201-208,15,19,66
83,81,114,136,149,203,209
DISCUSSION OF 106
FORIIAT IIODE
106
USE OF 133,36
FORMAT MODE TAKE$ FULL ADVANTAGE
36,131
FOUR-BYTE DESTINATION ID
160
FOUR-BYTE FIELD TCTTEDES
143
FOUR-BYTE LLBB FIELD
81
FREE TERIIINAL STORAGE
126
FULLBUF
32,36,15,130,133,203
FULLBUP CONVERSION
CASE OF 480/480 136
FULLBUF IIODE
106,136,36,131
FULLBUF MODE LIIIITS
USE OF 36,134
FULLBUF TRANSID
105
FULLBUP 2260 COIIPATIBILITY THROUGH
131
FUNCTION
212-213,l,lI,1, 91,113,116,135,146
SIGN-ON/SIGN-OFF 111

EBCDIC REPRESENTATION
211
ECB
140
END STATEIIENT
46-41
ENDLESS SCREEN
133
ENQUEUE
26,14,201
ENTER KEY
134
ENTRY INTERFACE PROGRAII
43
ENTRY IIACRO INSTRUCTION
13111116-171,105,108,112
2160 INPUT ED 212
ENVIRONIIENT
3,5,1,53,152
RES TRICTED 144
EOI' CONDITION
114,121,123
EOII
133
AUTO
212-213
EOT
123
EQU
211-213,215,193
ERASE
141
ERASEAUP
148
ERROPT
56-58,60,95,91,54,94,206,208
ERROR
163-164,170-111,125,128,161,57,95,91,120,181,183
ERROR CODES
121-123,143
ERROR CONDITION
121,129,146,171
ERROR IIESSAGE
16,68,114
ERROR STATUS
173,122
ERROR STATUS IIESSAGE
173
ESTABLISH BASE ADDRESS REGISTER USING
~11-212
ESTABLISH CONTROL SECTION
108
ESTABLISH SIGN-ON TABLE CONTROL SECTION
111
EVENT COIIPLETION TRANSIENT DATA CONTROL
10
EVENTS X '80 WAIT
38
EXCLUSIVE CONTROL
EXCLUSIVE CONTROL DUIIP DATA SET
155
EXCTL
38,15,203
EXEC CARD
11
EXECUTE
170
EXECUTE CICS
10
EXECUTION UNDER CICS
4
EIIDVER
62,66,32,59,131,196,15,54,68,203,206
EXISTING CUSHION
154
EXISTING DFHTEP
24
EXIT
118,143,149,215
EXIT ROUTINE
USER-IIRITTEN 39,31,40-42,116,119,21-28,30,148-149,118
EXIT ROUTINES
116,118
EIlTS DFHTCP
141
EXPAND
120,4
EXPIRATION TIllES
151
EXPLANATION
CSTL 164-165,113
EXTENT
82,84,81,201
EXTRAPARTITION DATA SET
40,93,155,158,111,214
EXTRAPARTITION DESTINATION
103-104,99,101
EXTRAPARTITION IIVC
215

-G-

GAl!
64,66,166
GAllA
101
GAP
11,43,204
GA21-2112
11
GC2l1-5031
85,60,91
GC26-3146
85
GC28-6550
24
GC28-66l11
60,91
GC28-610ll
21-22
GC30-20 04
60,66,164
GC30-2024
61,138,143,149,151
GC30-300 1
131
GC30-500 1
58-60,66
GC311-0013

130

GE
21,115
GENERATE LINKAGE
31,39-42,21,30,28,148-149
GENERATE SEGSET
89
GENERATE TCAM SUPPORT
24
GENPOLL
68-69,54,62,206
DISCUSSION OF 66
GH20-1028
50
GRAPHIC
62-63,196,54,206
GRAPHIC ATTENTION PROGRAII
43
GRAPHICS ACCESS METHOD
60

-1'-

F. E. TERIIINAL TEST PROGRAII
25
FBS
81
FCP
15,11,38,203,49,205
PCP IIACRO INSTRUCTION
39
FCT
86,39,80,85,199,201,49,51,205
FCT VALUE
86
FDP HEADER RECORD
214
FDP RECORD
214-215
FDP TRAILER RECORD
214
FEATURE
56-58,32-35,66-61,70,14-15,131,196,182
FEATURE OPERAND
34,132
USE OF THE 15
FEATURE PROGR CICS PREPROCESSOR
18
FEATURE PROGR DL/I APPLICATION
18
PEATURE PROGR DL/I CALL EXECUTION
18
FEATURE PROGR DL/I INITIALIZATION
18
FEATURE PROGR DL/I INTERFACE DUIIIIY
18
FEATURE PROGR HIGH-LEVEL LANGUAGE PROGRAIIS
18
FEATURE PROGR PL/I INTER1'ACE
18
FEATURE PROGR PL/I-OPT ENTRY INTERFACE
18
FEATURE PROGR 1110 CHANIIEL/ABNORIIAL
18
FIELD OF THE TACLE LABELED TCTLEECB
FILABL
95-96,94,208
FILE
98-99,94,6-8,23,80,88,96,208
FILE CONTROL
25-26,116
PILE CONTROL AREA
88
PILE CONTROL PROGRAII 2
25
FILE CONTROL TABLE
82,80,8,39,84,89,91-93
ASSEIIBLY 01' THE 48
DISCUSSION OF THE 9
PREPARATION OF THE 199
SPECIFY END OF 91
FILE CONTROL TABLE CONPIGURATOR
199
FILE CONTROL TABLE DCT
51
FILE CONTROL TABLE EXAIIPLE
91
FILE CONTROL TABLE LISTING
END 01' THE 91
FILE IIANAGEIIENT
2,82,155,158,80,89,116
FILSERV
43,38,15,203
FILSERV OPERAND
38
FINAL DYNAIIIC OPEN/CLOSE IIACRO INSTRUCTIONS
209
FINAL FILE CONTROL TABLE
201
FINAL IIACRO INSTRUCTION
119,44,16-11,91,95,100,106,
109,113,115
FINAL PROGRAII CONTROL TABLE
209
FINAL SIGN-ON TABLE
209
FINAL SYSTEII INITIALIZATION TABLE
204
PINAL TERIIINAL LIST TABLES
209
FIOA XTYPREQ
ADDRESS OF 119
PIXBLK
95-96,94,102-103,208
PIXED FORIIAT
89
FIXED LENGTH
PCI FIELDS 01' 69
PCI'S OF 5

-H-

HARDCOPY
62-63,54-55,10,12,206-201
HARDIlARE BUPFER
122
HARDIlARE BUFFER EXCEEDED 8C
125
HARDWARE BUFFER SIZE
165
HARDWARE DIFFICULTY
112
HDAII
45
HEADER
215,15
HEADER PORTION
89
HElAD
38,15,203
HEXADECIIIAL F'S
REPRESENTS FOUR BYTES OF 159
HEXADECIIIAL FF
9,160
HEXADECII!AL RELATIVE TRACK
38,86
HIDAII
115
HIDAII DATA BASE
INDEX DBD OF A 46
HIGH-LEVEL LANGUAGE FEATURE
18
HIGH-LEVEL LANGUAGE SUPPORT GROUP
43
HISAII
lI5
CASE OF 52
HLL
16,18,lI3,204
HLLTR
28,14,202
HOLD STATUS
156
HSAII
45
-1-

I/O ERROR
168
I/O ERROR INFORIIATION
120
I/O MACROS
85,60
I/O OPERATIONS
59
IADADIII
88,81,208
IADIII
88,81,92,208
IBROIlSE
38,15,203
ICE
30,119
ICP
14,11,29,202,20,45,49,205
ICP SPECIFICATION
151
ICPAUTO
29-30,26,14-15,202
ICPTIIIE
157,26,29,1l1,2Q1-202
ICVR
49,51,205
ICVS
49-50,205
ID VERIFICATION
58-59
IDENTIFICATION FIELD
IEUASII
20
1115/360
2,9,45,82
1115/360 ACB LIBRARY
46
1115/360 CTL
IIIS/360 VERSION 2
INSTALLATION OF THE 2,9
INAREAL
60,182-183,191,62, 6l1, 19-80, 54, 180-181,18l1
185-189,206
221

INAREAL VALUE
64
INDA
38,15,203
INDACC
82-83,88,81,207-208,92
INDAREA
82,84,81,199,207
INDAREA OPERAND
84
INDEX
46,92
INDEX DATA SET
92
INDEXED SEQUENTIAL ACCESS IIETHOD
INDICATO~ 01
SPECIAL
125
INDICATORS
128
INDIRACC
38,15,203
INDIRECT
38,94,99,88,209
INDIRECT ACCESS
81
INDIRECT ACCESSING
INDIRECT IIACRO INSTRUCTION
95,99
INDIRECT SPECIFICATION
176
INDSIZE
82,84,81,207
INDSKIP
82,84,81,207
INITIALIZATION
TIllE OF 48-49
INITIALIZATION PROCESS
48-49
INITIALIZATION PSB
46
SPECIAL 45
INITIALIZES
48-49,165
INITRL
32-33,35,15,57,203
INPUT DATA SET
96
INPUT DFHTCT TYPE
70
INPUT EVENT REJECTED
163
INPUT LINE
146
INPUT PROCESS QUEUE
67,144
INPUT QUEUE
145,61,146
INPUT STATUS
73,121,174
INPUT STEP
140-141
INPUT TCTLE
139
INPUT TCTTE
SPECIAL 145,140
INPUT TIOA BIT 1-7
126
INPUT TPROCESS QUEUE
64
INPUT USER EXIT
149,140
INPUT/OUTPUT IIACROS
97
INQUIRY 1I0DE
137
INSEG
38,15,203
INTEGRATED COlllIUNICATIONS ATTACH !lENT
59
INTERCEPT REQUIRED
168
INTERFACE DUIIIIY PROGRA!I UNDER CICS/OS
171
INTERV REQUIRED
173
INTERVAL CONTllOL
4,10,116,169
ENTRY POINT OF 30
OPTIONAL TIIIE-OF-DAY FEATURE OF 26,29
INTERVAL CONTllOL ELEIIENT
30
INTERVAL CONTROL PllOGRAII
29-30,45
IIACRO INSTRUCTIONS OF THE 20
INTERVAL CONTllOL PBOGRA!! BEING
30
INTERVAL CONTBOL PllOGRAII TCP
51
INTERVAL CONTllOL PllOGRAII 6
25
INTERVENTION
166,173,58
EXCEPTION OF 166
INTERVENTION REQUIRED IIESSAGE
173
INTRA
39-40,101,15,94- 95,98,176,203,208
INTRA IIACRO INSTRUCTION
98
INTRAPARTITION
171,93
INTRA PARTITION DATA SET DATA DEFINITION
44
INTRAPARTITION DATA SETS
7,40
INTRAPARTITION DESTINATION
93,101
INVALID COpy REQUEST
171
INVALID liES SAGE BLOCK
123,172
INVALID PROGllAII ID
170
INVALID REQUEST
161
INVALID TCAII DESTINATION AO
125
INVALID TERIIINAL ADDRESS
162
INVALID TRANSACTION IDENTIFICATION
77
INVALID WRITE REQUEST
174
INVLIST
192
INVLl:ST ORDER
193
IOERROR
137
IOSIZE
91,83,85,81,207
LARGEST 85
IOWORK
83,85,81,207
IPL
129
IPL RECORDS
129-130
PREPARATION OF 130
ISADD
38,15,203
ISADSCN
57,62,64,54,79,188,206
ISAII
82-85,7,81,199,92,207
ISAII DATA
92
ISAII DATA SET ORGANIZATIONS
ISAII DATA SETS
84-85,87
ISMI DATA SETS UNDER CICS/OS
199
ISAII FILES REQUESTING NEWREC SERVICES
85
ISAII LOGIC 1I0DULE END DFHFCTBA
93
ISAII ORGANIZATION
9
ISAII SEQUENTIAL llECORD RETRIEVAL 19
38
ISAII VARIABLE-LENGTH RECORDS
38
ISSUE TERIIINAL CONTROL
144
ISUPD
38,15,203
IVBR
38,15,203 9

KEY
88,199,82-84,81,86-87,,207-208,9
KEYBOARD
SPECIFY COMPONENT POLLING OF THE 65,71
KEYBOARD LOCK FEATURE OPERATIVE
35
KEYLEN
87,81,83,192,207
KEYLEN OPERAND
84,87
-L-

LABEL

124-126,129,158,67-68,46-47,116,118,66,89
90,200
SYIIBOLIC 123, .121-122
LABEL DFHDCTBA
100
LABEL DFHFCTBA
91
106
LABEL DFHPCTBA
LABEL DFHPPTBA
109
LABEL DFHSNTBA
113
LABEL DFHTCTBA MUST
77
LABEL DFHTLTBA
115
LABEL TCTLEECB
125
LABEL TCTLEIOA
125
LANG
28,14,16,18,43,202,204
LAST STATEIIENT
46-47,100,106,109,113,115
LAST TERIIINAL ENTRY
72
LENGTH
81,207-208,83-84,86-87,95-96,62,64,69
54,88-90,94,206,208,8-9,53,56,76,92
109,121,123,171
LENGTH DFHFCT TYPE
81,207-208
LERB
58,60
LEBB PARAMETERS
60
LEVEL
TRIGGER
154,98-99,93,153
LIBRAllY MAINTENANCE PROGRAII
19
LIIIIT
CONSECUTIVE DISPATCH 154
LINE ADDBESS
135
LINE ADDllESSING
135
LINE CONNECTION
59,76-77
LINE CONTROL CHAllACTERS
140
LINE CORRECTION FEATUllE
57-58
LINE DFHTCT TYPE
80,79,192
LINE DISCONNECTED
126-127
LINE ENTRY
66,77,70,125
LINE LOCKING
145
LINE IIACBO
65
LINE OUTQ60 DFHTCT TYPE
191
LINE POOL RESTRICTIONS
144
LINE POOL SPECIFICATION
144
LINE PRINTER
60,2,63,72
LINEADR
147
LINEADR llEQUEST X'EO
147
LINELST
62,72,56,59,79,54,80,179-182,184,186-187
189,206
LINES
MULTIPOINT 179,196-197
NUMBER OP 70,74,131,55,207
LINK EDITED BEFORE STAGE I I
22
LINK MACRO INSTRUCTION
120
LINKAGE
37.39-42,149,116,148-149
LINKAGE EDITOR
46-47
LINKAGE EDITOll OUTPUT LIBRARY
50.55,82,94,105,108,114
LINKEDIT
95
LIST
163,35,46,97,159
ANSWERING 66
LIST ERllOR
163
LISTADR
160-161,62,66.80,159,210,54,180,184-187,206
LISTADR OPERAND
DISCUSSION OF THE
160-161
LISTADR OPERAND MUST SPECIFY
66
LISTADR OPERANDS
159-160,68
LLBB
9
LOAD
11,43,49,212
LOAD MACllO INSTllUCTION
28
LOADED PROGRAIIS DUIIP DATA SET
LOCAL 2260 UNDER DOS
65
LOCAL 2260'S
59-60,72-73,32,43
LOCAL 3270 INPORIIATION DISPLAY SYSTEII
67,69,64,73
LOCAL 3270'5
63,72-73,59
LOCK OPTYPES
58
LOCKF
32-33,35,15,57,203
LOGIC PLOW
140
LOGIC 1I0DULE
101),103-104,109,93,96
LOGICAL
113
LOGICAL IOCS
96
LOGICIIOD DESTINATION CONTROL TABLE
208
LOGICMOD ESTABLISH CONTROL SECTION
82
LOGICMOD MACRO INSTRUCTION
91
LRECL
86,81,83,92,207
LRECL PARAIIETEll lIUST EQUAL
85
LV UNIT
79,189,55,70,207
L 17770 DI'HTCT TYPE
Ll7770
182
L2260
72,74,79,188-189,191,33,57
L2260 PARAMETEB
34
L3270
122,189
L3277
189,33-34,57,63,72
L3284
33-34,57,63,72
L3286
33,54,56,63,72,206

-J-

JCL
20,22,10-11
JCL DURING STAGE I I
20
JOB
19,21,11
JOB CONTROL
10,20
JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE
22,10
JOBCLASS
19,21,14,201
JOBNAIIE
19-20,14,201
JULIAN
156

-11IIACRF
56,60,77,190-192,54,186-187,206
IIACRI' OPERAND
57
IIACRO
CVT
38-39
IIACRO INSTRUCTION
200,130,173-174,5,18,28-29,48,70,94,99
159
LAST OPERAND OF THE 13,200
IIACRO INSTBUCTION DURING SYSTEII GENERATION
129,137
IIACRO INSTBUCTION HUST
ASSEIIBLY OP THE 103-104

-K-

KBL
56,58,54,189,206
KBRDLOCK
35,54,62,67,206
KCP
20-21,14,17,26,49,51,201,205
KCP IIACRO INSTRUCTION
29
222

EACH LOGICAL PAIR OF SEQUENTIAL SDSCI 62
MAIN STORAGE
84,91,6,10,21,41,90,109,154
AMOUNT OP 51-52,24
MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF 21
MAIN STORAGE AREA
84-85,1,55
MANAGEl'IENT
AUTOMATIC TASK INITIATION FEATURE OP CICS TItlE
157
OPTIONAL TIME ADJUSTMENT PEATURE OF CICS TIME
157
RUNAIiAY TASK CONTROL FUNCTION OF CICS TIME 1
MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
116-118
MASTER INDEX EXISTS 84,199
MASTER TERMINAL
104,158,152,2,74,129; 155-156
MASTER TERMINAL PACILITY
43,164,168
MASTER TERMINAL OPEN/CLOSE SERVICE PUNCTION
87
MASTER TERMINAL OPERATOR
152,156
MASTER TERMINAL PROGRAM
42,158,152,177
IIAXIIIUII BLOCK LENGTH
86
IIAXIIIUII LENGTH
96,86,90
MBBCCHHR
86
MCP
140,151,2,138,147,190,150
!'ICP MESSAGE HANDLER MACRO INSTRUCTIONS
147
68,127,129,143,157,172,176,207
!'lESS AGE CONTROL PROGRAJ1
2
!'IESSAGE CURSOR
148
MESSAGE DFH4000
61
IIESSAGE INDICATOR
ANY START OF
136
START OF 135,36
MESSAGE LINE
START OF 147
MESSAGE LTORG END INDEX
138,190
!lESSAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM
MESSAGE ROUTING
143
MESSAGE SIGN OFP
175
!'IESSAGE TOO LONG RESPONSE
166-167
!'lODE
56,60,54,136,206
MODE OPERAND
77
!'IODEL NUMBER
70,74,131,55,207
MODEL 33/35
33,63,67,72
MODELST
56,59,54,186-187,206
MODELST OPERAND MUST
77
MODULE
50,55,82,94,105,108,114
REMAINDER OF THE 130
!'IPP
138,190
!'IPS
19-20,23,14,201
!1PT
56,5f1,206
MSG BLOCK
INC!'IPLT 172
IISGCLAS
19,21,14,201
!1SGLVL
49-50,19-20,14,201,205
MSP/7
130
!1SP/7 OUTPUT HANDLER
TELETRANS OPTION OF THE
130
MSTIND
82,84,81,207
MTP
16-17,42,204
MULTIPLE ISAM DATA SETS
91
MULTIPLE TRACK SEARCH
85
III,\,
49,51,205
MXT OPERAND
53
MXT SPECIFICATION MINUS ONE
205

OPERATING SYSTEM
156-157,2,24,52,11,29,153,178
OPERATOR
168,174-175,42,19,21,111,14,67-68,201,5
34,110,112,134,156
OPERATOR GUIDE
152
OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION
112,111,174,209
OPERATOR NAIIE
112,111,168
OPERATOR PRIORITY
112,71,106
OPERATOR PRIORITY DPIISNT TYPE
111
OPERATOR PRIORITY, 0
209
OPERATOR SECURITY KEY
112,111
OPERATOR SIGN-ON TABLE ENTRY
112
OPPRTY
112-113,111,209
OPSYS
19,21,13,201
OPTCD
56,61,139,144,190-191,54,206
OPTION AL KEYBOARD LOCK PEATURE
35
OPTIONAL TIllE ADJUSTMENT PEATURE
157
ORDER DPIISIAS
53
OS
28,9,20,29,157
OS BASIC TELECOIIMUNICATIONS ACCESS IIETIIOD
60
OS DATA
85
OS DATA MANAGEIIENT SERVICES
85
OS DDNA!1E
83
OS IS All DATA SETS
83
OS JOB
9
OS JOB SCIIEDULER
21
OS LINKAGE EDITOR
6,95
OS/OOS SAVE
USE OP 117
OS/IIPT
61,143,149,151
OS/MVT
21
OS/IIVT TCAM PROGRAIIIIER GUIDE
61,143,149
oS/!1n TCAM PROGRAMMER'S
151
OSAOSCN
57,62,64,54,79,188,206
OSCOR
51-52,49,205
OUTPUT
38,94-95,102-103,127,139,61,137-138,143,149
208
OUTPUT AREA EXCEEDED
165
OUTPUT DATA SET
96
OUTPUT DATA STREAII
36,74,130-131,135,137
OUTPUT DCB
143
OUTPUT DFIITCT TYP.E
70
OUTPUT EVENT REJECTED
163
OUTPUT EVENTS
37,149
OUTPUT LENGTII ZERO
165,122
OUTPUT LINE
LOSS OF TilE LAST CIIARACTER OF EACII 134,36
OUTPUT TCTLE
139-140
OUTPUT TCTLE THAT
139
OUTPUT TPROCESS QUEUE
64
OUTPUT USER EXIT
149
OUTQ
191,54,62,69,146,207,215
OUTQ OPERAND
64
OUTQ OPERAND IIAY NOT
64
OUTSEG
38,15,203
OVERLAYS
53
-P-

PARAMETER DASD
GENERIC 33,57
PARA!1ETER LIST
160-161
PARAMETER LIST ADDRESS
159-160
PARA!'IETERS
74,131; 86, 159-160,68,143,185-186
PARTITION/REGION EXIT TI!1E INTERVAL
153
PASSiORD
112,111,209
PCB
138,45,52,83,192
PCB PAIRS
45
PCB STATEMENT
45
PCI
5,127-128,22,69,76,196,192
LENGTII OF TilE 5
PCI AREA ADDRESS USING PCIAREA
128
PCI FIELD
22,69
ADDRESS OP TilE 69
FIXED-LENGTH 15-BYTE 22
PCIBAR
128
PCICNT
127-128
PCISAVE
127-128
PCP
14,17,28,202,49,205
PCP MACRO INSTRUCTION
110
PCPLOAD
28,14,202
PCT
176-177,46,104,111,157,209,211,49,168,205
PCT ENTRY
46,111
PCTCBAR
211-212
peTEA
211
PCTIPIA
211
PCTTI
211
PDIR
46,22
PER!'IANENT LINE LOCK
144
PGMERID
19-20,14,201
PGMLANG
110,109,108,209
PHASE NAMES
LAST TWO CHARACTERS OF THE 53
PIP
49,51,14,17,29,202,205
PL/I
14,16,18,28,46,43,52,108-109,200,202,204
209
PL/I APPLICATION PROGRAMS
PL/I COMPILERS
43
PL/I P
43
PL/I INTERFACE PROGRAII
43
PL/I MACRO INSTRUCTION
18
PL/I OPTI!'IIZER
43
PL/I PROGRAMS
46
PLl
43,52,16,49,204-205
POINT-TO-POINT LINE
179
POINTER
124,88,120 9
POINTNO
212,214
POINTS
27-28,80,93,101,212
POLL LIST NAME
80
POLL LIST TERMINAL DPHTCT TYPE
80
POLLING
146,37,74,148
POLLING LIST
65-66,71,162-163
POLLING LIST ENTRIES
66
POLLING LIST ERROR
121
FOLLPOS
70,75,185,55,184,207

-N-

NCP
56,60,54,206
NEGATIVE POLL DELAY
154,67,153
NEGATIVE RESPONSE
167-168,67,122
NEll LINE SYIIBOL
135
NEll TIOA
145
NEIiREC
82,85-87,199,91,81,92,207
NL
135,74,131,134
NL KEY
135
NL SYIIBOL
135
NO OPERAND
29,20,23,28
NO OPERAND INDICATES THAT
96,42
NOEICTL RECORDS
83
NON-SliITCHED LINES
162,166,70,197
NON-TCA!1 ENVIRONMENT
146
NONRESIDENT DATA SET CONTROL BLOCKS
NONRESIDENT EXTRAPARTITION DATA SETS
DEPINITION OF 100
NONRESIDENT LOGIC IIODULES
102,104
NORMAL STATION ADDRESS
75-76
NORIID
95-96,94,208
NRECDS
86,83-84,81,207
NRECDS PARA!1ETER
86
NSD
23-24,14,201
NULL
75,54,62,68,206

102-104,100,97,93

-0-

OCP
17,43,204
OIU
56,58,54,180,206,213
ONE DASD SEQUENTIAL TERIIINAL 2
77
ONLINE TERMINAL TEST FACILITY
59-60
OPEN
97-98,87,160,158-159,81,83,94,153,155,162
192,207-208,210
OPEN ERROR 40
161
OPEN FAILURE
164
OPEN !1ACRO INSTRUCTION
161
OPEN !1ACRO INSTRUCTION FOLLOIiS
159
OPEN OPERATION
161
OPEN OPTION
60
OPEN TIllE
59
OPEN/CLOSE
158,7,155
OPEN/CLOSE IIACRO INSTRUCTION
158
OPEN/CLOSE PARAMETER LIST
159
OPEN/CLOSE PROGRAM THAT INDICATES IIHICH
97
OPERAND DFHTCTBA 179
OPERAND RESULTS
OIlISSION OF AN 26,28-29,31-32,38,40-41
OPERANDS
13,200,82,85,51,56,88-90,95,97-99,105
108,112,165,177,189
223

DISCUSSION OF 66
fOLLPOS OPERAND MUST
69
POOL
70-73,11111,62,139-1110,69,1114-145,511-55,207
80,187-189
POOL FEATURE
69,139,11111
POOL OPERAND
DISCUSSION OF THE
139
POOL READY DFHTCT TYPE
182-183
POOL SIZE
52
POOL 2980 GENERAL
1811
POOLADR
54,62,67,80,181,163-1811,186-189,206
PORTABLE AUDIO TERMINAL
2721
76
PPT
56,59,177,37,100,103,108-109,111,1111,157,170
209,49,511,186-167,205-206
PPT ENTRY
100
PREFIX. MACLtB
22
PREFIX. SOURCE
22
PRIMARY SYSTEM CONTROL
152
PRIr'IARY DATA SET
11-12
PRINTER ADAPTER
132
PRINTER ADAPTER FEATURE
711
PRIORITY
105-106,21,71,111,113
PRNT
103-1011
PRNT DF'HDCT TYPE
102,1011
PROCEDURE
19,22,212
PROCESS
1110-1111,145-1116,12,95,99,156
PROCESS CONTROL BLOCK
138
PROCESS CONTROL INFORMATION
127
PROCESS CONTROL INFORMATION FIELD
5,69,76,198
PROCESS TCAM UNSOLICITED ERRORS
125
PROCESSING PROGRAM TABLE
108-110,6,100,110-111,114,157,177
DURING PREPARATION OF' THE 37
END OF THE
109
SPECIFY END OF
109
PROCESSING PROGRAII TABLE MACRO INSTRUCTION
108
PROCESSING PROGRAM TABLE PCT
51
PROCNMS
19,22,14,201
PROCOPT
45
COMBINED 115
PROG CONTROL TABLE ADDRESS REG
211-212
PROGR CICS/DOS LINKAGE EDITOR DFHLINK
17
PROG R CONTROL SYSTEM DUIIMY PROGRAMS
17
PROGR PL/I-F ENTRY INTERFACE DFHPL 11
18
PROGRAM
20,25,97,107,110,109,155,163-1611,170,106,108
6,26,28,31-32,38,110-1111 ,177-178 ,3,23
25,27,29,42,48,51,105,110,176,209,211
PROGRAII CONTROL 28,6
PROGRAM INTERRUPT 29
PROGRA!! INTERRUPT CONTROL 29
PROGRAM SUFFIX DFHSG
14-16
PROGRA!! SUFFIX FILE CONTROL 203
PROGRA!! SUFFIX INTERVAL CONTROL 202
PROGRAM SUFFIX IIASTER TERMINAL 2011
PROGRAM SUFFIX' PROGRA!! CONTROL 202
STATUS OF A 155,153
TYPE OF
17-18,108-109
USER-SPECIFIED USER-WRITTEN
178
PROGRAM CODE
16-18
PROGRAM COMIIUNICATION BLOCK
lI5,52,83
PROGRAM CONTROL
170,10,108,116
PROGRAM CONTROL DELETE
109
PROGRAII CONTROL TABLE
105,1011,107,116,107,111,157,176,211
SPECIFY END OF
106
PROGRAM CONTROL TABLE ENTRY
112
PROG RAM CONTROL TABLE EXAMPLE
107
PROGRAM CONTROL TABLE FCT
51
PROGRAM CONTROL XCTL MACRO INSTRUCTION
211
PROGRA!! DCP
PROGRAM CONTROL
51
PROGRAM DYNAMIC OPEN/CLOSE
155
PROGRAII INTERRUPT
170
PROGRAII PROCESSING TABLE
103
PROGRAII NAME
177-178,20,116,106,108
PREPARATION OF THE 97
PROGRAM SPECIFICATION BLOCK
45,52
EIGHT-CHARACTER NAME OF THE
52
STATE!!ENTS OF 83
PROGRA!! SUFFIX
1 lI-16 ,26,29 ,31, 36-39,41-112,202-203
PROGRA!! TABLE
118,108,209
FIRST DURING PREPARATION OF THE PROCESSING 108
PROGRAII TABLE EXAMPLE
109
PROGRAII TSP
PROGRAM INTERRUPT 51
PROGRAM UNDER CICS/OS
DURING EXECUTION OF THE CICS-DL/I INTERFACE
171
PROGRAMMER ACTION
163-168,172-175
PROGRAMIIER GUIDE
211
PSB
116,52,115-116,83,119,205
PSB DIRECTORY
116
PSB NAIIE
116
PSBGEN
83
PSBPL
52,II5,lI9,205
PSEUDO-BINARY TRANSMISSION CODE
34
PSEUDOBIN
32,34,15,203
PTRADAPT
131,55,70,185,207
PTRADAPT SPECIFIES
711
PTTC/EBCD CODE
33
PUBLICATION DOS SUPERVISOR
97,60
PUBLICATION OS JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE
21-22
PUBLICATION OS SYSTEM PROGRAIIIIER'S
24
PUBLICATION OS/360 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS
1611
PUNCH/l lI03 PRINTER
188
USE OF 115

-QQUEUE CONS IDERATIONS
1115
QUEUE LOCKS
1 II 5
QUEUE PURGE PROGRAM
411,177
QUEUE SINCE TCAM REQUEUES
LOCKING OF THE TCAM OUTPUT PROCESS
146
QUEUE TERIIINAL ENTRY STORAGE CHAIN
125
QUEUES
146,192-193,99, ll14-145, 169
224

QUEZERO

215

-R-

RDBACK
911-95,208
RDYIISG
181-183,511,62,206
READ-ONLY
92
READ'S
11111
READB
148
READER 1
SPECIFY COIIPONENT POLLING OF 65,71
READER 2
COIIPONENT POLLING OF 65,71
READL
1117
READY
181-183,129,145
READY IIESSAGE
76,68
REAL LINE ENTRY
120-121
REAL TERIIINAL
166-167
CHECK SENSE F.
122
REAL-TIME EXECUTION
6,11
REAL-TIllE PRE-LOCATED PROGRAII LIBRARY
6,211
REAL-TIllE PRE-LOCATED PROGRAM LIBRARY DTF
23
REAL-TIllE RELOCATABLE LIBRARY
97'
REAL-TIllE RELOCATABLE PROGRAII LIBRARY
19-21,6,100,109
REAL-TIllE RELOCATABLE PROGRAM LIBRARY
50
REAL-TIME SYSTEM ADIIINISTRATION
152
REAL-TIllE SYSTEII PROGRAMIIING
3
RECEIVE
70,73,1110,55,79,156,189,207
TERIIINAL STATUS OF
1711
RECEIVE ONLY STATUS
125
RECFII
56,61,190-191,511,206
RECFII BYTE BYTE II
160
RECFORII
87,95-96,102-1011,81,83,92,911,101,207-208
RECORD CHARACTERISTICS
81-82,87,199
RECORD DATA SET
CICS DEFINITION OF A DOS ISAII VARIABLE-LENGTH
RECORD FORIIAT
86-87,7,96
RECORD IDENTIFICATION FIELD
RECORDS
86-87,83-85,7,92,1 liS, 61, 8, 89, 50, 87
90,96,99,157
RECURSIVE COUNT
128
RECWT
58
REFER
110,50,85,88,93,97-99,106,110,138,143,1119
200
REGION
19
REGISTER
159,210,118,161
SYIIBOLIC 159,210,161
RELATIVE LINE AA
163-164
RELATIVE LINE ZZ
162-1E3,166-168
RELEASE TCAII TIOA
121
RELOAD
109,100,103-1011 ,108 ,11 0, 209
RELOCATABLE PROGRAM LIBRARY
211
RELREC
88,81,208
RELREC S,IGNIFIES THAT
88
RELTYPE
86,81,83,207
RELTYPE OPERAim
86
RELTYPE OPERAND MUST ALSO
811
REMOTE
180,33,179,131
REMOTE BINARY
59
REMOTE DEVICES
56,58-59,197
REMOTE 3270
35,63,66,123,122,173
REMOTE 3270 INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM
64,173
REMOTE 3270 OPERATION
131,36
REREAD
95-96,94,208
RES
109,108,209
RESET
123,128,157
RESET PARAMETER
147
RESIDENT
109,21,100,155,160
RESIDENT DATA SET CONTROL BLOCKS
100-101,97-98,95
RESIDENT LOGIC MODULES
102
RESIDENT PROGRAM SUFFIXES
51
RESIDNT
97-98,102, lOll, 94,208
55,64,95,117,120,129,1110,1118
RESPONSE DEVICE MULTIPLE PARAMETERS lU Y
63
RESPONSE TIME
131
'
RETRY
59,128
RETURN CODE ZZ
163-1611
RETURN MACRO INSTRUCTION
130,117,120
RETURN REQUEST
75
RETURN X' 110 ABEND X '60 ABEND
170
REUSE
98,94,208
RIW
56,58,54,206
RIX
56,58,54,206
RKP OPERAND
THROUGH USE OF THE
87
RLN
192-193
ROLLOUT DATA SET DTF
27
ROLLOUT FACILITY
154
RPQ835503
74
RUN
106,138,21,35,41,130
RUN DFHDUP
11
RUNAWAY
29,26,ll1,153,201-202
RUNAWAY TASK TIME INTERVAL
153,34,51
-S-

S/360
32-311,15,203
S/360D
32,34,15,203
S/360D SYSTEM/360
33
S/370
32-33,15,203
S/370,1130
34
SAM
32-33,196,62-63,15,511,202,206
SAil LINES
166
SAl! UNDER CICS/DOS
93
SAVE
ll17,215,25,128
SCAN
193
SCONTROL
196,5l1,62,67,80,206
SCP
111,17,27,202,49,117,205
SCREEN
133-136,212
SCREEN FORMAT
65,72,36
SCREEN TECHNIQUES
131-132

SCS
49-50,205
SCTYKEY
112-113,111,209
SCTYKEY FIELD
THREE-BYTE 112
SCTYKEY KEYWORD
OPERAND OF THE 112
SDSCI
102-104,79,190-191,97,100,188,54,56,72,80
94-95,101,138,179-182,184-189,206,208
SDSCI I1ACRO INSTRUCTION
62,64,100,139,56,93,95,97,141,143
PARUETER OPERAND OF THE BTAI1 62
SDSCI SPECIFICATION
72,186,189
SEARCH ENTRY DFHPC TYPE
END OF TABLE 211,213
SECURITY KEY
112,168,1011-105,111
SECURITY VIOLATION
168,112
SEGCHAR
89,92,81,208
SEGCHAR OPERAND
89
SEGDEF
83,89,92-93,81,90,208
SEGDEI' I1ACRO INSTRUCTION
90,89
SEGHEAD
89,83,81,92,208
SEGLAST
93
SEGLENG
92-93,81,90,208,89
SEGI1ENT
82-83,89- 90,92-93,7-8,81,144-145,90
1113,207
SEGI1ENT PROCESSING
143,1111
SEG!!ENT RECORDS
83
SEG!!ENT SET
8,90
SEGIIENTED RECORD
7-8,89-90
DEI'INE HEADER OF 89
DESCRIBE EACH SEGIIENT OF A 89
SEGNAI1E
92-93,81-82,90,208,89
SEGSET
90,83,82,93,208,90
SEGSET IIACRO INSTRUCTION INCLUDES
90
SEGSET OPERANDS
89
SELCTPEN
131,10,185,189,201
SELECTOR PEN
132
SELECTOR PEN FEATURE
111
SENSEG STATEIIENT
45
SEPAS!!B
95,100,911,103,208
SEQUENTIAL
196,53-54,62-63,19,188,206
SEQUENTIAL ACCESS IIETHOD
32
SEQUENTIAL DATA SET
60.61,1,1,11,145
SEQUENTIAL DEVICES
51,60,62,611,119
SERVICE PROGR TRANSMISSION ERROR
11
SERVREQ
199,81,91,82-83,81,92,201
SET LENGTH
215
SET REAL-TIllE RELOCATABLE PROGRAII LIBRARY
SIGN-OF!' PROGRAII
25,17 6-111
SIGN-ON PROCEDURE
110-112
SIGN-ON PROGRAII
25,111
SIGN-ON TABLE
111,168,174,28,110,112-113,111
CREATION OF THE 111
END OF THE 113
SPECIFY END OF 113
USE OF A 110
SIGN-ON TA BLE BEFORE
ASS EIIBLY OF THE 113
SIGN-ON TABLE EXAMPLE
113
SIGN-ON TABLE HACRO INSTRUCTION
111
SIIIODS
53,49,205
SINGLE TCTTE
10
SIW
56,58,54,206
SIX-BIT TRANSCODE
59
SIZE
1111,50,64,106,154
SKIP
95,91,94,208
SLAVE
58
SLV
56,58,511,186-181,206
SI11
32,36,135,133,136,15,203
Sill CHARACTER
136,135,36
SNT
110,209
SOURCE DECK
82,105,108,111,1111
SOR
158
SOURCE TERIIINAL IDENTIFICATION FIELD
EIGHT-BYTE 140,149
SPECIFIC DATA SET
83
SPECIFICATION
13,16,53,65,12,86
SPECIFICATION COIIPAT
14,131
SPECIFIED SYSTEII INITIALIZATION TABLE
11
SPECII'IED TRANSACTION
136
SPECIFY DATA SET CONTROL
19-80
SPECIl'Y DATA SET CONTROL INFO
101
SPECIl'Y DATA SET CONTROL INFORIIATION
56,95,194
SPEC Il'Y EXIDVER
68
SPECIFY EXTRA PARTITION DESTINATIONS
91
SPECIl'Y HEXADECI!'IAL
191
SPECIFY INDIRECT DATA DESTINATIONS
99
SPECIl'Y INTRAPARTITION DESTINATIONS
96,93
SPECIFY IOSIZE
85
SPECIFY KEYLEN
45
SPECIFY LAST SEGIIENT SET
90
SPECIl'Y TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
114
SPECIFY THAT INTRAPARTITION DATA SETS
40
SPECIFY TIOA ADDRESS DFHTC TYPE
215
SPECIFY TRANSACTION CONTROL INFORIIATION
105
SPECIFY USER-DEFINED PROCESS CONTROL INFORMATION
22
SPIll
SPIE
29
SPURGE
106,105,101,209
SPl
49-50,205
SRCHII
83,85,81,201
SRCHI1 OPERAND UNDER DTFDA GENERATION
65
STAGE II
44,13
STANDARD CICS/TCAII COIIMUNICATION BYTE
141
STANDARD DOS LOGIC IIODULE NAIIE
100
STANDARD DOS NAIIE
96
STANDARD DOS SA!! IIACRO INSTRUCTIONS
100
STANDARD IIODULE NAIIE
50,55,82,94,105,108,1111
STANDARD SYSTEI1/360 RECORD FORIIATTING CONVENTIONS
STANDARD SYSTEII/360 VARIABLE LENGTH
7
STANDARD TERIIINAL APPLICATIONS
1
START/STOP DEVICES
64
START/STOP TRANSMISSION
119
STATEI'IENT
60-61,96,10,46,72
STATION CONTROL FEATURE
58,61,73
STATISTICS
151-158,1411
STATISTICS PROGRAIIS
225

SUPERVISORY 23
STATISTICS PROGRAMS WRITE DATA
176
STATUS
19-20,22,13,201,68,73,11
STC
56,58,54,19,206
STD
95-96,94,208
STN2980
10,15-16,184-185,55,201
STORAGE
104,109,3,7,45,99,124,141
STORAGE CONTROL
170-171,116
BEI'ORE TASK DISPATCH 10
ENTRY POINT OF 21
STORAGE CONTROL CANNOT ISSUE
118
STORAGE CONTROL PREEIIAIN
109
STORAGE CONTROL PROGRAI1
21,202,111
STORAGE CONTROL PROGRAM PCP
51
STORAGE CUSHION SIZE
154,49,153
STORAGE DEFINITION
DFHTCT SYIIBOLIC 19
DFHTCTTE SYMBOLIC 121
SYIIBOLIC 159-160
STORAGE ESTIIIATES
50
STORAGE IIANAGEMENT
1
STORAGE STATISTICS DYNAI'IIC OPEN/CLOSE I'UNCTION
158
STRG DEFN PCTCBAR EQU
STIlT
29
SUBPOOL 0
109
SUBSET
28,14,202
SUFI'IX OPERAND
31
ANY USE OF THE 30-31,39-110,42
SVC
23-24,14,201
SVC DL/I INTERI' ACE
18
SWITCH
56,59,162,19,11,511,80,153,159,119-182,1811
186-181,189,206,210
SIlITCH DUIIP DATA SETS
162,158
SIlITCHED LINES
61,1611,161,106,191,34,10,129,131
SIlITCHED NETWORK
56,59
SWITCHED-LINE PROCESSING
61
SIlLST
131,13
LABEL OF A DFTRMLST IIACaO INSTRUCTION OF THE 66
SIll
56,58,54,206
SYIIBADR
160-161,159,210
SYIIBADR OPERAND
159-160
SYIIBOL DI'HTCT TYPE
10,62,16,55
SYIIBOL DI'TRMLST SIiLST
66
SYNAD
56,61,54,206
SYNAD ROUTINE
61
OWN 61
SYS/3
32-34.54-55,181,206-201,15,56,62.10,203
SYS/3D
32,34,15,203
SYS/3D SYSTEM/3 MODELS 6
33
SYS/1
54-55, 206~201, 32-33,15,56 ,62,10,203
SYSLST
102,104,101,188
SYSNNN
56,59,54,206
NNN OF 59
SYSTEII
4,11,10,5,51,59,152,156,1,3,5,1
20,23,46,48.61,10,81,85,91,110-111,138
152-154,151
CPU-TO-CPU CONTENTION 58
POINT-TO-POINT DIAL 58
SYSTEII ABEND
96
SYSTEII ACTION
162-168,171-175
SYSTEII ADIIINISTRATION
50-51,152
SYSTEII CONSOLE
156
SYSTEI1 CONSOLE LOG.IIESSAGE
166-168
SYSTEII CONTINUES PROCESSING
163
SYSTEM CONTROL FUNCTIONS
152
SYSTEII CONTROL TABLES
CERTAIN USER-PREPARED 6
SYSTEM COUNT
121-128
SYSTEII DATA SET CONSIDERATIONS
6
SYSTEII GENERATION
4,13,131,10,20,48,200
INITIALIZATIO N OF 19,201
STAGE I I OF 21
SYSTEI! GENERATION MACRO INSTRUCTIONS 23-29,31-32,38-39,111-44
USE OF DFBSG 13
SYSTEII GENERATION PROGRAM NAME
11-18
SYSTEII INITIALIZATION
11,61,155,48,171
SYSTEII INITIALIZATION OVERLAYS
PHASE NAMES OF THE 53
SYSTEII INITIALIZATION PROGRAII
23-24,11.48,13,19
SIZE OF THE 52
SYSTEII INITIALIZATION TABLE
26,115,48,46
SYSTEI'I INITIALIZATION TABLES
FLEXIBILITY OF GENERATING SEVERAL 49
SYSTEII INITIALIZETION TABLE
38
SYSTEII !!AINTENANCE
5
SYSTEII PARTITION/REGION EIIT TIME INTEa~ AL
153,49-50
SYSTEII PROGRAMMER
3,194,199
SYSTEII PROGRAIIMING CONSIDERATIONS
116
SYSTEI1 REQUESTS IIIMEDIATl! TERIIINATION
USER OF THE CICS/DOS-STANDARD 156
SYSTEII SERVICE PROGRAIIS
13,16,18
SYSTEII SERVICE TABLES
110,28
SYSTEII STATISTICS
151,111
SYSTEI1 TABLE PREPARATION
5,9,118,22,1116
SYSTEII TERIIINATION
155,11,18
SYSTEM TERIIINATION PROGRAII
23,111
SYSTEII/3
119
SYSTEII/3 IIODELS 6
33
SYSTEI1/360 IIODEL 20
33-34
SYSTEII/360 MODEL 25
34,59
SYSTEII/310
59
SYSTEII/1
129-130,13,58,61
SYSTEII/1 STORAGE LOAD
130
SYSTEII/1 STORAGE LOAD UZERO
130
SYSOOl
19,188
SYS006
19,188
SYS008
31
SYS011
102-103
-T-

TAB
32,36,15,136,203
TABLE END
91,106,109,113
TABLE ENTRY
92

TABLE PREPARATION
200
TAB2980
70,76,184-185,55,207
TACLE
120-121,123,125-126
TACLE CONTAINS ALL
120
TACLE WHICH CONTAINS
TACLE WORK AREA
ADDRESS OF
124
TACP
125,127
TASK ABEND
126-127
TASK ATTACH USER EXIT
148
TASK CONTROL
169-170,26-27,10,38,116
TASK CONTROL AREA DSECT
214
TASK CONTROL ATTACH
37,148
TASK CONTROL PROGRAM
26,201
TASK CONTROL PROGRAM APCT
170
TASK CONTROL PROGRAM RETURNS CONTROL
153
TASK CONTROL PROGRAM SCP
51
TASK CONTROL TCA
42
TASK CONTROL WAIT MACRO INSTRUCTION
34
TASK INITIATION
99
TASK MANAGEMENT
1
TASK MANAGEMENT 2
TASKS
MAXlflUM NUMBER OF
154,51,62
TASYS3 DFTRMLST BSCLST,O,2,1070,l,2D 3735 PROGRAMMABLE
TA2770
187
TCA
169-171,159,161
TCA FACILITY CONTROL ADDRESS
120
TCADLECB
171
TCAFCAAA
211-212,215,120,126
TCAFCAAA FIELD
123
TCAM
32,62-65,70,72-73,75,56-57,61,144,146
142-143,137,24,123,139-141,143,145,147,149,151
190-191,54,206,15,202
CASE OF
64
DD CARD CORRELATION OF
139
UNDER CONTROL OF
2
TCAfI APPLICATION PROGRAM INTERFACE
138
TCAM APPLICATION PROGRAMS CURRENTLY ACTIVE
151
TCAM CONTROL BLOCKS
138
TCAM DEVICE CONSIDERATIONS
146
TCAM ENVIRONMENT
138
TCAM FACILITIES
TAKE ADVANTAGE OF
146
TCAM HEADER
143,149
TCAM INPUT
57
TCAM INPUT PROCESS QUEUE
139,146-149
SEPARATE
146
TCAM INPUT QUEUE
145
TCAM LINE
144,67
TCAM LINES
MIXED BTAM/TCAM MODE OF OPERATION WHEN
151
TCAM MCP
143,146-147,150
TCAM MCP MESSAGE HANDLER
146
TCAM MESSAGE CONTROL PROGRAM
190,138,144,147,151
PORTION OF THE
136
TCAM MESSAGE PROCESSING PROGRAM
190
TCAM OUTPUT PROCESS QUEUE
149,140.143.146.69
TCAM OUTPUT PROCESS QUEUE TCTLE
69
TCAM OUTPUT QUEUE
75
TCAM PARTITION/REGION
PRESENCE OF A 150
TCAM PROCESS QUEUE
70,144
PARTICULAR 70
TCAM PROCESS QUEUES
PROPER CONFIGURATION OF
145
TCAM PROGRAMMER GUIDE
136
TCAM QUEUE
140
TCAH TERHINAL MACRO INSTRUCTION
HEANS OF A 144
TCAH TPROCESS BLOCK
13 6
TCAM USER EXITS
148,140-142
TCAM WORK AREA
146
COHPOSITION OF THE
149
STAGES OF THE
150
TCAM WORK AREAS
DISCUSSION OF
149
TCAM WORK UNIT
61
TCAH WRITE MACRO INSTRUCTION
61
TCAM/CICS
192
TCAM/2260 DEVICE CONSIDERATIONS
147
TCAM/3270 DEVICE CONSIDERATIONS
148
TCAOCLA
159
TCAOCTR
161
TCAPCPI
170.211
TCAPCTR
170
TCATDAA
215
TCATDTR
171
TCEMCICM
123
TCEHCIDR
123
TCEMCIER
121
TCEHCIMB
123
TCEMCNOA
122
TCEMCOBE
122
TCEMCPL
121
TCEMCTO
122
TCEMCUI
121
TCEMCWOT
123
TCEHIDR
123
TCM3270
32,37,15,203
TCM7770
32,37,15,203
TCP
32.202.140,148.15,17,49.57.66.121,205
TCP HACRO INSTRUCTION
24,75
TCP PROGRAM ERROR
164
TCT
132.5,53,121,179.194,206,49,51,57.121,126
205
DURING PREPARATION OF THE
TCT • • • TSP
51
TCT CODING
164
TCT END DFHTCTBA
END OF
60
TCT SEARCH ERROR
162
TCT TERMINAL ENTRY
127
PARTICULAR
5
TCTLE
69,139,61,70.120,136,140
NUHBEa OF 69

187

226

TCTLE TIOABAR ADDRESS
ADDRESS OF
119
TCTLE'S
POOL OF
69
TCTLECSW
124,126
TCTLEDCB
124,126,128
TCTLEECB
124-127,121
TCTLEPCH
124
TCTLEPFL
124,121
TCTLEPF2
124-127
TCTLEPSA
124
TCTLEPTE
124-125,128
TCTLEQID
70
TeTTE
139,70,73.127-128,144.146,142-143,145,5,69
112.143,149,141
AREA OF THE
127
INDIVIDUAL
139-141,145,149
SPECIAL
139
TCTTE BASE REGISTER TIOABAR EQU
215
TCTTE FIELD
143
TCTTE HAY
TCTTE TCTLEAR ADDRESS
119
ADDRESS OF
TCTTE'S
GENERALIZED
144
NUHBER OF
144
POOLED
144
TCTTEAR
211-212.215,128.119
TCTTECI
22,69
TCTTECIA
69,22,128
TCTTECIL
22,69
TCTTEDA
211-212.215
TCTTEDA FIELD
165
TCTTEDES
143
TCTTEMCI
137
TCTTENI
127-128
TCTTENO
127
TCTTETCM
143
TCTTETM
132
TCTTETT
132
TCTUA
19,22,14,201
TCTUAL
69-70,76.54-55,206-207,62
TCTUAL VALUE
76
TDIABAR
215
TDIADBA
215
TDP
15,17,39,203,49,205
TDP MACRO INSTRUCTION
41
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACCESS METHOD
137,59,66
TEMPORARY STORAGE CONTROL
116
TEHPORARY STORAGE CONTROL PROGRAM
41-42,7,30
TEMPORARY STORAGE DATA SET
7,41
TEMPORARY STORAGE MANAGEMENT
2,4
TEMPORARY STORAGE PROGRAM
41
TElIPORARY STORAGE SERVICES
41
TEP
125,128,67
TERM
192-193,158
TERM CONTROL TABLE ADDRESS REG
211-212
TERMINAL
70,72-73,75-16,61-69,98-99,32,34,93
94,131,123,125-128,188,196,162-163,166-168,112
113-175,182-163,191,61-63,79-80,53-55,130
131,146,185,169,5.57-58.11,110,129,136,153
TERMINAL ABNORMAL CONDITION LINE ENTRY
120,124
TERMIN AL ABNORMAL CONDITION PROGRAM
23-24,162,169,176,178
TERHINAL ADDRESS
80
TERHINAL ADMINISTRATION FACILITIES
152
TERMINAL CONT TABLE DSECT
214
TERMINAL CONTROL
99,116,11
TERMINAL CONTROL 'PROGRAH
32,37,11,51,64,76,120,163,68
TERMINAL CONTROL PROGRAM FCP
51
TERMINAL CONTROL PROGRAM TCAM MODULE
37,148-149
TERHINAL CONTROL TABLE
163,172,55,22,53,76,79-80,111,132,206,68
75
DURING PREPARATION OF THE 35
END OF THE
71
EXTENSION OF THE
5
PREPARATION OF THE
131,194
SPECIFY END OF 77
TERMINAL CONTROL TABLE ASSEMBLY
55,71
TERMIN AL CONTROL TABLE CONFIGURATOR
194
TERMINAL CONTROL TABLE EXAMPLE
71
TERMINAL CONTROL TABLE LINE ENTRY
61,69,138-139
TERHINAL CONTROL TABLE HAcao INSTRUCTION
53,138
TERHINAL CONTROL TABLE PREPARATION
EXAMPLES OF
179
TERHINAL CONTROL TCA
ASSEHBLY OF
42
TERIIINAL CONTROL WRITE REQUESTS
127
TERIIINAL DEPENDENT CONTROL PROGRAH
44,204
TERMINAL ENTRY
66,71,122,125
TERHINAL CONTROL TABLE 70,13,75,112,139,144,171
TERHINAL ENVIRCNHENT
32-34,53
TERIIINAL ERROR PROGRAM
143,23,120.145-146,178
USER-WRITTEN
24,162
TERIIINAL ERROR PURGE INDICATOR
106
TERMIN AL FACILITY
TASK TERMINATION PORTION OF THE HASTER
169
TERMIN AL FUNCTIONS REQUI BE MULTIPLE READ'S
144
TERIIINAL I/O AREA
165
TERHINAL I/O AREA ADDRESS L
211-212
TERMINAL I/O AREA ADDRESS REG
211-212
TERMINAL I/O AREA DSECT
214
TERHINAL IDENTIFICATION DFHTLT TYPE
114,209
TERMINAL IDENTIFICATIONS
113,34,61.17,114
LIST OF
114
TERMINAL INPUT/OUTPUT AREA
MINIHUM SIZE OF THE
16
HINUHUH SIZE OF THE
64
TERMINAL LIST HACRO STATEflENT
LABEL OF THE BTAfI DEFINE
66
TERflINAL LIST TABLE
113-114,28,43,114-115
END OF THE
115
SPECIFY END OF
115
TERflINAL LIST TABLE ASSEMBLY
114
TERflINAL LIST TABLE CONTROL SECTION
114
TERflIN AL LIST TA BLE EXAfI PLE
115
TERflINAL flACRO INSTRUCTION
61,63,65-66,69-70,131-132,

98,132,144
TERMINAL MANAGEMENT 8
64,71,132
TERMINAL MODEL NUMDER
TERMINAL OPERATOR
157-158,129,75,112,152
TER MINAL OPERATOR GUIDE
152
TERMINAL REQUEST
162,73
TERMINAL SPECIFICATION
69,71
TERMINAL STATISTICS PROGRAM
23
TERMINAL STATUS
73
TERMINAL SYSTEM
75,184
TERMINAL SYS3D DFHTCT TYPE
187
TERMINAL TEST PROGRAM
177
TERMINAL TEST '1
4
163,72,75,63,70,132
TERMINAL TYPE
TERMINAL IIRITE STORAGE
165-166
TERMINAL/2760 OPTICAL IMAGE UNIT COMBINATION
75
TERMINATE CICS
63,153,155,150
TERMIN ATE ENTRIES
100
TERIIINATING JCL
44
TERIIINATION PROGRAM
11
TERMTST
56,59-60,54,206
TEST
211,215,138
TEST MODULE
10
TIME
162,120,131,145
SPECIFIED INTERVAL OF 30,1
TIllE ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM
23,157
TIME INTERVAL
153
STALL
TIME MANAGEMENT
1,4
TIME OUT
166-167,34,174
TIllE OUT ERROR CONDITIONS
166
TIllE SHARING OPTION
138
TIIIECTL
19-20,29,13,201
TIIIEOUT CONDITION
137
TIOA
150,64,75-76,140,145,149,165
TIOATDL FIELD OF THE
165
TIOA CONTAINS
149
TIOA CORRESPONDS
SIZE OF THE 76
TIOA DFHFCP
TIOA 1I0RK AREA
149
TIOA XINPUT
ADDRESS OF 119
TIOA XOUTPUT
ADDRESS OF 119
TIOABAR
211-212,215
TIOADBA
211,213-215,130
TIOADBA POINTS
149
TIOATDL
130,149,215,122
TLT
42-43,113,209,16,204
TOTCAII
192-193
TPMARK
95-96,94,208
TPROCESS BLOCK
138
TPROCESS CONTROL BLOCK CONTROLS COIIIIUNICATION
138
TPROCESS PCB
192
TPURGE
106-107,105,209
TRACE
19-20,154,13,28,50,192,201
TRACE CONTROL PROGRAM
23
TRACE FACILITY
50
TRACKS
NUMBER OF 84-85
TRANS
17,192
TRANSACTION
165-168,172-174,70,73,75-76,136,130,129,204
106,111,62,64,130,1,3,5,9,46,48,55
77,123,132,144,152,154,207
2260-COMPATIBLE 130-131
TRANSACTION CODE
136,75,211
TRANSACTION CODE CSXX
177
TRANSAC'UON CONTROL PilOGRAII
44,169,177
TRANSACrION CSIIT
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE USE OF THE
11
TRANSACTION CSTA
157
TRANSACTION ID
129
TRANSACTION IDENTIFICATION
162,148,155
TRANSACTION INFUT PROCESSING DFHRD2
177
TRANSACTION INPUT PROCESSING PROGRAIIS
44
TRANSACTION OUTPUT PROCESSING DFHWT2
178
TRANSACTION OUTPUT PROCESSING PROGRAMS
44
TRANSACTION PRIORITY
106,71,104
TRANSACTION PROCESSING
22,146,156
TRANSACTION PROCESSING CONTROL PROGRAM
53
TRANSACTION PROCESSING FACILITY
177-178,53,176
TRANSACTION PROCESSING GROUP
44
TRANSACTION PROCESSING PRIORITY
71,106
TRANSACTION PROCESSING 9
4
TRANSACTION PROGRAII CONTROL TABLE
111
TRANSACTION ROLLOUT DATA SET
6
TRANSACTION STATUS
73
TRANSACTION TERIIINAL
73
TRANSACTION WORK AREA
106
LENGTH OF THE 104
SIZE OF THE
105
SIZE OF THE LARGEST
211
TRANSACTION XXXX ABEND XXXX
169
TRANSACTION YYYY
163-168
TRANSACTIONS
EXArlPtES OF USER-IIRITTEN
211
TRANSACTIONS CSAC
177
TRANSACTIONS CSFE
177
TRANSCEIVE
70,73,80,55,180-188,207
TRANSCEIVl! DFHTCT TYPE
80,184-185,189,79,180
TRANSCEIVE STATUS
73
TRANSCODE
32,35,68,56,54,206,62,15,203
TRANSCODE INDICATES TRANSIIISSION
59
TRANSDATA
160,159,210,161
TRANSDATA ENTRY
TRANSEC
106-107,105,209
TRANSID
107,98-99,70,75,180,55,94,101,105,137,176
181,188,207-209
TRANSID OPERAND
75,99
LAST SPECIFICATION OF THE 75
TRANSID PARAIIETER
176
TRANSID SPECIFICATION
75
TRANSIENT
93,100
TRANSIENT DATA
171,124,130,178
TRANSIENT DATA CONTROL
99,116,129

TRANSIENT DATA CONTROL PROGRAM
39-40,7,93,176
TRANSIENT DATA CONTROL PROGRAII DEING
40
TRANSIENT DATA CONTROL PllOGRAM 3
25
TRANSIENT DATA EXTRAPARTITION DATA SET
TRANSIENT DATA INPUT/OUTPUT AREAS
6
154,153
TRANSIENT DATA INTRA PARTITION DATA SET
TRANSIENT DATA MACRO INSTRUCTION
98-99,97
TRANSIENT DATA MANAGEIIENT
2,155,158
TRANSIENT DATA IIANAGEIIENT 10
4
51
TRANSIENT DATA PROGRAII TRP
TRANSIENT DATA PURGE IIACRO INSTRUCTION
98
TRANSIENT DATA SERVICES
40
TRANSINIT
39,15,203
TRANSLATE ERROR
163
TRANSMIT READL
147
TRC
56
TRIGLEV
98-99,94,101,208
70,73,137,80,185,180,55,184,187-188,207
TRIIADDR
191,79-80,182-183,185,189,115,180,189,55,70
TRIIIDNT
114,181,184,186-188,207,209
TRIIIDNT PARAMETER . 71
62,64-65,70-72,75,184-185,54-55,185,206
TRIIIIODL
207,80,180,189
TR!!MODL MAY
196
65
TR!!MODL PARAIIETER
65
TR!!1I0DL PARAIIETER SETS
191,79-80,182-183,185,189,70-71,180,55,181
TRMPRTY
184,186-180,207
TR!!TYPE
62-63,70,72,75,69,137,182-183,191,79,180
185,54-55,80,186-189,206-207,179,181,184,188
TRIITYPE OPERAND
63
USE OF THE 63
TRIITYPE OPERAND MUST
63
TRMTYPE SPECIFICATION
72
TRNPRTY
107,106,105,209
TRNSUFX
97,100,95,102-103,94,208
TRP
49,51,205
TRT
49-50,205
TSBLK
49-50,205
TSDA
119
TSEGIND
89,81,92,208
TSO
138
TSP
16-17,41,203,30,49,205
'lilA
159,211
FIRST BYTE OF THE 159-160
'lilA CONTAINS
129
TWACOBA
129
TWASIZE
106,176,107,105,209
TIIX
70,72-73,32-33,184,67,162,179,54-55,62
63,206-207,15,197,203
TlIXAUTO
184
TW33
54,56,206
'11135
54,56,184,206
TYFULE
95-96,102-103,94,208
-U-

U/R

54-55,62-63,70,72,206-207
32-33,35,70,75,131,148,15,55,57,203,207
UNIQUE NAME DFHTRNXX
97
UNIT CHECK
166;122,125
UNIT CHECK ERROR
166
UNIT ERROR
166-168,173,122
UNIT EXCEPTION
167-168,122,125,129
UNLOAD
95-96,94,200,212
UPDATE
82-83,81,92,207
UPDATE DAM 4
38
UPDATE ISAII 5
38
USE OF THE CICS/TCAM INTERFACE
ONE PRACTICAL
138
USER DATA BASE CONSIDERATIONS
7
USER EXIT
10,116,70,141,149
USER EXIT ENTRY
117
USER EXIT ENTRY SAVE
117
USER EXTRAPARTITION DATA SETS
USER FIELD
127-128
USER MUST PROVIDE
19,149,157
USER SPECIFIES
18,149
USER SPECIFIES V1CMPAT
129
USER TIOA
130
USER TRANSACTION DATA
140
USER IIRITTEN ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE PROGRAIIS
22
USER WRITTEN EXIT ROUTINE
37
USER DATA
66
UTIPL
130
UZERO
130
-V-

V
41,56,61,54,206
V EXIT FRAMENO DC
214
VALID
57-58,60,48
VALID CODES
169-171
VALID ENTRIES
96
VALID TERIIINAL IDENTIFICATION
77
VALID TERIIINAL IDENTIFICATION BEING
76
VARBLK
95-96,94,208
VARIABLE
19,22,14,69,87,90,92-93,201
VARIABLE LENGTH
90,22,69,87
VARIABLE LENGTH BECORDS
96
VARIABLE LENGTH-RECORDS 13
38
VARIABLE-LENGTH ISAM RECORDS
199
VARIABLE-LENGTH PCI FIELD
CASE OF A 69
VARIABLE-LENGTH RECORD DATA SET MUST
9
VARIABLE-LENGTH RECORD PORMAT CONVENTIONS
360/370 9
VARIABLE-LENGTH RECORDS
8,61,83-87
VARUNB
95-96,94,102,104,200
VIDEO
62-63,54-55,70,72,206-207,189
VIRTUAL
41,16,203
227

SPECIFICATION OF 41
VRC/LRC FEATURE
67
VS ENVIRON~ENT
21
Vsl
13,19,201
VS2
13,19,201
V1C~PAT
23-24,14,19,201
V1CO~PAT
14,19
V2
14,28,202
V3
28,14,202
V4
14,28,202

2740
57.58,67,75,33,79-80,180,197-198
2740 CO~~UNICATION TER~INAL
67,64-65,71,57,179
2740 CO~~UNICATION TER~INAL ~ODEL 2
64-65,33,67,71
2740 CO~~UNICATION TER~INAL ~ODELS 1
33
2740 ~ODEL 2
197-198
2740 MODEL 2 4
34
2740 TER~INAL ENTRY
80
2740, 2740/2760,2741C, 2741E, 2770,2780,2982
54-55,206-207,62,70
2740D
33
2741 CO~~UNICATION TER~INAL
33,179,99
2741C
181,33
2741DC 2741 CO~~UNICATION TER~INAL
33
2741E
33
2760
212,33,75,181,197-198
2760 OPTICAL I~AGE UNIT
58,65,71,179
2760 PARA~ETER OIU
147
2760 TRANSACTION
Tl030 EXA~PLE OF A 211
2770
186-187,33
2770 DATA CO~~UNICATION SYSTE~
33,146,179
2770 DATA COM~UNICATION SYSTE~ 21
33
2770D
33
2780
186,33,58
2780 DATA TRANS~ISSION TERMINAL
33,146,186
2780D
33
2845/2848 DISPLAY CONTROL
135
2845/2848 TAB FEATURE
135
2848 CONTROL UNIT ~ODEL 21
147
2848 DISPLAY CONTROL 1I0DELS 21
67,135
2848 DISPLAY CONTROL 5
LOCA L/REMOTE 33
2848 LOCK FEATURE
135
2848 MODELS 21
35
2980 ADHINISTRAT.J:VE STATION ~ODEL 2
65,71
2980 GENERAL BANKING TER~INAL SYSTE~
74,179
2980 TELLER STATION ~ODEL 1
65,71
2980 TELLER STATION ~ODEL 4
65,71
32-SECOND TI~EOUT AS
3210
130-131,35-36,74-75,133,69,106,122,125,148,173
3270 BASIC ~APPING SUPPORT
117
3210 INFOR~ATION DISPLAY SYSTE~
35-37,71,74,172-173,
179,65,106,185
3270 OPERATING UNDER CICS CO~PATIBILITY
135
3270 PARAMETERS READB
147
3275 DISPLAY STATION
74,33,66,132
BUPFER OF THE 74,132
3275 DISPLAY STATION MODEL 1
65,71
3275 DISPLAY STATION ~ODEL 2
65,71
3277 DISPLAY STATION
74,33,172
3277 DISPLAY STATION ~ODEL 1
65,71
3277 DISPLAY STATION ~ODEL 2
65,71
3284 ~ODEL 3 PRINTER
132
3284 PRINTER
33,74
3284 PRINTER ~ODEL 1
65,71
3284 PRINTER 1I0DEL 2
65,71
3284 PRINTER ~ODEL 3
74
3286 PRINTER
33,74
3286 PRINTER ~ODEL 1
65,71
3286 PRINTER 1I0DEL 2
65,71
360N-CB-482
28
360S-CB-545
28
360S-CQ-548
32
3735
5734-CBl
28
5734-CB2
28
5734-xx6
2,9
5736-CBl
28
5736-CB2
28
7770
181-183,63,68,76-77,33-34,59,61,129
7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT
68,34,36-37,76-77,129,174
7770 CHANNEL/ABNOR~AL END APPENDAGE PROGRA~
23
7770 ~ODEL 3' S
60
7770 OPERANDS
24
7770 READ/liRITE PROGRA~
23
7770 SVC PROGRA~
23
7770 SVC ROUTINE
24
7770 32-SECOND TIIIEOUT
t22.
7770 32-SECOND TI~EOUT CONSIDERATIONS
129
7770~SG
182-183,55,76,207
7770~SG ~ACRO INSTRUCTION
68
7770NULL
34
7770TERM
34

-W-

WAIT
130,147
WORK AREA
61,6,42,85,149
STATIC 85
WORK UNIT
61,149
WRAPLST
32-33,35,15,57,203
WRITE
163,165,173-174,130,147,42,146,213-215,69,76
124,135
WRITE ABORT BIT
127
WRITE CONTROL CHARACTER
148
WRITE DATA RECORD
215
WRITE ~ACRO INSTRUCTION
135,143,60,142
WRITE ~ACRO INSTRUCTION CAN
143
WRITE OPERATIONS
69
WRITE REQUEST
165-166,173-114,121,142,86
WRITE ST
215
WRITE TR
137
WRITEL REQUESTS
147
WRITES TER~INAL I/O ERROR ~ESSAGES
176
WRKAREA
42,16,204
WRKAREA OPERAND
42
-X-

XATTACH
148,32,37,15,119,203
XDSPCHR
26-27,14,119,202
XFETCH
28,14,119,202
XICEEXP
29-30,15,119,202
32-33,37,15-16,38-42,57,203
XINPUT
PLACE OF THE 148
XINPUTC
38-39,15,203
32-33,37,15-16,119,38-41,57,203
XOUTPUT
XOUTPUT EXITS
148
148,140,149,32,37,15,140,203
XTC~IN
148-149,32,37,15,142,203
XTC~OUT
143
XTC~OUT USER EXIT
XTYPREQ
14-16,117,119,26-27,29-30,38-41,202-203
-Y-

YES OPERAND
YES OPTION

29-30,35,100,103-104,157,31,39-40,42,95
144

-Z-

ZERO 8E
OUTPUT LENGTH OF 125
ZONED DECI~AL RELATIVE TRACK
38
184-185,33,164-165,23,38,107,124,153,192,212
-NU~ERIC-

1030
1030
1030
1030
1030

179-180,18,33,195-196
BADGE READER 2
75
DATA COLLECTION SYSTE~
179
DATA COLLECTION SYSTE~ 2
33
TRANSACTION
EXA~PLE OF A
211
1050
80,33,67
1050 CO~~UNICATION SYSTE~
67
1050 DATA CO~~UNICATION SYSTE~
65,71,33
1050 TER~INAL ENTRY
80
1050D
33
1053
72,74,33,79,180,189
1053 PRINTER
33,72,74,57,131
1053 PRINTER ~ODEL 4
63
2260
74,32-33,57,180,15,131-133,135,147.202
2260 CO~PATIBILITY
74-75,130,106,131
2260 CO~PATIBILITY ~ODE
36,106,177
2260 °DFHTCT TYPE
191
2260 DISPLAY STATION
33,179,188,65,72
960-CHARACTER 36
2260 DISPLAY STATION UNDER CICS/DOS
62,64
2260 DISPLAY STATION 2
240-CHARACTER 36
2260 DISPLAY STATION 7
64,71
2260 ~ODEL-DEPENDENT DATA STREAl!
132
2260 PARMETERS WRITEL
147
2260 SCREEN
132-133
2260 TER~INAL ENTRY
79
2260-BASED TRANSACTION
36,133
2260/2265 DISPLAY STATION AS FOLLOWS
65,72
2260/2265 TER~INAL
74,131
SCREEN SIZE OF THE 74,131
2265 DISPLAY STATION
64
2265 DISPLAY STATION F~T3270
36
2265 DISPLAY STATION TR~~ODL
71
2265 DISPLAY STATION 12
33
2265 DISPLAY STATION 4
36
2314
79,188,50,85,96
2314 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE FACILITY
188
2701
56,59,180
2703
59,79-80,180-181,184,186-187

228

SH20-1043-6

Q
(')

en
-<
en
.-+
CD

.,-c
0

~
Q)

3
3
~

en"

::0

:"'"

!S:
Q)
~

.,-c

5·
.-+
CD

5·

en
~

:c
I\J
9.....
0

.;::.
tAl

International Business Machines Corporation
Data Processing Division
1133 Westchester Avenue, White Plains, New York 10604
(U.S.A. only)
IBM World Trade Corporation
821 United Nations Plaza, New York, New York 10017
(International)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.31 Paper Capture Plug-in
Modify Date                     : 2010:03:20 09:02:37-08:00
Create Date                     : 2010:03:20 09:02:37-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:03:20 09:02:37-08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:4755800d-cdbe-48a9-80c6-75f84e9e3dcb
Instance ID                     : uuid:57ec57a8-dce4-4bbe-a319-680093ef334e
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 246

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

SC20 1043 6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75 6 CICS System Programmers Reference Manual Mar75

SC20-1043-6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75 manual pdf -FilePursuit

SC20-1043-6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75 SC20-1043-6_CICS_System_Programmers_Reference_Manual_Mar75

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation